Y26 3752 0_1130_Monitor_Programming_System_PLM_1966 0 1130 Monitor Programming System PLM 1966
Y26-3752-0_1130_Monitor_Programming_System_PLM_1966 Y26-3752-0_1130_Monitor_Programming_System_PLM_1966
User Manual: Y26-3752-0_1130_Monitor_Programming_System_PLM_1966
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 272
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Z26-3752-0
Progra,m Logic
IBM 1130 MONITOR PROGRAMMING SYSTEM
PROGRAM LOGIC MANUAL
This publication describes the internal logic of the IBM 1130
Monitor Programming System. The contents are intended for use
by persons involved in program maintenance, and for system
programmers who are altering the program ldesign. Program
logic information is not necessary for the use and operation of
the program; therefore, distribution of this,manual is limited to
those who are performing the aforementioned functions.
RESTRICTED DISTRIBUTION -- SEE ABSTRACT
PREFACE
•
Effective use of this publication requires an understanding of the IBM 1130 Computing System and the
appropriate programming system. Publications relating to the 1130 System are listed in the IBM 1130
Bibliography (Form A26-5916).
--The' contents of this publication describe the internal structure of the programs comprising the 113()
Disk Monitor System. The publication is divided mto
seven sectiof(ls, the first of which is an introduction.
Following this are sections which describe each of
the Monitor programs:
•
Supervisor
•
•
•
Disk Utility Program
•
Subroutine Library
System Loader
Each section consists of a general description of
the program and includes flowcharts depicting the
major program components. The component names
are the same as those used in the program listings
supplied by the Programming Systems Department.
It has been necessary to define many terms in
order to describe the 1130 Disk Monitor System.
Included in this publication is a glossary of special
terms. It is recommended that the reader familiarize himself with these terms before attempting to
read the rest of the publication.
As an aid to the reader, actual core addresses
have been specified in the text and on core maps;
actual disk sector addresses have also been specified
where useful. These addresses are accurate at the
time of publication of this manual. However, they
are subject to change and must not be construed as
applicable at all times and in all cases.
Assembler Program
FORTRAN Compiler
Copies of this and other IBM publications can be obtained through IBM Branch Offices. A form has
been provided at the back of this publication for reader's comments. If the form has been detached,
comments may be directed to: IBM, Programming Publications Dept. 452, San Jose, Calif. 95114
©
International Business Machines Corporation 1966
ii
CONTENTS
Core Storage Layout.
Phase Descriptions •
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2: SUPERVISOR •
Introduction
Area Description •
Control Functions • • • •
Resident Routines
Phases • • • • • •
The Loader • • •
Disk System Format Loading
Core Image Format Loading
Subroutines Used by the Loader
The Load-Time Transfer Vector
The Flipper-Table • • • •
The Object-Time TV. •
System Overlay Scheme. •
2
2
2
77
• 82
2
3
7
8
12
13
13
14
14
15
SECTION 6: SUBROUTINE LIBRARY • • • • •
Card Subroutine(CARDl)
Keyboard, Console Printer or Operator Request
Subroutine (TYPEO)
••••••••••••
Console Printer or Operator Request
Subroutine (WRTYO)
Paper Tape Subroutine (PAPTl)
Paper Tape Subroutine (PAPTN)
Plot Subroutine (PLOTl) • • • • •
The IBM 1132 Printer Subroutine (PRNTl)
Disk Subroutines (DISKl)
Flipper Routines (FLIpO, FLIPl) •
FORTRAN I/O
·121
·122
• ·122
• ·123
·124
0126
0127
0127
SECTION 3: DISK UTILITY PROGRAM (DUP).
Introduction • • • • • • • • •
DUP Functions and Routines
DUP I/O • • • • • •
DUP I/O Routines
17
17
18
41
41
SECTION 7: SYSTEM LOADER/EDITOR FOR
THE 1130 MONITOR SYSTEM
• • • • • •
System Loader/Editor Input
General Description
Routine Descriptions • • •
• .134
-134
• .138
• .143
SECTION 4: ASSEMBLER PROGRAM
Program Operation •
Relocatability • • • • • • •
Notes • • • • • • •
Storage Layout. • •
Output Format and Error Codes ••
Tables and Buffers • • • • •
Phase Descriptions • • • • • •
Assembler Input -Output Routines •
45
45
46
47
47
49
51
53
74
SECTION 8: THE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
PROGRAM
SECTION 5: FORTRAN • • • •
Program Purpose • • • • • • •
General Compiler Description
Phase Objectives
• • •••
Control Records • • • • • •
76
76
76
76
77
2
'119
·119
·120
.147
FLOWCHARTS • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 149
APPENDIX A. EXAMPLES OF FORTRAN
OBJECT CODING
• • • • • • • • • 245
iii
APPENDIX B. DIAGNOSTIC AIDS·
.254
APPENDIX C. DISK MAP
.256
GLOSSARY
• .257
INDEX' ••
• • 262
ILLUSTRATIONS
Chart AA.
Chart AB.
Chart AC.
The 1130 Monitor System . • • • . .
149
The Supervisor
• . . • • • • • • • 150
The Skeleton Supervisor, Presupervisor,
and Cold Start Routine
• •• 151
Chart AD. The Supervisor - Phase A
• •• 152
Chart AE. The Supervisor - Phase B
• • 153
Chart AF. The Supervisor - Phase C
• • 154
Chart AG. The Supervisor - Phase D
155
Chart AH. The "upervisor - Phase E
• • 156
Chart AJ.
The Loader - Disk System Format Load
• • • • 157
Chart AK. The Loader - Core Image Format Load
158
Chart BA. DUP Functions
• • • 159
Chart IlB.
DUP·-DUPCO
160
Chart BC. DUP·-DCTL
• •• 161
Chart BD. DUP-DUMP
• • • 162
Chart BE.
DUP·-DELETE
• 163
Chart BF.
DUP·-DELETE
• •• 164
Chart IlG. DUp·-STORE
• • 165
Chart BH. DUP-STOREMOD
• 166
Chart BI.
DUP-DUMPLET
• 167
Chart BJ.
DUP·-DWADR
168
Chart BK. DUP-DEFINE
169
Chart IlL.
General Assembler Flowchart
• •• 170
Chart BM. The Assembler - Phase 0
171
Chart BN. The Assembler - Phase 0
172
Chart BO. The Assembler - Phase 1
173
Chart BP.
The Assembler - Phase lA
174
Chart BQ. The Assembler - Phase 2
• •• 175
Chart BR. The Assembler - Phase 3
• • 176
Chart BS: The Assembler - Phase 4
• • 177
Chart BT. The Assembler - Phase 5
• 178
Chart BU. The Assembler - Phase 5
• • 179
Chart BV. The Assembler - Phase 6
• • 180
Chart BW. The Assembler - Phase 6
• •• 181
Chart BX. The Assembler - Phase 7
182
Chart BY. The Assembler - Phase 7
• • • 183
Chart BZ.
The Assembler - Phase 7
• • • • 184
Chart CA. The Assembler - Phase 7
• • 185
Chart CB. The Assembler - Phase 8
• • • 186
Chart CC. The Assembler - Phase 8
187
Chart CD. The Assembler - Phase 8
188
Chart CEo The Assembler - Phase 9
• • 189
Chart CF. The Assembler - Phase 9
• •• 190
Chart CG. The Assembler - Phase 9
• •• 191
Chart CH. The Assembler - Phase 9
• •• 192
Chart CI.
The Assembler - Phase 9
• • 193
Chart CJ.
The Assembler - Phase 9
• • 194
Chart CK. The Assembler - Phase 9
• 195
196
Chart CL. The Assembler - Phase 9
Chart CM. The Assembler - Phase 9
• 197
Chart CN. The Assembler - Phase 9
198
Chart CO. The Assembler - Phase 9
• • 199
Chart CPo The Assembler - Phase 10
• •• 200
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
CQ.
CR.
CS.
CT.
DA.
DB •
DC •
DD.
DE.
DF.
DG.
DH.
DJ.
DK.
DL.
DM .
DN.
DP.
DQ.
DR •
DS.
DT.
DU.
DV.
DW.
DX.
DY.
DZ.
EA .
EB.
EC .
ED.
EE.
EF .
EG.
EH •
FA.
FB.
FC.
FD.
FE.
FF.
FG.
FH.
Figure
Figure
1.
2.
Figure
3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
iv
The Assembler - Phase 11
The Assembler - Phase 12
The Assembler - Phase 12
The Assembler - Phase 12A •
FORTRAN - Phase 1
FORTRAN - Phase 2
FORTRAN - Phase 3
FORTRAN - Phase 4
FORTRAN - Phase 5
FORTRAN - Phase 5
FORTRAN - Phase 6
FORTRAN - Phase 6
FORTRAN - Phase 7
FORTRAN - Phase 7
FORTRAN - Phase 8
FORTRAN - Phase 9
FORTRAN - Phase 10
FORTRAN - Phase 11
FORTRAN - Phase 12
FORTRAN - Phase 13
FORTRAN - Phase 14
FORTRAN - Phase 15
FORTRAN - Phase 16
FORTRAN - Phase 17
FORTRAN - Phase 18
FORTRAN - Phase 19
FORTRAN - Phase 20
FORTRAN - Phase 21
FORTRAN - Phase 22
FORTRAN - Phase 23
FORTRAN - Phase 24
FORTRAN - Phase 25
FORTRAN - Phase 26
FORTRAN - Phase 27
FORTRAN - Phase 28
FORTRAN - Dump Phase
FORTRAN I/O
System Loader/Editor - Phase El
System Loader/Editor - Phase E2
System Loader/Editor - Phase E2
System Loader/Editor - Phase E2
System Maintenance Program
System Maintenance Program •
System Maintenance Program
• •• 201
• • 202
• 203
204
• •• 205
•
•
• ••
•
206
207
208
209
210
• •• 211
212
213
214
215
216
• •• 217
218
• 219
• • • 220
221
•
•
•
•
222
223
224
225
226
•
• •
•
•
227
228
229
230
231
• 232
233
234
• •
•
•
•
•
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
Supervisor Phases and Areas
• • • • . •
Layout of the LOCAL and NOCAL
Control Record Areas • • • • <,
Layout of the FILES Control Record
Area
••••••.••••.
Storage Map of the Loader
Storage Layout at Object - Time
2
6
7
8
12
Figure
Figure
6.
7.
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
8.
9.
to.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
Layout of the Object - Time TV Area
Format Of the CALL TV for System
Overlays
Storage Layout of DUP
Storage Layout of DUPCO
Assembler I/O Flow
Assembler Storage Layout
FORTRA1\J" Input (Card Form)
Layout of Storage During Compilation
DO Table
Subscript Expression Table
Scan Example
Organization of System Loader/Editor
Input
Loader/Editor Control Records
ISS Subroutines
The Bootstrap Loader
15
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
16
17
18
46
48
76
77
101
103
106
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
135
135
136
141
v
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Phase El
Ph ase E2 - Part I
Phase E2 - Part II •
Phase E2 with the Skeleton Supervisor
Phase E2 with DUPCO •
Storage Layout During Execution of the
System Maintenance Program
.141
.142
.142
.142
.142
I/O Code Conversion Table
Format of the I/O Buffer.
Assembler Error Codes •
Location Assignment Counter •
FORTRAN Communications Area.
Symbol Table ID Word
Statement ID Word Type Codes
Output Code of FORMAT Specification
42
• 49
50
51
79
80
81
95
.147
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
The major characteristic of a non-process control
monitor is that it allows continuous operation of
stacked input jobs. It operates in a static environment in that control is regulated by the input data,
not by external stimuli. It differs from a process
control monitor in that the supervisory section
relinquishes complete control to the program
whose operation has been requested.
In the 1130 Disk System Monitor, the JOB control
record defines the starting and ending points of the
job; however, the total job can consists of many subjobs. The Assembler Program, the FORTRAN compiler, the Disk Utility Program, and the user I s programs can be called for operation by the ASM, FOR,
DUP, and XEQ control records, respectively. These
are each considered subjobs, and the successful completion of the job depends on the successful completion
of each subjob. In most cases all subjobs subsequent
to the unsuccessful completion of a given subjob are
bypassed.
The Monitor, which resides totally on disk,
allows the storage and retrieval of user programs on
disk by a referenced name, and it provides a work
storage area on disk which can be used by both Monitor programs and user programs. A directory of
programs is maintained to keep track of all programs
which reside on the disk.
The overall flowchart of the Monitor is shown in
Chart AA.
Supervisor
The Supervisor performs the control and loading
functions of the Monitor. Monitor control records,
which are used to direct the sequence of jobs without
operator intervention, are included in a stacked input
arrangement and are processed by the Supervisor,
which decodes the control records and calls the proper Monitor program to perform the desired operation.
Disk Utility Program
The Disk Utility Program (DUP) is a gTOUp of routines that automatically allocate disk storage as required by each program stored on the disk and make
these programs available in card or paper tape format, in addition to providing printed r1ecords of the
status of User Storage and Working Storage. By
means of DUP, the required operations of disk maintenance can be performed with minimum effort.
Assembler Program
The Assembler Program receives program source
statements written in the 1130 Assembly Language
and produces a machine-language program as output.
The input can be in either card or paper tape format.
At the conclusion of the assembly process, the
assembled program resides in Working Storage. It
may also have been outputted on the principal I/O device. Assembler control records are used to specify
options and to provide instructions concerning the
assembly process.
FORTRAN Compiler
The FORTRAN compiler accepts statements written
in the FORTRAN language as input and produces a
machine-language program as output. It provides for
calling the necessary subroutines at execution time.
SubroutIne Library
The subroutine library consists of a group of subroutines designed to aid the programmer in making
effiCient use of the machine system. The library
contains input/output, data conversion, arithmetic,
functional, and selective dump subroutines. The user
can delete undesired subroutines from the library as
well as add subroutines of his own.
System Loader
The System Loader is a program that must be used
initially to load the Monitor onto the disk pack. The
Monitor is supplied to the user on cards or paper
tape, which, with the aid of some control records
(IBM-supplied in the case of Paper Tape Systems,
user-supplied in the case of Card Systems), must
be loaded to the disk pack before operation of the
Monitor can begin.
Section 1: Introduction
SECTION 2: SUPERVISOR
INTRODUCTION
Hardware Area
The Supervisor performs the control and loading
functions for the 1130 Disk Monitor System. In order
to accomplish the control functions, the program is
divided into several segments, which are a combination of core-resident logic (Skeleton Supervisor) and
separate core load phases. See Chart AB.
The relocating and loading-to-core storage functions are performed for the Supervisor by the Loader.
/
0028
/
0090
/
OOF4
/
0460
/
055C
/
09C4
/
OFFF
Communications Area (COMMA)
Skeleton Supervisor
Low Core I/O Area: DISKO,
TYPEO, CARDO/PAPTl
Presuperv isor
AREA DESCRIPTIONS
The following descriptions summarize the contents
or purpose of the areas in core which contain or are
used by the Supervisor. See Figure 1.
Phase Area
COMMA: This area is used and reserved by all Monitor programs. Among other things, it contains the
Monitor indicators and switches, the LET /FLET
parameters, and the Disk IOCS indicators.
Skeleton Supervisor: This area contains the Skeleton
Supervisor segment of the Supervisor. The Skeleton
Supervisor is located in this area except during the
execution of either a FORTRAN core load or an Assembler core load which uses the DISKZ routine.
I/O Area (low-core): This area holds the I/O routines (Card or Paper Tape, Disk, and Console Printer) that are used by the Supervisor. The zero, e. g. ,
CARDO, versions of the I/O routines are used by the
Supervisor (except for paper tape, in which case
it uses PAPT1.)
This area is over laid by the user Disk I/O and/or
the user's core load at load time.
High Core I/O Area: Conversion
Routines, Buffers, Printer Routine
\
Figure 1.
Supervisor Phases and Areas
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Presuperviso.!.3. This area may also be overlaid by
the user's core load. It contains the Presupervisor
segment of the Supervisor and a routine which gives
DISKO the ability to process multiple sectors.
Phase Area: This area contains the phases of the
Supervisor during its execution.
I/O Area (high-core): This area contains the character code conversion routines, the 1132 Printer
routine, and the I/O buffer. This area may also be
overlaid by the user's core load at load time'.
2
RESIDENT ROUTINES
Skeleton Supervisor
Chart: AC
•
Calls the Presupervisor on CALL EXIT or CALL
LINK.
•
Completes the loading of the user's core load
and transfers control to that program.
Upon a CALL EXIT or a CALL LINK from a successfully completed user mainline or upon the
return of a Monitor program to the Supervisor, the
Skeleton Supervisor calls the Presupervisor, which
determines whether the return was due to a CALL
EXI T or a CALL LINK.
When entered from the Loader, the Skeleton
Supervisor reads the first sector of user's core
load into core and transfers control to it.
When entered via CALL LINK or CALL EXIT,
the Skeleton Supervisor waits for all interrupts to
be serviced before continuing.
The Master IL routine, which handles all I/O
interrupts during Supervisor execution, is contained
within the Skeleton Supervisor (00E0 -00F3 ).
16
16
The Supervisor makes use of the I/O routines DISKO,
TYPEO, and either CARDO or PAPT1, depending
upon the system configuration. These routines are
used by all phases of the Supervisor. They are
loaded into the low core I/O area, between the
Skeleton Supervisor and the Presupervisor.
These routines are identical to the corresponding
I/O routines in the Subroutine Library but are not
taken from the Subroutine Library. They are wholly
incorporated in the Supervisor itself.
A fourth I/O routine is used by the Supervisor
to perform required printing on the 1132 Printer.
This routine is loaded into the I/O area in high core.
See the Subroutine Library portion of this
manual, Section 6.
Presupervisor
I/O Conversion Routines
Chart: AC
•
•
Initializes the Master IL routine.
•
Saves the areas above and below the Presupervisor on the CIB.
•
Loads the I/O routines used by the Supervisor.
•
Calls Phase A.
For all CALL LINK entries, before reading the
Supervisor into core, the Presupervisor saves
core from core location 256 to core location 4095
on the CIB, except for locations 1216 - 1536, which
are saved by the Skeleton Supervisor before the
Presupervisor is read in.
Contained within the Presupervisor is a routine
which enables DISKO to read or write more than 320
words. Thus, the Presupervisor can use whatever
disk routine happens to be in core at the time it
gains control to load its own disk I/O routine.
The Pre supervisor then reads DISKO into the
Disk I/O area, followed by CARDO or PAPT1, and
TYPEO.
Phase A is read into core by the Pre supervisor
to analyze the Monitor control record.
Input/ Output Subroutine s
•
Perform the servicing functions for the I/O
devices.
Perform the I/O character code eonversions.
These routines provide the interface between the
internal character representation and. the I/O devices.
The routine EBPRT converts from EBCDIC either to
Console Printer code or to hexadeciTIlal (for the 1132
Printer) . The routine HOLEB conveli:'ts EBCDIC to
IBM card code and vice-versa. The routine P APEB
converts EBCDIC to Paper Tape code and vice-versa.
During Supervisor execution these routines
reside in the high-core I/O area. They are identical
to the routines in the Subroutine Library of the same
names. However, they are a part of the Supervisor
and. are not loaded from the Subroutine Library.
PHASES
Phase A
Chart: AD
•
Initializes for the principal print device.
•
Initializes for the principal I/O device.
•
Reads the input record.
•
Analyzes each Monitor control record and calls
the requested Monitor program "
Section 2: Supervisor
3
•
Prints the Monitor control records.
•
Calls Phase B if an XEQ record is encountered.
Phase A is the Monitor Control Record Analyzer and
Director. For each type of Monitor control record,
Phase A initiates and calls the requested Monitor
program. In the case of an XEQ record, additional
phases of the Supervisor are required to complete
the processing before the Loader can be called.
Phase A prints the error messages for the remaining phases of the Supervisor.
SUP 1: Tests to determine the type of entry into the
Skeleton Supervisor. Entry from a CALL LINK
causes the program to transfer into the routine that
analyzes the XEQ control record. An entry from a
Cold Start or a CALL EXIT causes the program to
transfer into the routine that reads the input control
record.
OKSUP: Detects and prints comments record.
PRNT2; Prints the control records.
NAME 1: Places the control record name in the
accumulator.
NAME 2: Tests for the type of control record;
branches to JOB1, ASM1, FOR1, XEQ1, DUP1,
PAUS1, TYP1, or TEND1 on a valid type; prints
an error message on an invalid Monitor control
record and returns to SUP1.
JOB1: Indicates the end of one job and the beginning
of the next. Switches are initialized and the Monitor
control record (// JOB) is printed. The control
data from the Monitor // JOB record is stored and
is used to modify the disk input/output control words.
PAUS1: Causes the system to enter the WAIT state
to allow for operator intervention. The routine
branches to SUP 1 to read the next record in the
stack when the PROGRAM START key is pressed.
TYP1: Causes the input mode to be switched from the
principal I/O device to the keyboard for succeeding
Supervisor control records. This allows the
operator to type in the control records.
TEND1: Causes the input mode to be switched from
the keyboard to the principal I/O device for succeeding control records.
4
ASM1: Causes Phase A to initialize and read the
first sector of the Assembler Program into core for
execution. This is the Assembler caller routine.
FOR1: Causes Phase A to initialize and read the
first sector of the FORTRAN compiler into core for
execution. This is the FORTRAN Compiler caller
routine.
DUP1: Causes Phase A to initialize and read the
first sector of the Disk Utility Program (DUP) into
core for execution. This is the Disk Utility Program
caller routine.
NONDP: Prevents DUP from being read if the nonDUP switch is set. A FORTRAN Compiler or
Assembler diagnostic, among other things, sets the
non -DUP switch. If it is set, an error message is
printed and the program returns to SUP 1.
XEQ1: Causes Phase A to continue the Supervisor
processing by calling Phase B if either an XEQ
Moni tor control record is encountered or an entry to
the Supervisor by a CALL LINK occurs. However,
a FORTRAN Compiler or Assembler Program
diagnostic sets the non-XEQ switch. If XEQ1 finds
this switch set, an error message is printed and the
program returns to SUP 1.
Phase B
Chart: AE
•
Converts the mainline name to modified EBCDIC
and compresses it into name code.
•
Stores the count of *LOCAL, *NOCAL, and
*FILES records.
•
Searches LET /FLET for the sector address of
the mainline.
•
Determines the format of the program: Core
Image or Disk System format.
•
Calls either Phase C or the Loader.
Phase B is initialized and brought into core storage
when Phase A detects an XEQ Monitor control record.
The information contained in the XEQ record is analyzed and processed. Phase C is called if the XEQ record indicates that *LOCAL, *NOCAL and/or *FILES
Supervisor control records follow. Otherwise, the
Loader is called to load the program to be executed.
RITE: Looks up a single character in the EBCDIC
table (T AB1). When the input character is verified,
it is left-justified and truncated into modified
EBCDIC code. VERT 1 contains the converted
character.
LIMIT: Determines if the converted character falls
within a range of decimal 0 through 9. If so, it is
right-justified and stored in VERTl. Otherwise,
it is considered an invalid character.
GOXEQ: Stores each character of the mainline
name in a separate word for conversion to modified
EBCDIC; compresses the name into name code.
LOKUP: Performs the LET /FLET look-up. The
routine NAME initializes for the LET search;
FLTLK initializes for the FLET search. The equivalent address for the mainline name is obtained
from either of these two tables. It is an error if
the name is not located.
HIT: Analyzes the indicator bits in the located table
entry to determine which Loader entry point to use
for loading the program. The possible bit combinations are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
00 Disk System Format Load
01 An error condition: Program is considered
not to be in loadable form
11 An error condition: Program is considered
not to be in loadable form
10 Core Image Load
TST2 and TST3 routines specify that the Core
Image and Disk System Format entry points, respectively, are required.
CPROC: Initializes and calls Phase C into core
storage. Phase C is executed repeatedly just after
the mainline name is converted from EBCDIC to
name code until all of the *LOCAL, *NOCAL and/or
* FILES records have been processed. Then the
remainder of Phase B is executed.
•
Calls Phase D to process *LOCAL or *NOCAL
control records and Phase E to process * FILES
control records.
Phase C is initialized and brought into core storage
if Phase B detects a count in the XE<;~ record. The
count indicates the number of Supervisor control
records that follow.
Phase C reads and prints the first Supervisor
control record. Then, depending upon the control
record type, Phase C calls either Phase D or
Phase E. Phase D processes *LOCAL and *NOCAL
control records; Phase E processes *FILES control
records. These phases process control records
until a type change is detected. All the Supervisor
control records of each type MUST be processed
before the type change is made. The Supervisor
control record types can be processed in any order.
A type change causes Phase C to be recalled.
Phase C in turn calls the phase to process the new
type control record.
BLNK1: Reads and prints the *-type record.
LTST: Tests for the name LOCAL in a Supervisor
control record.
NTST: Tests for the name NOCAL in a Supervisor
control record.
FTST: Tests for the name FILES in a Supervisor
control record.
LOCAL: Initializes and calls Phase D for *LOCAL
or *NOCAL processing.
FPROC: Initializes and calls Phase E for *FILES
processing.
Phase D
Chart: AG
•
Converts the mainline and subroutine names to
name code and stores these names.
•
Writes the *LOCAL and *NOCAL records on the
disk.
•
Reads and prints all *LOCAL or *NOCAL
records (after the first).
•
Calls Phase C at a type change or Phase B at
the end of the Supervisor control records.
Phase C
Chart: AF
•
Initializes for processing *LOCAL, *NOCAL
and/or * FILES records.
Section 2: Supervisor
5
Phase D is initialized and called by Phase C to process *LOCAL and *NOCAL records. A separate pass
is made for each type.
Phase D extracts from the control records the
mainline and subprogram names, converts them to
name code, and stores them in the disk output area.
Upon detection of a control record type change, or
the end of the Supervisor control records, Phase D
writes the disk output area on the LOCAL/NOCAL
control record area of disk.
Figure 2 shows the layout of the LOCAL and
NOCAL control record areas. Two sectors are allotted for each area. The word count is the number
of words used to store (1) the I-word word count,
(2) the 2 -word mainline name, and (3) the names of
the LOCAL/NOCAL subprograms applying to the
mainline name" each two words. This format is
repeated for each mainline name encountered in the
*LOCAL and *NOCAL records.
Phase D then re-calls Phase C if a type change
was detected or Phase B if the last of the Supervisor
control records was detected.
Phase D, once loaded, reads and prints the
Supervisor control records until a type change or
the last control record is detected.
NAMER: Stores each character of the mainline or
subroutine name in a separate word for conversion to
modified EBCDIC; compresses the name into name
code.
RIGHT: Looks up a single character in the EBCDIC
table (TAB 1) . When the input character is verified,
it is left-justified and truncated into modified EBCDIC
code. VERTI contains the converted character.
DOFLO: Detects a disk buffer overflow. If the
number of words used to store *NOCAL or *LOCAL
records exceeds 640, an error is indicated by a
printed message and the program returns to Phase A.
WNDUP: Initializes to write the. disk output area to
disk storage; initializes to read Phase C back into
core storage and to re-enter Phase C at LTST.
ENDUP: Initializes to write the disk output area on
disk storage; initializes to read Phase B back into
core storage and to re-enter Phase B at SAVA.
Phase E
Chart: AH
CAL: Initializes the disk output area pointers and
switches; contains a routine to read, print, and
test the record type of the input record.
•
Edits and converts the file number to binary
and stores the number.
NAMEA: Edits and stores the mainline name in the
disk output area; adjusts the pOinters, switches, and
counts for the disk output area and the record input
area.
•
Converts the file name to name code and stores
the name.
•
Writes the file names and numbers on the disk.
SUB: Edits and stores the subroutine name in the
disk output area; adjusts the pointers, switches,
and counts for the disk output area and the record
input area. If the next character is not a comma or
a blank, it is in.valid. A blank indicates the end of
the subroutine names applying to the current mainline name. If a. comma is followed by a blank, the
routine looks for a continuation record. Otherwise,
it branches to SUB to process the next subroutine
name.
•
Reads and prints all FILES records (after the
first) .
•
Calls Phase C at a type change or Phase B at
the end of the Supervisor control records.
Word
Count
No.1
Name
Mainline
No.1
Name
LOCAVNOCAL
~------~----.------~----~,
Figure 2.
6
Name
Phase E is initialized and called by Phase C to process *FILES records.
The file name is extracted and converted to
name code and stored in the disk output area. The
Word
Count
Name
Main-line
Name
~__L_O_C_A~V_N_O
___
CA_L__~~~ (~l~___N_o_._2___~___N_o_._2______~_L_O_C_A_V~N_O_C_A_L___~I\
layout of the LOCAL and NOCAL Control Record Areas
File
File
File
File
File
Name
No. I
Name
No. J
Name
file number is also extracted, converted to binary,
and then stored in the disk output area. Upon detection of a control record type change or the end of the
Supervisor control records, Phase E writes the disk
output area (the file names and numbers) in the
FILES control record area of disk.
Figure 3 shows the layout of the FILES control
record area. Two sectors are allotted for this area.
The word count is the number of words used to store
(1) the I-word word count, (2) a I-word file number
for each file designated, and (3) a 2-word file name
for each file designated.
Phase E then recalls Phase C if a type change
was detected or Phase B if the last of the control
records was detected.
Phase E, once loaded, reads and prints the
Supervisor control records until a type change or
the last control record is detected.
Word
File
I Count I No. I
FILES: Initializes the disk output area pointers and
switches; contains a routine to read, print, and test
the record type of the input record.
THE LOADER
NUMER: Edits each position of the file number.
Each character is verified as numeric and the required left parenthesis is detected. The number is
converted to binary and is stored in the disk output
buffer.
NAME: Edits each position of the file name. Each
character is verified as valid alphameric and the required right parenthesis is detected. The individual
characters are converted to a modified EBCDIC and
then are compressed into name code. The compressed name is stored in the disk output buffer.
NTBLN: Indicates an error if the position following
the right parenthesis is other than a comma or blank.
An appropriate message is printed and the program
returns to Phase A. A comma followed by a blank
indicates a continuation record and the program
branches back into the FILES routine. A comma
followed by a left parenthesis branches the program
back within NUMER to process the next entry.
SLDR: Right-justifies the file number before it is
converted to binary.
DOFLO: Detects a disk buffer overflow. If the number of words used to store the file names exceeds 640,
an error is indicated by a printed message and the
program returns to Phase A.
Figure 3.
Layout of the FILES Control Record Area
WNDUP: Initializes to write the disk output area to
disk storage; initializes to read Phase C back into
core storage and to re-enter Phase C at L TST .
ENDUP: Initializes to write the disk output area on
disk storage; initializes to read Phase B back into
core storage and to re-enter Phase B at SAVA.
There are two entry pOints to the Loader, one for Disk
System format loads and the other for Core Image format loads. The format in which the object program is
stored on the disk (Disk System format or Core Image
format) determines which of these entry points will
be entered from the Supervisor or DUP.
The appropriate entry point is selected either by
Phase B of the Supervisor after detection ofaXEQ
Monitor control record or by the Disk Utility Program (DUP) after detection of a *STORECI DUP control record. Detection of either of these control
records causes the controlling program to perform
the following operations prior to the calling and execution of the loading program:
An XEQ control record causes the Supervisor to
store in COMMA the mainline name, the code for the
disk I/O version requested, and the indicator which
causes the Loader to print a storage map.
A *STORECI control record causes DUP to
store in COMMA the mainline name and the code for
the requested version of disk I/O. In addition, the
DUP program sets switches in COMMA which cause
the Loader to print a storage map and to return to
DUP after the core load is built.
The Supervisor writes *LOCAL, *NOCAL, and
*FILES records in a special area on the disk. (See
the Supervisor, Phase C, for the format of these
records.) If DUP detects a *LOCAL record, an
error message will be printed.
If the mainline name appears in the control record, it is located in LET /FLET (Location Equivalence
Section 2: Supervisor
7
Table). The mainline name must appear in the
*STORECI control record. The mainline name must
appear in the XEQ control record if the program to
be loaded is in Core Image format or is located in
User Storage. Hence, if the mainline name does not
appear in the XEQ control record, it is assumed that
the program is located in Working Storage and is in
Disk System format. From LET /FLET the disk
block address is computed and stored in COMMA.
Also, the format, i.e., Core Image or Disk System,
of the mainline program is determined.
The CIB
Upon every entry to the CALL LINK entry in the
Skeleton Supervisor, the contents of core storage
between locations 256 and 4095 are saved on the
CIB. This area is assumed by the Supervisor to be
COMMON. This constitutes exactly twelve 320-word
sectors, which are written on sectors three through
fourteen of the CIB.
As a core load is built, the first sector of the
CIB is used by the Loader to build up the Core Image
Header record during a DSF load. In this same type
of load the first word of the core load, if it is to reside below core location 4096, is placed in the first
word of the second sector of the cm, followed by
consecutive words of the core load until the core load
is complete, except for those words which should
reside (at execution time) at core locations greater
than 4095. The Loader, in building the core load,
overlays as necessary the saved COMMON, sectors
three through fourteen.
Thus, at the end of the loading process, the CIB
contains the Core Image Header Record, that part of
the core load which is to reside below core location
4096, and any part of COMMON which is to reside
below core location 4096.
If the core load was built as a result of an XEQ
control record, Phase 8 will first convert the number
of words of COMMON in the CIB to a sector count,
rounding the count up by one if there is not an integral
number of sectors. This number of 320-word sectors
will then be read directly into core storage from the
disk, thus restoring COMMON. Then the core load
itself is read directly into core storage from the cm,
except for the contents of the second sector of the
CIB, which is read in by the Skeleton Supervisor.
To take an example, suppose that a link to a program with an object program of 626 words has occurred. The object program is to reside at core location
450, and the object-time transfer vector is 25 words
long. A COMMON of 3004 words has been defined.
Consequently, the core load consists of 641 words
(626+25), which is two full sectors plus one word.
8
COMMON occupies ten sectors (3004+320=9+=10).
Phase 8 will first read the fifth to the fourteenth sectors of the cm into core, beginning at core location
896 (COMMON actually begins at location 1092).
Next, all 320 words of the third sector and one word
of the fourth sector will be read into core, beginning
at location FFO. At this point all COMMON has been
restored (locations 1092-4095) and all but the first
320 words of the core load have been read into core
(locations FFO-1091). The Skeleton Supervisor performs the last step of the process, which is to read
the second sector of the CIB into core locations 450F69 and to transfer control to the object program.
Figure 4 shows relative allocation of core storage
during Loader execution.
DISK SYSTEM FORMAT LOADING
Loading (relocating) from Disk System format requires nine phases of the Loader (0 thru 8) plus the
routines to print error messages and a storage map
Hardware
Area
Communi cations
Area
(COMMA)
Skeleton Supervisor
/
0028
/
0090
/
OOF4
/
026A
/
/
0578
0630
/
/
0944
OAAO
I
OBBC
/
/
/
OBFC
0050
0004
/
1000
Disk I/O Routine
(OISKO)
Buffers
} Phase 8
Phase 0
Phase 1
/
Load-time TV Area
) Phase 2}
~
Figure 4.
Storage Map of the Loader
}
Phase 3.
:~S~it7
Map and
Message
Routines
(see Chart AJ). The mainline to be relocated can
reside in either Working Storage or User storage.
TL
Phase 0 (When entered for Disk System format loads)
EX
Exits to the Monitor call routine or to the
DUP program, depending upon the entry point
used.
Exits through routines PM and TL. This
routine is entered for those errors which
cause the Loader to terminate the loading
process.
Extracts from the mainline header record
the addresses, counts, and indicators required for loading a mainline program. This
routine utilizes the BT routine to make the
initial entry in the load-time TV, a LIBF
entry to the disk I/O routine requested by
the user (DISKZ, DISK1, etc.). If no specific version is requested, DISKZ is used.
Mter all *LOCAL and *NOCAL records have
been processed, the routine reads in and
transfers control to Phase 2.
Examines all *LOCAL and *NOCAL records
in the LOCAL/NOCAL sectors and enters the
subprogram names in the load-time TV. All
LOCAL subprogram types are checked to
determine if they are valid for LOCALs, i. e. ,
the LOCALs are not mainlines or interrupt
level (IL) subroutines.
The entry point is BP 100. This phase simply loads
Phase 1 and transfers control to it.
MC
Phase 1
•
Initializes the processing of the *LOCAL and
*NOCAL records.
•
Builds the load-time TV and stores the first
entry, the TV entry for the requested disk I/O
routine.
•
Processes the mainline header record.
LN
LK
NW
RH
GP
BT
LS
PM
Controls the reading of a given number of
words from disk storage to core storage.
Fetches the next data word in sequence from
the data buffer and, if required, reads the
next sequential sector.
Reads into the data buffer the sector containing the header record for both mainline
and subprograms.
Reads or writes one disk sector. The operation to be performed, i. e ., GET or PUT,
is determined by the entry point to the
routine.
Builds the load-time transfer vector (TV).
The first entry is always for the disk I/O
routine requested. Following this, as LIBF
and CALL statements are encountered by
the Loader, additional entries are made to
the TV.
The first entry in the TV occupies words
4086-4089. Subsequent entries are stored
in successively descending blocks of four
words each (see Load-Time TV).
Searches LET /FLET for program and data
file names. If the name is not found, the
load is terminated. If the name is found,
the output from this subroutine is the disk
block address of the program or data file.
For core image programs the execution address, the loading address, and the word
count are also a part of the output.
Prints the storage map if requested. Error
messages are printed as errors are encountered during the loading functions.
Phase 2
•
MC
RL
Relocates and converts the mainline and all subroutines and subprograms from Disk System format to Core Image format.
Controls the operation of Phases 3 through 8.
After the execution of Phase 6, this routine
returns to DUP if the Loader was called by
DUP as the result of a *STORECI control
record. Otherwise, this routine calls Phase
7, executes it, and then calls the Phase 8
and transfers control to it.
Controls the conversion of all programs comprising a core load from Disk System format
to Core Image format. As a program is converted, the absolute address of each entry
point is placed in the third word of its loadtime TV entry. LmFs within the program
are replaced by a short BSI instruction with
a tag of 3 and a displacement to the corresponding LIBF TV entry. CALLs within the
program are replaced by a long indirect BSI
instruction, the second word of which is the
execution-time address of the corresponding
CALL TV entry.
Section 2: Supervisor
9
TR
WR
xc
MV
DF
10
The RL routine replaces DSA (define
sector address) statements with a sector
address, word count, and entry point (this
will be zero for data files) from LET /FLET .
In addition, the absolute addresses of device
servicing routines are inserted into all IL
subroutines required by the particular core
load.
Places the core load being built, one word
at a time, into the Core Image Buffer (CIB)
or into core storage. If the address at
which a word is to be stored is greater than
4095, the word is placed directly into storage. If this address is greater than the
capacity of the machine, an error message
is printed. If the address at which a word
is to be stored is 4095 or less, the word is
stored in the Core Image Buffer. Thus the
core load can be entirely in core storage,
entirely in the Core Image Buffer, or divided between the two.
Writes the core load being built, one sector
at a time, on the CIB. A disk write occurs
when the address at which a word is to be
stored falls outside the limits of the onesector buffer which is contained in core.
This subroutine also writes LOCALs and
SOCALs in Working Storage.
Places the core address of the LIBF TV
entry associated with a subprogram entry
point into the exit control cell for that entry
point. For all entry points referenced by
LIBF statements the address of the exit control cell is the address of the subprogram
entry point +2. For example: if the entry
point FLOAT is located at the address
100010 and the corresponding LIBF TV
entry is located at the address 407510' then
the XC routine places the address 407510
into location 100210. This operation provides for execution time return linkage
through the link word contained in the LID F
TV.
Moves the DEFINE FILE table to a processing area (see DF) and, when processing is
complete, saves the table in the Core Image
Buffer.
Places into the table entry for a given Defined File the sector address assigned to
that file. This address can be an absolute
sector address taken from LET /FLET or
a sector address relative to the beginning of
Working Storage. In the latter case the address is calculated and assigned by the DF
routine.
If the DEFINE FILE table specifies a
disk block count for a file defined in User
Storage that is greater than the disk block
count for that file contained in LET /FLET ,
the count from LET /FLET replaces the count
in the DEFINE FILE table.
If only one file is defined in Working
Storage and if the disk block count for that
file exceeds the available Working Storage,
the count in the DEFINE FILE table is reduced to the length of Working Storage. If
multiple files are defined in Working Storage
and if the total di.sk block count exceeds the
available Working Storage, the core load will
not be executed.
Checks to ensure that COMMON does not
extend into the area to be used by Phase 8.
An overlap results in an error message.
Loading continues, but the non-XEQ and nonDUP switches are set.
Checks to ensure that the loading address for
the mainline is greater than the highest core
location occupied by the requested version of
Disk I/O.
CK
ML
Phase 3
•
Controls the loading of subprograms by class.
•
Processes the program header record of all routines named in the load-time TV.
•
Selects and controls the loading of required IL
subroutines.
IL
HR
CC
TY
SV
Selects and relocates the IL subroutines
associated with each of the required interrupt
levels within a particular core load.
Extracts the data required for loading (e. g. ,
preciSion, type, and entry point names) from
the header records of both mainline programs
and subprograms.
Controls the loading of subprograms by
class. The in-core routines are loaded
first, followed by LOCALs and then
SOCALs. The latter routines will be
loaded according to system overlay level
if system overlays are used. See System
Overlay Scheme.
Checks that subprograms requiring an LIBF
reference are referenced by LIBFs and that
subprograms requiring a CALL reference
are referenced by CALLs.
Scans the load-time TV twice, first to ensure that the routine has not been previously
loaded and then to find any other entry
points to the routine being relocated.
The first scan examines the entry
points in the load-time TV which precede
the current one. If another entry point to
the same routine is found, the routine has
been loaded and the absolute address of the
current entry point in that routine is placed
in the third word of its load-time TV entry.
The routine is not loaded a second time.
If no other entry pOints are found in this
scan, the routine is loaded.
The second scan examines the entry
points following the current one. If other
entry points to the routine being relocated
are found, the absolute addresses of each of
those entry points are stored into the third
word of their respective load-time TV
entries.
Phase 4
•
•
Checks to see if the core load built in Phase 3
fits into core storage.
If LOCALs are used, computes the size of the
LT
(Executed if LOCALs are present) outputs
the Flipper table (parameters required for
loading and execution of LOCALs) and then
outputs the selected Flipper routine. L T
sets an indicator which causes Phase 2 to
to load the LOCAL subprograms. Phase 2
scans the load-time TV and adds to the core
load all LOCAL subprograms referenced.
(Executed if no LOCALs are present or if
they have already been processed) returns
to Phase 2 if no SOCALs are required. If
SOCALs are required, this routine sets an
indicator to cause the loading of the next
SOCAL by class code.
See System Over lay Scheme.
ST
Phase 6
•
•
Builds the object-time LIBF and CALL TVs.
•
Completes the Core Image Header record.
Ensures the odd boundary for the Floating Accumulator (FAC).
ER
Builds one object-time TV for LIBFs and
one for CALLs. (See Object-time TV.)
The Flipper table address is placed in the
TV entry of all LOCALs.
If it is necessary, a dummy entry is
made in the CALL TV by this routine in order
to make the address of the rightmost word of
the Floating Accumulator (F AC) an odd address.
The Core Image Header record is completed by this routine and is then stored in
the first sector of the Core Image Buffer.
Flipper table and decides which of the two Flipper routines is required, i. e., FLIPO or FLIPl.
•
Initiates the attempt to fit oversize core loads
into core storage through the use of overlays.
ET
Calculates the amount of storage required
for the core load. If the core load fits into
the available storage, control is returned to
Phase 2 (MC) which reads in Phase 6 to construct the object-time TV.
If the core load does not fit, further
processing is required.
See System Overlay Scheme.
Phase 5
Phase 7
•
•
Loads the requested disk I/O routine into core.
•
Saves part of the Skeleton Supervisor and COMMA
on the disk if DISKZ has been requested.
•
Moves the interrupt TV for the core load to be
executed into the Hardware Area in low core.
•
•
Outputs the Flipper table and Flipper routine if
LOCALs are present.
If SOCALs are required, outputs a special TV
for any 2-word calls (functionals) which are a
part of SOCALs.
Establishes the class code for loading SOCAL
subroutines.
LD
Tests an indicator in COMMA which indicates the user-requested version of disk I/O
Section 2: Supervisor
11
and then reads that disk routine into core.
If DISKZ is requested, part of the Skeleton
Supervisor and COMMA is written on the
disk in order to allot more storage to the
mainline program. That portion of the
Skeleton Supervisor and COMMA which was
overlayed is restored before control is returned to the Monitor after execution. No
disk 1/0 loading occurs if DISKO is called,
because this routine is used by the loader
and therefore is already in the disk 1/0
area .
NOTE: Phase 7 has its own disk 1/0 subroutine for reading the user's disk 1/0
routine into the disk 1/0 area.
Phase 8
Phase 7 (Same description as in the section Disk
System, Format Loading.)
Phase 8
First restores COMMON from the crn, if any, if
the program being loaded is a CALL LINK. Its other
function is to read all but the first sector of the core
load into core. It sets up the sector address and
word count of the first sector and relinquishes control to the Skeleton Supervisor, which it has supplied
with the necessary information for moving the objecttime TV into its execution-time location. The Skeleton Supervisor then completes the loading process
and transfers control to the object program.
Figure 5 shows the relative allocation of core
storage at user execution time.
The description of this phase is identical to that
which is given in the section on Core Image Format
loads except that, for DSF loads, Phase 8 reads into
core storage only that part of the core load which is
in the crn, including COMMON, before transferring
control to the Skeleton Supervisor.
NOTE: Phases 7 and 8 are used in Disk System Format
Loads only when the relocated program is to be executed. See routine MC in Phase 2.
Hardware Area
Communications Area (COMMA)
r--------------------------~
Skeleton Supervisor
r---··-----------------------~
Disk I/O
CORE IMAGE FORMAT LOADING
r·--··------------------------~
User Mainline
For loading programs in Core Image format only
three phases of the Loader are required: Phase 0,
Phase 7, and Phase 8 (see Chart AK). Phase 0 processes the Core Image Header record and controls the
fetching and tr~msfer to Phases 7 and 8. Phase 7
returns control to Phase 0, whereas Phase 8 returns
to the Skeleton Supervisor.
Phase (? (When entered for Core Image format loads)
In-core Subroutines
Flipper Tabl.
Flipper Program
r--.-----------------------~
LOCAL Area
SOCAL Area
The entry point is BP 200 .
It Subroutines
Avai fable Core
LK
GET
BP
12
Controls the reading of a given number of
words from disk storage to core storage.
Performs the disk read function.
Extracts the parameters from the Core
Image Header record and transfers them to
COMMA. It fetches Phase 7 and transfers
control to it. It then fetches Phase 8 and
relinquishes control to it.
LIBF TV
CALL TV
COMMON
Figure S.
Storage Layout at Object-Time
SUBROUTINES USED BY THE LOADER
Most phases of the Loader use the following routines.
These routines are located on the disk, and when
called are loaded into the LET search buffer. This
buffer occupies the first 320 words of the Loader.
1132/Console Printer Print Routine - Performs
any printing by the Loader -storage map,
error messages, etc. - on the principal
print device. The 1132 Print Routine is
loaded at system load time only with systems
having an 1132 Printer; otherwise the Console Printer Print Routine is loaded.
Error Message Routines - Set up the appropriate
error messages for printing. See the publication ffiM 1130 Monitor System Reference
Manual (Form C26-3750) for a listing of
these messages and conditions which cause
them to be printed.
Map Routines - Set up the titles, messages, etc.
required for the printing of the storage map.
THE LOAD-TIME TRANSFER VECTOR
The load-time TV consists of an entry for:
The Disk I/O routine specified by the user on
the XEQ or STORECI record.
Each LOCAL and NOCAL entry point specified
on a *LOCAL or *NOCAL record.
Each different CALL or LffiF reference in the
relocated core load.
If System overlays are employed, one special
entry for each overlay.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Each entry in the load-time TV is four words in
length. The first entry is stored in locations 40864089, the second in 4082-4085, etc.
Bit 0
Bit 1
30-Bit
j
Entry Point
Name
I I Ir - - - ' ' ' - - - - - - - - -
Word 1
Word 2
Absolute
Entry
Point
Address
Word 3
Program
Class
Code or,
for LOCALs,
the Flipper
Table Address I
Word 4
During the first load-pass, the first two words
of each TV entry contain the symbolic name of the
entry point associated with the entry. This 30-bit
name is right-justified in the 32 bit pOSitions of the
two words. LOCALs are flagged in the TV by setting
bit zero in the 32-bit name. Bit one is set to indicate
NOCALs and those entry points referenced by CALL
statements.
NOTE: All subprograms indicated as NOCALs must
be type 4 or 6 routines.
Phase 1 makes the TV entries for the Disk I/O
routine (in routine MC) and for LOCAL and NOCAL
subprograms (in LN). The entry for the Disk I/O
version is made, even if the program contains no
LIBF statements to a Disk I/O routine. Phase 1 also
sets bits zero and one of each entry (as necessary)
as the entry point name is added to the TV.
The third word of each load-time TV entry, initially zero, ultimately contains the absolute core address at which the corresponding entry point will
found at execution time.
A non-zero value in this word indicates to the
Loader that the routine associated with this TV entry
has already become a part of the core load and thus
is not to be loaded a second time. This absolute address is added by either Phase 2 (routine RL) or
Phase 3 (routine SV).
The fourth word, also initially zero, is reserved
for the class code of the routine to which the loadtime TV entry corresponds. This code is used in
determining the order in which subprograms will be
loaded if SOCALs are employed. This code is inserted by Phase 3 (routine SV).
The class 0 subprograms are subtype 0 subroutines of types 3, 4, 5, and 6. See the publication
IBM 1130 Monitor System Reference Manual (Form
C26-3750) for descriptions of the type and subtype
specification.
These subprograms are termed "in-cores"
because they are loaded with all mainlines. The IL
subroutines are also "in-cores" but they are never
a part of any overlay and they technically do not belong to a class.
The class 1 subprograms (System Overlay 1) are
the Arithmetic and Functional subprograms, which
comprise the first SOCAL.
The class 2 subprograms (System Over lay 2) are
the FORTRAN I/O, and I/O conversion routines
which comprise the second SOCAL.
Disk FORTRAN I/O is the only class 3 subprogram. It, along with a 320-word buffer, comprises
the third SOCAL.
Section 2: Supervisor
13
On the first load-pass the mainline is loaded,
followed by the subprograms in the order of their
appearance in the TV. If the core load fits and no
LOCALs are specified, the core load is established
as it is. Phase 2 then calls Phase 6 to build the
object-time TV.
If the core load does fit and if LOCALs are specified, a second load-pass is made. In this case, all
subprograms except the LOCALs are considered as
class 0 SUbprograms. Thus, the mainline is loaded,
followed by the class 0 (all) subprograms, followed
by the Flipper table and Flipper routine. The
LOCALs are written out on Working Storage following any Defined Files.
If the core load does not fit into the available
storage as determined by Phase 4, a second loadpass is made. In this case, during the second loadpass, the mainline is loaded, followed by the class 0
SUbprograms. If LOCALs are present, the Flipper
table and Flipper program are loaded next,followed
by the LOCAL subprograms, which are written out
on Working Storage. Mter this, the remaining subprograms are loaded, i. e., written out on Working
Storage following the LOCALs, by class code. See
System Over lay Scheme.
For a LOCAL subprogram the fourth word of the
TV entry contains the address of the Flipper table
entry for that LOCAL. Phase 5 places word three
of the TV entry into the corresponding Flipper table
entry. Phase 6 then moves word four of the TV
entry into word three. Thus, at execution time, the
TV entry causes control to pass to the Flipper routine through the Flipper table rather than to the
called subprogram (see Flipper Tabl~).
THE FLIPPER TABLE
The Flipper table and Flipper routine become part
of a core load only if LOCAL subprograms are specified by the user for that core load.
The Flipper table consists of a 6-word entry for
each of the entry points specified in an *LOCAL
record which is referenced by a CALL statement
and a 5-word entry for each entry point referenced
by an LIBF statement.
The word count, sector address, and absolute
entry point are computed and inserted into each
Flipper table entry by the Loader (Phase 5) as it
processes each LOCAL. Phase 5 also builds the
linkage to the Flipper routine (a long BSI instruction)
and, for CALL entry points, a linkword.
The LOCAL subprograms are placed into the
Working Storage area on the disk following the Defined Files, if there are any.
14
The Flipper routine is the subroutine which, at
object-time, using the parameters of the Flipper
table entry, reads a LOCAL subprogram when it is
called from Working Storage into the LOCAL overlay
area, and transfers control to it.
A special Flipper table is created for SOCALs if
the System Overlay scheme is employed. See System
Overlay Scheme.
THE OBJECT-TIME TV
Phase 6 of the Loader builds two separate
object-time TVs: the CALL TV and the LIBF TV.
Each CALL TV entry is a single word containing the absolute address of a subprogram
entry point. However, in the case of a LOCAL
subprogram referenced by a CALL statement,
the absolute address is the address of the corresponding Flipper table entry instead of the subprogram entry point.
Each LIBF TV entry is comprised of three
words. Word one is the linkword. Words two and
three contain a long BSC instruction to the subprogram entry point. However, in the case of a LOCAL
subprogram referenced by an LIBF statement, words
two and three contain a long BSC instruction to the
corresponding Flipper table entry instead of the
subprogram entry point.
The LIB F TV is preceded by two special entries,
each three words in length. The first is the Floating Accumulator (FAC). The address of the first
word of FAC must be an odd address. Therefore,
if necessary, a dummy entry is made in the CALL
TV by Phase 6 in order to make F AC begin at an
odd address.
The second special entry is one 3-word entry
for use by certain subroutines to indicate overflow,
underflow, and divide check.
If the System Overlay scheme is employed, the
object-time LIBF TV contains special entries for
SOCAL subprograms referenced by LIBF statements.
These entries transfer indirectly either to the referenced subprogram if the overlay containing the subprogram is presently loaded or to the SOCAL Flipper in order to load the required overlay and transfer to the referenced subprogram. See System
Overlay Scheme.
The object-time CALL TV does not contain
entries for SOCAL subprograms referenced by
CALL statements, i. e., functionals, if a System
Overlay is employed. See System Overlay Scheme.
Figure 6 shows the layout of the object-time
TVs.
I
Dummy one - word entry in CALL TV
(i f necessary) to ensure odd address
for FAC
Last
First
Disk
LI BF
1I BF
I/O
Indicators
FAC
Last
CALL
Second First
CALL CALL
r ---+---+--11 )rr---+---+----t---+-----+--+-!-t-!-If f!
.JI-
! !
J
({
./1-------1
End of Core
High Core
Low Core
_ _-------~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~Il~_ _ _ _ _ _~~------~Il~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~--------~
CALL TV
1I BF TV
COMMON
Object - time TV
Figure 6.
Layout of the Object-Time 1V Area
SYSTEM OVERLAY SCHEME
If, after the first load-pass, Phase 4 determines
that the core load will not fit into the available storage, and if the mainline is an Assembly-written program, loading is terminated and a message is printed
indicating by how much the core storage capacity has
been exceeded.
If the mainline is a FORTRAN program, Phase 4
initiates a second load-pass. Phase 2 reloads the
mainline program and the class 0 or "in-core" subprograms. If LOCAL subprograms are present,
Phase 5 (routine LT) indicates their presence to
Phase 2 which then loads the Flipper table, the Flipper routine, and the LOCALs. Phase 4 then attempts
to make the core load fit by overlaying the class 1
SOCALs (the arithmetics and functionals), the class
2 SOCALs (FORTRAN I/o, I/O, and I/O conversion
routines) and the class 3 SOCALs (Disk FORTRAN
I/O plus a 320-word buffer). (This third overlay is
made only if Disk FORTRAN I/O is called.)
If Phase 4 finds that the core load can be made
to fit, it actually causes the Loader to create the
overlays described above. otherwise loading is
terminated and an error message printed out.
A special Flipper table is created for SOCALs.
This table, in conjunction with the DISKZ routine,
performs the same function for SOCAL subprogram
references as do the standard Flipper table and Flipper routine for LOCAL sUbprograms. However, this
Flipper table is contained within the DISKZ routine
in the disk I/O area.
The CALL TV does not contain entries for
SOCAL subprograms referenced by CALL statements,
i. e., functionals. The one-word CALL TV entries
are attached to the front of the System over lay in
which the corresponding subprograms appear. Since
the subprograms in overlays 2 (FORTRAN I/O, I/O,
and I/O conversion routines) and 3 (Disk FORTRAN
I/O routines) can be referenced only by LIBF statements, the one-word entries preceding these overlays all cause a return to the SOCAL Flipper to
load the arithmetic/functional overlay.
Suppose a core load (1) contained a FORTRANwritten main -line, (2) required all three System
Overlays to fit into core, and (3) contained references
to FSQR and SIN. Then each overlay would start with
a special CALL TV two words in length, one word for
FSQR and the other for SIN. Any user-written routines referenced by CALL statements would be represented in the normal CALL TV which is found just to
the left of COMMON. The two words of the CALL TV
for System Overlay 1 would contain the actual core
addresses of the entry points
FSQR and SIN. The
two words of the CALL TV for System Overlays 2 and
3 would contain the addresses of the SOCAL flipper
entries for FSQR and SIN. All CALL FSQR/SIN statements would have been replaced with long, indirect
BSI instructions to the address of the corresponding
special CALL TV entry. Thus, at execution time
whenever a CALL FSQR/SIN is encountered, a branch
will be made to either FSQR/SIN or to the SOCAL
flipper. In the latter case the flipper would first
read System Overlay 1 into the overlay area and then
re-execute the branch to FSQR/SIN. In either case
FSQR/SIN would be entered and executed.
Figure 7 shows the CALL TV for the above
example.
Section 2: Supervisor
15
System Overlay 1
Subroutine
FSQR
Subroutine
SIN
((
~ ~
L
1 ""Word TV: XEQ address for SIN
ll-word TV: XEQ address for FSQR
System Overlay 2
FORTRAN I/O, I/O, and
I/O Conversion Routines
---------It
~~----
L
1- word TV: address of the SOCAL
Flipper entry for SIN
l
1- word TV: address of the SOCAL Flipper entry for FSOR
System Overlay 3
FORTRAN Disk I/O and
I/O Buffer
----------I~
10....-..__'__
...
Lsame as System Overlay 2
Figure 7.
16
Fonnat of the CALL 1V for System Overlays
CJ-------'
SECTION 3: DISK UTILITY PROGRAM (DUP)
INTRODUCTION
The Disk Utility Program is designed to accomplish
the following:
•
Automatically allocate disk storage to each program assembled or compiled.
•
Make these programs available in card or paper
tape format.
•
Print out programs and certain other predetermined areas from disk storage.
•
Provide automatically printed records of the
status of the size of the User Area and Work
Storage Area.
•
Provide automatic file protection for all areas
other than Working Storage.
•
•
The principal input/output device routine is called in
to read the next record.
This sequence of events is repeated until the
principal input device reads a Monitor control record,
in which case control is returned to the Supervisor.
The Supervisor now examines the Monitor control
record and acts accordingly.
Figure 8 shows the layout of storage during the
execution of DUP . Chart BA is an overall flowchart
of the DUP functions.
Hardware Area
/ 0028
Communications Area (COMMA)
/ 0090
Skeleton Supervisor
Provide the facility to delete the Assembler
Program and/or FORTRAN, and to specify and
enlarge the Fixed Area of Disk Storage.
Disk I/O Routine
/ 0272
Provide various other disk and core maintenance
operations.
The Disk Utility Program (DUP) is called into operation when the Supervisor recognizes a / / DUP record.
One sector of DUP, DUP Common (DUP CO), is
brought into core storage. DUPCO calls in DUP Control (DCTL). DCTL calls in the principal print device routine (VIPX or TYPX) to print as required.
Following this, DCTL calls in the principal input
device routine (CARDX or PTX) to read the next
record, which should be a DUP control record.
The DUP control record is then printed, decoded,
and checked for accuracy. Switches are set in
DUPCO in accordance with information obtained from
the control record. The required DUP function is
then called from disk, overlaying the core area of
DCTL as required.
When DCTL transfers control to other DUP
functions, LETAR, the buffer used in the LET/FLET
search, contains the sector of LET /FLET last read
from disk storage; i. e., the portion of LET /FLET
containing the entry involved.
Control is turned over to the DUP function which
performs its assigned tasks according to the information that was extracted from the DUP control record.
Upon completion, the function returns to DUPCO,
which calls DCTL back in. DCTL calls in the principal print routine and prints the DUP EXIT message.
/ 00F4
DUP Common (DUPCO)
--
/ 03B4
DUP Control (DCTL)
or
DUP Function required
/ 0828
CARDX/PTX
/OB10
LET AR Buffer
/OC42
VIPX/TYPX
/ OF22
Cord and Print Buffers
/ OFFF
~
Figure 8.
Storage Layout of DUP
Section 3: Disk Utility Program (DUP)
17
DUP FUNCTIONS AND ROUTINES
DUP Common (DUPCO) Routine
Chart: BB
•
•
•
Provides entry for Supervisor to DUP.
Provides common conclusion of all DUP functions.
Provides for the return of the Loader to DUP
after performing a Disk System Format Load.
All DUP disk read/write operations are done
through the multi-sector routine in DUPCO. This
provides a maximum word count of 320 words to the
DISKO routine and keeps supplying word counts until
the original word count requested by the DUP routine
has been transmitted.
NOTE: 10AR Header, used throughout this description of DUP, refers to the two words required to be
in. front of all c'ore areas at the time they are used as
buffers for Disk I/O operations. These two words are
the word count and the sector address respectively.
Figure 9 shows the storage layout of the DUPCO
routine.
•
Provides Disk multi-sector read/write capabilities for DUP.
•
Provides common system check 'WAIT' for DUP.
•
Provides a common call and linkage to a DUP
error message routine (TERRC/PERRC).
SUPDC
•
Provides and initializes switches available for
all of DUP.
REST
•
Initializes the Interrupt Transfer Vector for DUP.
•
Calls in the Store Core Image function of DUP .
•
Provides Interrupt Level routines for DUP I/O
routines.
•
Calls in DUP Control (DCTL).
Entry Points
NYETC
Selects blank record. Exit to RDCTL.
Calling address in NYETC.
Supervisor entry to DUPCO. Supervisor
has read DUPCO to core from disk.
Exit to SEPT.
DUP functions return to this point in
DUPCO after completing required operations. Exit to REST2. Return address
in REST if valid DUP function completed.
IOAR Header
/
0272
/
0274
/
0291
/
02B7
/
02F4
/
032B
/
0336
/
0383
/
03B4
DUPCO Entry Points
DUPCO is a one sector routine that is resident in
core all the time that DUP is in control, except while
the Loader is converting a Disk System format program into Core Image format for DUP.
Switches and routines that are common to many
of the DUP functions are kept available in core at all
times. Because of this, DUP CO provides many entry
points from other DUP functions as well as from the
Supervisor and the Loader.
An initialized DUPCO is read in by the Supervisor when a DUP control record is read and the nonDUP Switch (word 6416) is zero.
A non-initialized DUPCO (DUPCO that is written
to the disk before calling the Loader) is read back in
by the Loader to continue the Store Core Image
function.
If DUPCO is entered with a BSI to REST, REST
is non-zero and an exit message will be printed. If
the entry is a BSC to REST + 1, the message will be
inhibited.
18
DUP Switches
Multi-sector Routine
Initialization
Patch Area
DUP I LS Routines
Patch Area
~
Figure 9.
Storage Layout of DUPCO
REST+l
LDRDC
PUT
GET
SYSCK
SEXIT
Entry point generally from error point
routines whenever a DUP function is not
completed successfully. Printing of the
exit message is inl;1ibited when REST is
left zero. Exit twer limits for Symbol Table
1. ODD8: No listing, one pass mode
2. OD74: No listing, two pass mode
Figure 11.
48
Assembler Storage Layout
OUTPUT FORMAT AND ERROR CODES
Table 2 lists the contents of character positions 1-16
(each character position corresponds to one word in
the I/O buffer) of the I/O buffer. The contents are
inserted during Pass 2 in hexadecimal format. Just
prior to the optional print and/or punch operation,
the buffer contents are converted to the proper
output format for the output devices.
Table 2.
Character positions 18 and 19 of the I/O buffer
are used for error codes. The code for the first
error detected in an erroneous statement is inserted
into position 18. The code for any remaining errors
is inserted into position 19. Note that if three or
more errors are detected within one statement,
only the !irst (in position 18) and the last (in
position 19) are indicated. The error codes are
listed in Table 3.
Format of the I/O Buffer
Statement
Type
I/O Buffer
Position*
I/O Buffer Volue in Hexodecimal
ABS
1-16
Blank.
BSS, BES
1-4
9-12
Location assigned to the label, if any.
Number of reserved words {operand value}.
CALL
1-4
6-7
9-16
Location assigned to the branch instruction built by the Loader.
30 {special relocation code for a CALL}.
Subroutine name in packed EBCDIC form.
DC
1-4
6
9-12
Location assigned to the constant.
Relocation code for the constant {O = absolute, 1 = relocatable}.
Va lue of the constant.
DEC
1-4
6':'7
Location of the left-most word of the constant {always at an even location}.
00 {both words are absolute}.
DSA
1-4
6-7
9-16
Same as CALL.
31 {special relocation code for a DSA}.
Same as CALL.
EBC
1-4
9-12
Location of the left-most word of the operand.
Number of core positions reserved for the operand.
END
1-4
9-12
Next available even location after this program.
Starting address if mainline program.
ENT
1-4
9-12
Location of the entry point.
Name of relative entry point.
EPR
1-16
Blank.
EQU
1-4
16-bit operand value.
EXIT
1-4
6
9-12
Location assigned to the label.
O.
60XX (XX is the address of the EXIT entry point to Skeleton Supervisor; i.e., 6038).
1-16
Blank.
HDNG
All Imperative
Instructions
1-4
6
7
9-12
13-16
Location of the left-most instruction word.
Relocation code for word 1 {always zero}.
Relocation code for word 2 {blank for a short instruction; 0= absolute, 1 = relocatable}.
Machine-language OP code, F and T, and Displacement.
Word 2 of long instructions.
ISS
1-16
Same as ENT.
L1BF
1-4
6-7
8-16
Same as CA LL.
20 (special relocation code for an LlBF).
Same as CALL.
L1BR
1-16
Blank.
LINK
1-4
6-7
9-13
Location assigned to label, if any.
00.
Same as CALL.
ORG
1-4
Location assigned to the label, ifany.
SPR
1-16
Blank.
XFLC
1-6
6-7
9-16
Location of the left-most mantissa word.
Value of the exponent.
Volue of the mantissa.
*Buffer positions correspond directly with card columns in the List Deck.
Unlisted positions are always blank.
Section 4: Assembler Program
49
Table 3.
Assembler Error Ccx:les
Error Code
Error Procedure
A
Address Error
An attempt has been made to specify a displacement,
directly or indirectly, outside the range +127 to -128
The displacement is set to zero.
c
Cond i tion Code Error
A character other than +, -, Z, E, C, or 0 (Alpha)
has been encountered in a condition operand.
The displacement is set to zero.
F
Format Error
A character other than a blank, X, L, or I has been
used in the format field or an L or I format has been
specified for an OP code valid in short form only.
The instruction is processed as a long instruction if the
instruction is valid in the long form. Otherwise, it is
processed as though an X format code had been specified.
L
Label Error
An invalid symbol has been used as a label.
The label is ignored.
M
Multiply-defined Symbol Error
More than one statement has the same symbol in the
label field.
The first occurrence of the symbol defines the value in
the Symbol Table. Subsequent occurrences of the same
symbol are ignored. Note: this error wi II appear in
statement referencing the multiply-defined symbol.
o
OP Code Error
The mnemonic OP code is not in the OP code table.
Header type statements are incorrectly positioned in the
source program.
The Location Assignment Counter is incremented by two.
The statement is treated as comments (except for the
error code).
R
Re location Error
The operand is neither absolute nor relocatable, or two
relocatable operand elements are multiplied by each
other.
u
so
Error Description
The effective operand value is set to zero.
The operand is absolute in a relocatable assembly
when the displacement had to be modified or the
operand is relocatable when the displacement did not
require modification.
The displacement is set to zero.
The operand of an ENT or ISS statement is absolute.
The effective operand value is set to zero.
The operand of an ORG statement is absolute in a
relocatable assembly.
The operand value is ignored.
The operand of a BSS or BES statement is relocatable.
The effective operand value is set to zero.
Syntax Error
Illegal syntax in the operand field (e.g. invalid symbols, adjacent operators, illegal characters in an
integer, no I before character va lues) •
The affected operand is given a value of absolute zero.
Mainline program entry point not specified in an END
statement of a mainline program.
Posi tions 9-12 of the I/O buffer are left blank.
Incorrect syntax in a DEC or XFLC operand (e.g. Illegal
character, loss of high order bits, exponent overflow).
Constant set to
Tag Error
The Tag field in an instruction contains a character
other than a blank, 0,1,2, or 3.
The Tag field is set to zero and the statement is processed as though the Tag field were zero.
Undefined Symbol Error
An Undefined symbol is found in an operand.
The affected expression is given the value of absolute
zero.
a or 0.0.
T ABLES AND BUFFERS
Operation Code Table (BEGOP)
The operation code table contains three words for
each mnemonic entry The first two words of each
entry contain the four characters of the op code
(packed 2 EBCDIC characters per word). The third
word contains the binary machine-language op code
and information used by the routine that processes
the particular op code. The format of the third
word is as follows.
r
1:~:~1~15Iil'71819110'1lll'~;;'il5l
cates
L1BF statement
Ones indicate
CALL statement
One indicates
displacement
must be
modified by
Location Assignment
Counter
routine
One indicates
valid in
short
form
only
One indicates
displacement
must not be
modified by
Location Assignment
Counter
Modification bits for
shift instructions
The statement-processing routine code (bits 1215) is used to branch to a branch table at the beginning of each instruction-processing overlay. If the
overlay required for this instruction is in core, the
branch table will branch to the specific routine.
Otherwise the branch is to the mainline to set-up
the read of the required overlay. See Figure 11.
Instruction Buffer (INSBF)
The instruction buffer is a one-word work area used
when instructions are being formed. It contains only
the first word of long instructions. Initially, it is
loaded with the op code (bits 0-4) and the modification
bits (bits 8-9) for shift instructions (derived from the
third word of the op code table). As the instruction
is being processed,the format, tag, indirect addressing, and displacement bits are inserted.
At the end of the DISP routine, the contents of the
instruction buffer are saved in the one-sector DSF output buffer and then are converted to four EBCDIC characters (four bits per character) and stored in pOSitions
9-12 of the I/O buffer.
Location Assignment Counter
The Location Assignment Counter (named address
counter in the listings; symbolic:ADCOW) is a oneword counter used to assign sequential storage
addresses to the program statements. It always
contains the next available address.
The counter is initially set to zero and is set
differently or incremented according to the statement type as shown in Table 4.
Secondary Location ASSignment Counter
The secondary Location ASSignment Counter (ADCW2)
is used to detect breaks in sequence in Disk System
Format output. It is incremented by one in the DFOUT
subroutine for every data word entered in the output
buffer (except the first word of an LIBF entry point
name) .
Table 4.
Location Assignment COlUlter
Statement
Type
Effect
~----------r---------------------------------------
ABS
Set to the lowest loadable core address.
(Address obtained from the symbolic location
LDRND.)
BSS, BES
Incremented by the value of the operand.
(If E-format and the counter is odd, increment
one more.)
DC, LlBF
Incremented by one.
DEC
Incremented by two. (If the Location Assignment Counter is odd, increment one more.)
DSA,XFLC
Incremented by three.
EBC
Incremented by one-half the number of operand
characters. (An odd character count is incremented by one before the count is halved.)
END
Incremented by one if the Location Assignment
Counter is odd.
LINK
Incremen ted by four.
ORG
Set to the va lue of the operand.
EXIT
Incremented by one.
Invalid
OP Code
Incremented by two.
Machine
Instruction
Statements
Short
Long or
Indirect
Incremented by one.
Incremented by two.
Symbol Table
The Symbol Table is a table containing the source
statement labels and their assigned values. There
are also bit positions to indicate that the label is
relocatable or multiply-defined.
All symbols defined in the program are entered
in the Symbol Table. Symbols that appear in the
label field of Assembler instructions which do not
use labels (for example, ABS, END, ENT) are not
entered.
Section 4: Assembler Program
51
The Symbol Table begins at the high address end
of core and extends toward one of three lower limits
(see Figure 11):
1.
2.
3.
The end of the print routine when LIST option selected. The Console Printer and 1132 Printer
routines are not the same length, but the lower
limit will be adjusted for the print routine loaded
at assembly time.
The end of Phase 11 when LIST option is not
selected. The Symbol Table is allowed to
overlay the print routine.
The end of Phase 10 when LIST option is not
selected and there is no intermediate I/O (two
pass mode).
Symbols are added to the Symbol Table in alphanumeric order with higher values (Z9999) toward the
lower address end. If the lower limit is reached, a
one-sector buffer is written on the disk to allow more
symbols to be added. This buffer is at the low address
end of the table. Each overflow sector is therefore
ordered; however, there is no ordering between overflow sectors. There may be up to 32 overflow sectors.
Symbol Table Size (Approximate)
Size of Core
(Words)
LIST
No LIST
1 PASS
No LIST
2 PASS
4096
8192
111
1476
184
1549
217
1582
Max., with
Maximum
Overflow
3609
4974
Each entry in the Symbol Table requires three
words. The format of a Symbol Table entry is:
Word 1
o 12
15 0
1
15
1
, ,
T
T
Label (packed EBCDIC
5 char. max.)
Value
Re locatiion bi t
Mu Itipl)'-defined bit
52
15 0
Card Code Input Conversion Table
Conversion from IBM Card Code to EBCDIC is done
by table lookup. The conversion table contains two
EBCDIC characters per word with all 256 characters
represented. The leftmost eight bits of each word
represent the card code characters that can be
formed with 12 through 8 punches; the right-most
eight bits of each table word represent the card
code characters that can be formed with 12 through 9
punches. Thus, if the input character contains a 9
punch, the right half of a conversion table word will
be used. Conversely, if the input character does
not contain a 9 punch, the left half of a conversion
table word will be used. (In searching for the
proper word, the 12-8 punches are used to decide
which word; the 9 punch is used to determine which
half of the chosen word.) (See TLU subroutine
description. )
Paper Tape Input Conversion Table
Word 3
Word 2
During Pass 1, labels are entered into the
Symbol Table by the Symbol Table Add Routine
(ST ADD). As each label is processed, the partially
built Symbol Table is searched to determine if the
label has been previously defined. If it has been
previously defined, the multiply-defined bit (of the
first entry) is set, and the label is not entered.
If the label has not been previously defined, it
is entered along with the current value of the label
value buffer.
If the program is being assembled in relocatable
mode (no ABS statement), the relocation bit is set
for each relocatable label. (See Relocatability. )
The Symbol Table is used during Pass 2 when
evaluating an operand containing symbols. The
symbol in the operand field is given the value of the
symbol in the Symbol Table. If the multiply-defined
bit was set, an M (multiply-defined error code) is
entered in the I/O buffer.
1
The conversion of paper tape input to EBCDIC is
performed by table lookup. The input character
is used as the argument to perform a table search
for the equivalent EBCDIC character.
The conversion table contains only valid
PTTC/8 characters (73 total) and the EBCDIC
equivalent. Bits 0-7 of each table word contain
the EBCDIC character code and bits 8-15 contain
the equivalent PTTC/8 character code.
PHASE DESCRIPTIONS
The generalized logic flow of the Assembler is shown
in Chart BL. The labels beside the chart symbols
correspond to the labels used in the program listings.
The following phase descriptions are divided into
the routines represented in Chart BL. Subroutines
are described with the phase in which they reside.
When tne Supervisor encounters a ASM Monitor
control record, Phase 0 of the Assembler is read into
core storage and control is transferred to it. Phase
o sets up the lTV for the principal printer and I/O
device and reads in the ISS subroutines for these
devices. It also initializes the Symbol Table limits,
initializes the heading sector on CIB, makes sure
there are 33 sectors of Working Storage available,
reads in Phase 9, and reads in Phase 1, which overlays part of Phase O.
Phase 0 also contains a level 4ILS subroutine,
a routine that is used with the DISKO· subroutine to
enable it accomodate word counts exceeding 320,
and a flipper routine that uses the disk routine to
read in overlay phases. These routines remain in
core throughout the assembly.
Phase 1 reads and processes control records,
sets switches for each control record specified, and
executes a branch to the print routine to print each
control record. When the first non-control record
is encountered, Phase lA is read in, overlaying
Phase 1. Phase lA modifies the I/O area if paper
tape input is used, and during Pass 1 determines the
lower limit of the Symbol Table on a basis of the
options specified by the control records. Phase 2
is then read in, overlaying Phase lA. Phase 2
processes ABS, ENT, ISS, ILS, LIBR, EPR, SPR,
and HDNG statements. When any other type of
statement is encountered, Phase 6 is read in, and
a branch to Phase 9 is executed.
Phase 3 is used to save the Symbol Table
(optional) and to print and/or punch the Symbol Table
(optional) . It is read in from the disk at the end of
the Pass 2 processing of the END statement. Upon
conclusion of Phase 3, FLIPR is set up to read
Phase 4 from the disk.
Phase 4 is used to print the closing message of
the number of errors in the assembly and to move
the object program output back 4 cylinders (to the
beginning of Working Storage). This phase is read
from the disk at the end of Phase 3 and returns to
the Monitor entry point in the Skeleton Supervisor
when completed.
Phase 5 processes ORG, EQU, HDNG, BSS, and
BES statements. It also contains the subroutine used
to print the heading at the top of each new page of the
listing. The phase is always in core as a result of
one of the above statement types, except when
brought in as a result of a Channel 12 condition
on the 1132 Printer.
Phase 6 processes all imperative instructions
(hardware mnemonic op codes) and the DC statement.
The phase is always in core as a result of an imperative instruction or a DC statement.
Phase 7 processes DEC and XFLC statements.
The phase is always in core as a result of encountering a DEC or XFLC constant.
Phase 8 processes CALL, LIBF, DSA, LINK,
EXIT, and EBC statements. The phase is always
in core if one of the above statements is encountered.
Phas e 9 checks the mnemonic op code for all
statements except ABS, ENT, ISS, ILS, LIBR, EPR,
and SPR statements, and executes a branch to the
branch table contained in each statement processing
phase. If the required phase is in core, the statement is processed. If the required phase is not in
core, it is read in, and the statement is processed.
Phase 9 also contains subroutines that are common
to all phases of the Assembler.
Phase 10 consists of two subroutines used during
Pass 2 to control the generation of the Disk System
Format output. This phase is an overlay which is
read over the Symbol Table Add portion of Phase 9
during Pass 1 of the END statement processing.
Phase 11 contains a subroutine that is used to
read the source statements from the disk during
Pass 2 if the assembly is in one pass mode. It is
read in when the END statement is processed during
Pass 1 and overlays the subroutine used to save the
source statements on the disk during Pass 1.
Phase 12 is brought into core when the END
statement is encountered. This Phase is used in
Pass 1 to build the program header record, read
in Phase 10 to replace the STADD section of Phase 9,
and read in Phase 11 to replace a section of Phase 9
(one pass mode only), and then overlay with Phase 1
after the first record for Pass 2 is in the I/O buffer.
In Pass 2, Phase 12 reads in Phase 12A to process
the END statement, finishes the DSF output, and
then Phase 12A is overlaid.
Phase 0 (Initialization Phase)
Chart: BM, BN
•
Contains the non-overlay routines, ILS04, DISKl,
and FLIPR.
•
Reads in non-overlay phase (Phase 9).
•
Reads in ISS subroutines for the principal
printer and I/O device.
Section 4: Assembler Program
53
•
•
Initializes: lTV, Symbol Table Limits, and the
listing page heading on the first sector of the
CIB.
Checks Working Storage available on disk.
Overlay Section of Phase 0
STRTO: Start of Phase 0 execution. Also corresponds to the loading address of all instructionprocessing phases.
Non-Overlay Section of Phase 0
1.
ILS04: Interrupt level subroutine for level 4. This
subro~tine senses the interrupt level status work
(ILSW) for level 4 to determine which device on this
level is responding. When this is determined, a BSI
instruction is executed to the interrupt service entry
point in the ISS subroutine for the device. When the
ISS subroutine returns to ILS04, the interrupt is
reset and the routine returns control to the mainline
program.
2.
DISK1: Multiple sector read/write subroutine. This
routine is used with DISKO to read and write more than
320 words at a time. The two words preceding the
I/O area are saved and 320 is subtracted from the
word count. If the word count is greater than 320,
320 is used as word count and a read or write of one
sector is performed. If the word count is less than
320, the specified amount is used and the read or
write operation is executed. When the disk operation
is completed, the two previously saved words are
restored. If the last word count was not less than
320, the subroutine sector address is incremented
by 1, the next two words are saved, and a read or
write function is executed. This process is repeated
until the word count indicates that all data has been
read or written.
7.
3.
5.
6.
8.
Save the settings of non-XEQ and non-DUP
switches and set them on temporarily.
Set up interrupt level addresses for levels
0, 2, and 4 (words 8, 9, and 12 of the lTV).
Use the DISK1 routine to read in Phase 9.
Use the DISK1 routine to read in the ISS subroutine for the principal printer and the principal
I/O device.
Set the HIEND and LOEND of the Symbol Table.
Use the DISK1 routine to write a listing page
heading containing EBCDIC blanks on the first
sector of the CIB.
Make sure there are at least 33 sectors of
Working Storage available.
Read in Phase 1 overlaying Phase O.
LSS33: Less than 33 sectors of Working Storage.
Branches to print an error message (A 01) and
returns control to the Supervisor.
Phase 1 (Control Records)
Chart: BO
•
•
Reads a source record.
•
Sets switches for speCified options.
•
Prints control record read.
•
Overlays Phase 1 with Phase 1A.
Processes Control Records.
DSKER: Disk error exit.
----
TV3 (Pseudo-transfer Vector Entry): Replaces the
need for an LIBF statement. Branches to the standard entrance in the Print subroutine.
Operation
FLIPR (Overlay Flipper): Uses DISKl to read in
overlay phases. The sector address and word count
are set up before entering FLIPR.
BRBCK (Branch Back): A long branch that is modified to branch to the correct location in the branch
table of an overlay phase.
OVRLY (Overlay): Contains the word count and
sector-addresso{ the overlay phase now in core or
to be read into core.
54
Phase 1 reads in and processes control records; the
data on each control record is compared with data
stored in core. When the data in the control record
matches the string of data in core, a switch is set
indicating the options specified. When a non -control
record is encountered, Phase 1A is read in overlaying Phase 1.
SlA: Entry Point for Phase 1: Uses the read card
(RDCRD) subroutine to read one card or paper tape
record. If the record is not a control record, go
to ENDCC. XR1 is set to the first word of the input
record. XR2 is set to the number of words in the
string in core containing a control record. XR3 is
set to the address of the first word of the string
in core.
CKBLN (Check Blank): Check the input record
(character by character) for blanks. If all 70 characters are blank, go to NXSTR. When a non -blank
character is found, go to PSTBL.
PSTBL (Past Blank): Compare the input character
with the character in the string stored in core. If
they do not match, go to NXSTR. If they match,
return to CKBLN to process the next character.
If all characters in the input record match the characters in the string in core and a blank follows the
last character, go to the routine servicing the record
type. If the input record does not match any string
in core or if the character following a matching
record is not blank, go to NOCTL.
NXSTR (N ext String): Update counters and index
registers to scan the next string. If the input record
has been checked with each string and no matching
string is found, go to NOCTL.
of numeric information and then use the SCAN
routine to evaluate the number of sectors or the
interrupt level number contained in the control
record. The value will be returned in the accumulator. Any error will cause an exit to NOCTL.
PRTST (Print Symbol Table): Sets bit 0 in STOPT
(Symbol Table option) switch when a PRINT SYMBOL
T ABLE control record is processed.
LIST: Set bit 0 in LSTOP (list option) switch when
a LIST control record is processed.
PCHST (Punch Symbol Table): Sets bit 15 in STOPT
switch when a PUNCH SYMBOL TABLE control
record is processed.
TWOPS (Two Pass Mode): Sets PSMDE (Pass Mode)
switch to zero when a TWO PASS MODE control
record is processed.
LSTDK (List Deck): Sets bit 0 in LDKOP (List Deck
option) when a LIST DECK control record is
processed.
EDIT: Sets bit 15 in LDKOP when a LIST DECK E
control card is processed.
INTCC: Initializes to scan all strings. This is done
after one control record has been completed and
before the next record is read.
SAVST (Save Symbol Table): Sets SAVSW (Save
Symbol Table) switch on (non-zero) when a SAVE
SYMBOL TABLE control record is encountered.
COMN1: Go to CLCTN to compute size of COMMON.
Save the size of COMMON in SCOMN and go to
CCCOM.
SYSTB (System Symbol Table): Reads the System
Symbol Table into the Symbol Table area. The
System Symbol Table resides in the Assembler area
on the disk. The first word will be a count of the
symbols in the System Symbol Table. This will be
used to initialize the symbol count (CTSYM) and
position the lower limit of the Symbol Table
(LOEND).
DEFINE (Define File Size): Set FILSW indicating a
FILE control record. Go to C LC TN to obtain the
number of sectors required by the program at object
time. Store the number of sectors at FILSZ (File
Size) . Increment ADCOW by 7. Note that when
*FILE is used, the first data word that would normally
have been assigned to relocatable address zero will
now be assigned to relocatable address seven.
INTLV (Interrupt Level): Go to CLCTN to obtain the
interrupt level number. Save the interrupt level
number and decrement the interrupt level count by 1.
CLCTN: Used by DFINE, COMN1, and INTLV to
obtain numeric information from control records.
Sets up the SCAN routine to allow only the processing
CCCOM (Current Control Record Common): Use the
principal printer to print the control record and go
to INTCC to initialize for the next control record.
NOCTL (NOT Control Record): Insert ID into the
input buffer before listing the control record. This
record has an * in the first position indicating a
control record, but was not recognizable or was an
illegal Level or File record.
ENDCC (End Control Record): Read in Phase 1A.
Section 4: Assembler Program
55
Phase 1A
Chart:
BP
•
Move record right 20 positions if input is from
paper tape.
•
Initialize the Symbol Table limits according to
the options specified.
•
Read in Phase 2.
The current record is not a control record. Restore
SCAN and go to CRDIO if input is from cards. If the
input is from paper tape, move the current record
over 20 positions and set the read-in address for
position 21 of the I/O area.
CRDIO (Card I/O): If Pass 2, go to FTCH2; otherwise initialize for Symbol Table overflow. Compute
the End of Symbol Table address (ENDST) on a basis
of the options specified by the control records. Set
up a word count of 320 and a sector address of 0
(relative to start of Working Storage) at ENDST-2
and ENDST-1 respectively. Go to FTCH2.
FTCH2 (Fetch Phase 2): Use the DISK1 routine to
read in Phase 2 overlaying Phase 1.
Phase 2 (Header Statement Processing)
Chart: BQ
•
Process ABS, ENT, ISS, ILS, EPR, SPR, LIBR,
statements.
•
Initiate reading of Phase 5.
•
Initiate reading of Phase 6.
•
Transfer control to Phase 9.
This routine is entered at STRT2 when entered from
Phase 1A.
8TRT~:
Initialize ENTCT to allow 14 entry points.
If Save Symbol Table option is in effect, set reloca-
tion mode (RLMDE) to 0 for absolute and allow only
ABS and HDNG in Program Header group.
82000: Bypass a comment record (* in postion 21).
S2003: Pack and save op code. Look up op code in
small op code table. If op code not in table, go to
SZOUT.
S6
OPVC2: Transfer Vector DC Table for Program
Header group. Sections of code for a particular op
code are reached by an indexed, indirect branch,
where an entry in the table becomes the effective
address of the branch.
TB2ST: Beginning of small op code table. Includes
following mnemonics: ABS, ENT, LIBR, ISS, EPR,
SPR, and ILS.
ENTl: ENT processing. Assembly relocation
mode must be relocatable.
S2006: Op code error code entered in buffer. This
error will occur if mutually exclusive op codes of the
Program Header group are in the same source program, 1. e., ABS and ENT.
S2008: ENT must not be preceded by ISS or ILS.
Up to 14 ENTs allowed. Each ENT increases word
6 of the Program Header (Length of Header -9) by
three. In Pass 2, S2100 is used to collect the entry
point name and to look up the address of the entry
point.
ISSl: ISS processing. The relocation mode of the
assembly must be relocatable. An ISS cannot be
preceded by an ENT, ILS, or another ISS. Set up
SCAN to allow only numeric operand. SCAN is then
used to evaluate the ISS number in positions 32-33
of the ISS record. If Pass 2, S2100 is used to set up
scan for symbolic operand and collect entry point
and evaluate its address.
LIBRl: LIBR processing. Assembly relocation
mode must be relocatable. LIBR not permitted if
no entry point in source program (ENT, ILS, or ISS).
ABSl: ABS processing. Must not be preceded by
LIBR, ENT, ILS, or ISS. RLMDE (Relocation mode)
is set to 0 for absolute assembly, and the primary
(ADCOW) location counter and secondary (ADCW2)
location assignment counter are set equal to ADCNI
(Resident Supervisor with DISKN).
ILS1: ILS processing. The relocation mode of the
assembly must be relocatable. Only one ILS
statement is permitted and it must not be preceded
by an ENT or ISS statement. The interrupt level
(positions 32 and 33 of the I/O buffer) is stored in
ISSNO until the program header is constructed in
Phase 12.
EPR1: EPR processing. Must not be preceded
by SPR.
SPR1: SPR processing. Must not be preceded
by DPR.
S2100: Subroutine used by ENT and ISS during
Pass 2 to collect entry point name and evaluate its
address. Since the pass mode (PSMDE) determines
the object output buffer, S2100 will store the entry
point name and address in the program header in
DFBUF or BUFI for one pass mode or two pass
mode, respectively. The name and address of the
first entry point will also be stored in COMMA.
HDNGA: The HDNG op code is permitted anywhere
in the source program. When Phase 2 is in core,
Phase 5 must be read in to process the HDNG
statement and then Phase 2 is restored. Further
Phase 2 type op codes may then still be processed.
S20m: Phase 2 exit. Set up FLIPR to unconditionally read in Phase 6 and transfer to BGASM in Phase
9 to process the current source statement.
Phase 3
Chart: BR
•
S3A2: Save the relative sector address of the disk
sector of DSF output, and save the relocation mode
of the assembly. If any condition causes an inhibit
of the Symbol Table save (STPSV non-zero), use
GETER to read the error print routine from Disk,
and print error message (A 04).
S3A3: Go to S30UT if no symbols in Symbol Table
(CTSYM = 0). Move the Symbol Table that may reside
in the area of the principal print routine and in Phase
11 to Phase 9.
LIPH 3: Loop to make move described above. Set up
the word count and sector address to read the principal I/O routine and the principal print routine from
the disk. Go to RSTIO if print routine already in core
(LIST option selected); otherwise, read principal
print routine.
RSTIO: Read principal I/O routine. Use the PLNIO
routine to blank the I/O buffer. If no Symbol Table
output (print or punch), go to S30m. Go to NOPRT
if PUNCH SYMBOL TABLE only. Use RPAGE to
restore the page (printer), and then print a blank line
(space). Move the words 'SYMBOL TABLE' to the
I/O buffer (centered), and print. Print a blank line
to provide a space after the title.
Save the Symbol Table (optional).
•
Print the Symbol Table (optional).
•
Punch the Symbol Table (optional).
•
Set up FLIPR to read in Phase 4.
S3A: Phase 3 begins at this address. If the SAVE
SYMBOL TABLE option was not selected, the
Assembler branches to S3A2. If there were any
assembly errors (ERCNT non-zero), the Symbol
Table cannot be saved. If the number of entries in
the Symbol Table exceeds the count contained in the
constant at D100, the Symbol Table cannot be saved
(STPSV set non-zero).
SV1: Set up the word count and sector address to
Insert the symbol count
(CTSYM) as the first data word of the System
Symbol Table (next word after the sector address).
Temporarily set the file protect address to zero to
allow the System Symbol Table to be written in the
Assembler area on disk.
save the Symbol Table.
BLNIO: Subroutine to move eighty blanks into the
I/O buffer.
NOPRT: Common point for print and punch. Start
output of table at the high -core end..
L4: Use SUDMP to print and/or punch a record of
five symbols. If the output is complete, go to
S30m; if the output address (PARA 1) has gone
below the low-end address of the table (LOEND), go
to DOSTO. If the output address is within 14 words
of the breakpoint address caused when part of the
Symbol Table was moved to Phase 9, the discontj ".uity
must be corrected. If it is not within 14 words, go
back to L4. In correcting the discontinuity caused
by the move, the LOEND value will have to be changed
to the address in Phase 9 of the last in -core symbol.
The number of words in the discontinuity (one to
fourteen) are moven to adjoin to the table moved to
Phase 9. The table output now continues from the
part of the table that is now in the Phase 9 area.
L5:
Use SUDMP to output a record of five symbols.
If there are any overflow sectors, go to L5A; if
WRTST: Write the System Symbol Table and then
restore the file protect address.
there are no more symbols, go to S30m; otherwise, go back to L5.
Section 4: Assembler Program
57
L5A: If the output address (PARA1) has gone below
the value of LO END, go to DOSTO. Go back to L 5
if another complete record of five symbols can be
outputted. Otherwise, set the temporary symbol
count (TCONT) for the exact number of symbols
left in the in-core table. SUDMP will then cause a
record of fewer than five symbols to be outputted.
Set LOEND to a large value before returning to L5.
This will cause the test at L5A to go to DOSTO.
SUDMP: Subroutine to set up the conversion routine
called DUMP, and to print and/or punch the record.
If the punch option has been selected, go to S3PCH
to read '(if card). If printing the Symbol Table and
the principal printing device is the 1132, restore
page if printer on channel 12.
S3065: Set-up DUMP to output five symbols if more
than five to go. Otherwise, set-up DUMP to do the
exact number left. Use DUMP to convert to output
format from symbol format.
S3TPR: Print output record and go to S3PC2 to
punch the record if this option is also selected.
S3PC2: Punch the output record. Branch here for
punch only, or after print if print and punch.
DOSTO: Output overflow sectors of table. Set
TCONT equal to 106 for each sector of overflow.
L8: Read overflow sector.
L9: Use SUDMP to output a record of five. First
time through the output address (PARA1) is at highcore end of overflow sector. If the sector is completed, decrement the overflow sector count
(OFCNT) by one, and go to S3040 if overflow sectors
remain. If sector is not complete, return to L9 to
continue. When overflow sectors are completed,
go to S30UT.
S3040: Set-up for next overflow sector, and return
to L8. Note that each overflow sector consisting of
106 symbols is outputted as 21 records of five symbols and one record of one symbol.
DUMP: Subroutine to convert from name code to
EBCDIC. An M is inserted in front of each symbol
that is multiply-defined, and an A is inserted in
front of a symbol whose value is absolute in a relocatable assembly.
NOTE: The characters mentioned should not be
considered to be Error Flag Indicators (see Table 3).
58
Phase 4
Chart:
BS
•
Print the number of errors in the assembly.
•
Move the Disk System format output to the
beginning of Working Storage.
•
Return control to the Supervisor.
S4A: Start of Phase 4.
SPCE4: Space printer (or typewriter). Go to
ERMSG if no assembly errors, and go to ONER if
only one assembly error. Use routine starting at
BC 06 to convert the error count from binary to a
sign and five decimal positions starting at OUTP4.
S4110: Move decimal error count into the output
message string (MSG4).
ERMSG: Move error message into I/O buffer. When
there are no assembly errors, the word 'NO' is used
instead of an error count. Print message and go to
S4A2.
ONER: Replace the S in 'ERRORS' by a blank, and
move an EBCDIC one (1) into the error count position
of the message. Go to ERMSG.
S4A2: Move the DSF output down four cylinders to
the beginning of Working Storage. The number of
sectors moved is rounded to the nearest number of
half-cylinders of DSF output, since the move takes
place by half-cylinders.
READD: Loop to read in one sector of DSF output
from its sector position during the assembly, and
then write it with its sector address reduced by 32
(four cylinders). When all sectors of DSF output
have been moved in this fashion, the non-XEQ
switch and the non-DUP switches are restored from
TXQSW and TDPSW respectively. These two temporary values reflect the effect of assembly errors (if
any) before returning to the Skeleton Supervisor.
Phase 5
Chart: BT, BU
•
Processes OR, EQU, HDNG, BSS, and BES
statements.
a.
b.
c.
•
Sets the Location Assignment Counter equal
to the operand value of an ORG statement.
Assigns the value of the operand to the label
of an EQU statement.
Reserves a number of words in core equal
to the operand value for a BSS or BES
statement.
Prints the heading when a channel 12 indicator
is sensed.
ORGA: Branch table causes ORG processing to
begin here. The SCAN routine is used to evaluate
the operand, and then the ORGBS subroutine (common
to ORG and BSS) is set-up for an ORG entry. ORGBS
will under certain conditions insert an error code in
position 18 of the I/O buffer. If error M (multiple
definition), simply use first value to change the
Location Assignment Counter. If any other error,
ORG has no effect on the Location Assignment
Counter.
ORGER: Use LDLBL routine to load label in Pass 1
(if any). The label of an ORG will have the value of
the Location Assignment Counter before the ORG
changed it. In Pass 2, the output options will be
performed by going to LDLBL. Return to BGASM
in Phase 9 to process the next statement.
BSSA: Branch table starts BSS (or BES) processing
here. The label value (LABVL) is made even if odd
when an E is present in position 32.
NALGN: The SCAN routine is used to evaluate the
operand, and the ORGBS subroutine is set-up for a
BSS entry. The value of the operand (number of
words reserved by BSS or BES) is added to the label
value and the sum is stored in the Location Assignment Counter. If BES statement (OPCNT --third
word of op code table entry), the label value is set equal
to the new value of the Location Assignment Counter
(last reserved word plus one). The number of words
reserved (Hex) is inserted into positions 9 -12 of the
I/O buffer. Exit at ORGER.
ORGBS: Common subroutine for BSS and ORG processing. If no error as a result of the operand scan,
go to NOER. If error is present in Pass 2, go to
ER2, otherwise use ERADD to enter the internal
statement number (INTSN) in the 25 word error
table (ERTBL).
ER2: If assembly is absolute, go to NOER2. In a
relocatable assembly, an ORG operand must be
relocatable, and a BSS operand must be absolute.
AB: Modified instruction. Conditional BSC tests for
the condition tested in ER2. The condition codes are
modified by ORG or BSS processing. Conditions are
plus and minus for ORG (branch on condition zero)
and zero for BSS (branch on condition non -zero) . If
operand relocation is valid, go to NOER2; otherwise
insert an R (relocation error) in the I/O buffer and
set the operand value to zero.
NOER: If Pass 1, go to ER2. In Pass 2 use ERSCH
to determine if the internal statement number for this
statement was added to ERTBL in Pass 1. If it was,
insert a U (undefined error) in the I/O buffer.
NOER2:
ORGBS exit.
EQUA: Branch table starts EQU processing here.
Use SCAN to evaluate operand and store the value
returned in the label value word (LABVL). If Pass 2,
go to EQU2. If operand contained an undefined symbol, go to EQUER.
EQLBL: Save relocation value returned from SCAN
in label relocation word (LABRL).
EQUER: Use ERADD to enter the internal statement
for this statement in the error table.
EQU2: Use ERSCH to determine if the internal
statement for this statement was added to the error
table in Pass 1. If it was, insert U (undefined error)
in the I/O buffer, and set the label value equal to
zero.
EQUXT: Use LDLBL to enter label in Symbol Table
or to do output options. Return to BGASM in Phase 9
to process next statement.
ERADD: Since any symbol in the operand of an ORG,
BSS, BES, or EQU statement must be previously
defined, a table is built during Pass 1, containing the
internal statement numbers of the above statements
whose operands were undefined. This table, known
as ERTBL is 25 words long, and the address of the
last entry is known as ERPTR.
ERSCH: This subroutine is used to search ERTBL.
If the internal statement number is found in the table,
a switch known as ERSW is set non-zero.
HD5: The GTHDG routine in Phase 9 reads Phase 5
into core and transfers to this label. An entry is
made into the print routine at RPAGE to restore the
page on the printer (dummy entry if print routine is
for Console Printer). When the page restore is
Section 4: Assembler Program
59
finished, the heading is read into the print area
(PAREA) from the first sector of the CIB.
L 1: The binary page count (PGCNT) is converted to
decimal and stored in positions 78-80 of the print
buffer. Leading zeros in the page number are
suppressed.
OUTVP: Increment the page count by one. Sct up
the print routine pseudo-transfer vector (TV3) to
enter the print routine beyond the section which
moves the I/O buffer to the print buffer. Print the
heading line. Restore the pseudo-transfe:r vector for
normal entry, and clear the page restore switch
(EJECT). Restore the phase which was in core
before GTHDG read in Phase 5. Return to GTHXT
in Phase 9 to exit GTHDG routine.
HDNG5: If Pass 2, and LIST option selected, the
HDNG statement is processed. The HDNG statement
is punched (optional), and then the HDNG operand is
centered, and written on the first sector of the CIB.
If typewriter is print device, the heading line is
typed, preceded, and followed by a line feed. If the
1132 is the print device, GTHDG is used to perform
the new page routine. If HDNG5 entry is from
Phase 2, Phase 2 is restored.
.
Phase 6
--Chart:
•
SINST: If Pass 2, go to SI2ND; otherwise increment
Location Assignment Counter by one and go to INSXT.
SI2ND: Save the Location Assignment Counter
(TTEMP plus 2), because it must be incremented
before going to SCAN and then restored before going
to DFOUT. The Location Assignment Counter is then
incremented by one (points to next instruction).
DISP: If instruction uses special operand (condition
codes), go to SPOND. Use SCAN to evaluate operand.
If format is non -blank, go to NOMOD (no modification).
If op code is STX, go to MOD (displacement modification). If instruction is LDX, LDS, any shift instruction, or WAIT, go to NOMOD. For any other
instruction, the tag bits are checked, and if they are
zero, the Assembler branches to NOMOD.
MOD = Displacement modification. The value of the
Location Assignment Counter is subtracted from the
value of the operand and relocation value is made
absolute.
BV, BW
Processes DC statements and all imperative
instruction statements.
a. Converts the operand of a DC statement to
its binary value.
b. Builds machine-language instructions for
all imperative instruction statements.
INST A: Branch table starts imperative instruction
processing here. The five-bit op code obtained
from the op code table is saved in the instruction
buffer (INSBF). The tag position (33) is examined,
and if it is blank, a branch is made to INST2. A
non-blank tag is tested for validity. If it is not a
0, 1, 2, or 3, a T (tag error) is inserted in the
I/O buffer. The tag bits, 6-7, are inserted in
INSBF (zero if tag error).
INST2: The format position (32) is examined, and
if it is blank or X a branch is made to SINST. If
the long form of this instruction is not valid (controlled by third word of op code entry), go to FC ER
to insert F (format error) in I/O buffer and process
60
as a short instruction. If format is I, go to IINST to
process an indirect instruction, and if format is L,
go to LINST to process a long instruction. Any other
format is an error, but since instruction is valid in
the long form, after error is inserted in the I/O
buffer, Assembler branches to LINST to process as
a long instruction.
NOMOD: No displacement modification. The displacement must be absolute or an R is inserted in
the I/O buffer and the displacement is set equal to
zero. The displacement must be in the range of
minus 128 to plus 127 or an A (addressing error) is
inserted in the I/O buffer and the displacement is
set equal to zero.
INST3: The displacement is inserted in INSBF, and
the Location Assignment Counter is restored from
ITEMP plus 2. A zero (relocation code for the first
word of a long instruction, or the code for a short
instruction) is inserted in position 6 of the I/O
buffer. INSBF is outputted in hexadecimal to positions 9-12 of the I/O buffer, and in binary to the
object output buffer by DFOUT. The Location
Assignment Counter is incremented by one, and if
this is a long instruction, the Assembler goes to
LI3RD (TWOSW non -zero).
INSXT: Uses LDLBL in Pass 1 to load label (if any),
and in Pass 2 to do I/O options. Returns to BGASM
in Phase 9 to process the next statement.
SPOND: Special (conditional) operand processing.
This section checks each operand character for the
condition codes shown below, and inserts the corresponding condition bits into INSBF for those it finds.
It returns to INST3 when it reaches a blank, or when
it detects an erroneous condition code (C inserted in
I/O buffer). Shown below is a table of the condition
codes and the bit each sets:
Bit Position Set
point to location of the DC plus one before entering
SCAN). Use SCAN to evaluate operand and then
restore the Location Assignment Counter from DCCN
plus 1. Insert the relocation value of the constant in
position 6 of the I/O buffer (0 or 1). Output the value
of the constant in hexadecimal to positions 9-12 of
the I/O buffer and use DFOUT to insert the binary
value with its relocation indicator bits into the object
output. Go back to DCA plus 4 to exit.
Condition Indicated
Phase 7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Zero (Z)
Minus (-)
Plus (+ or &)
Even (E)
Carry (C)
Overflow (0)
Charts:
•
Processes DEC statements.
a.
b.
IINST: Indirect instruction. Inserts indirect addressing bit (8) in INSBF.
c.
LINST: Long instruction. Inserts long instruction
bit (5) in INSBF. If Pass 2, go to LI2ND; otherwise,
increment Location Assignment Counter by one and
return to SINST plus four to increment (ADCOW) for
second word.
LI2ND: Turn on TWOSW to indicate a long instruction (for later use). Save Location Assignment
Counter as in short instruction processing~ and use
SCAN to evaluate operand. Insert relocation property (0 or 1) in position 7 of the I/O buffer and save
relocation bits with the operand value in ITEMP
(2 words). If instruction may have condition codes
(BSC), go to SPOND. Otherwise, return to DISP
plus two to output first word of this instruction.
Note that after the first word is outputted, if TWOSW
is set, the Assembler will branch to LI3RD to output
the second word.
LI3RD: Set TWOSW equal to zero to return to oneword mode. Output second word (saved in ITEMP)
in hexadecimal to positions 13-16 of the I/O buffer,
and use DFOUT to output the second word and its
relocation indicator bits. Return to INSXT in the
short instruction processing section.
DCA: Branch table starts DC statement processing
here. If Pass 2, go to DC2ND; otherwise increment
Location Assignment Counter by one and use LDLBL
to load label (if any) . Return to BGASM in Phase 9
to process the next statement.
DC 2ND: Save the Location Assignment Counter in
DCCN plus 1 before incrementing it by one (it must
•
BX, BY, BZ, CA
Converts decimal integers to a 31-bit binary
value.
Converts fixed-point numbers to a 31-bit
binary value.
Converts floating point numbers to a 23-bit
binary value plus an exponent.
Processes XFLC statements.
a.
Converts floating point numbers to a 31-bit
binary value plus an exponent.
DECAl: The branch table starts DEC processing
here. If this statement is an XFLC, go to XFLCA.
If the Location Assignment Counter value is now odd,
go to ADJCT.
STOLB: Store the Location Assignment Counter in
the label value. If Pass 2, go to DECIN; otherwise
increment the Location Assignment Counter by two
and go to DECCN -4 to exit to LDLBL.
ADJCT: Add one to the Location Assignment Counter
to make it even. Go to STOLB to revise label value.
DECIN: Use FLOTD to evaluate DEC operand. Go to
DECA if non-integer constant, and to DEFXP if integer. Treat integer as fixed point with a binary place
value of 31.
DECA: If B-value specified, go to DEFXP. Otherwise form two-word constant in DECBF for output at
DEOUT. (Convert negative constant to complement
form. )
DEFXP: Fixed point section of DEC. Compute the
shift count; go to FLERR if minus; if shift count is
more than 31 go to FLZER. If sign of constant is
plus, shift constant by the first shift count and go to
Section 4: Assembler Program
61
(b) If a decimal point is included in the operand,
a minus one is added to XR3 for each digit
to the right of the decimal point (the operand
is treated as an integer).
(c) The binary value of the decimal integer or
mantissa is stored into a 5-word buffer
(BUF5) for further processing.
DEOUT. If sign of constant is minus, remove sign
bit, shift right by shift constant, and convert to
two f s complement.
DEOUT: Output section of DEC. Insert relocation
code (0) in positions 6-7. Output first word in hexadecimal to positions 9-12 of I/O buffer, and then
use DFOUT to output in binary to Disk System
format. Increment Location Assignment Counter
by one and then output word two of constant in hexadecimal to positions 13-16 of I/O buffer. Use
DFOUT to output word two in binary to DSF, and
then increment Location Assignment Counter by
one. Use LDLBL to load label (if any) in Pass 1
and to do I/O options in Pass 2. Return to BGASM
in Phase 9 to process the next statement.
2.
3.
The value
converted
FLE10.
The value
converted
FLOTD - Floating Decimal: The FLOTD subroutine
converts the operand of a decimal integer, fixed, or
floating point number to their binary equivalents.
A floating point number represented in powers of 10
will be converted to powers of 2. The FLOTD subroutine contains a scanning process which converts
the operand to its binary equivalent and a post scanning process which converts from powers of 10 to
powers of 2. Buffers FLE10 - BUF5 are initialized
to zero upon entry to FLOTD; XR3, which is used to
count digits to the right of the decimal point, is also
set to zero.
Scanning Process: This portion of the FLOTD subroutine does the following:
1.
62
Converts the decimal integer or the mantissa of
a fixed or floating point number to its binary
equivalent.
(a) If the decimal integer or mantissa is
negative, a /8000 is stored in the FLSGN
buffer (the decimal integer or mantissa is
processed as a positive number.
of a binary point identifier (B-type) is
to its binary value _and stored in FLB2.
Assume an operand of 4.500 E-1; at the end of
the scanning process the contents of buffers would be:
XFLCA: If Pass 2, go to XFLIN, otherwise increment the Location Assignment Counter by three and
exit at DECCN -4 to LDLBL.
XFLIN: Use FLOTD to evaluate XFLC operand. If
any B -value specified, go to FLERR. Convert magnitude and sign to complement form. Use DFOUT to
insert the binary characteristic as the first word of
the constant in the DSF, and then convert to hexadecimal and insert in positions 6-7 of the I/O buffer.
Increnlent the Location Assignment Counter by one,
and go to DEOUr plus 5 to output words two and
three.
of a power of 10 exponent (E -type) is
to its binary value and stored in
BUFS
Word 1
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
Word 5
0000
0000
0000
0000
7194
XR3 = -3
IF F F D I
FLEW = -1
IF F F F I
At the end of the scanning process, the power of 10
representation is:
(a)
A binary mantissa representing an integer
in BUF5.
(b) A binary power of 10 exponent (FLE 10).
(c) A binary value equal to the number of digits
to the right of the decimal point (XR3).
The objective of the post scanning process is:
(a)
(b)
G
A binary fraction (left-justfied to the binary
point identifier).
A binary exponent using 128 as the zero
point. Positive exponents will range from
129 (+1) to 255 (+127), and negative exponents
will range from 127 (-1) to zero (-128).
The post scan processing is initialized to convert
to a power of 2 by:
(1)
Combining the values of XR3 and FLE10 to
obtain the effective value of the power of 10
exponents. The result is stored in FLE10.
(2) Moving the binary point identifier (decimal
point) from the end of word 5 to the end of
word 2. This is effectively raising the power
of 2 exponent +64.
(3)
Set XR3 to represent the initial power of 2
exponent. This is 128 (zero) plus 64 (step b)
or 192.
(4) Shift the mantissa left (normalized) until the
high-order bit is in bit position zero of
word 2. Decrement XR3 by 1 for each bit
position shifted.
After initializing for the post scan processing,
the buffers contain:
BUFS
Word 1
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
Word 5
0000
8CAO
0000
0000
0000
Prior to returning to the DEC or XFLC routines, the
contents of word 2 and word 3 are loaded into the
accumulator and extension, and shifted right one to
clear bit position 0 of the accumulator before performing an OR of the sign bit .. The mantissa and
sign are then stored in the FLBMN (Binary Mantissa)
buffer.
The contents of XR3 are stored in the FLBCH
(binary characteristic) buffer.
The output of the FLOTD subroutine is:
FLBCH (Binary characteristic)
100 831
FLEW = -4
IFF F C
XR3 = 192
1
ooco
I
I
The scanning portion of the FLOTD subroutine is
entered at FLOTD from the DEC or XFLC statement
processing routines.
The following steps are performed, during the postscan process, to convert from a power of 10 to a
power of 2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reduce the power of 10 exponent (FLE 10) toward
zero' by:
(a) Dividing the mantissa by 10 if the exponent
is negative and multiplying the mantissa by
10 if the exponent is positive.
(b) Add a 1 to FLEI0 for each division and subtract a 1 from FLE 10 for each multiplication.
Normalize the mantissa by shifting the highorder bit to bit position 0 of word 2.
Determine the effective power of 2 exponent by:
(a) Adding a 1 to XR3 for each bit position
shifted to the right.
(b) Subtracting one for each bit position shifted
to the left.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 until FLEI0 is equal to zero.
At the end of the post-scan process the buffers
show:
BUFS
Word 1
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
Word 5
0000
9000
0000
0000
0000
XR3 = 131
100831
FLEW
100001
FLOTD
FLLP
FLSSC
Initializes subroutine.
(a) Resets buffers and switches.
(b) Sets FLSGN equal to /8000 if the
mantissa is negative.
Converts the mantissa to its binary value
and stores the binary value in BUF5.
(a) Checks each digit to determine if
it is numeric and if it is not, goes
to FLSSC.
(b) Converts character by character,
beginning with the high-order digit.
(c) If a decimal point is encountered,
add a -1 to XR3 for every digit to
the right of the decimal point.
(The instruction at FLLP will be
changed from a NOP to an ADD by
the FLSSC routine.)
(d) If BUF5 overflows indicating the
mantissa is too large, go to FLERR.
Analyzes non-numeric operand characters.
(a) Branch to FLBSC if the character is
a B (binary point identifier).
(b) Branch to FLESC if the character is
an E (power of 10 indicator).
(c) Modify the instruction at FLLP2 to
ADD if the character is a decimal
point.
(d) Branch to FLFIN when a blank is
found.
(e) Branch to FLERR if the character
is not one of the above.
Section 4: Assembler Program
63
FLBSC
FLESC
FL2
FLFIN
FLFNL
FLFNX
64
Initializes for the processing of B -type
exponents.
(a) Set FLNIS to non-zero.
i(b) Load the address of FLB2 to
FL3+1.
(c) Go to step (c) of FLESC.
Initializes for the processing of E-type
exponents and processes E and B-type
exponents.
(a) Set FLNIS to non-zero.
(b) Load the address of FLEI0 into
FL3+ 1.
(c) Modify the instruction at FL4 to
ADD if the exponent is positive and
to SUBTRACT if the exponent is
negative.
(d) Go to FL2.
Converts exponents to their binary
value.
(a) If the exponent is an E-type,
convert it to its binary value and
store in FLEI0.
(b) If the exponent is a B-type, convert
it to its binary value and store it in
FLB2.
(c) Exit to FLSSC when a character
other than numeric is found.
The post-scan processing is entered at
FLFIN from FLSSC of the scanning
process.
Initializes for the post-scan processing.
(a) Add XR3 and FLEI0 and store in
FLEI0.
(b) Load XR3 with 192 (128 + 64).
(c) Check BUF5 for a zero condition
and branch to FLZ ER if zero or
FLFNL is not zero.
This routine determines the direction
of shift and if necessary shifts the
mantissa right.
(a) Check word 1 of BUF 5; if zero, go
to FLFNX.
(b) Branch to the SRT subroutine to
shift the entire contents of BUF5
one position to the right.
(e) Add a 1 to XR3.
(d) Repeat steps (b) and (c) until word
1 is zero.
This routine determines if word 2 of
BUF5 is negative and, if necessary,
shifts mantissa left.
(a) Check word 2 of BUF5; if negative,
go to step (c).
Branch to the SLT subroutine to
shift the entire contents of BUF5
one position to the left.
(c) Subtract 1 from XR3.
(d) Repeat steps (b) and (c) until
word 2 is negative.
(e) Check the value of FLEI0 and if
negative or zero go to step (h).
(1) Subtract 1 from FLEI0.
(g) Branch to the multiply (MPY) subroutine to multiply the contents of
BUF5 by 10 and return to FLFNL.
(h) Check FLEI0 and branch to FLFEX
if zero.
(i) Add a 1 to FLEI0.
(j) Branch to the Divide (DIV) subroutine to divide the contents of
BUF5 by 10 and return to FLFNL.
This routine stores the mantissa and
exponent into buffers to be used by the
DEC or XFLC routines.
(a) Store the contents of XR3 into
FLBCH (binary characteristic).
(b) Load words 2 and 3 of BUF 5 into
the accumulator and extension.
Shift right one and insert the
mantissa sign bit. (FLSGN contains
a 18000 if the mantissa is negative.)
Store in FLBMN (binary mantissa).
(c) Check the binary exponent to
determine if it is greater than 256
or less than O. If it is, branch to
FLERR. If not, go to FLXXX.
Load XR2 with the address of FLBMN.
Exit via the return address at FLOTD.
Floating zero routine.
(a) Clear buffers and switches.
(b) Set data in FLNIS.
(c) Go to FLXXX.
ERROR Routine.
(a) Load S (syntax error) into position
18 or 19 of the I/o buffer.
(b) Go to FLZER.
(b)
FLFEX
FLXXX
FLZER
FLERR
Phase 8
Charts:
•
CB, CC, CD
Processes CALL, LIBF, DSA, LINK, EXIT,
and EBC statements.
a. Converts the operand (subroutine name) to
name code for CALL and LIBF statements.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Reserves three words in the program (these
will be filled by the Loader) for a DSA.
Generates four words in the object program.
Words 1 and 2 are a long BSI to MONCL + 1.
Words 3 and 4 are the program name in
name code for a LINK.
Generates a short LDX, tag 0, to MONCL
for an EXIT statement.
Reserves the needed storage for the operand
of EBC.
LIBFA Statement: Beginning of LIBF processing.
This label is reached from CALL processing on the
basis of information contained in the third word of
the op code table entry. The relocation bits (in
hexadecimal) are 20 and are saved in INDBT. If
Pass 2, go to CA2ND; otherwise, increment the
Location Assignment Counter by one and go to
CLLXT to exit.
CALLA: Branch table starts CALL processing at this
point. If LIBF (see above), go to LIBF A. Set relocation indicator bits (in hexadecimal) to 30 and
save in INDBT.
CALLC: If Pass 2, go to CA2ND; otherwise, increment the Location Assignment Counter by two
and go to CLIXT to exit.
DSAA: Branch table starts DSA processing here. If
Pass 2, go to DS2ND, otherwise increment the
Location Assignment Counter by three, and go to
DSA2-4 to exit.
DS2ND: Relocation code for word one is three and for
word two, one. Use CLLCT routine to collect the
name. Go to DSA2 if the name is all right; otherwise,
increment the Location Assignment Counter by three
and go to DSA2-4 to exit.
DSA2: Insert 3, relocation code for word one of nrulle,
into position 6 of the I/O buffer. Output the first
word of the name (in hexadecimal) to positions 9-12,
and use DFOUT to insert word one (in binary) with its
relocation indicator bits into the DSF. Increment the
Location Assignment Counter by one. Insert a 1,
relocation code for word two of the name, into position
7, and insert word two of the name into positions
13-16. Use DFOUT to output word two and its relocation indicator bits to the DSF. Increment the
Location Assignment Counter by two before exiting.
Note that the DSA statement will generate a data
header in the DSF since only two words are actually
output.
LINKA:
Branch table starts LINK processing here.
If Pass 2, go to LK2ND; otherwise increment the
Location Assignment Counter by four before going
to DSA -4 to exit.
CA2ND: Use CLLCT subroutine to collect the
name of the call. The name is returned in the
accumulator and extension and, if it is blank
(accumulator equal zero), the Location Assignment
Counter is incremented by one (LIBF) or two (CALL)
before going to CLLXT to exit.
LK2ND: Use CLLCT routine to collect the name of
the program link. If the name is all right, go to
LINK2; otherwise, increment the Location Assignment
Counter by four, and go to DSA-4 to exit.
COP: CALL (or LIBF) output. The relocation code
(3 or 2) is inserted in position 6 of the I/O buffer
for word one of the call name. The first word of the
name (in hexadecimal) is inserted in positions 9-12,
and DFOUT is used to enter word one (in binary)
with it relocation indicator bits into the DSF. The
Location Assignment Counter is incremented by ORe
if this is a CALL statement. A zero is inserted into
position 7 of the I/O buffer, and word two of the
name is inserted into positions 13-16. DFOUT is
used to insert word two of the name into the DSF.
The Location Assignment Counter is then incremented
by one.
LINK 2: Insert a zero into position 6 of the I/O buffer,
and insert word one (first word of a long BSI--4400 in
hexadecimal) into positions 9-12. Use DFOUT to
enter this word (in binary) into DSF, and then increment the Location Assignment Counter by one.
Insert a zero into position 7, and then insert word two
(address of MONCL plus one) into pOSitions 1a-16. Use
DFOUT to enter this word into DSF, and then increment ADCOW by one. Use DFOUT to enter word three
(first word of link name) into DSF, and then increment
ADCOW by one. Use DFOUT to enter word four
(second word of link name) into DSF, and then increment ADCOW by one. Go to DSA-4 to exit.
CLLXT: Use LDLBL to load label (if any) during
Pass 1, and to do output options during Pass 2.
Return to BGASM in Phase 9 to process the next
statement.
EXIT A: Branch table starts EXIT processing here.
If Pass 2, go to EX 2ND , otherwise increment
ADCOW by one and go to DSA-4 to exit.
Section 4: Assembler Program
65
EX2ND: Insert a zero into position 6 of the I/O
buffer, and insert a short LDX instruction, tag 0,
to MONCL into positions 9-12. Use DFOUT to insert
this instruction into DSF, and then increment ADCOW
by one. Go to DSA -4 to exit.
EBCA: Branch table starts EBC processing here.
Position 35 is checked for the presence of the period
(.) delimiter. If it is present, go to EBLP-l. If it
is missing, an S (syntax error) is entered in the I/O
buffer, the Location Assignment Counter is incremented by 18 (maximum number of words generated
by an EBC), and the Assembler exits at.EBX.
•
Contains subroutines common to statement
processing.
BGASM: Entry point for Phase 9. If the record is a
comment record, do not process. Pack the mnemonic
op code into two words and save in the OPBUF (Op
Code Buffer).
Input-Buffer:
Position 27
10000,0000,1100,000110000,0000,1100,01001
EBLP: The operand field is scanned from position
71 to the left for the right-end delimiter. When
found, go to EBDL.
EBDL: A blank is used to replace the delimiter just
detected. Then if the character count between the
delimiters is odd, the blank for the right half of the
last compressed word will be present. The number
of characters is stored in EBBF and adjusted to be
the next even number if odd before dividing by two to
obtain the word count. The number of characters
(EBBF) is inserted (in hexadecimal) into positions
9-12 of the I/O buffer.
EBXR2: The number of words to be generated by
this EBC is stored into the second word of this LDX
instruction.
EBPC~:
Loop used to pack the characters in the
EBC operand, two characters per word, and insert
into DSF by means of the DFOUT subroutine during
Pass 2. Increment the Location Assignment
Counter by one for each time through the loop, in
Pass 1 and in Pass 2.
(Non-Overlaid Mainline)
A
D
First Word
Second Word
Op Buffer:
11100,0001111001010010000101001°000101001
A
D
blank
blank
Representation of the mnemonic AD (Add Double)
OPLP: Performs a search of the op code table
(BEGOP) using the op buffer contents as the argument.
The search is performed using XR3 as the entry
pointer. When an equal entry is found, a branch to
the OPOK routine is executed. If an equal entry is
not found, an 0 (Op code error) is placed in position
17 or 18 of the I/O buffer and the program exits to
the LDLBL routine if in Pass 1; otherwise, two zero
words are inserted in object output before going to
LDLBL.
OPOK
EBX: Use LDLBL to load label (if any) in Pass 1,
and to do I/O options in Pass 2. Return to BGASM
in Phase 9 to process the next statement.
Phase 9.
Position 28
COMPT
Charts: CE, CF, CG, CH, CI, CJ, CK, CL, CM,
CN, CO
Using XR3, the third word of the op code
table entry is obtained (see Operation
Code Table). Bits 12-15 are used as a
transfer vector for transfer of control
through a branch table to the individual
routine used in processing the statement,
or to a routine which reads in the proper
overlay and repeats the transfer vector
branch to the branch table.
Initializes the FLIPR routine to read in
the phase required to process the statement.
•
Searches the op code table to ascertain valid
operation mnemonic.
Scan: This subroutine converts the expression in the
operand field to its binary value. It also determines
whether the operand expression is absolute or relocatable.
•
Transfers control to the proper statement
processing routine (directly or through an
overlay read -in routine) .
SCAN
66
Entry point for the scan routine.
Initializes the scan routine.
SCNLP
TYPE
SKPCB
FERR
SCNEX
5MBOL
SYMTP
DCINT
HXINT
INTYP
CHRVL
STRX
(Scan loop) Checks the operand character to determine if it is an operator
(+, -, or *) or delimiter (blank or
comma) ann branches to the routine
that processes the special character.
Checks the operand character to
determine the type of operand element
to be processed and branches to the
routine servicing the element. The
instruction at TYPE is modified to go
directly to the servicing routine once
the type is determined. It will be
changed to a NOP instruction when an
operator or delimiter is encountered.
This routine leaves the scan pointer
(XR1) pointing at the terminator (if
blank) or one character position past
the terminator (if comma).
(Format error) Clears buffers and
enters an S (syntax error) into the
I/O buffer when an operand error is
detected.
(Scan exit) Uses the SKPCB routine to
set up for processing the second
operand. Exits to the Scan return
address.
Initializes to process symbols and
returns to SCNLP.
Modifies TYPE to return to SYMTP.
Exits to QENRT+2 if the symbol has
five or less characters and to FERR
if it has more than five characters.
(Decimal integer) Initializes the
INTYP routine to collect decimal
integers. Modifies TYPE to branch
to INTYP. Returns to SCNLP.
(Hexadecimal integer) Initializes the
INTYP routine to collect hexadecimal
integers. Modifies TYPE to branch to
INTYP. Returns to SCNLP.
(Integer type) Converts decimal or
hexadecimal integers to their binary
equivalents. Returns to SCNLP.
(Character value) Collects character
values. Modifies TYPE to branch to
FERR if there is more than one character in a character value.
(Asterisk) Determines if the asterisk
is an operator or an element. Branches
to STAR if it is an element. Modifies
the CON routine to multiply the previous
operand element by the one following
the asterisk and to suspend addition or
subtraction until all multiplication has
been completed. Goes to GENRT.
STAR
SPLUS
SMNUS
SCMMA
SBLNK
RELER
UDFER
CaLL
LABCK
Sets RLSCW (relocation switch) equal to
the mode of assembly (RLMDE). Assigns the asterisk the current value of
the Location Assignment Counter. Goes
to CHRVL+ 2 (ensures an operator
follows the asterisk).
Branches to the CaLL routine to perform the arithmetic operation which was
determined by the previous operator.
Modifies the CaLL routine to add the
next value of the next operand element
to the VALUE buffer.
Same as SPLUS except it modifies the
CaLL routine to subtract the value of
the next operand element from the
VAL UE buffer.
Branches to FERR if the comma is in
the operand field of a short instruction.
Goes to SBLNK.
Branches to the CaLL routine to process
the last operand element. Branches to
RELER if the operand is neither absolute or relocatable. Normal exit is to
SCNEX.
(Relocation error) Enters an R into the
I/O buffer using the FERR routine.
(Undefined Symbol Error) Enters a U
into the I/O buffer if a symbol in the
operand is not in the Symbol Table.
(Collect) Entered when an operator or
terminator is found in the operand.
This routine performs the arithmetic
specified by the operators in the operand expression. The result is stored
in the VALUE buffer. It also resets the
Scan routine after each operand element
has been processed.
This subroutine checks labels for
validity and converts them into name
code. LABCK is called by the LDLBL
(Load Label) routine when building the
Symbol Table and from SCAN when
determining the value of an operand
field containing labels.
The input is a label (five words; one
EBCDIC character per word) from the
label field of the I/O buffer or from the
operand field.
LABCK first checks the validity of
the label. A label is valid if:
1.
2.
The first character is not numeric.
There are no blanks between
characters.
Section 4: Assembler Program
67
3.
All characters are in the range of
A-I, J -R, S-Z, 0-9, or #, @, or $.
If the label is not valid, an L
(Label error) is inserted in position 18
or 19 of the I/O buffer and the label is
ignored (zeros are returned to the calling routine) .
If the label is valid, it is converted
to name code. The label AJS 19 is
compressed as follows:
STSIA
STSI
STXRl
Label (positions 21-26 of the I/O buffer)
A
S
J
1000000001100000110000000011010001100000000111000101
Word 1
Word 2
1
STSXT
Word 3
9
10000000011110001100000000111110011
Word 4
Word 5
Symbol Table entry (name code)
J
A
10010000011010001
Word 1
S
1
9
GTOF2
;101~010~110oo1 111100Jj
Word 2
Hex:
01462C79
A valid label is placed in A and Q;
zeros are returned if label is invalid.
STSCII - Symbol Table Search: This subroutine is
entered from SCAN to look up the value of the symbolic operand just collected. It searches the Symbol
Table (includi.ng any disk overflow) and returns the
symbol value if the symbol is found. When a symbol
is found, STSCH exits to the return address plus one.
If the symbol is not found, STSCH exits to the normal
return address. This exit to SCAN causes a U
(Undefined error) to be inserted in the I/O buffer.
The following is a description of STSCH by
label:
STSCH
68
Entry point. A check is made to determine if there is any table overflow. If
no overflow, go to STSIA, otherwise
save the partial sector (any symbols
in the one sector I/O area of the table).
Save index register 1. Use SRCH subroutine to search in-core table. If
symbol is found at this point, go to STSl,
otherwise go to STSXT plus 2 for possible
overflow search.
Symbol is found, therefore increment
link word for return plus 1 to SCAN.
Save the symbol value returned from
SRCH, restore the partial sector previously saved if there is any table
overflow.
Restore XRl as per saved upon entry.
This instruction is transferred to for an
undefined symbol. The link word is not
incremented.
Symbol T able search exit. If a symbol
is not found in the in-core table, transfer is made to STSXT plus 2. At this
point, a check is made to determine if
there is any table overflow. If there is
none, the symbol is undefined, and
transfer is made to STXRl. Otherwise,
go to OFSCH to set up search of overflow sector(s).
Use RDSYT subroutine to read overflow
sector, and then use SRCH to search
the one sector table. If found, go to
STSl; otherwise, increment sector address of overflow and, if there are more
overflow sectors to search, go to
GTOF2. If there are no more overflow
sectors, the symbol is undefined and
transfer is made to STS2 to restore the
partial sector.
SRCH - Search: This subroutine is used to do the
actual search of the Symbol Table. The search
technique used is a binary search. SRCH is entered
from STSCH and STADD (Symbol Table Add). If
SRCH finds a symbol, the return link word is incremented by one. The relocation and multiple definition
bits (if any) are stored in a location named BITS. The
limits of the table to be searched may be controlled
externally, thus facilitating the use of SRCH for the
in-core table and the one-sector table. The following
is a description of SRCH by label:
SRCH
GO
Entry point. Begin computing limits of
search.
Begin finding midpoint of table. Check
if HI - LOW is greater than three. If
not, search is done.
MID
NOTEQ
SECHF
MULT
SAREA
ERTBL
BTHEX
B4HEX
ERFLG
GTHDG
LDLBL
STLBL
Load XRl with address of table midpoint. Compare input symbol (SYMBL)
with this table entry. If not equal, go
to NOTEQ. If symbol was found and
SRCH was entered from ST ADD, this is
a multiply-defined symbol. If entry
was from STSCH, save relocation and
multiple definition bits, increment link
word, and exit.
Input symbol was not equal. If input
symbol wa...~ greater, (higher in alphanumeric sequence) go to SECHF. If
not, the last midpoint address is the
new LOW address.
Input symbol was greater. The last
midpoint address is the new HI address.
Multiply-defined symbol. OR the multiple definition bit into the table entry
just found. Transfer to NOTEQ-6 to
increment link word, clear ADDSW
(indicates entry from ST ADD), and
exit.
Source Area. 80-word buffer for card
or paper tape.
Table of internal statement numbers of
EQUs, ORGs, and BSSs whose operands
where undefined in Pass 1.
Binary to hexadecimal (General). Input
is binary word in accumulator. Output
is 1-4 hexadecimal EBCDIC characters
starting in address specified in XR3.
Binary to 4 hexadecimal characters.
Uses BTHEX to output exactly 4 hexadecimal characters.
Error Flag. Inserts error codes into
positions 18 and 19 of I/O buffer
(SAREA). Each entry also increments
error count (ERCNT) by 1.
NOTE: ERCNT is the count of the
total number of errors, not just those
reflected in pos itions 18 and 19.
If listing is specified, and 1132 is
principal printer, read Phase 5 into
core and transfer control to new page
routine (HD 5) . After new page routine
is performed, control is returned here,
and the overlay that was in core before
Phase 5 is restored.
Load Label. Uses LABCK (Label
Check) to collect label. If label OK,
goes to ST ADD in Pass 1.
Label value to positions 1-4 of
SAREA in hexadecimal.
PALBL
Al
Pass label. Secondary load label
entrance. Statements whose label fields
are ignored enter here.
If output (object or intermediate) fills
Working Storage, print error message
(A03). If Pass 1, set PSMDE = 0 for
two pass assembly. The Assembler
will stop at a WAIT instruction after
printing the error message. This will
enable the operator to take the necessary
action with regard to his card or :paper
tape input. The assembly will cdntinue
in the two pass mode after pressing
Start. When it is undesirable to alter
the JOB source, the Assembler will
eventually trap out the next Moni~or
control record and pass it to the
Supervisor. If Pass 2, exit to Supervisor (MONC L).
If Working Storage not yet full, sFlve
RDSRC
AITWO
PUNCH
PCHDK
PCHNB
ERS
GETER
source statement in intermediate; output
if one pass assembly (INT 1).
Read Source record and exit LDLBL.
If no LIST, go to PUNCH. If Console
Printer is print device, go to PRILNE
and print record. If 1132 is print
device, go to GTHDG if this is the first
source record, or if printer is om
channel 12.
No LIST DECK unless two pass assembly. If not, get. next record from
intermediate input (INT 2) and exit.
Go to RDSRC if LIST DECK or L]ST
DEC K E options not selected. Go to
ERS if LIST DEC K E.
For full list deck, find end of object
output (1-19) and set punch count for
this number.
Punch errors only. Go to RDSRC and
read next record if no errors. Otherwise, blank positions 1-17 and set
punch count to 20 before punching.
Note that when punching paper tape the
punch count is not needed, since the
object and source is punched into the
tape.
Reads error printing routine into
BUFI from disk.
RDSYT - Read Symbol Table: This subroutine: is
used by STSCH and ST ADD to read one sector of
Symbol Table overflow.
Section 4: Assembler Program
69
RSTRE - Restore: This subroutine is used by
STSCH and SRCH to restore full table status after
an overflow search. It uses RDSYT to read in the
partial sector initially saved, and resets the H1END
and LOEND addresses.
OFSCH - Overflow Search: This subroutine is used
by STSCH and ST ADD whenever it is necessary to
initialize for an overflow search. The LOEND address is saved in SVLOW, the overflow sector
address is set for the first overflow sector, and
the HIEND and LOEND addresses are set up for a
one-sector table. Upon exit, XR3 contains the
number of overflow sectors.
WRSYT - Write Symbol Table: This subroutine is
used by STSCH to save a partial sector and by STADD
to either save a partial sector or to write a complete sector of table overflow.
DFOUT - Disk Format Output: This subroutine is
used in Pass 2 to build the object output sectors in
Disk System format (DSF). Data is input to DFOUT,
one word at a time, along with the two relocation
indicator bits which pertain to this word. The data
word and its indicator bits are stored in a two-word
buffer named TRWRD. D FOUT also checks for data
breaks by comparing the primary Location Assignment Counter (ADCOW) with the secondary Location
Assignment Counter (ADCW2). If they are not the
same, DFOUT transfers to the data header subroutine (DTHDR) to insert a data header in the DSF.
After each data word has been output, DFOUT transfers to the write disk format output subroutine
(WRDFO) to determine if the one-sector buffer is
full. The following is a description of D FOUT by
label:
DFOUT
CMPCT
FXDTH
70
Entry point. If first entry, store load
address in first data header (follows
immediately after Program Header
Hecord). Set ADCW2 equal to ADCOW.
Compare the Location Assignment
Counter (ADCOW) with the secondary
Location Assignment Counter (ADCW2).
If equal, go to DFXRl. Otherwise, go
to DTHR unless a data header was just
generated because of a new sector
(see WRDFO).
Fix data header. If a break in sequence
occurs, and a new sector data header
was just generated, the Location
Assignment Counter (current) is stored
in the first word of this new data header.
DFXR2
DFXR3
DFOXT
LDXRS
Disk format index register 2. Index
register 2 points to the buffer word containing the relocation indicator bits for
the current block of eight data words. If
first entry, or if starting a new block of
eight words, XR2, XR1 (points to buffer
word where this data word will be stored),
and XR3 (shift count for indicator bits)
are initialized.
Disk format index register 3. Load
shift count to XR3. Store data word and
increment program word count (WRDCT)
by one. Shift data word's indicator bits
and OR to indicator bits word (XR2). If
this data word is the first word of an
LIBF name, ADCW2 is not incremented,
since the two words of the name will be
replaced by a short BSI at load time.
Disk format exit. Clear two-word input
buffer and redundant data header switch
(RDTHD) to zero.
Load index registers. Go to WRDFO to
check if output sector is done. Reload
index registers as per saved upon entering. Exit.
STADD - Symbol Table Add: This section of Phase 9
is used only in Pass 1 to build the Symbol Table; consequently it is overlaid during Pass 1 processing of the
END statement by Phase 10 (consisting of the DTHR
and WRDFO subroutines).
If label field of a statement is blank, STADD
transfers to ADDXT which exits to load label subroutine. SRCH is used to determine if the label has
already been defined in the in-core table. If it has
not, and there is no table overflow, go to ST AD2 to
add label to table. If defined in in-core table, go to
ADDXT. If not defined in in -core table and there are
overflow sectors, this overflow must be searched.
WRSYT is used to save the partial sector, and then
OFSCH is used to initialize the overflow search. In
ST ADD, all sectors of overflow must be searched to
detect a possible multiple definition. ]f a multiplydefined symbol is found on an overflow sector, this
sector is rewritten so as to contain the multiple
definition flag bit. If the symbol is not multiplydefined on any overflow sector, the full table is first
restored before making the new entry.
The following is a description of ST ADD by
important labels:
STAD2
Label not multiply-defined and can be
added to table. If this label is the next
higher alphameric entry (no table move
SYMIN
ST002
required), go to SYMIN for direct add
to table. Otherwise move all higher
entries three words toward lower core
(one entry leftwards).
OR label relocation value (LABRL) into
label before adding to table. Increment
the count of number of symbols (CTSYM)
by one. Reduce LOEND address by
three, and determine if in -core table
full. If not, go to ADDXT. Write overflow sector, increment count of overflow sectors (OFCNT) by one, and check
whether or not the four cylinder overflow
area has been exhausted. If not go to
ST002. If it has, print error message
(A02) and return to Supervisor.
Increment sector address of table
overflow, and reset table limits to
allow another sector of overflow (106
more symbols) .
INT 1 - Intermediate I/O Pass 1: This subroutine
is used in Pass 1 of a one pass assembly to save
the source input on the disk. It is overlaid by INT 2
during Pass 1 processing of the END statement of a
one pass assembly. Each source statement is
packed, two characters per word, and preceded by
one word referred to as a prefix word. The prefix
word contains the word count of the statement (including the prefix word) in. bits 8 - 15. Bit 0 is used
to indicate that the statement begins in position 21.
Bit 1 is used to indicate that the statement includes
an ill field.
The following is a description of INT 1 by principal label:
INTI
IN105
BLSCN
LVSCN
Entry point XR 1 points to the prefix
word for this statement, XR2 points to
position 21 of I/O buffer (SAREA), and
XR3 is set to five to check the label
field. If there is any non-blank in the
label field, go to INI05. When there
is no label field, packing starts at
position 27 (LFT27).
OR bit 0 (CON plus 2) to prefix word
and start packing at position 21.
Scan from position 71 toward left
pointer (position 21 or 27) for a nonblank. If a non -blank found, go to
LVSCN.
Compute number of positions from left
pointer to end of statement. If minus
(blank record), go to LDCTL. Add two
(CON plus 5) to this number and divide
LFPTR
NOPBR
ID
LDCTL
NOWRT
WRTIO
CTLX2
by two. This result is the number of
words to be packed (also enters prefix
word).
Pack statement, two characters per
word, and store in output buffer (BIUFI).
NOP or branch. When INT 1 is entered,
this word is set to an NOP to allow
checking for the ID field. If the ID
field is found, this word is set to a
branch to LDCTL. This allows the
same packing routine to be used for the
ID field (LFPTR). If there is no 10
field, go to LDCTL.
ill field found. OR bit 1 (CON plus 4) to
prefix word. Add four to word count in
prefix word. Use packing routine at
LFPTR to pack ill field.
Reset NOPBR to a NOP. Check if !room
in buffer for one more statement (use
maximum statement length). If not
enough room, go to WRTIO.
CTLWD contains address in buffer of
next prefix word. Set this next pr~fix
word equal to 0001 (minimum word'
count) . Exit.
Compute total word count for this sector
(including prefix words). This count
becomes the first data word in this
secto-r.
Write sector of intermediate I/O.
Decrement count of sectors of Working
Storage left (SCRA) by one, and inorement sector address of intermediate
I/O by one. Go back to NOWRT to
initialize before exit.
Phase 10
Chart: CP
•
Enters a data header in DSF when required
(DTHDR).
•
Writes one sector on the disk when the output
buffer is full (WRD FO) .
DTHDR (Data Header): This subroutine enters a
data header in DSF as required. The program word
count (WRDCT) is incremented by two for each entry
to this subroutine, since each data header is two:
words long. The number of words to and includilng
this new data header is stored in word 2 of the last
data header. The Location ASSignment Counters
(ADCOW and ADCW2) are set equal, and the load
Section 4: Assembler Program
71
address (ADCOW) is stored in word 1 of the new
data header. The address constant which is used
for determining the number of words between data
headers (DHPTR) is set to the address of the first
word of this new data header. The buffer address
where the next data word is to be stored (DFXRl
plus 1) is incremented by two. XR2 and XR3 initialization is also performed. The number of words to
be moved, in the event that this data header is a
normal new sector data header, is incremented by
one so that all data words will be moved (see
WRD FO) . Exit.
NOTE: In both DTHDR and WRDFO, reference is
made to a buffer. This buffer will be DFBUF if
assembly is in one pass mode, or will be BUFI if
assembly is in two pass mode (see Figure 11). Both
buffers are long enough to contain one sector of output plus a maximum of ten words past the three
hundred and twentieth word. Note that various addresses in DFOUT, DTHDR, and WRDFO are set
initially for DFBUF (one pass mode). Should the
assembly be in two pass mode, these addresses will
be set to their equivalent positions for BUFI during
the processing of the END statement (Phase 12).
WRDFO (Write Disk Format Output): This subroutine writes one sector of Disk System format
output when the output buffer is full. After the
sector is written, it moves any words past the
three hundred and twentieth word of the buffer back
to the beginning of the buffer. The following is a
description of WRDFO by principal label.
Phase 11
WRD FO: Entry point. If the entry is from END
statement processing, go directly to WR TSR to write
the sector. Otherwise, check if output is past
sector point of buffer. If output is past the three
hundred and twentieth word of the buffer and a block
of eight data words has been completed, go to
DTHDH. to insert a data header for the next sector
and turn the redundant data header switch (RDTHD)
before writing the sector. If the above condition
does not exist, exit.
WRTSR: Write DSF sector. Increment sector
address of DSF output by one, and decrement
number of sectors of Working Storage available
(SCRA) by one ..
MVLFT: If entry is from END statement proceSSing,
no moveis required. Exit.
MVCNT: The number of data words to be moved is
contained in the second word of this LDX instruction.
This number is a result of the difference computed
when checking for output past the three hundred and
twentieth word of the buffer, and is incremented in
DTHDR by one to give the correct move number. If
the count is zero, go to NOMVE.
W2: Loop to move words past the three hundred and
twentieth word of the buffer back to beginning of
buffer.
NOMVE: Initializes XRl and XR2 control in DFOUT,
and resets the data header address constant (DHPTR).
Exit.
72
Chart:
•
CQ
Reads the source statements from the disk during
Pass 2. (One pass mode assembly.)
INT2 (Intermediate I/O Pass 2): This subroutine is
used in Pass 2 of a one pass assembly to bring the
source statements saved by INT 1 back into core in
such a way that they are indistinguishable from
statements read from the principal I/O device (card
or paper tape). The following is a description of
INT2 by principal label.
INT 2: Entry point: Store blanks in I/O buffer
(SAREA).
INT2A: Load XRl with the next prefix word, and
XR2 with the address of position 21. If prefix word
indicates no label field, change XR2 for position 27.
LDR3: The second word of this LDX instruction
contains the number of words to be unpacked (obtained from prefix word). If statement has an ID
field, reduce word count by four. If the word count
of this statement is 1 (only a prefix word, i. e., a
blank record), go to NOID2,
UNPCK: Unpack statement into I/O buffer. Reduce
the total data word count of this sector (contained in
BUFI plus 2) by one for each time through this loop,
TSTID: Check prefix word to determine if this
statement has an ID field. If no ID field, go to
NOID2. Otherwise, go back to UNPCK and unpack
four-word ID field.
NOID2: Check total data word count to see if this sector
is exhausted. If it is, go to RDIO to read in next sector.
Pack and save op code (save in OPBUF) , and set XR2
for two positions preceding I/O buffer. Then exit.
RDIO: Read next sector of intermediate input. In~nt sector address by one, reset address where
next prefix word is obtained, and exit.
82420: If no EPR statement, go to 82421; otherwise,
store extended precision indication in word 3 of
Program Header Record, and go to 82430.
NOTE: It is possible for the 8ymbol Table to extend
into the area where INT 1 and INT 2 reside if the
assembly is in two pass mode with no listing.
82421: If no 8PR statement, go to 82430, otherwise
store standard precision indication in word 3 of the
Program Header Record.
Phase 12
82430: If program is type one, go to 82431. If program type is greater than two, go to 8243A. If a file
was not defined (no *FI LE record), go to 82431.
8tore number of files defined (one) in word 9 of the
Program Header Record. A seven word table (see
82485 in listing) is outputted to D8F by the DFOUT
routine. As each word is outputted,the Location
Assignment Counter is incremented by one. Thus
the first data word will be assigned to relocatable
seven in Pass 2. This table includes the size of the
file (FIT8Z) as obtained from the *FI LE record.
Charts: CR, C8
•
Processes END statements.
•
Reads in Phase 10 to build a Program Header
Record (Pass 1).
•
Reads in Phase 11 (one pass mode) (Pass 1).
•
Reads in and transfers control to Phase 3
(Pass 2).
ENDA: The branch table starts END processing
here. If Pass 2, go to END2. Initialize switches
for Pass 2, and load XR2 with BUFI plus 2, or
DFBUF plus 2 if two or one pass mode, respectively.
CLR51: Clear first 51 words in D8F buffer to zero
( maximum Program Header Record length). If
relocation mode of assembly is relocatable (RLMDE),
go to 82402. Otherwise, the program is type 1, and
the length of the header (word 6 of header) is equal
to three.
82402: If 188 assembly, move the I88NO (saved
from Phase 2) to word 14 of the header, and the
number of interrupt levels required to word 15.
Move the number(s) of the interrupt levels specified
with control records into the header beginning with
word 16. Increment the length of the header by one
for each level specified (I8HDR).
8243A: If LIBR assembly (188 or ENT called wi'fu
one word call), reduce program type by one (type
equals 5 or 3, respectively).
82431: OR program type to precision already in
word three of the Program Header Record.
82440: Read Phase 10 from disk replacing the 8T ADD
section of Phase 9. 8tore the length of the header
minus nine (HDLTH) in word 6 of the Header. Initialize the total word count of the program (WRDCT)
to the length of the Header. 8tore the length of
COMMON (completed in Phase 1) in word 5 of the
Header. 8et the data header address (DHPTR) equal
to the address of the first word past the Program
Header Record, and setup the XR load addresses in
DFOUT to correspond. Note that these addresses
will at this time be for the correct output buffer
since XR2 was initialized for the correct buffer
earlier in this phase.
82403: If no ENTs used, go to 82404; otherwise,
the program type is set to 4.
82151: If two pass assembly, go to ENDA2; otherwise, set word count equal to 320 at DFBUF, and
sector address 32 relative to Working 8torage at
DFBUF plus one. 8ave the END statement in intermediate I/O (INT 1), and force one more sector of
intermediate output to be written, thus insuring that
the END statement will be found in Pass 2.
82404: If IL8 assembly, the interrupt level (saved
in 188NO) is inserted in word 13 of the Program
Header, the Header length is 4, and the program
type is 7.
ENDAO: The force-sector-write returns from INTI
to this address. Read Phase 11 (INT2) from disk,
replacing the INTI section of Phase ,9. Force the
reading of the first intermediate input sector.
I 88XX: Reset XR2 to its value before moving the
188 information into the header. 8et HDLTH equal
to 18HDR and go to 82420.
Section 4: Assembler Program
73
ENDA1: The forced-read returns from INT2 to this
---
address. Use INT2 to get the first source statement
into the I/O buffer (SAREA). Clear the ENT and
ISS switches tor Pass 2 processing, and set-up
FLIPR to read Phase 1 from the disk. Write the
sector buffer area of the Symbol Table (possible
partial sector) to the next available table overflow
sector.
ENDXX: Address filled in here points to the sector
overflow section of the Symbol Table.
ENDA2: Two pass assembly. Therefore it is necessary-to reverse these addresses in the WRDFO
subroutine to point to BUFI. Decrement the paper
tape first position address (PTADR) by twenty
so that the next record, if from paper tape, will
read into position 1 of the I/O buffer. Use RDCRD
to read the next record from the I/O device, and go
to ENDA1 plus 2 to complete Pass 1 processing of
END.
ENDA5: The special entry to LDLBL returns to this
address. If the DSF output is not past the three hundred and twentieth word of the buffer, go to ENDA3.
Otherwise, use WRDFO to write output sector.
ENDA3:
output.
ENDA4: Set up FLIPR to read Phase 3 from disk.
Compute the block count of the program by dividing
the total word count (WRDCT) by 20. Store the disk
block count in COM54 of the Skeleton Supervisor and
overlay with Phase 3.
ASSEMBLER INPUT -OUTPUT ROUTINES
Input/output routines for the Assembler include:
1.
2.
END2: Read in Phase 12A. Phase 12A performs
END statement processing in Pass 2 beginning at
P12AX.
3.
Phase 12A
Chart: CT
P 12AX...: Adjust the Location Assignment Counter to
the next even address if it is odd. Store the Location
Assignment Counter in COM60 of the Skeleton
Supervisor. Use DTHDR to complete the word count
for the last data header, and then force the word
count of this new data header to be zero. If program has an entry point, go to SBRTN; otherwise,
program must have an execution address specified,
or an S (syntax error) is inserted in the I/O buffer.
The SCAN routine is used to compute the execution
address which must be relocatable in a relocatable
assembly. If it is not, ENDER is used to insert
an R (relocation error) in the I/O buffer.
XEQOK: Store the execution address in COM56, and
output in hexadecimal to positions 9-12 of the I/O
buffer.
SBRTN: END statements with no execution address
required or with an error pertaining to the execution
address transfer to this address. The LDLBL routine
is set up to bypass the read of the next record and
to do only output options (print and/or punch).
74
Use WRDFO to write last sector of DSF
DI SKO - This routine is part of the Skeleton
Supervisor.
CARDO/PAPT1 - This routine services either
card or paper tape depending on which is defined
as the principal I/O device for the particular
system.
WRTYO/VIPST - This routine services either
the Console Printer or the 1132 Printer, depending on which is defined as the principal printer
for the particular system.
Input-Output Device Routine
The Assembler is device-independent; i.e. , it is indifferent to the I/O device which it uses. The assembler uses whichever ItO device routine, card or paper
tape, which was loaded by the System Loader/Editor.
The I/O device routine reads the input record
and converts it into unpacked EBCDIC code in the
input-output buffer SAREA. No return is made to
the Assembler until the reading and conversion of
the entire record is complete.
Mter completion of the Assembler control record
input, the Assembler, by examining word 9710 in
COMMA, determines if the input is from paper tape.
If so, the Assembler shifts the pointer to the input
buffer 20 character pOSitions to the right.
As the assembly of each statement is completed,
the Assembler builds the output record in the buffer
SAREA. Card punching occurs from positions one
through twenty of this buffer. The card output
routine performs the character conversion. No
return is made to the Assembler until the entire
card has been punched.
If the output is to paper tape, the output record
is built in the buffer SAREA and then moved to the
buffer PBUF. Paper tape punching occurs from this
buffer beginning at position one, ending at the endof-record. The paper tape output routine performs
the character conversion. As soon as punching has
been initiated, the paper tape output routine returns
to the Assembler, thus allowing for overlap of the
paper tape output operation.
Print Device Routine
As with the principal I/O device, the Assembler is
indifferent to the device assigned as the principal
print device; i. e., the Console Printer or the 1132
Printer. The Assembler uses whichever routine
was loaded by the System Loader Editor.
Upon entry, the move routine (P9MVE) determines if any I/O operation is in progress. If so,
the move routine waits for the completion of that
operation. Then the contents of the output buffer
SAREA are moved to the print buffer P AREA. (This
is the same buffer used for paper tape output, PBUF,
renamed.) When the move is completed,the print
line is initiated and the print routine returns to the
Assembler.
The Assembler will not call for the new page
routine (Phase 5) if the principal print device is
the Console Printer.
The Console Printer output has as its first
character a new line character to res tore the type
ball before starting each line. The 1132 Printer
routine is set up to space after printing each line
and to double space after printing at channel 1.
The Printer routine has an entry labeled RP AGE
to eject to a new page. A corresponding address in
the Console Printer routine is a dummy entry to
make the Assembler more independent with regard
to the print device.
Overlays
To conserve core, the Assembler Program is
divided into 15 phases (numbered 0-12A). Only
Phase 9 and a portion of Phase 0 remain in core.
during the entire assembly process.
Statement processing phases (5, 6, 7, 8, and
12) are read in whenever they are needed. A
branch table (Figure 3) is included at the beginning
of each statement
Statement
Type
DC
INST
EQU
ORG
BSS,BES
EBC
CALL,L1BF
EXIT
LINK
DSA
DEC,XFLC
END
HDNG*
Phase
Needed
6
6
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
7
12
5
Phase Needed
is in Core
Phase Needled
is not in Core
BSC L to
BSC L to
DCA
INSTA
EQUA
ORGA
BSSA
EBCA
CALLA
EXITA
L1NKA
DSAA
DECA
ENDA
HDNG5+2
GETS6
GETS6
GETS5
GETS5
GETS5
GETS8
GETS8
GETS8
GETS8
GETS8
GETS7
GTS12
GETS5
*When HDNG occurs whi Ie in Phase 2, reads in Phase 5
and branches to HDNG5. When HDNG processing is
completed, Phase 2 is restored and control is returned to
Phase 2 at HDRT2. In all phases after Phase 2, one of
the two options indicated in the table is executed.
processing phase. When the statement type is
determined (Phase 9), a branch is executed to the
instruction in the branch table corresponding to tlhe
statement type. If the phase needed to process the
statement type is in core, processing begins. If
the phase is not in core, the branch table returns
control to Phase 9. Phase 9 initializes the routine
used to read disk data (FLIPR) and the requested
phase is read into core and the program returns
to the branch table to process the statement.
Section 4: Assembler Program
75
SECTION 5: FORTRAN
This section describes the internal structure of the
1130 Disk Monitor System FORTRAN Compiler programs which are designed to compile FORTRAN
source statem ents into object programs. The source
statements must conform to the statement specifications given in the 1130 FORTRAN Language publication (Form C26-5933).
PROGRAM PURPOSE
The FORTRAN Compiler accepts statements of a
source program written in the 1130 FORTRAN
language as input (see Figure 12) and translates
them into machine language instructions, which
form the object program. The object program can
then be loaded, along with the required subroutines,
for execution.
The compiler-generated machine language coding
includes a large percentage of branch instructions
which transfer control to subroutines during execution of the program. Thus, it is the subroutines
that perform the majority of the operations in any
given problem; however, it is the compiler-generated coding that selects and directs the subroutines.
FORTRAN source
statements
II
FOR
Figure 12.
}
FORTRAN con"ol ,.oo,d.
FORTRAN Input (card form)
GENERAL COMPILER DESCRIPTION
The FORTRAN Compiler consists of a series of 28
phases. Generally grouping the phases, Phases 1
and 2 are initialization phases which set up the
76
compiler-reserved areas, int,errupt levels, etc.
Phases 3, 4, and 5 are the control phases which
read control records, set Communications Area
indicators, read the source statements, and ready
them for the compilation phases. Phases 6 through
11 are speCification phases which process the
specification statements and other definitive information. Phases 12 through 20 are the analysis
phases which perform the actual compilation.
Phases 21 through 27 are the output phases, and
Phase 28 is a recovery phase which restores the
Skeleton Supervisor.
PHASE OBJECTIVES
The following is a list of the compiler phases and
their major objectives.
1. First Sector - initializes the loader routines.
2. Second Sector - stores the Skeleton Supervisor
on the disk and loads the Input Phase.
3. Input - reads the control records and source
statements.
4. Classifier - determines the statement type and
places the type code in the ID word.
5. Check Order/Statement Number - checks for
the presence and sequence of SUBROUTINE,
FUNCTION, Type, DIMENSION, COMMON,
and EQUIVALENCE statements and places
statement numbers in the Symbol Table.
6. COMMON/SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION places variable names and dimension information in the Symbol Table; checks for a SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement and, if
found, places the name and dum my argument
names in the Symbol Table.
7. DIMENSION/REAL and INTEGER - places
DIMENSION statement information in the
Symbol Table and indicates the proper mode
for REAL and INTEGER statement variables.
8. Real Constant - places the names of real
constants in the Symbol Table.
9. DEFINE FILE - checks the syntax of DEFINE
FILE, CALL LINK, and CALL EXIT statements
and determines the defined file specifications.
10. Variable and Statement Function - places the
names of variables, integer constants, and
statement function parameters in the Symbol
Table.
11. FORMAT - converts FORMAT statements into
a special form for use by the object time
input/ output routines.
12. Subscript Decomposition - calculates the
constants to be used in subscript calculation at
object time.
13. Ascan I - checks the syntax of all arithmetic,
IF, CALL, and statement function statements.
14. Ascan II - checks the syntax of all READ,
WRITE, FIND and GO TO statements.
15. DO, CONTINUE, etc. - replaces DO statements with a loop initialization statement and
inserts a DO test statement following the DO
loop termination statement. This phase also
handles STOP, PAUSE, and END statements.
16. Subscript Optimize - replaces subscript expre ssions with an index re gister tag.
17. Scan - changes all READ, WRITE, GO TO,
CALL, IF, arithmetic, and statement function
statements into modified Polish notation.
18. Expander I - replaces READ, WRITE, GO TO,
and RETURN statements with object coding.
19. Expander II - replaces all CALL, IF, arithmetic, and statement function statements with
object coding.
20. Data Allocation - allocates an object time
storage area for all variables.
21. Compilation Errors - prints out unreferenced
statement numbers, undefined variables, and
error codes for erroneous statements.
22. Statement Allocation - determines the storage
allocation for object program coding.
23. List Statement Allocation - lists the relative
statement number addresses, if requested.
24. List Symbol Table - lists the subprogram names
from the Symbol Table and System Subroutine
names found in the statement string, if requested.
25. List Constants - computes the addresses of the
constants and lists them, if requested.
26. Output I - builds the program and data header
records and places them into Working Storage.
This phase also outputs the real and integer
constants into Working Storage.
27. Output II - completes the conversion of the
statement string to object coding and places the
object program into Working Storage.
28. Recovery - restores the Skeleton Supervisor
and returns control to it.
29. Dump - dumps the contents of the Symbol Table,
Communications Are a, and String Area, upon
request.
CONTROL RECORDS
The FORTRAN control records are discussed in
detail in the publication IBM 1130 Card/Paper Tape
Programming System Operator's Guide (Form
C26-3629).
CORE STORAGE LAYOUT
Figure 13 illustrates the layout of core storage
during compilation. The hexadecimal addresses
listed are approximate and should not be construEed
as the final address assignments. For the actual
addresses, refer to the program listings using tHe
symbolic labels.
Hardware Area
/
0042
String Area
~._._._._._._._._._._
/7590
Phases 3 and 28 origin here
t
Symbol Table
/
7~50
/
7984
FORTRAN Communications Area
Othe, phases od9;n he'e
1
-.-.-.-.-._._.-.-.Phase 1 origin
COMMON Save Area
/ lEBC
/
7F09
/
7F2B
/
7FFF
ROL Routine
DISKF Routine
Figure 13.
Layout of Storage during Compilation
Section 5: FORTMN
77
Compiler-reserved Areas
Two areas of storage are reserved by the compiler.
The first area, in the low-addressed words of
storage, is comprised of approximately 66 words
of storage. In this area are the index registers,
the Interrupt Transfer Vector (lTV), interrupt
traps, information pertaining to the restoration of
the Skeleton Supervisor, and a CALL EXIT routine.
The second area, in the high -addressed words
of storage, is comprised of approximately 247
words of storage. In this area are stored the ROL,
DISKF, and DUMP routines. The DUMP routine
calls the Dump Phase upon request; the ROL and
DISKF routines control and execute the phase-tophase transfer.
Phase 1, of which these routines are a part, is
loaded into these locations by the Supervisor when
the FORTRAN Compiler is initialized. These three
routines are resident in storage all during the
com pi lation.
FOR TRAN Communications Area
The FORTRAN Communications Area consists of 52
words of storage where information obtained from
the control records and compiler-generated addresses and indicators are kept. This information
is available to any phase needing it. The contents
of the FORTRAN Communications Area words are
described in Table 5.
Phase Area
The Phase Area is the area into which the various
phases of the compiler are read by the ROL routine.
The size of the Phase Area is determined by the
size of the largest phase of the compiler.
Each phase, when loaded into the Phase Area,
overlays the preceding phase. There are three
phases, however, which are exceptional in that they
are loaded at some location other than the Phase
Area origin. Phase 1 is loaded into high-addressed
storage so that the ROL and DISKF routines occupy
initially the positions they will occupy throughout
the compilation. The control card analysis portion
of Phase 3 is loaded into the String Area. This
portion of the phase is in use only until the control
78
cards have been processed and is overlaid by the
source statements. Phase 28, the Recovery phase
which follows the compilation, is also loaded into
the string Area. The compilation, however, is
com pleted by the time this phase is loaded. If the
Recovery Phase should be loaded during compilation, due to an overlap or disk error, the Statement
String is overlaid by the Recovery Phase.
COMMON Save Area
The COMMON Save Area is composed of nine words
of storage used to save core location ten and vari0us addresses which are used by the Recovery
Phase, if and when it should be called.
Symbol Table
The Symbol Table contains entries for variables,
constants, statement numbers, various compilergenerated labels and compiler-generated temporary
storage locations.
The first entry of the Symbol Table occupies the
three highest-addressed words of the String Area;
i. e., the 3 words just below the first word of the
Communications Area. The second entry is positioned in the lower-numbered core storage words
adjacent to the first entry, etc.
During the initialization of the Symbol Table in
Phase 3, three words of storage are reserved for
the first Symbol Table entry. This entry is not
made, however, until Phase 5. From this point
the size of the Symbol Table varies from phase to
phase until it achieves its largest size in Phase 19.
Its size always includes the three words reserved
for the next Symbol Table entry.
During Phases 5 through 19, the Symbol Table
contains variables, constants, and statement numbers. Information for these entries has been removed from the statement string and has been
replaced by pOinters to corresponding Symbol Table
locations. Also, the Symbol Table contains the
various compiler-generated labels and temporary
storage locations used in compilation.
During the output phases, 20 through 27, these
entries in the Symbol Table are replaced by object
time addresses which are inserted into the object
coding by Phase 27.
Table 5.
Word
FORTRAN Communications Area
Description of Contents
Symbolic Name
1
SOFS
The address of the start of the string.
2
EOFS
The address of the end of the string.
3
SOFST
The address of the start of the Symbol Table.
4
SOFNS
The address of the start of the non-statement-number entries in the Symbol Table.
5
SOFXT
Phases 1-20. The address of the start of the Symbol Table entries for SGTs (subscript-generated temporary variables).
Phases 21-25. The work area word count.
6
SOFGT
Phases 1-20. The address of the start of the Symbol Table entries for GTs (generated temporary storage locations).
Phases 21-25. The constant area word count.
7
EOFST
The address of the end of the Symbol Table.
8
COMaN
Phases 1-19. The address of the next available word for COMMON storage.
Phase 20. The address of the highest addressed word reserved for COMMON storage.
Phase 21 - Not used.
Phases 22-25 - Relative.entry point.
9
CSIZE
All phases except Phase 20. The COMMON area word count.
Phase 20. The address of the lowest-addressed word reserved for COMMON storage.
10
ERROR
Bit 15 set to 1 indicates overlap error.
Bit 14 set to 1 indicates other error.
11-12
FNAME
The program name (obtained from the *NAME control record, or SUBROUTINE, or FUNCTION statement).
Stored in name code.
13
SORF
Set positive to indicate FUNCTION.
Set negative to indicate SUBROU!'NE.
14
CCWD
Control card word.
set to 1
Bit 15
Bit 14
set to 1
set to 1
Bit 13
Bit 12
set to 1
set to 1
Bit 11
Bit 10
set to 1
Bit 9
set to 1
set to 1
Bit 8
Bit 6
set to 1
Bit 5
set to 1
15
16
lacs
DFCNT
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
i nd i cates
indicates
indicates
lacs Control Card Word.
Bit 15
set to 1
indicates
Bit 14
set to 1
indicates
Bit 13
set to 1
indicates
Bit 10
set to 1
indicates
set to 1
indicates
Bit 9
Bit8
set to 1
indicates
Transfer Trace.
Arithmetic Trace.
Extended Precision.
List Symbol Table.
List Subprogram Name.
List Source Program.
One Word integers.
Save Loader.
Console Printer as the principal print device.
1132 Printer as the principal print device.
1442 Card Read Punch.
Paper Tape.
Console Printer.
Keyboard.
1132 Printer.
Disk.
Define File Count.
Following the above 16 words are 36 words containing the IOCC words. The contents of these words is described in the compiler listings.
Section 5: FORTRAN
79
An entry for a subprogram name of COUNT
would appear as:
10 Word
(see Table 6)
Name Word 1
C
10000000010000000 11
0
Name Word 2
U
N
T
0000il 0l0ll0 ~OlOlOllOOo"1ll
Highest-Addressed
Word
Lowest-Addressed
Word
Entry in hexadecima I form - 0080 86B4 C563
ID Word. The layout of the Symbol Table ID word
is given in Table 6. The ID word is formed when
the entry is placed in the Symbol Table.
Name-Data Words. Names in the Symbol Table
are in a format similar to name code. However,
the 30 bits comprising the name are equally divided
between the two words. Bit zero of each word is
set to zero for constants; it is set to one for all
other Symbol Table entrie s.
Format. All entries in the Symbol Table are
comprised of three words; an ID word and two
Name-Data words. The entries for dimensioned
variables are exceptional, however, in that they
are six word entries; the additional three words
contain the dimension information.
The ID word occupies the lowest-addressed
word of the three word entry. The Name-Data
words occupy the two higher-addressed words.
In the six word, dimensioned variable entries
in the Symbol Table, the ID word and Name-Data
words occupy the same positions relative to each
other. The dimension information is added in the
three lower-addressed words below the ID word.
A typical entry is illustrated in the following
example of an integer constant entry of 290.
10 Word
(see Table 6)
Data Word 2
Data Word 1
2
9
0
,.....------...!..-
blank blank
~ ----------
11100000000000000101100101110011101°0000000000000001
Lowest-Addressed
Word
Highest-Addressed
Word
Entry in hexadecimal form -EOOO 65CE 0000
Table 6. Symbol Table ID Word
Bit
Position
Status and Meaning
0
1
0
-
Constant
Variable
1
1
0
-
Integer
Real
2
1
-
COMMON
3-4
01 -
One dimension
10- Two dimensions
11 - Three dimensions
80
5
1
-
Dummy argument
6
1
-
Statement number
7
1 -
8
1
-
Subprogram name
9
1
-
FORMAT statement number
10
1
-
Referenced statement number or defined
variable
11
1
-
External
12
1
-
Generated temporary storage location (Gn
13
1
-
Subscript-generated temporary variable (SGT)
14
1
-
Allocated variabl e
15
Not Used
Statement function name
Dimensioned Entries. The Symbol Table entry for
dimensioned variables requires six: words: two for
the array name, one for the ID word, and three for
the dimension information. Three words are always
used for the dimension information regardless of
the number of dimensions.
For one-dimension arrays, the dimension words
all contain the same information - the integer constant that specifies the dimension of the array.
For example, the entry for array ARRY (10) would
appear as:
.
Dimension Information
po
! 10
LowestAddressed
Word
10
Array Name
10 Word
I
HighestAddressed
Word
For two-dimensional arrays, one dimension
word contains the integer constant of the first
dimension and the remaining two words contain the
product of the first and second dimension inte ger
constants. For three -dimensional arrays, the
first two words are as they are for a two-dimensional array and the third word contains the product
of the first, second, and third integer constants of
the array dimensions. Thus, the dimension information for array B(5, 15) appears as:
75,75,5,10
and the dimension information for array C(9, 9, 9)
appears as:
Statement Body. Each statement, after being COIllverted to EBCDIC, is packed two EBCDIC characters per word. This is the form in which the
statements are initially added to the statement
string.
Statement Terminator. Statements are separatelil
by means of the statement terminator character, a
semicolon. The statement terminator character
indicates the end of the statement body. This
character remains in the string entry throughout
the compilation process. All statements in the
Table 7. Statement ID Word Type Codes
Statement String
The source statements are read by the Input Phase,
converted to EBCDIC, and stored in core storage.
The first statement is stored just above Compilerreserved area in lower storage and each succeeding
statement is placed adjacent to the previous statement thus forming the source statements into a
string. The area within which the source statements
are stored is referred to as the string area.
J
00000
Arithmetic
00010
END
00100
00110
CALL
00111
COMMON
01000
DIMENSION
01001
REAL
01010
INTEGER
01011
DO
01100
FORMAT
01101
FUNCTION
01110
GO TO
01111
IF
t
10000
RETURN
1 = Numbered statement;
set during Phase 3 if
statement contains a
statement number.
10001
WRITE
10010
READ
10011
PAUSE
10100
Error
10101
EQUIVALENCE
10110
CONTINUE
10111
STOP
0,1,2,3,415,6,7,8,9,10,11,12, 13h 4,151
T i l . . .
Statement Types
SUBROUTINE
ID Word. For identification purposes, as each
statement is placed in the string area, an ID word
is added at the low-address end of each statement:
Statement
type code
(see Table 7).
FORMA T type
code set in
Phase 3; all
others set in
Phase 4.
Code
Inter-phase communication;
various uses.
Norm - Binary count of the number of words
used for storing this statement (count
includes 10 word; set during Phase 3).
The Norm is the only portion of the ID word
completed by the Input Phase. The Norm is a
count of the number of words used to store that
statement, including the ID word and statement
terminator.
The statement type codes, shown in Table 7
are added in the Classifier Phase.
11000
DO-test
11001
EXTERNAL
11010
Statement Function
11011
Internal Output Format
11100
CALL LINK, CALL EXIT
11101
FIND
11110
DEFINE FILE
Section 5: FORTRAN
81
statement string carry the statement terminator
except for FORMAT and CONTINUE statements and
compiler-generated Error entries. Error entries
inserted into the string by the compiler are inserted
without the terminator character.
String Area
The string area during compilation contains both the
statement string and the Symbol Table. The statement string is built by the Input Phase beginning in
the low-addressed words of the string area. The
Symbol Table is built during the compilation process,
beginning in the high-addressed words of the string
area.
The sizes of the string and Symbol Table vary
during the compilation. As some items are removed
from the string, they are added to the Symbol Table.
In addition, some phases move the entire statement string as far as possible toward the Symbol
Table. The last statement of the string then resides
next to the last Symbol Table entry. As the phase
operates on thH statement string, now referred to
as the input string, it is rebuilt in the low-addressed
end of the string area. The rebuilt string is referred to as the output string. This procedure
allows for expansion of the statement string.
If at any time during the compilation an entry
cannot be made to the statement string or to the
Symbol Table due to the lack of sufficient storage,
an overlap error condition exists. In the event of
such an overlap condition,the remaining compilation
is bypassed and an error me ssage is printed. (See
the section, Compilation Errors.) Either the size
of the source program or the number of symbols
used must be decreased or the program must be
compiled on a machine of larger storage capacity.
3.
the Symbol Table and the Symbol Table pointer
is retained in the error entry on the string.
The statement string is closed up, effectively
deleting the erroneous statement from the
statement string.
Error entrie s in the Statement String are
exceptional in that they do not carry the statement
terminator character (semi-colon). CONTINUE
and FORMAT statements also do not carry the
special terminator character. All other statements
in the string are ended by means of the semi-colon.
Error indications are printed at the conclusion
of compilation. If a compilation error has occurred,
the message
OUTPUT HAS BEEN SUR PRE SSED
is printed and no object program is punched.
Error messages appear in the following format:
CbAAbATbSTATEMENTbNUMBERbXXXXX
YYY
where C indicates the FORTRAN Compiler, AA is
the error number, XXXXX is the last encountered
statement number, and YYY is the count of statements from the last statement number. See the
publication IBM 1130 Monitor System Reference
Manual (Form C26-3752) for a list of the FORTRAN
error numbers, their explanations, and the phases
during which they are detected.
In addition to the errors, undefined variables
are listed by name at the end of compilation. Undefined variables inhibit output of the object program.
The initialization of each phase includes an
overlap error check. If, at any time during the
compilation, the statement string overlaps the
Symbol Table, or vice-versa, the remainder of the
compilation is bypassed and the message
Compilation Errors
PROGRAM LENGTH EXCEEDS CAPACITY
When an error is detected during the compilation
process, the statement in error is replaced by an
appropriate error entry in the statement string.
Each entry is made during the phase in which it is
detected and the procedure is the same in all phases.
1.
2.
82
The type code in the erroneous statement's
ID word is changed to the Error type (see
Table 3).
The statement body is replaced by the
appropriate error number (see Table 7). The
statement number, if present, is retained in
is printed.
PHASE DESCRIPTIONS
The description of the compiler operation is
divided into separate descriptions for each phase.
Each phase description is accompanied by a flow
chart illustrating the logic flow of that phase. The
symbols used on the charts are the same as those
contained in the program listings.
Phase 1: First Sector
Phase 2: Second Sector
Chart: DA
Chart: DB
•
•
Places the Supervisor into the Core Image
Buffer on the Disk.
•
Loads Phase 3.
Loads Phase 2.
Upon detecting the / / FOR Monitor control record,
the Skeleton Supervisor loads the first sector of the
FOR TRAN Compiler. Phase 1 comprises this first
sector.
The purpose of the phase is simply to load Phase
2 which performs the initialization needed to begin
the compilation of the FORTRAN source program.
The phase is loaded into high-addressed storage
rather than at the normal Phase Area origin. This
is done in order to locate initially the ROL, DISKF,
and DUMP routines into the compiler-reserved
area in high-addressed storage. These routines
reside in this area throughout the compilation and
are used to control and execute the phase-to-phase
transfer (ROL and DISKF) and to print the contents
of the Symbol Table and statement string between
phases (DUMP).
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or function of the major!
routines and subroutines contained in Phase 2.
Errors Detected.
this phase.
Routine/
Subroutine
There are no errors detected in
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or functions of the major
routines and subroutines contained in Phase 1.
Phase 2 stores the Skeleton Supervisor in the Core
Image Buffer on the disk. The CALL EXIT routline,
which is loaded with Phase 2 but not executed, i$
placed into the compiler-reserved area in lowaddressed storage. The defective cylinder table
is saved for use by the FORTRAN disk routines.
Phase 2 loads Phase 3 through the ROL routine.
Errors Detected.
in this phase.
PHOA
CALL1
Routine/
Subroutine
Function
CALL2
PHO
ROL
DUMP
DISKF
PLACE
SK01
Initializes the disk interrupt; sets
up the parameters for the disk read.
Loads the next phase from the disk
into the phase area in memory.
Tests the Console Entry Switches
(1130) or Data Entry Switches (1800);
if dump requested, sets up for the
next phase; calls pump Phase.
Sets up the disk function parameters;
tests disk for not-busy state and
defective cylinders; accomplishes
the READ, WRITE, and READ
CHECK.
Controls the READ, WRITE, SEEK,
and READ CHECK disk functions.
Performs the SEEK operation to a
specified cylinder on the disk.
There are no errors detected
Function
Sets up the parameters for placing
the Skeleton Supervisor onto the
disk.
Writes the first of two portions of
the Skeleton Supervisor onto th~
first sector of the CIB.
Writes the second of two portions
of the Skeleton Supervisor onto the
second sector of the CIB; save~
the defective cylinder table; pl~ces
the CALL EXIT routine into the
reserved area in lower storagel;
loads Phase 3.
Phase 3: Input
Chart: DC
•
Computes the core storage size.
•
Reads the control records; sets indicators iin
the FORTRAN Communications Area.
Section 5: FORTRAN
83
•
Reads the source statements; stores them in
the string area; precedes each statement with
a partially completed ill word.
•
Checks for a maximum of five continuation
records per statement.
•
Lists the source program, if requested.
Phase 3 is composed of two major segments; the
first analyzes the control records and the second
4nputs the source statements. The control record
analysis portion of Phase 3 is loaded into the string
area, while the statement input portion is loaded at
the normal Phase Area origin.
The control record analysis routines, therefore,
remain in storage until the processing of the control
records is completed. They are then overlaid by
the source statements as the statement string is
built by the statement input portion.
Phase 3 bebrins the compilation process by
determining the storage capacity of the compiling
machine. The FORTRAN Communications Area
is set up with pertinent addresses, indicators, and
the computed storage size. The I/O interrupt levels
and indicators are initialized and the control records
are read. I/O controls and compiler indicators
drawn from the control records are placed in the
FORTRAN Communications Area. The control
records are converted to modified EBCDIC and
listed.
The source statements are now read. If the
control records include an *LIST SOURC E PROGRAM or * LIST ALL record, the source statements
are listed as they are read. At this time comment
statements are bypassed from further processing.
During input, a check is made for continuation
statements. A maximum of five continuation statements per statement is permissible.
The body of the statement is packed, two
modified EBCDIC characters per word. Blanks
between characters or words are removed from
all statements except FORMAT statements.
Phase 3 calculates the number' of words required
to store each statement on the string, including an
ID word and two words for the statement number,
if one is present. This number is called the statement Norm.
The statement is now stored on the statement
string. The Norm is placed in the ID word and bit
position 15 of the ill word is set to 1 for all statements having statement numbers.
84
Statement numbers are compressed into two
words. Bits 15 and 16 of the second word are not
used; statement numbers of less than five digits
are left-justified, leading zeros being removed.
The 2-word statement number is inserted between
the ID word for the statement and the statement
body.
Phase 3 handles FORMAT and END statements
in an exceptional manner. The statement type code
is inserted into the ID word of all FORMAT statements. For all other statements this flUlction is
provided in Phase 4.
When the source statement input routines detect
the END statement in the source program, a
special I-word END indicator is placed onto the
statement string rather than the END statement.
If, during Phase 3, an input record having a /
(slash) in column one is detected, control is
transferred to the Recovery Phase and the compilation is discontinued.
Errors Detected.
are: 1 and 2.
The errors detected by Phase 3
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or function of the major
routines and subroutines contained in Phase 3.
Routine/
Subroutine
AXXO
AXX2
AXX3
AXX4
AXX4A
AXX5
AXX6
AXX7
AXXll
Function
Reads the control records and
source statements.
Calls CONVI' to convert the input
buffer to EBCDIC; checks if the
source statements are to be listed.
Lists the source statements, if
requested.
Performs a check for comments
statements.
Perform s a check for continuation
statements.
Checks if more than five continuation statements are encountered.
Checks for blank records.
Calls PUT to place the ID word on
the string; if present, puts the
statement number on the string.
Packs the statement body into two
EDCDIC characters per word; puts
the packed word into the string
area.
Routine/
Subroutine
AXX15
CCDO
CARDS
CONVT
CSL
CNM
DEE
ERST
GETCH
GTWD
HOBO
INTER
NEXT
PHO
PRINT
PUT
PUTS
RTNMN
W8
Phase 4: Classifier
Function
Inserts the statement type code into
the ID word for FORMAT statements.
Checks control record; stores
control information in Communications Area.
Controls column reading into the
input buffer.
Converts input characters to
EBCDIC; converts characters to
be printed into print code.
Checks for valid statement numbers,
if pre sent; packs the number into
two words.
Removes trailing blanks from
statements; computes the statement
length (Norm); inserts the Norm
into the ID word.
Resets interrupts; transfers to the
ROL routine to load the next phase.
Places an error message on the
string in place of an erroneous
statement.
Checks for an END record.
Obtains characters from the input
record; converts them to modified
EBCDIC form.
Picks up non-blank columns from the
input records.
Transfers control to the specific
device routine s on an interrupt.
Place s the END indicator into the
string.
Computes core size; initializes the
FORTRAN Communications Area;
sets up the I/O interrupts.
Performs the printing onto the
system printer.
Places a word into the string.
Generates the special END indicator.
Transfers to the Recovery Phase
if a / (slash) is detected in column
1 of an input record.
Obtains the source program name
from the *NAME control record;
stores the name in the FNAME word
in the FORTRAN C omm unications
Area.
Chart: DD
•
Determines the statement type for each state'""
ment; inserts the type code into the statement
ID word.
•
Places the terminal character at the end of each
statement.
•
Converts subprogram names longer than five
characters to five-character names.
•
Converts FORTRAN supplied subprogram names
according to the specified precision.
•
Generates the calls and parameters which will
initialize I/O routines at object time, if the
IOCS control indicators are present.
Initially, Phase 4 moves the entire statement stting
next to the Symbol Table. As each statement is
processed, it is moved back to the lower end of the
string area.
According to the indicators set in the IOCS w<))rd
of the FORTRAN Communications Area by the
previous phase, Phase 4 generates the required
calls to FORTRAN I/O. If the Disk indicator is ion,
a 'LIBF SDFIO' followed by its parameter is inserted in front of the statement string. Then,
Phase 4 inserts the 'LIBF SFIO' followed by its
parameters. Next, the table of device servicing
routines is built and inserted.
See FORTRAN I/O in the Subroutine Library
section of this manual for a description of these
calls and parameters, an explanation of their
function at execution time, and examples of the oalls
and calling sequences.
Phase 4, beginning with the first statement of
the string, the n proceeds to check each statement
in order to classify it into one of the 31 statement
types. FORMAT statements, already having the
type code, and compiler-generated error messages
are not processed by this phase.
Each statement name is compared to a table of
valid FORTRAN statement names. Each recognized
statement name is removed from the string and the
corresponding ID type code is inserted into the
statement ID word. (See Table 7 for the statement
Section 5: FORTRAN!
85
ID type codes. )
Arithmetic statements are detected by location
of the equal sign followed by an operator other than
a comma. Because of this method of detection,
arithmetic and statement function statements both
carry the arithmetic statement ID type until Phase
10 whieh distinguishes them.
Names within the statement body are converted
into name code and stored. Names with only one or
two characters are stored in one word.
Phase 4 converts all parentheses, commas, etc.
into special operator codes. These operators are
each stored in separate words. Also, arithmetic
operators (+, -, /, *, **) are each stored in
separate words,and a statement terminator character (a semicolon) is placed after each statement,
except CONTINUE and FORMAT statements and
compiler-generated error messages.
Routine
Subroutine
NOTE: The string words containing name or constant characters have a one bit in bit position O.
Bit position 0 of string words containing arithmetic
operator characters has a zero bit.
GETID
The standard FORTRAN supplied subprogram
names specified in the source program are changed,
if necessary, to reflect the standard or extended
precision option specified in the control records.
Also, the six-character subprogram names of
SLITET, OVERFL, and SSWTCH, which are allowed
so as to be compatible with System/360 FORTRAN,
are changed to SLITT, OVERF, and SSWTC,
respectively.
The word FUNCTION appearing in a Type statement and the statement num hers of DO statements
are isolated by the Classifier Phase. Isolation is
accomplished by placing a one-word special operator
(colon) just after the word or name to be isolated.
This process aids later phases in detecting these
words and numbers.
CLFIO
CQCT
ENDD
FCNT
FlO
FUNEX
GET1
GET2
IDAHO
MAKE
MOVE
MOVIE
PSDIO
PTFIO
PUT
QZA1
START
Errors Detected.
is: 4.
The error detected by Phase 4
TWONT
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or function of the major
routines or subroutines contained in Phase 4.
WAIT
Routine/
Subroutine
BACK
86
Function
Moves the entire statement string
next to the Symbol Table.
XXYZ
XYZ
XYZ1
Function
Determines I/O specifications;
generates the *FIO call.
Checks for the presence of IOCS
indicators in the FORTRAN
Communications Area; sets up
the parameters of the *FIO LIBF
to reflect the specified precision.
Checks for the presence of an END
statement.
Isolates the word FUNCTION in the
string entry.
T at Ie of I/O routine call s.
Functional name exchange table.
Gets a character from the string.
Gets two characters from the input
string.
Initializes for a statement type
code table search; ,gets the statement type code; stores it in the
ID word.
Checks for the name SSWTCH.
Stores names in compressed
EBCDIC, five characters per two
words; stores operators in one
word on the string.
Moves statements from the input
string to the output string.
Updates the string pointer (XR1) to
move to the next statement.
Places a call to Single-disk I/O
routine s onto the string, if
applicable.
Places the *FIO call into the string.
Places the word in the accumulator
into the string.
Inserts the new Norm in the statement ID word.
Checks the FORTRAN Communications Area ERROR word for overlap
condition.
Table containing the first two characters of FORTRAN statement
names and the address of the remaining name characters.
Transfers to the ROL routine to
load the next phase.
Closes the string by one word and
adjusts the statement Norm.
Checks for the name OVERF L.
Checks for the name SLITET.
Routine/
Subroutine
ZAO
ZA1
ZA1A
ZA1B
ZA2
ZA6
ZA7
ZA11
ZA13
Function
Initializes for a scan of the
statement string.
Checks for the special END
indicator.
Places the END statement ill
word on the string.
Checks for arithmetic statements.
Checks the arithmetic statement
for the various types of operators.
Places the ID word into the string.
Checks for a DO statement.
Isolates statement numbers in DO
statements.
Places the statement terminator
(;) at the end of the statement.
Phase 5:c Check Order/Statement Number
Chart: DE, DF
•
Checks subprogram and specification statements
for the proper order; removes any statement
numbers from these statements.
•
Checks to ensure that statements following IF,
GO TO, RETURN, and STOP statements have
statement numbers.
•
Removes CONTINUE statements that do not have
statement numbers.
•
Checks the statements for statement num bers;
checks the Symbol Table for a previous entry
of the same statement number.
•
Places the statement number into the Symbol
Table; places the Symbol Table address into
the string entry.
Statement numbers assigned to the statements
listed above are removed. A second check is made
to ascertain that these statements precede the first
executable statement of the source program.
Any CONTINUE statements that do not have
statement numbers are removed from the statement
string. A check is made to ensure that statements
following GO TO, IF, RETURN, and STOP statements have statement numbers.
The SORF word in the Communications Area is
appropriately modified if a SUBROUTINE or
FUNCTION statement is present.
The second pass of Phase 5 scans the statement
string for statements with statement numbers.
Each unique statement number is placed into the
Symbol Table and the address of the Symbol Table
entry is placed into the string entry where the
statement number previously resided.
All statements having statement numbers previously added to the Symbol Table (duplicates of
other statement numbers) are in error.
Mter each statement number has been placed
into the Symbol Table and the Symbol Table address
placed into the string, a check is made to determine
if the Symbol Table has overlapped the statement
string area. If an overlap has occurred, an error
is indicated in the FORTRAN Communications Area
by setting bit 15 of the ERROR word to 1; any
further processing is bypassed by an immediate
transfer to the ROL routine to load the next phase.
All remaining phases are bypassed except Phase 21,
which prints the overlap error message.
Errors Detected. The errors detected by Phase 5
are: 5, 6, and 9.
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or function of the major
routines or subroutines contained in Phase 5.
Routine/
Subroutine
ABEL
Phase 5 makes two passes through the statement
string. The first pass checks to ascertain that the
subprogram and specification statements are in the
following sequence:
SUBROUTINE or FUNC TION statement
Type statements (READ, INTEGER)
EXTERNAL statements
DIMENSION statements
COMMON statements
EQUIVALENC E statements
CKRL
CLOSE
CLOZE
EFF
ENDST
Function
Checks the statement for a statement number.
Checks for REAL statements.
Replaces the erroneous statement
with an error me ssage; closes up
the string.
Checks for the presence of transfer
statements.
Checks for the END statement;
checks for a statement number in
statements other than END.
Section 5: FORTRAN
87
Routine/
Subroutine
EOP
INIT
LOOK
MOVE
NEXT
PUTIN
RMOVE
RMOVl
START
STl
SUBRT
TAG3
TAG4
TAG5
TENT
TENTl
Branches to the ROL routine to load
the next phase.
Initialize s the phase; checks for a
previous overlap condition.
Scans the Symbol Table for a
duplicate statement number.
Updates the string pointer (XRl)
to move to the next statement.
Checks for statement numbers in
statements following transfer
statements.
Places the statement number into
the Symbol Table; updates the
FORTRAN Communications Area
to reflect changes in the table's
length; replaces the string area
statement number with the Symbol
Table address where it is now
located.
Removes the statement number.
Removes the statement from the
string.
Checks for a previous overlap
error.
Checks for a FUNC TION statement.
Checks for a SUBROUTINE
statement.
Checks for COMMON statements.
Checks for EQUIVALENCE
statements.
Checks for CONTINUE statements.
Checks for DEFINE FILE statements.
Checks for INTEGER, EXTERNAL,
and DIMENSION statements.
Phase 6: COMMON/SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION
Chart: DG, DH
•
Places COMMON statement variables into the
Symbol Table; includes dimension information,
if present.
•
Removes COMMON statements from the string.
•
Checks for a SUBROUTINE or FUNC TION
statement.
88
•
Place s the names and dummy arguments of the
SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement into the
Symbol Table; deletes the statement from the
statement string.
•
Checks REAL and INTEGER statements for
the word FUNCTION.
Function
Phase 6 is a two pass phase. The first pass
processes COMMON statements; the second pass
processes SUBROUTINE and FUNCTION statements, including FUNC TION found in REAL and
INTEGER statements.
Pass 1 of Phase 6 examines all COMMON
statements, checking all variable names for validity.
Variable name s are considered valid if the name:
1.
2.
3.
begins with an alphabetic character,
contains no special characters, and
contains no more than five characters.
Unique variable names found in COMMON
statements are placed into the Symbol Table.
Duplicate variable names are in error.
When dimension information is present in a
COMMON statement, the Symbol Table entry is
expanded to six words, the dimension constants are
changed to binary format, and this binary information is inserted into the Symbol Table entry. The
Symbol Table ID word is updated to indicate the
presence of the dimension information and the level
of dimensioning.
See the section SYMBOL TABLE for the format
of dimension and non-dimension entries in,the
Symbol Table.
Upon com pletion of storing the statement information, the COMMON statement is removed from
the string.
The second pass of Phase 6 checks for a
SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement among the
specification statements'. If either is found, the
SORF word in the FORTRAN Communications Area
is modified to indicate whichever is applicable.
The subprogram name is checked for validity. If
valid, the name is added to the Symbol Table and
the address of the Symbol Table entry is placed into
the FNAME word in the FORTRAN Communications
Area. Following this, the subprogram parameters
are checked and, if valid, they are added to the
Symbol Table and the statement is removed from
the string.
REAL and INTEGER statements are examined
for the presence of the word FUNCTION. If the
FUNCTION specification is found, the REAL or
INTEGER statement is processed in the same
manner as a FUNCTION statement, except that the
subprogram mode is specified explicitly by the
statement type.
Routine/
Subroutine
PLACE
Errors Detected. The errors detected by Phase 6
are: 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
sUI\lmarize the purpose or function of the major
routines and subroutines contained in Phase 6.
Routine/
Subroutine
CHK
CLOSE
DDI
DD2
DD3
D02
D03
DTB
FLOP
LLPQ
MOVE
MV
NEX
NEXP
PH
PIECE
Function
Checks for a COMMON entry of a
parameter name.
Closes the string after replacing
the erroneous statement with an
error message.
Updates the string pointer (XRl)
to move to the next string word.
Checks the name for validity.
Checks for a comma operator.
Checks for a valid subprogram
name.
Checks for a SUBROUTINE or
FUNC TION statement.
Checks for a left parenthesis or a
statement terminator following the
subprogram name.
Checks for a valid parameter name.
Removes an erroneous statement
from the string.
Replaces an erroneous statement
with an error message; closes up
the string.
Updates the string pointer (XR1) to
move to the next statement.
Places a dimension constant into
the Symbol Table.
Checks for acomm a, a right
parenthesis, and an overlap error;
indicates the dimensioning level
in the Symbol Table ill word.
Initialize s the phase; checks for a
previous overlap error.
Places the parameter name into
the Symbol Table; sets the
parameter and type indicators in
the Symbol Table; checks for a
PLACQ
PLAC1
PRTE
PTB
RMOVE,
RMV
SOS
START
STAR 1
TCNT
TRY
TST
ZARRO
ZOR
ZORRO
Function
Symbol Table overlap; checks for
a comma or right parenthesis.
Places a variable name in the
Symbol Table; sets the COMMON
and type indicators in the Symbol
Table ID word; checks for a
Symbol Table overlap.
Place s the subprogram name into
the Symbol Table; places the
address of the Symbol Table entry
into the FORTRAN Communications
Area (FNAME).
Sets the subprogram and type
indicators in the Symbol Table ID
word of a subprogram name found
in a SUBROUTINE, FUNCTION,
REAL FUNCTION, or INTEGER
FUNC TION statement; checks for
a Symbol Table overlap.
Converts the dimension constant
to binary.
Checks for the statement terminator.
Removes a statement from the
string; closes up the string.
Branches to the ROL routine to
load the next phase.
Initializes the phase; checks the
first statement to see if it is a
*FIO LIBF.
Checks the FORTRAN Communication Area (SORF) for a subprogram
indication; if none, checks the
first statement to see if it is REAL
or INTEGER.
Checks that the dimensioning does
not exceed three levels.
Checks for the word FUNCTION in
a REAL or INTEGER statement;
if found, indicates the function in
the FORTRAN Communications
Area.
Checks for END and COMMON
statement.
Scans the Symbol Table for the
parameter name.
Scans the Symbol Table for a
duplicate of the subprogram name.
Scans the Symbol Table for
duplication of the variable name.
Section 5 : FORTRAN
89
Phase 7: DIMENSION, REAL, INTEGER, and
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL statements are scanned for the
names IFIX and FLOAT. These subprogram names
are erroneous.
Chart: DJ, DK
Errors Detected. The errors detected by this
phase are: 7, 8, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, and 22.
------
•
Analyzes DIMENSION statements; places
dimension information into the Symbol Table.
•
Removes DIMENSION statements from the
statement string.
•
Places variables and dimension information
from REAL, INTEGER, and EXTERNAL
statements into the Symbol Table.
•
Indicates in the Symbol Table ID word the mode
(Real or Integer).
•
Check EXTERNAL statements for the names
IFIX and FLOAT, which are not allowed.
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or function of the major
routine and subroutines contained in Phase 7.
Routine/
Subroutine
BEGIN
BOB
CHK
CLOSE
The processing of Phase 7 is done in two passes.
The first pas s analyze s DIME NSION statements.
Each variable name found in a DIMENSION
statement is first checked for validity. If the name
is valid,the Symbol Table is searched for a duplicate.
If no duplicate is found, the variable name, along
with its dimensioning inform ation, is added to the
Symbol Table.
If a duplicate is found which has not yet been
dimensioned, the dimensioning information from the
variable name is added to the existing Symbol Table
entry. If a duplicate is found which has already
been dimenSioned, the variable name is in error.
In a subprogram compilation, a comparison is
made to ensure that no variable name duplicates the
subprogram name.
As dimensioned variables are added to the
Symbol Table, the DIMENSION statements are removed from the statement string.
See the section SYMBO L TABLE for the format
of dimension and non-dimension entries in the
Symbol Table.
The second pass of Phase 7 examines the REAL,
INTEGER, and EXTERNAL statements found in the
statement string. Each variable found in these
types of statements is checked for validity. Valid
variables are compared to the Symbol Table entries.
Those variables duplicated in the Symbol Table as
the result of prior COl\tIMON or DIMENSION statements are in error. Those not equated to Symbol
Table entries are added to the Symbol Table in the
same manner as in the first pass of this phase.
90
CLQSE
COZ
DAP
FUN
JAP
LAP3
LAP5
LORD
MA
MIX
MLTN
Function
Checks for a Symbol Table overlap.
Removes the statement from the
string after a statement terminator
is located; closes the string up.
Determines if the dimensioned
variable duplicates the subprogram
name.
Closes up the string after replacing an erroneous statement with
an error message.
Replaces the erroneous statement
with an error message.
Checks for a right parenthesis;
indicate s the dimensioning level in
the Symbol Table ID word.
Checks for END, REAL, INTEGER,
and EXTERNAL statements.
Checks a variable name for a
FUNCTION or SUBPROGRAM name
equivalent or previous dimensioning;
initializes error routine s, if
required.
Checks for the statement terminator.
Initializes to scan the body of REAL,
INTEGER, and EXTERNAL statements.
Sets the REAL indicator of the
Symbol Table lD word.
Checks for a Symbol Table overlap.
Sets the INTEGER indicator of the
Symbol Table lD word.
Indicates a DIMENSION statement;
initializes to scan the booy of the
statement.
Checks the subprogram name for
prior COMMON or DIMENSION
reference; sets the EXTERNAL
indicator in the Symbol Table ID
word; checks for the name
IFIX.
Routine/
Subroutine
MOTQS
MV
NEX
Function
Mo~es the pointer; checks the next
wor~ for comma or left parenthesis;
Che~kS for a subprogram.
Mo es the pointer to the next
stat ment.
Chepks that the dimension constant
is npt zero; puts it into the Symbol
Routine/
Subroutine
TICKK
TICKQ
YELP,
YELPl
ZAR
Tab~e.
NEXP
NEXT
NEXTS
PADS
PHASE
PHIL
PLACE
PLACQ
PREY
RMOVE
SIP
SOS
SUBN,
SUBQ
TARZ
TCNT
TEST
Chepks for a comma or a right paren~hesis; checks to see that there
are no more than 3 dimensional par
eters present per variable name.
Put the dimension constant into
the ymbol Table.
Che ks the next word for a comma;
che ks to see that there are no more
tha 3 dimensional parameters
pre ent.
ChlkS the variable name for validity.
Init alize s the phase; checks for a
pre ·ous overlap error.
Mo es to the word following a
con ma or left parenthesis; tests
for la dimension constant; converts
the ponstant to binary.
PIa es the variable name into the
S bol Table.
PIa e s the variable or subprogram
na e into the Symbol Table.
Che ks for previous dimensioning
of variable; checks SORF word
for he subprogram indication;
deltmines if name is in COMMON.
Re. oves the statement from the
stri g; closes up the string.
Checks for the statement terminator.
Cor verts the dimension constant to
bin ry.
Trc sfers to the ROL routine to
loa the next phase.
Spr ads the Symbol Table so that dime sional parameters can be added.
Mo es the pointer; checks for a
left parenthesis.
Checks to see that there are no
mo: ethan 3 dimensional parameters
pre ent.
Checks for END and DIMENSION
ZOR,
ZORRO
Function
Checks for the name FLOAT.
Indicates Real or Integer in the
Symbol Table ill word of a
variable.
Checks for a Symbol Table overlap;
checks the next word for a comma.
Checks for valid names in REAL,
INTEGER, and EXTERNAL statements.
Searches the Symbol Table for a
duplicate entry.
Phase 8: Real Constants
Chart: DL
•
Scans all IF, C ALL, and arithmetic statements
for valid real constants.
•
Converts real constants to standard or extended
precision format, as specified.
Phase 8 examines the arithmetic, IF, and CALL
statements found in the statement string, checking
for valid real constants.
Each valid real constant is converted to binary
in the precision indicated by the FORTRAN
Communications Area indicators derived from the
control records in Phase 3. The Symbol Table is
checked for a previous entry of the constant. If a
previous entry is found no new entry is made and
the Symbol Table address of the constant is inserted
into the statement string along with the constant
operator in place of the constant. If no previous
entry in the Symbol Table is found, the converted
constant is added to the Symbol Table and the constant operator with the Symbol Table address of the
constant replaces the constant in the statement
string. The statement string is closed up following
the alteration of the string.
Errors Detected. The following error is detected
in this phase: 23.
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or function of the major
routines and subroutines contained in Phase 8.
Section 5: FORTRAN
91
Routine/
Subroutine
CAP
CLSUP
GET
MOVE
OUT
RC
RCC
RC1
RC2
RC3
RC10
RC19
RC20
RC21
RC22
START
SWIT
Z
ZZ
Zl
92
Function
Checks for END, arithmetic, IF,
and CALL statements.
Closes up the string; adjusts the
Norm of the closed statement.
Collects the elements of the real
constant to be converted to binary.
Moves to the next statement on the
string.
Transfers to the ROL routine to
load the next phase.
Checks for the statement terminator;
tests switch 6, indicating the string
needs to be closed up.
Initializes to scan the body of IF,
CALL, and arithmetic statements.
Gets a character from the constant;
checks it for zero or a digit.
Checks whether the present character is E, if E is allowable.
Checks whether an exponent sign is
present and valid, if signed numbers
are allowable.
Checks the constant for validity.
Checks the specified precision of
the program; combines the extended
constant, if Extended Precision.
Combines the Standard Precision
constant.
Checks the Symbol T able for a previous entry of a constant; enters
constants into the Symbol Table if
not previously entered; checks for
an overlap error.
Inserts the constant operator and
the Symbol Table addre ss into the
statement string; moves the statement pointer; checks whether
statement closure is required;
calculates the number of words for
closure.
Checks for a Symbol Table overlap.
Checks whether the present character is a decimal point, if a
decimal point is allowable.
Moves the pOinter to the next word
of the statement body.
Checks the real constant for
validity.
Checks for a decimal point.
Routine/
Subroutine
Z3
Z33
Function
Checks for an operator.
Moves the pointer to the last
operator preceding the constant;
initializes to collect the real
constant.
Phase 9: DEFINE FILE, CALL LINK, CALL EXIT
Chart: DM
•
Checks the syntax of DEFINE FILE, CALL EXIT,
and CALL LINK statements.
•
Determines the defined file specifications.
Phase 9 checks the syntax of all DEFINE FILE,
CALL LINK, and CALL EXIT statements. All
variable names are checked for validity and are
added to the Symbol Table. All valid constants are
converted to binary and are added to the Symbol
Table.
The SORF word in the FORTRAN Communications
Area is examined to ensure that a DEFINE FILE
statement does not appear in a subprogram.
This phase then computes the file definition
specifications; that is, a DEFINE FILE table
com prised of one entry for each unique file. Each
entry consists of, in order, the file number, the
number of records per file, the record length, the
associated variable, a blank word for insertion of
the sector address at load time, the number of
records per sector, and the number of disk blocks
per file. A count is kept in the DFCNT word in the
FORTRAN Communications Area of the number of
file s defined.
Errors Detected. The errors detected by this phase
are: 3, 70, 71, 72, and 73.
Routine Summary. The following descriptions
summarize the purpose or function of the major
routines and subroutines contained in Phase 9.
Routine/
Subroutine
CE1
Function
Modifies the CALL EXIT ID word
Routine/
Subroutine
Phase 10: Variable and Statement Functions
added to the Symbol Table. A second check is made
to ensure that all variable names conform to the
implicit or explicit mode specifications (Real and
Integer). Integer constants and internal statement
numbers are also added to the Symbol Table, provided they are unique. However, names, integer
constants, and internal statement numbers that are
found in subscript expressions are not added to the
Symbol Table until a later phase.
When adding names, constants, and statement
numbers to the Symbol Table, Phase 10 replaces
them in the string by pointers to their respective
Symbol Table entries. The pointer replacing a constant, name, etc. is the address of the ID word of
the Symbol Table entry for that constant, name, etc.
This phase also examines statement function
statements.
The ID word of the statement function statement,
until now identical to that of an arithmetic statement, is changed to the statement function type.
Also, the parameters of statement functions are
added to the statement function name, located in the
Symbol Table. These entries in the Symbol Table
are distinguished by their lack of a sign bit in the
second word of the name.
During Phase 10,the left parenthesis on subscripts is changed to a special left parenthesis
operator which indicates the order of the dimension
that follows.
This phase also converts all operators except
those in subscripted expressions from the 6-bit
EBCDIC representation to a pointer value. This
pointer value is derived from the scan-forcing
table. The conversion is done in preparation for
the Scan Phase, Phase 17, when an operation
priority will be determined through these pointer
values.
Chart: DN
Errors Detected. The following errors are detected
in this phase: 7, 24, 25, 26, and 43.
CK1
CL1
COLL
DF1
DF3
DF5
ED1
FILES
IDSV1
OUT
SKIP
XR2R
Function
[I
to atch the CALL LINK ID word.
Init alize s to scan the statement
bod.
Ch cks the syntax of the CALL
LnJK statement.
co~verts a constant to binary.
Ch~cks for file definition in a
subprogram.
PlaF,es a variable name into the
SYll}bol Table, if not previously
entered.
co~'ects valid constants to binary;
get the file count, file number,
nu ber of records, and record
len h; checks variable name s for
val'dity.
Tr sfers to the ROL routine to
the next phase.
Ch cks that there are no duplicate
file and no more than 75 files
def'ned.
Che~,cks for DEFINE FILE, CALL
EX T, CALL LINK, and END
sta ements.
PI~es the contents of the accumulat r into the output string.
By as se s the rem ainder of the
sta ement.
Co pute s the number of records
perl sector and disk blocks per file;
upd~tes the file count.
I
•
Places variablesJ internal statement numbers,
and integer consiants into the Symbol Table.
•
Places parameters from statement function
statements into tre Symbol Table.
I
•
•
Converts operatrd COWlt is decremented by one
and the I/O area address is incremented by one.
When the word count goes to zero, the routine busy
indicator is reset, the ISS cOWlter is decremented
by one, and the Read fWlction is terminated.
If a check fWlction has been specified, each
character read is checked to see if it is a DEL or
NL character. When the DEL character is encountered it is not placed in the I/O area and reading
continues. When the NL character is encoWltered,
the operation is terminated.
Errors: A read error or a reader not ready condition after the operation is initiated causes an exit to
the user's error routine. Read errors are checked
as each character is read prior to processing the
information.
Call Processing
Interrupt Processing (Punch)
•
Determines type of fWlction
•
Checks status of routine and device
•
Initiates requested operation
The punching of the first character is controlled by
the call processing routine. The interrupt processing routine controls the punching of all remaining
characters. The second character of a record comes
from bit pOSitions 8-15 of the first word. Whenever a complete word has been punched, the word
count is decremented by one and the I/O area address
is incremented by one. When the word count goes to
zero or when an NL character is encountered, if
check is specified, the routine busy indicator is reset, the ISS counter is decremented by one, and the
Punch function is terminated.
Operation: When entered from a mainline program
via an LIBF statement, the contents of XR1, the
Accumulator and Extension, and the status indicators
are saved. XR1 is set to point to the calling sequence
control parameter.
If a Test function is specified, the routine Busy
indicator is checked and the saved registers are restored. If the routine is busy, the subroutine exits
to LIBF+2, if it is not busy, to LIBF+3.
If a Read or Write (punch) fWlction is specified,
the IOCC is built and the CHECK indicator is set if
the control parameter specifies that a check of DEL
or NL characters is required. The routine Busy
indicator is then set and the ISS counter is incremented by one. The Read or Write fWlction is initiated
and the routine exits to LIBF+4.
Error~
An exit to location 41 occurs if the device,
function, or check digits are not valid, if the character cOWlt is zero or minus, or if the requested device (reader or pWlch) is not ready.
122
Errors: A punch not ready condition after the operation is initiated causes an exit to the user's error
routine.
PAPER TAPE SUBROUTINE (PAPTN)
•
Call processing: similar to PAPT1 except
reader and punch can operate simultaneously.
•
Interrupt processing routines similar to PAPTl.
Call Processing Routine
•
Determines type of device and function
•
Checks status of routine and device
•
Initiates requested operation
Operation: When entered from a mainline program
via an LIBF statement, the contents of XRl, XR2,
the Accumulator and Extension, and the status indicators are saved. XRl is set to point to the calling
sequence control parameter and XR2 is set to point
to the constants table for the device called (reader
or punch).
If a Test function is specified, the routine device
busy indicator is checked. If the requested routine is
busy, the routine exits to LIBF+2, if it is not busy,
to LIBF+3.
For Read and Write functions, separate constant tables are built - one for the reader and one for
the punch. Each table contains a device Busy indicator, Check indicator, word count, character count,
I/O area address, and error subroutine address.
All other operations are the same as the PAPTI
operation.
condition is indicated. Then, indicators and constants are initialized, and the ISS counter is incremented by one. The Write function to perform the
operation indicated by the first hexadecimal digit
in the control area character is now executed, the
saved registers are restored, and control is returned to the calling program.
Buffers and Indicators
BUF
BUSY
DEVIC
DIGIT
DUPCT -
ERR+l
FIRST
IOAR
Interrupt Processing Routine
Same as PAPTI operation, except after processing
any read interrupt, the subroutine checks and processes any punch interrupt before returning control
to ILS04.
WDCNT WORK
Contains the data word (or partial
word) being processed.
Set to indicate the routine is busy.
Contains the number of the plotter
being used (zero).
Contains the count of the number of
characters remaining in the data word
being processed.
Duplication counter. Contains the
count of the number of times a plotter
action is to be repeated.
Set to the address of the user's error
routine.
Set to indicate that the PLOT subrootine was entered by an LIBF call
rather than by an interrupt.
I/O area address. Initially contains
the address of the first data word in
the I/O area.
Word Count. Contains the count of the
number of words in the I/O area.
Contains the hexadecimal character
being processed.
Interrupt Processing
PLOT SUBROUTINE (PLOTl)
•
Check for parity error
•
Execute next plotter function
Call Processing
•
Determines type of function
•
Checks status of routine and device
•
Initiates requested operation
Operation: When entered via an LIBF statement, the
contents of XRl, the Accumulator and Extension, and
the status indicators are saved. XRl is set to point
to the calling sequence control parameter.
If a Test function is specified, the routine busy
indicator is checked and the saved registers are restored. The subroutine exits to LIBF+2 if the Busy
indicator is set, and to LIBF+3 if it is not set.
If the Write function is specified and the Busy
indicator is set, the subroutine loops until a not busy
Operation: Upon entering the routine from an interrupt, the duplication counter (DUPCT) is checked to
determine if the previous plotter action is to be duplicated. This check is accomplished by decrementing DUPCT by one. If it does not change sign or go
to zero, the previous operation is repeated and the
routine exits to ILS03 routine.
If DUPCT changes signs or goes to zero, it is
set to zero and the next plot character is obtained
by the GET routine.
GET Routine: DIGIT contains the count of the number of plot characters remaining in the data word
being processed. It is set to four each time a new
word is entered into BUF. As each hexadecimal
Section 6: Subroutine Library
123
digit is moved to WORK, DIGIT is decremented by
one. When DIGIT goes to zero, WDCNT and IOAR
are decremented and a new word is placed into BUF
for processing.
When WDCNT goes to zero, the ISS counter is
decremented by one, the Busy indicator is reset, and
an exit to ILS03 occurs.
THE IBM 1132 PRINTER SUBROUTINE (PRNT1)
Call Processing
•
Determines type of function
•
Checks status of routine and device
•
Initiates requested operation
Operation: When entered via an LIBF statement, the
contents of XR1, XR2, the Accumulator and Extension,
~thE1. status indicators are saved. The control
par~eter is then checked to determine the type of
..fJ,SfCtion requested.
If a Test function is specified (control parameter
zero, i. e., the first hexadecimal digit), the routine
Busy indicator is checked and the saved registers are
restored. If the device is busYJ the subroutine exits
to LIBF+2, if not busy, to LIBF+3.
If the first hexadecimal digit of the control parameter is not zero (non-Test function), hexadecimal
digits 2, 3, and 4 (bits 4-15) are saved in the Extension and the hexadecimal digit for control (bits 0-3)
is checked to determine if the requested operation is
Carri.age Control (3), Print Alphameric (2), or Print
Numeric (4).
If a Carriage Control' operation is specified, hexadecimal digits 2 and 3 of the control parameter are
used to determine the carriage action. Digit 2 controls immediate actions and digit 3 controls actions
after print. The Iafter print switch (AFTIN) is set to
the value of hexadecimal digit 2. If its value is zero,
it is considered set "on" and the action of the carriage will be determined by the value of hexadeCimal
digit 3 and will be executed after printing.
The value of hexadecimal digit 2 or 3 is further
used to determine whether the carriage should space
or skip. If the value is greater than 12, a space is
indicated, if one through six, nine, or twelve, a skip.
If the operation is a space, the contents of hexadecimal digit 2 or 3 is placed directly in the space or
skip counter (SPSK). If the operation is a skip, the
contents of hexadecimal digit 2 or 3 is converted, a
negative sign is added, and the resultant hexadecimal
number is placed is SPSK. The converted number
124
identifies the channel to which the skip will occur.
(See chart below. )
If the carriage action is to be executed immediately, (AFTIN not zero) a carriage space or skip is
initiated, the ISS counter is incremented by one, the
saved registers are restored, and the subroutine
exits to the calling program.
If the carriage action is to be taken after printing, (AFTIN zero) the saved registers are restored
and the subroutine exits to the calling program.
Value of
hexadecimal
digits
2 (immediate)
and
3 (after print)
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
C
D
E
F
Hex value
of SPSK
8008
8007
8006
8005
8004
8003
8002
8001
0001
0002
0003
Carriage Action
Skip to channel
Skip to channel
Skip to channel
Skip to channel
Skip to channel
Skip to channel
Skip to channel
Skip to channel
Space 1
Space 2
Space 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
12
If a Print function is speCified, the numeric
indicator (NUM) will be positive if the output is print
numeric, negative for alphameric. Counters will be
set for print cycles, words 32-39 will be cleared,
bit 15 of word 39 will be set on, and the ISS counter
will be incremented by 1. A start print operation
(alphameric or numeric) will be initiated and the
routine will exit to the calling program.
Errors; An exit to location 41 occurs if any of the
follOwing conditions are sensed:
1.
2.
3.
An end of forms (or not ready) condition exists
An illegal function is being attempted
The word count is negative, zero, or over
sixty
Interrupt Processing
•
Resets the interrupt.
•
Tests DSW to determine the function.
•
Executes the function.
Operation: A sense and reset command is given to
obtain and store the DSW and to reset the interrupt.
The stored DSW is then checked to determine if the
interrupt is a skip or space response:
If a skip -
Compare the channel indicator in the
stored DSW with the channel indicator
in the SPSK. If they are equal, execute
a carriage stop command, decrement
the ISS counter by 1, and continue the
interrupt processing routine. If they
are not equal, the carriage is not at the
requested channel and no carriage stop
command will be executed.
If a space - If the DSW indicates a space response
OR the DSW into PASS. (PASS contains
a bit for each channel passed while
spacing. It will be checked later to
determine if the carriage is at channel 9
or 12.) Decrement the space counter
(SPSK) by 1. If the counter goes to zero,
decrement the ISS counter by 1 and exit
to ILSOI. If the counter does not go to
zero, execute a space command and
continue the interrupt processing. If the
DSW does not indicate a space response,
check for a character emitter interrupt.
If a Print operation is in progress, the DSW is
checked to determine if the print scan has been completed. If it is not completed the routine will exit
to ILS01. The following counters are checked during
a print operation:
1.
2.
Check CTR46. During processing of each character emitter interrupt, CTR46 is tested. If
zero, the stored DSW is checked to determine if
the last print scan had a print scan check. If it
did, 46 more cycles must be allowed so that the
character associated with the print scan check
can be re-processed. In this event, CTR46 is
set to 46 and the routine exits to ILS01. With
each character emittej interrupt, CTR46, if
non-zero, is decreme!ted by one and routine
exits to ILS01. When CTR46 is zero and no
print scan error is detected, routine will branch
to FC70 to check CTR48.
Check CTR48. CTR48 is set to 48 during call
processing for alphameric printing. It is decremented by 1 for each successful print scan. If
CTR48 is not zero, the routine exits to the EMIT
routine to scan the I/O area for the next character to be printed. If the printing is numeric,
CTR48 will be set to 22 by the EMIT routine (22
3.
4.
numeric and special characters). If CTR48 is
zero, indicating that all printing is completed,
the scan field is cleared and a 1 bit is placed in
bit position 15 of word 8 (Core location 39) of the
scan field.
Check CTRI6. CTR16 is set to 48 during call
processing time. It is used to count 16 of the
18 idle cycles required to complete a print operation. The counter is decremented by 3 for
each of the 16 idle cycles. When CTR16 goes to
zero, the SPSK counter is checked. If a space
or skip operation is to be executed, the SPSK
will contain the skip to channel number or a
digit representing the number of spaces remaining to be taken. A space or skip command will
be executed, the ISS counter will be incremented
by 1, and the routine will exit to ILS01.
If the value of the SPSK counter is zero, the
control parameter of the print function is checked
to determine if a space after print should be
executed.
CTR2. CTR2 is set to twelve during cal~oc
essing. It is decremented by 6 each tim an.
idle cycle interrupt occurs. When CTR2
.
to zero, a stop printer operation is executed.
The ISS counter is decremented by 1 and the
routine exits to ILSOI. A skip or space operation can be in progress at this time.
Errors: The PASS indicator is checked after prir.Lting (when CTR16 reaches zero). If it indicates that
channel 9 has been passed, the routine exits to the
user's error routine with a 3 in the Accumulator. If
channel 12 has been passed, the user's error routine
is entered and a 4 is placed in the Accumulator. Upon
returning from the user's routine, the operation will
continue as follows:
If the value of the Accumulator has been set to
zero, no skip to channel 1 will be initiated. User
requested carriage operations will be serviced as
usual.
If the value of the Accumulator is not zero, a
skip to 1 will occur.
Emit: A Read command will be executed to determine
which typewheel character i~ to be printed next. Each
character in the I/O area is checked and a bit is set
in the corresponding position of the scan field for
each matching character.
If the print function is Print Numeric, CTR48 is
set to 22 and printing is suspended until the first
numeric character is in position to print. When the
I/O area has been scanned and the scan field set up,
the routine exits to OUT.
Section 6: Subroutine Library
125
DISK SUBROUTINES (DISK1)
Call Processing
•
•
Determines type of function
•
Initiates requested operation
Checks status of routine and device
Operation: When entered via an LIBF statement, the
contents of XR1, XR2, the Accumulator and Extension,
and the status indicators are saved. XR1 is set to
point to LIBF+2.
If a Test function is specified, the routine busy
indicator is checked and the saved registers are restored. If the routine is busy, the subroutine exits to
LIBF+3, if not busy, to LIBF+4.
If the function is not Test, store the address of
the I/O area into IREAD and IWRITE. This data is
sa ved and also becomes the first word of the read and
write IOCC. Store the original sector address at
SAVE 2. ' The effective sector address is computed
by" adding the file protect address to the original sector address if the displacement option is specified
in the control parameter. If this address is over
+1599, an error exit is made to location 41. Add
eight to the sector address for each defective cylinder
prior to and including the present cylinder (maximum
three cylinders per disk). Word two of the IOCCs for
Read, Write, Control, and Sense is now built. The
ISS counter is incremented by one, the Retry Count is
set to ten, and the Busy and First Count indicators
are set. The usable word count (word count +1 to
indicate the sector ill word) and the usable sector
address are stored in the I/O area. The function is
now initiated.
Seek: If a seek option is specified, set the control
IOCC to indicate a cylinder count of one, modify
CYLIN (internal cylinder count) by eight, and set the
interrupt return to terminate the function. Execute
a seek to the next cylinder.
If a seek option is not specified, modify the read
IOCC to allow the sector address from the desired
sector to be read. Call SBRTA (subroutine A) to
initiate a seek to the cylinder specified by the sector
address in the I/O area. Terminate the operation
when the correct sector address is read.
Head (GET): Call SBRTA to determine if the read
heads are at the correct cylinder. If they are not,
SBRTA seeks the correct cylinder and reads the
desired sector.
126
Write (PUT): The following paragraphs describe
the write operations with or without a read back
check.
Determine if the cylinder is file protected. If it
is, terminate the function and exit to location 41.
If the cylinder is not file protected, call SBRTA
to determine if the R/W heads are at the correct location. SBR T A seeks if required. When the correct
sector has been located, write the data, terminate
the function and exit to ILSO 2.
If a Read Back Check (RBC) is specified, modify
the read IOCC to indicate an RBC with an I/O area
address the same as the write IOCC. The program
branches to SBRTA to execute the Read Back Check
operation.
Write Immediate: Write disk data and terminate the
function. No data error checks are made.
When the operation is terminated, the ISS counter is decremented by one and the Routine Busy
indicator is cleared.
Errors: The subroutine will exit to the user's error
routine if after ten tries the desired sector address
is not located, an irrecoverable read error is found,
or the read back check indicates an inability to write
correctly.
Subroutine A (SBRTA)
•
Check sector address read to determine physical
location of heads
•
Seek the requested cylinder
•
Read the specified sector
•
Process errors
Operation: Initially the internal cylinder location
(CYLIN) is compared to the cylinder address specified in the sector address (TRAC) to determine if
the R/W heads are at the correct location. If CYLIN
and TRACK agree.a read is initiated at SBA10 to
confirm the R/W head loc ation and the return is modified to SBA13. If the location is incorrect, a seek
is initiated towards TRACK. The sign of the difference between CYLIN and TRACK determines the di,rection (if CYLIN is less, the sign is negative and the
seek will be towards the center of the disk). If a
seek is necessary, the return is modified to SBA10.
At SBA10 a read is initiated and the return is modified to SBA13. The routine will continue to loop between SBA10 and SBA13 (reinitializing a seek on
each pass) in an attempt to locate the correct cylinder
address. If the correct cylinder is not found after
ten tries, the routine exits to the user's error routine. If the read at SBAIO indicates that the actual
location agrees with TRACK, the cylinder number is
stored in CYLIN and the routine exits to the return
address stored at SBRTA (BSI return).
MUL T (Read or Write Multiple Sectors)
•
Read or write data on consecutive sectors contained on more than one cylinder
•
Call RBCRT routine
The interrupt return is modified to return to the
RBCRT routine. When all written data has been
checked, the routine exits back to MULT.
FLIPPER ROUTINES (FLIPO, FLIPI)
•
Read LOCALs into storage and transfer control to the LOCAL.
•
FLIPO is used with DISKO and DISKZ.
•
FLIPI is used with DISK! and DISKN.
Description
Operation: The original word cOlUlt and sector address is stored in the I/O area. The remaining word
cOlUlt (stored in WKWC table) is tested. If its value
is zero or negative, indicating that all words have
been read or written, RBCRT is called. If RBC is
not requested, the routine exits back to MULT;
otherwise, the routine exits to the return address
stored at RBCRT (BSI return). If the word cOlUlt
test indicates that more data is to be processed,the
retry cOlUlter is set to ten and one is added to the
sector address. If the three low-order bits of the
sector address go to zero (overflow), a seek to the
next cylinder is required. 320 is then added to
IWRITE (the address of the I/O area), the last two
data words in the I/O area (IWRITE-I and IWRITE-2)
are saved and the new sector ill is inserted in the
I/O area in place of the last data word (IWRITE-I).
The new word COlUlt is now determined and its value
is inserted into the I/O area in place of the next to
the last data word (IWRITE-2). IWRITE is set to
point to the new word COlUlt. One is added to the
sector number in the write IOCC, the read IOCC
(IREAD) is modified to indicate the same I/O area and
sector address as the write IOCC, and the routine
exits to the return address.
The FLIP routine contains two entry points. One is
used with two-word calls (CALL), and the other with
one-word calls (LIBF). After entry, the FLIP routine fetches the XEQ address and the LOCALs sector address in Working Storage from the Flipper
Table (see Section 2, Supervisor, for a description
of the Flipper Table). A test is then made to determine whether the LOCAL is currently in storage by
comparing the sector address from the Flipper
Table with the sector address of the last LOCAL
read. If the LOCAL is not in storage, the word
count is fetched from the Flipper Table.
The manner in which a LOCAL is read differentiates FLIPO from FLIP!. FLIPO reads a LOCAL
into storage one sector at a time, whereas FLIPI
passes the total word count to DISKI or DISKN and
that routine reads in the entire LOCAL. After the
LOCAL is read, or if it was already in storage, a
check is made to determine if the LOCAL is a CALL
or a LIBF. If the routine is a CALL, the return
address is stored in the XEQ address of the routine
and control is transferred to XEQ+1. If the routine
is a LIBF, control is transferred to the XEQ address
as specified in the Flipper Table.
RBCRT (Read Back Check)
FORTRAN I/O
•
Check all written data
•
Return to MULT if RBC is not requested
Operation: The RBCRT routine is entered from
MULT when a cylinder has been filled and a seek is
necessary or when all of the data in the I/O area has
been written. If an RBC is not requested (RBC not
zero) the routine exits back to MULT. If a check is
required, the constant table is searched to determine
the I/O area to be checked. A read IOCC is built
using data saved from the call processing routine.
The FORTRAN I/O routines are a part of Subroutine
Library. These routines provide a link between the
FORTRAN object program and the I/O devices.
There are two versions of FORTRAN I/O - SFIO
and SDFIO.
•
SFIO services non-disk I/O device; it supports
standard and extended precision.
•
SDFIO services the disk I/O statements; it
supports standard and extended precision.
Section 6: Subroutine Library
127
Each of these versions has ten separate entry
points. The entry mnemonics and major functions
are:
SFIO
SDFIO
SFIO
SRED
SWRT
SCOMP
-
SIOI
-
SIOIX
-
SIOF
-
SIOFX
-
SIOAI
-
SIOAF
-
performs I/O initialization
accomplishes a READ operation
accomplishes a WRITE operation
completes WRITE operation
(if necessary)
handles an integer, nonsubscripted element
handles an integer, subscripted
element
handles a real, non-subscripted
element
handles a real, subscripted
ele:ment
handles an integer, nonsubscripted array
handles a real, non -subscripted
array
SDFIO
SDRED
SDWRT
SDCOM
SDI
SDrx
SDF
SDFX
SDAI
SDAF
Device Routines
There are 4 versions of the various device routines
which perform the I/O functions. The version is
denoted by the suffix added to the routine name. The
suffixes are 0, 1, N, and Z. The suffix 0, 1, and N
routines are general utility I/O routines. The suffix
Z indicates a routine specifically designed to support
FORTRAN programs.
See the publication IBM 1130 Subroutine Library
(Form C26-5929) for a detailed discussion of these
various routines.
Input Specifications
The object time I/O requirements of a FORTRAN program are indicated in the FORTRAN control records
which precede the source program at compile time.
These control records are interpreted by the FORTRAN Compiler (see Phase 1 in Section 5: FORTRAN)
and during compilation the calls and parameters
needed to accomplish the I/O functions are inserted
into the object program under a 'LIBF *FIO' (see
Phase 2 in Section 5: FORTRAN) .
FlO Call
The calls and parameters inserted by the FORTRAN
Compiler consist of a FORTRAN I/o initialization
sequence and a table of calls (LIBF SFIO only) to the
routines servicing the devices specified in the *IOCS
control record.
128
Non-Disk
LIBF
DC
DC
SFIO
TS
LIBF
DC
SDFIO
S
B
The first parameter follOwing the 'LIBF SFIO'
denotes the trace device (T) if tracing is specified by
an *TRANSFER TRACE or by an *ARITHMETIC
TRACE control record and integer size and precision (S). S equals 4 or 6 if one-word integers are
speCified by the *ONE WORD INTEGERS control
records. S equals 7 or 5 if either extended or
standard precision is specified by the *EXTENDED
PRECISION control record or by the default condition' respectively.
The second parameter contains the displacement
(D), in words, to the next executable statement (the
following I/O calls comprise a table rather than inline executed instructions).
The SFIO entry to the non-disk I/O routine sets
up the addresses and parameters which are needed
by all the other entry pOints.
At object-time the call to SFIO must be executed
prior to any other I/O call (in fact the 'LIBF SFIO',
or SDFIO if present, is made the first executable
statement in the object program by the FORTRAN
Compiler). If a call to SFIO or SDFIO is not executed or is preceded by a call to some other I/O entry
point, the program will WAIT with /FOOI (non-disk)
or /FI03 (disk) displayed in the accumulator. Pressing PROGRAM START will cause control to return
to the Monitor.
At the execution of a call to the SRED or SWRT
entry point following execution of the call to SFIO,
the call corresponding to the device specified in the
SRED or SWR T call is located in the table of device
routines. The SRED or SWRT routine then executes
the call selected from the table. The called device
performs its I/O function and returns to the SRED or
SWRT routine.
1130 FORTRAN Non-disk I/O
The 1130 FORTRAN non-disk I/O services a nondisk device. The Z suffix device routines are used
to perform the I/O functions.
Assuming that all devices were specified in the
*IOCS control record, no tracing was specified, and
extended precision was not specified, the I/O initialization sequence and calling table for an 1130 program
appear as follows:
LIBF
DC
DC
SFIO
0005
12
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
WRTYZ
0
CARDZ
0
PRNTZ
0
PAPTZ
0
0
0
TYPEZ
0
(Typewriter)
SIOFX/SIOIX
(Card Read/Punch)
•
Sets real/integer type indicator.
(1132 Printer)
•
Sets array element counter to 1.
(Paper Tape Read/Punch)
•
Calculates address of this element.
•
Goes to the FORMAT scan.
(Keyboard)
SIOAF /SIOAI
•
Sets real/integer type indicator.
•
Places the number of elements into array
element counter.
•
Sets address of the first element of the array.
Summary of the 1130 FORTRAN Non-disk I/O
•
Goes to the FORMAT scan.
The following descriptions summarize the entry pOints
and FORMAT scan routines which comprise the 1130
FORTRAN non-disk I/O (see Chart FA).
The ten entry points to the I/O routine are:
SCOMP
The position and order of the device routine
calls are fixed; the calls are always separated by
the 'DC 0'. If a device is not specified in the *IOCS
control record, its corresponding call in the table is
replaced by a 'DC 0'.
•
Checks REDO indicator.
•
Outputs the I/O buffer, if ON.
•
Checks the last format type for slash (/), if OFF.
•
Returns to the calling program, if slash found.
•
Outputs the I/O buffer, if slash not found.
SFIO
•
Saves the address of the I/O call table.
•
Sets the integer length and trace device
parameters.
The FORMAT scan:
SRED/SWRT
•
Sets the Read/Write indicator.
FRMTS (F ORMA T Scan)
•
Sets the address of the FO RMA T statement.
•
Checks the REDO indicator; executes I/O, if
on; gets next word from FORMAT, if off.
•
Sets the I/O unit number.
•
•
Sets the I/O call from the call table.
Checks for types E, F, I, and A; if one of these,
checks that all items in the last list entry were
processed; if so, returns to the calling program.
•
Reads a record and goes to the FORMAT scan
or clears the I/O buffer and goes to the FORMA T
scan.
•
Checks for types E and F, if all previous list
items not processed; if one of these, saves
decimal specifications.
•
Saves field width specifications.
•
Checks for E, F, I, A, X, and H types; checks
for full I/O buffer; displays error code and
WAITs, if full.
SIOF/SIOI
•
Sets real/integer type L'ldicator.
•
Sets array element counter to 1.
•
Sets the address of the variable.
SLASH
•
Goes to the FORMAT scan.
•
Sets REDO indicator on.
Section 6: Subroutine Library
129
•
•
Moves the FORMAT pointer one position.
•
Sets the buffer pOinter to the beginning of the
buffer.
•
Checks for the H-type; moves the FORMAT
pointer one position and goes to the FORMAT
scan if yes; decrements the array count and
address of array storage and goes to the
FORMAT scan if no.
Goes to the FOR MAT scan.
TYPIF (E, F, and I-type Formats)
RDO
•
•
Sets REDO indicator on.
•
Determines if the array is exhausted; returns to
the calling program, if yes; goes to the FORMAT
scan if no.
Sets the FORMAT pointer to the beginning of the
FORMAT statement.
•
Initializes the parameters following a 'LIBF
FSTO' (floating store) or 'LIBF FLD' (floating
load).
•
Goes to Decimal-to-Binary conversion routine
(DEC2) if a Read operation.
•
Determines if storage mode is Real; loads
Floating Accumulator if yes; loads accumulator
and converts the fixed point value to a floating
point val ue if no.
Goes to the Decimal-to-Binary conversion
routine (DEC2).
GRPR1? (Group Repeat)
•
Moves the FORMAT pOinter to the backspace
number.
•
•
Increments the repeat counter.
TYPA (A-type Format)
•
Checks for completed repeat; goes to the
FORMAT scan, if yes; backspaces the FORMAT
pointer and goes to the FORMAT scan, if no.
•
Calculates maximum number of characters
per variable.
•
Gets storage address of A-type I/O area.
•
Truncate left-hand characters if A-type data
exceeds the maximum specification; insert
blanks if data fails to fill the input area.
•
Transfers EBCDIC characters - from storage
to I/O buffer if a Write, from I/O buffer to
storage, if a Read - until all characters are
processed.
F LDR~ (Field Repeat)
•
Increments the repeat counter.
•
Checks for completed repeat; moves to the next
position of the FORMAT statement and goes to
the FORMAT scan, if yes; backspaces the
FORMAT pointer and goes to the FORMAT scan
if no.
TYPX (X-type Format)
DEC2 (Decimal-to-Binary Conversion)
•
Increments the buffer pointer by positions
specified in X-type.
•
Gets a character from the I/O buffer and increments the buffer pOinter.
•
Moves the FORMAT pOinter one position.
•
•
Goes to the FORMAT scan.
Determines if the character is one of the valid
subset; displays an error code and WAITs if
not.
•
Checks for a numeric digit; checks for an E
(exponent) indicator; builds the binary exponent
if E found; builds a binary mantissa if E not
found.
•
Checks for a decimal pOint; increments count of
a decimal digits if decimal found; checks for remaining characters.
TYPH (H-type Format)
•
Sets the address of H data.
•
Transfers EBCDIC characters - from storage to
I/O buffer if a Write, from I/O buffer to storage
if a Read - until all characters are processed.
130
•
Checks for duplication of the E (exponent) indicator, the sign, and the decimal point; checks for
imbedded blanks; displays an error code and
WAITs on any of these conditions.
loads the number with leading blanks, if necessary, if data does not overflow.
•
Outputs mantissa sign and rounded number if
I -type format.
•
Outputs integer portion of the number.
DEC 50 +5 (Process Binary Built Mantissa)
•
Checks if the mantissa equals 0; stores zeros to the
the Floating Accumulator if yes.
•
Adjusts for the exponent; normalizes the number.
•
Checks if the mantissa sign is negative; stores
the number in negative form in the Floating
Accumul ator if yes.
•
•
Checks if the exponent is greater than 250 or less
than 0, stores the number in the Floating Accumulator if not; displays an error code and WAITs
if yes.
Checks if the mode of data is Real; stores the
Floating Accumulator at the storage address if
yes, truncates the number in the Floating Accumulator at the decimal point and stores the resultant integer at the storage address if not.
•
Decrements the storage address and array
counter.
•
Increments the FORMAT pointer and goes to the
FORMAT scan.
BINRY (Binary-to-Decimal Conversion)
•
Outputs decimal point and fractional portion also
if not I -type format.
•
Outputs' E', sign, and exponent if E-type format.
•
Decrements the array count, increments the
FORMAT. pointer, and goes to the FORMAT
scan.
1130 FORTRAN Disk I/O
With the exception of SDFIO, SDRED and SDvVRT,
all calls to the FORTRAN disk I/O entries are
identical to their counterparts in the FORTRAN
non-disk I/O routines. The exceptions are:
SDFIO
The calling sequence is:
LIBF
DC
SDFIO
S
where S is a parameter specifying integer size and
precision. Through SDFIO initialization, this parameter governs the number of words per element to
be moved via the real and integer entries.
•
Calculates the working buffer size.
•
Stores the Floating Accumulator in the work area.
•
Checks for sign; initializes to process positive
or ne gati ve number.
LIBF
SDRED
•
Checks for zero number; zeros out the exponent
if yes.
DC
DC
FILE
REC
SDRED and SDWRT
The calling sequence is:
•
Checks if the exponent is greater than or less than
128; normalizes the binary mantissa, forcing the
exponent to the base 128.
•
Checks for an E-type format; sets the exponent
sign and converts the exponent to 2 decimal
digits if yes.
•
Compares the data length with the field width;
loads the buffer with asterisks if data overflows;
(or SDWRT for WRITE
operation)
where FILE is the ID of the disk file to be read or
written (the file must have been defined by a DEFINE
FILE statement) and REC is the record number
within the specified file to be read or written. FILE
and REC actually contain the addresses of the locations containing the required information.
All disk data is stored in binary; therefore,
knowledge of the type of variable (integer or real) is
necessary only to determine the number of words to
be moved.
Section 6: Subroutine Library
131
SDrx
-'--
The following descriptions summarize the entry pOints
and other major areas within the FORTRAN disk I/O
routines.
•
•
Sets integer flag.
SDFIO
•
Fetches word count for integer variable.
•
Checks and initializes integer precision.
SDAF
•
Checks and initializes standard or extended precision for real variables.
•
Sets real variable flag.
•
Sets indicator showing SDFIO has been called.
•
Obtains number of elements to be moved from
calling sequence.
SDRED
•
Picks up word count for each element.
•
•
Sets read indicator.
SDAI
Enters SRED1.
•
•
Sets integer variable flag.
•
Gets integer size.
SDWRT
•
Sets write indicator.
•
Goes to SREDl.
Gets subscript from calling sequence.
Gets number of elements to be moved from
calling sequence.
SREDl
SDCOM
•
Sets exit to the calling program.
•
Goes to DUFIP to perform final disk write.
•
Verifies that SDFIO has been called.
•
Initializes total number of files for this job.
•
Searches file table for specified file.
•
Issues error condition if file not found.
SDF
•
Sets real variable flag.
•
Picks up word count for real variable.
DFND
•
Gets starting sector address of specified file.
•
Checks for valid record number.
•
Calculates sector containing specified record.
SDFX
•
Sets real variable flag.
•
Picks up subscript from calling sequence.
RECOK
•
Obtains word count for real variable.
•
Sets up associated variable.
•
Calculates position in sector of the record.
SDI
•
Sets integer flag.
DIO
•
Obtains integer size.
•
132
Clears REDO switch.
•
Sets forced read for initial call to disk (if call is
a WRITE, a read must first be given to preserve
data that should not be altered.
MOVE
•
Checks for full buffer, if yes set REDO and go
to DUFIP.
•
Checks for full record, if yes, move position
pointer to next record, increment associated
variable by one, and return to beginning of
MOVE.
•
Sets up move of variable, one word at a time,
until variable is moved. If READ, move from
buffer to LIST area. If WRITE, move from
LIST area to buffer.
•
Reduces variable count, when zero, exit.
DUFIP
•
•
•
•
•
Performs call to disk I/O routine.
Sets proper function parameter for next call.
Checks REDO.
If ON, returns to do a read.
If OFF, checks count, if zero - exit, if not zero -
go to MOVE.
Section 6: Subroutine Library
133
SECTION 7: SYSTEM LOADER/EDITOR FOR THE 1130 MONITOR SYSTEM
-----------
The primary function of the System Loader/Editor is
to load a disk pack with the programs and subroutines
necessary to build a working Monitor System which is
based upon the user's hardware configuration and
individual requirements.
During an initial load operation, the System Loader/
Editor controls placement upon the disk of the
Supervisor, DUP, the FORTRAN Compiler, the
Assembler program, and the Subroutine Library.
During system load, a set of user-supplied
control records causes deletion (bypassing) of progr~ms and/or subroutines not desired or not usable
by the system.
By means of the Load Mode control record the
user can request that the Assembler and/or FORTRAN
not be loaded. Accordingly the location of buffer
areas, tables, and subroutine storage on the disk is
shifted so as to provide as much Working Storage as
possible.
The System Configuration Records specify to the
System Loader/ Editor (1) the devices present in the
System and (2) the Interrupt Level Subroutines (ILS)
and Interrupt Service Subroutines (ISS) to be included
in the system pertaining to the specified devices.
As the storage locations of the FORTRAN Compiler and the Assembler program (if loaded) are
established, the System Loader/Editor initializes the
Commlmications Area (COMMA) with their starting
addresses. The location of the Core Image Buffer
(CIB), Location Equivalence Table (LET), User
Area (U A), and other information contained in COMMA
is also initialized by the System Loader/Editor.
After the system programs are on disk, control
is transferred to DUP to load the subroutines and
update COMMA and LET.
System Reload
In the event that the user wishes to reload the Monitor
System programs (not including the Subroutine
Library), the System Loader/Editor can perform a
reload operation. This is controlled by a control
record (Load Mode control record) inserted by the
user in the System Loader/Editor following the last
record of Phase E1 and preceding the first record of
Phase E2. Bits 14 and 15 of the first 16-bit binary
word of the Load Mode control record must call for
exactly the same Monitor System programs to be
134
stored as were present just prior to the initiation of
the reload operation. During a reload operation,
only the Supervisor (excepting COMMA), DUP, the
Assembler program, and the FORTRAN Compiler
are replaced upon the disk. If the Assembler program and/or the FORTRAN Compiler were not
loaded during initial loading, they cannot be loaded
during a reload of the Monitor system. Also, if the
Assembler program and/or the FORTRAN Compiler
were deleted by DUP after the initial loading, they
cannot be loaded during a reload of the Monitor
System.
SYSTEM LOADER/EDITOR INPUT
The 1130 Monitor System is available in either card
or paper tape versions, ready for loading by the
System Loader/Editor. The card version is supplied
in a continuous card deck (see Figure 17), whereas
the paper tape version is supplied in nine separate
paper tapes which comprise the system (see below,
Paper Tape Input).
User-Supplied Input
The user supplies to the System Loader/Editor the
Load Mode control record and the System Configuration records. These records are generated by the
user when the input is in card form. When the input
is in paper tape form, the user simply selects the
proper Load Mode and System Configuration tapes
from the IBM-supplied set (see below, Paper Tape
Input).
The Load Mode control record indicates to the
System Loader/Editor whether an initial system load
or a system reload is to be performed. This record
also carries the indicators to the System Loader/
Editor which cause bypassing of the Assembler program and/or the FORTRAN Compiler during system
loading. This record is inserted between Phases El
and E2 of the System Loader/Editor (see Figure 17).
The System Configurat.ion records (SCON, REQ,
and TERM) indicate to the System Loader/Editor the
devices that are present in the system and their
associated interrupt Branch addresses. Using these
indicators, the System Loader/Editor loads only
those Interrupt Level Subroutines (ILS) and Interrupt
Service Subroutines (ISS), that are required in the
system. These records are inserted immediately
following Phase E2 of the System Loader/Editor
(see Figure 17).
See the publication IBM 1130 Monitor System
Reference Manual (Form C26-3750) for a detailed
description of the format and use of these usersupplied records.
IBM-Supplied Input
The following is a list of the IBM-supplied programs
and control records which comprise the System
Loader/Editor, excepting the User-supplied input
(see Figures 17, 18, and 19).
1.
The bootstrap loader and Phase E1.
The bootstrap loader is comprised of the first
six cards of Phase E1 in card form. The initial
records of Phase E1 in paper tape form are the
same bootstrap loader.
ILS04
ILS04
ILS03
Figure 17. Organization of System Loader /Editor Input
*EDlr
I LSOO
Figure 18. Loader /Editor Control Records
Section 7: System Loader/Editor, 1130 Monitor System
135
Loader/Editor to load the following phase
or routine at a sector boundary.
Format (in 16-bit binary code)
Word 1 -
non-zero indicates that the
phase to follow involves either
a print device or an I/O device
bit 0 off = I/O device involved
(paper t ape or card)
bit 0 on ~ print device involved
(Console Printer or
1132 Printer)
valid codes for word ~ include:
0001 =1442 card read/punch
involved in phase
000 2 = paper tape I/O involved
in phase
8001 = Console Printer involved
in phase
8002 = 1132 Printer involved in
phase
Word 2 unused
Word 3 type code; hexadecimal 0100,
0200, or 0900
Words 4-60- unused
1
ISS Deck Leod Record
L - -_ _ _ _ _ _
Figure 19.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ISS Subroutilles
Phase E2.
The Monitor System programs: the Supervisor
(including COMMA), DUP, the Assembler program, and the FORTRAN Compiler.
The Loader/Editor control records.
The ISS subroutines.
The Subroutine Library.
The Load Mode control records and System Configuration records for paper tape systems (see
below, Paper Tape Input).
02
04
08
08
09
OA OF 10
12
Within the System Loader/Editor input, the following control records are found. They are listed
by type code. The leftmost eight bits of binary
word three of each control record contain the type
code.
Type Code
01
136
Sector Break Record (absolute sector address)
This record is found within the Monitor System programs. It instructs the System
Sector Break record (sector address relative
to the last sector with data)
*STORE DUP control record
*EDIT special DUP control record
/ / DUP Monitor control record
Sector Break record (sector address relative to the last sector address established
by a type 01 control record.
Data (relocatable binary) record
End-of-program (type F) record
Load Mode control record (see Usersupplied Input. )
FORTRAN Comoiler lead record
This record precedes the FORTRAN Compiler and indicates to the System Loader /
Editor that the FORTRAN Compiler has been
reached.
Format (in IBM card code)
Cols. 1-4 FORT
Cols. 5-72 unused
13
ISS program lead record
This record carries the ISS number of the
following ISS subroutine used by the System
Loader /Editor in determining whether to
load the following ISS subroutine.
Format (in 16-bit binary code)
Words 1-2 - unused
Word 3 type code; hex 1300
Word 4 ISS number (1,2,3,4,6, or 7) of
following ISS
Words 5-60- unused
14
-
20
40
TERM record (a System Configuration record;
see User-supplied Input.)
REQ record (a System Configuration record;
see User-supplied Input. )
Assembler program lead record
This record precedes the Assembler program and indicates to the System Loader/
Editor that the Assembler program has been
reached.
Format (in IBM card code)
Cols.I-3 SAP
Cols.4-72 unused
42
Supervisor program lead record
This record precedes the Supervisor program (follows COMMA) and indicates to the
System Loader/Editor that the Supervisor
program has been reached.
Format (in IBM Card Code)
Cols. 1-4 SUPV
Cols. 5-72 unused
81
Format (in 16-bit binary code)
Words 1-2 - unused
Word 3 - type code; hex 8600
Words 4-60 - unused
Paper Tape Input
Paper tapes are provided by IBM which correspond
to all the standard paper tape-disk system configurations and loading combinations. The appropriate
System Configuration tape is to be selected by the
user from the set furnished. The tape should be
chosen which contains in its header a list of those
devices which the user has in his system.
A Load Mode tape is to be selected to meet the
user's requirements. During an initial System load,
7 to 9 tapes will be loaded depending upon whether the
FORTRAN Compiler and/or the Assembler program
tapes are included in the load.
Tapes 1 through 8 contain binary data and all
records, except the bootstrap loader section of tape
1, are preceded by a word count. Tape 9 contains a
combination of binary records with word COWlt and
control records. Each control record beginning
with / / b or * is preceded by a new line (NL) character and is ended by an NL character. The data
between NL characters is in PTTC/8 code. No word
count is present. In binary control records (those
not beginning with / /b or *) there are no NL characters.
End of last system program record
Tape #=
This record follows the last Monitor System
program and precedes the Loader/Editor
control records.
Format (in 16-bit binary code)
Words 1-2 - unused
Word 3 - type code; hex 8100
Words 4-60 unused
84
86
-
SCON record (a System Configuration record;
see User-supplied Input).
End of last ISS program record
This record follows the *EDIT control record
following the last ISS subroutine. It precedes the Subroutine Library programs. The
System Loader/Editor does not analyze any
ISS records other than the ISS program lead
record (type 13) of each ISS subroutine and
the End record (type 86) following the last
ISS subroutine.
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Contents
The bootstrap loader and Phase E1.
Load Mode control record (IBM supplies a
separate tape for each possible Load Mode
combination; the user must select for loading the number 2 tape that matches his
desired load mode).
Phase E2.
System Configuration records (IBM supplies
a separate tape for each possible configuration; the user must select for loading the
number 4 tape that matches his desired
configuration) •
The Supervisor.
DUP.
The FORTRAN Compiler.
The Assembler program.
System Loader/Editor control records,
the ISS subroutines, and the Subroutine
Library.
Section 7: System Loader/Editor, 1130 Moniter System
13 7
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Two phases comprise the System Loader/Editor,
Phase E1 and Phase E2. On cards, Phase E1 can be
identified by "E1" in columns 73-74 of the deck and
Phase E2 by "E2" in columns 73-74. The program is
organized to operate within 4095 words of core storage and will not use any location above OFFF.
To successfully load the Monitor System, the
user must supply a Load Mode control record and the
System Configuration records (see above, User-supplied Input).
-----NOTE: The following descriptions of Phases E1 and
E2 assume the input to be in card form. However,
the processing for card input is identical to that for
paper tape input, except as noted under Paper Tape
System Loader~
Phase E1
Phase E1 of the System Loader/Editor is read into
core by a 6-card bootstrap loader (RLB). The bootstrap loader occupies locations /0000 through /005D
and /OE50 through /OF24. Phase E1 is loaded into
locations /0028 to approximately lOA 70. When execution of E1 begins, the first card to be read should
be the type 10 (hexadecimal) Load Mode Control Card
which the user has placed between decks E1 and E2.
If the Load Mode card is missing, an error message
will be displayed on the Console Printer and the program will stop~
If reload is specified, Phase E1 compares control record data with certain information in COMMA
to determine if a reload is possible. In processing
with either an initial load or a reload, Phase E2 is
read and stored in sectors /0630 through /063A of
disk Working Storage. The System Configuration
records which follow E2 are read by E1 and stored
in the E1/E2 Communications Area that will be used
by both phases and updated as loading operations are
executed.
When the SCON card is read, E1 clears the area
into which REQ card data will be stored, and sets a
switch (P AK) so that the REQ cards will be read into
an 80 word card buffer without packing to 60 word
format. As each REQ card is read, the program
will branch to a routine (CONVT) which will convert
the IBM card code to binary and store the result in
table CFTA. Each card is stored next to and
following the previous one in the table. More than
six cards will result in an error message.
When the TERM card is read, E1 will search
through table CFT A checking each number from each
card for validity and at the same time will build
138
another table (AUXT2) whose words correspond to
Interrupt Branch addresses. The words which correspond to IBAs that will be used are set positive,
while those that will not be used remain zero. When
the tables are finished, they are written to disk
sector /0632 and control branches to routine LDPT2
to load E2 to core. Nine sectors will be loaded to
core and will occupy locations /03C2 to /OF02.
Control will exit from E1 and enter E2 at location
/0504 (INIT2).
Phase E2
At SET10 Interrupt Branch Addresses will be reset
to link with the ILS routines in E2. At SETDT, defective disk track data (originally from DPIR) will be
set in the DISKO routine of E2. Two additional sectors (/0630 and /0631) will then be read from disk
into core to complete the overlay. From the REQ
card data assembled by E1, two words will be set up
at locations /047C and /047D which will reflect the
principle I/o and principle print devices, respectively. During the system program load, if data is
present in word 1 of a sector break card, that data
will be compared with word /047C or /047D and that
phase will be bypassed if no match occurs.
If an initial load is to be performed (determined
in LDMDD subroutine), reading of the system program decks will commence.
If a reload is to be performed, sector 8
(COMMA) will be read into the disk buffer labeled
BUFFI. If the FLET entry in COMMA is not zero,
it will be stored in the word called CIBA in E2. If
FLET is zero, the CIB address from COMMA will
be placed in CIBA. During loading of the system
programs, an error will be displayed if any sector
requested to be loaded is numbered as high or
higher than the contents of CIBA.
The words in COMMA which indicate whether or
not the FORTRAN Compiler is on the disk and whether
or not the Assembler Program is on the disk will be
checked and compared with the type of load requested
by the Load Mode card. If the reload is to be different from the present status of the disk pack, an error
message will be displayed.
If no error in the Load Mode card is detected, a
switch (SPVSW) is set on (non-zero) which results in
the System Loader/Editor passing all system program cards until the SUPV card is encountered. This
will be located in the system deck beyond those data
cards which comprise sector 8 (COMMA). Beyond
the SUPV card, loading will progress until the· FORT
card is encountered. During either an initial load or
reload, the Load Mode card (which has been saved at
MODCD) is tested to see if the FORTRAN Compiler
should be loaded. If not, switch A (SWA) is set positive and all subsequent cards will be bypassed until
the SAP header card is read which turns SWA off (to
zero). In like manner, MODCD is tested to see if the
Assembler program should be loaded. If not, all
cards will be bypassed until the type 81 End of System
programs card is reached.
At the time the SAP card is read, an indicator
(SAPX) is set on. When the first data card of the
Assembler program is processed, the SAPX indicator
will cause a branch to subroutine ASMCK. If the
FORTRAN Compiler was not loaded and the Assembler
program is to be loaded, the beginning sector address
will be forced to /0080 with the constant ADRF.
Normally the FORTRAN Compiler starts at sector
/0080 and the Assembler program at /00E8.
During card to disk loading of any system program, if a sector break card is read which contains
data in binary word 1, that phase involves some kind
of I/O device and is to be loaded only if the device
represented in the break card is equivalent to the
principle I/O device of the system in the case where
the code in word 1 refers to I/O devices. If the code
refers to a print device, the phase will be loaded if
the print device indicated is the prinCiple one of the
system. otherwise switch B (SWB) will be set on
(non-zero) and cards will be passed until a sector
break card is reached. SWB is then set off (to zero)
and sector break processing starts again.
In cases where the system includes both card I/O
and paper tape I/O, the prinCiple I/O device is interpreted to be the card read/punch. If an 1132 Printer
is present with the Console Printer, the 1132 Printer
is interpreted to be the prinCiple print device. This
is reflected in COMMA (sector 8).
Each time that a sector break card is read, the
data-card check-sum routine (CKSR) is reset so that
the data cards following the sector break card may
begin with any sequence number. All subsequent data
cards must then be in sequence until the next sector
break card or an error message will be displayed.
As the system programs are loaded to disk, the
highest sector number used is saved so that the Core
Image Buffer (CIB) can be positioned at the first
available cylinder beyond the last sector used.
When the End of System programs card (type 81)
is read, the System Loader/Editor will branch to
ENDSY and test the load mode. If a reload is being
performed, E2 will be cleared from disk Working
Storage (WS) and operations will halt at OFFF. No
more records will be read. COMMA will remain as
it was when the reload began.
If an initial load is being performed, control will
branch to LDSKL to load the Skeleton Supervisor from
disk to lower core. At MILS in the System Loader /
Editor the data in table AUXT2 will be used to generate for COMMA a code representation of the devices (see discussion above of principle devices)
present in the system. The two words required are
placed in core locations /0060 (principle print) and
/0061 (principle I/O). If the FORTRAN Compiler
was loaded, the beginning sector address will be
placed in location /004A and if the Assembler program was loaded, its beginning sector address will
go to /004B. If no program was loaded, the corresponding locations will contain zero.
Core size of the CPU will be stored in /007E.
The CIB address (described above) will be placed in
/004D and 3 cylinders will be reserved following that
address. The address of FLET is set to zero and
placed in /004F. The sector address of LET in
/0050 will be 3 cylinders greater than the sector
address of CIB. The User Area (UA) , Working Storage Base and Working Storage Adjusted sector addresses will be equal and one cylinder greater than
the address of LET. This value will go to locations
/0051, /0052, and /0053. The UA sector address is
converted to a disk block address and stored in
locations /0058 and /0059. /0005 is stored in locations /0056 and /0057. Before this data is established
on the disk, the 320 word buffer (BUFFI) is cleared
to zero and the fourth word following the sector address is initialized to /013B. This buffer is then
written to disk at the LET address established.
The region in lower core starting at location
/0028 and extending 320 words is written to sector 8
(COMMA) of disk at REST8. Control goes next to
MFILS where the highest level ILS that the system
will require is generated.
To determine what ILS is to be built first, and
how many will be required in all, the AUXT2 table
is entered and the first word containing a positive
number will correspond to some IBA which in turn
corresponds to some interrupt level. When such a
word is found, it will be set negative to indicate that
it should be ignored next time.
In core is a basic framework for single device
ILS routines and a multiple ILS routine. If the configuration deck contained a device which is on level 0
or level 4, an indicator (SETMI) is set which will
cause ILS04 to be the last ILS routine generated.
If the positive word found in table AUXT2 corresponds to an IBA less than 12, the disk format
header of the single device ILS frame will be set up
to match the ILS under construction. SL W13 will be
loaded with the level number. The ILS name, in
truncated EBCDIC, will be loaded at SLW11. Data
required by the DSF and Core Image Loader will be
entered at CILO (the first word of the ILS). The
area code will be loaded to CILA. Disk System
Section 7: System Loader/Editor, 1130 Monitor System
139
format indicator words are included as constants at
the appropriate places in the framework.
When the ILS is finished, sector S (COMrvrA) is
read from disk so that the current Working Storage
address may be determined. The ILS is then written
to disk at that address. If this is the first ILS that
has been built, the next card in the hopper will be
*EDIT •••••••••• ILSOO. When this card is read, control will branch to EDITC where an indicator (FILS)
will be tested to see if the Supervisor has been called.
If it has not, control will go to the Supervisor provided that the cards in the hopper match the ILS that
has been built. This is determined by testing columns
24 and 25 of the *EDIT card. If they do not match the
name of the manufactured ILS, cards will be passed
until the System Loader/Editor stops at an *EDIT card
whose name field does match. At this point the next
card in the hopper will cause the Supervisor to call in
DUP, which will in turn read the next card. The record which DUP reads will be of the type *STORE •••••
WS •• UA •• ILSXX where XX represents the correct
name of the ILS in Working Storage.
After the Supervisor has been called once, indicator FILS will be set to zero and thereafter the System
Loader/Editor will transfer control directly to DUP
Control (DCT!..) at /027C after positioning the correct
*STORE card in the hopper for DUP to read. When
each DUP Store operation is completed, DUP will read
a special control card (*EDIT) which will cause it to
reload the System Loader/Editor to core from location /03C4 upward. DUP will then send control to
/03C4 where a long BSC will send control to the System Loader/Editor at NEWIL.
The System Loader/Editor will continue to search
table AUXT2 until no more positive words can be
found. The re-entry point from DUP will then be set
to point to ISSDK since the next processing operations
will involve ISS decks.
When the last required ILS has been stored, the
System Loader/Editor will encounter a lead record
(type 13) ahead of each ISS routine. The System
Loader /Editor will compare the ISS number of the following ISS subroutine with the System Configuration
data and will either bypass the ISS subroutine or call
DUP to load it to the User Area. When the last ISS
subroutine has been processed, a control record
(type 86) will signal the System Loader/Editor to clear
itself from disk Working Storage and transfer complete
control to DUP to load all remaining subroutines.
1130 Paper Tape System Loader/Editor
A special paper tape reading routine is employed in
place of CARDO and some differences, to be explained,
exist in the way the input buffer (B) is filled. Other-
140
wise, all input record processing and program logic
is no different from the card system. In the paper
tape system all binary input data goes directly into
buffer B rather than first being read into buffer A
and then compressed into buffer B.
Upon entering the paper tape reading routine at
PAPOO, buffer B is cleared and bit 5 of the tape
reader DSW is tested. If not ready, routine will wait
at /OC35. If ready, the first frame will be read. At
PAP60, an indicator (PAK) will be tested to determine if the record should be in binary or in PTTC/S
format. If binary, control will go to P AP62 where
the first frame will be treated as a word count provided that it is not a blank or a delete code. If the
first frame contained a word count that was not zero,
negative, or over /003C, the quantity of words indicated will be read into buffer B (two frames per word)
and control will branch to CARD1 for record processing.
PAK will be set to zero (binary) throughout
loading of the system programs. When the type 81
record which precedes the Subroutine Library is read,
PAK will be set to 1 to cause the next input record to
be read in PTTC/S mode. In such a case, control
will branch to that section of the paper tape routine
labelled PAP61. Since each record in PTTC/S code
begins and ends with a new line (NL) character, the
first NL character will be ignored and the last NL
character will be interpreted as the end of the record.
As each PTTC/8 character is read in, a table,
whose ending address is TABLE, is searched to find
the binary equivalent of the frame, had the control
record been in binary instead of PTTC/S. Not all
characters are included in the table because the System Loader/Editor requires only those parts of control records which would be found in columns 3, 4,
24, and 25 of the same records on cards instead of
tape.
The data gathered is placed in buffer A (as if it
had come from a binary card) and when the ending
NL character is reached, control branches to a routine called STUFF which packs the data from buffer
A to buffer B. The binary data in buffer B is then
processed at CARDl. When the System Loader/
Editor finishes the last ILS control record which it
will read, PAK is set back to zero.
The next record is an ISS control record (type 13)
in binary format. If it is determined from this record that the following ISS should be loaded, PAK will
be left at zero and control will branch to DUP at
/027C. If the ISS is to be bypassed, PAK will be set
to 1 since the next control record will be in PTTC/S
code (*STORE ••••• PT. e UA •• XXXXX). After this
record is read, PAK will be reset to zero and binary
records will be read until the End of program (type F)
record is reached. At that time, PAK is reset to 1 so
that the next control record (*EDIT ••••• ) is read in
PTTC/8 mode. PAK is then set to zero again in anticipation of a type 13 binary record.
After all of the ISS programs are processed, the,
System Loader/Editor will clear itself from the disk
and turn over complete control to DUP to load the
remainder of the Subroutine Library.
During a reload operation, the System Loader /
Editor will expect to find the SUP V binary control
record within the first twenty records following the
TERM record. If it is not found, a tape has been
placed on the reader out of sequence. Error message
3 will be displayed.
Bootstrap Loader
/
005D
/
OE50
/
OF23
/
0028
/
OA65
/
OE50
/
OF23
Core Allocation Summary
Figure 20 reflects core after the bootstrap loader
(the first six records of Phase E1) is in core.
Figure 21 reflects core between the reading of
type F record of Phase E1 and the reading of the
last REQ record of the System Configuration records
following Phase E2.
When the TERM record is read, Phase E2 is
loaded from disk to core as in Figure 22.
After sector /063A has been read from disk, control is transferred to Phase E2 at location /0504 and
sectors /0630 and /0631 are read to core as shown in
Figure 23. During reload operations, the core map
remains as in Figure 23. End of reloading occurs
when the type 81, end of last system program, record is read.
During an initial load, the Skeleton Supervisor is
read from disk to core after the type 81 record is
read. Figure 24 reflects core until the System
Loader/Editor branches to location /0038 to call the
Supervisor.
At this time one of the ILS control records beginning with / /b will be the next record to be read. The
data from the System Configuration records is used to
determine which of these records the Supervisor should
read so that DUP in turn reads an *STORE record
which contains the ILS name which matches the ILS
routine that the System Loader/Editor has placed in
Working Storage. (See Figure 1 in Section 2.)
Mter the Monitor control record (with / /b DUP)
is read, DUPCO is loaded, and control is transferred to it. DUP reads a STORE record and reads
from disk to core whatever DUP phases are necessary to perform the STORE function. Figure 8 (Section 3) reflects core until DUP completes the STORE
operation and reads the *EDIT record which follows
each *STORE record in the ILS group. The *EDIT
card causes DUP to load the System Loader/Editor
from disk to core as in Figure 25 and to branch to
location /03C4.
Bootstrap Loader (cont'd)
Figure 20. The Bootstrap Loader
Phase El
Bootstrap Loader
Figure 21. Phase El
Section 7: System Loader/Editor, 1130 Monitor System
141
/ 0028
/
0028
/
0272
/
/
037F
03C2
/
OEEF
/
0028
Skeleton Supervisor
Phase E1
Phase E2
/
03C2
Phase E2
Phase E2
/
OEEF
Figure 22. Phase E2 - Part I
~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---1
Figure 24. Phase E2 with the Skeleton Supervisor
/0028
Phase E1
/0100
Skeleton Supervisor
E2
/ 0272
/ 037F
/ 03C2
/ 03C2
Phase E2
Phase E2
1--,
DUPCO
/OEEF
/
Figure 23. Phase E2 - Part II
142
Figure 25. Phase E2 with DUPCO
1000
When the System Loader/Editor again needs DUP
to perform a STORE operation, records are passed
as necessary by the System Loader/Editor until an
*STORE record is the next record to be read. At
this time, a long BSC is performed to location /027C
and DCTL overlays core, as in Figure 8, with those
phases necessary to store the ILS routine.
When the ILS routines have been stored, the
System Loader/Editor (read into core by DUP at the
end of each STORE function) te sts for the type 13,
ISS deck lead record. The System Loader/Editor
remains in core (Figure 25), reading cards until an
ISS subroutine is reached that should be put on the
disk. At this time, a branch to DUP is executed and
DUP is again brought into core (Figure 8).
At the end of the last ISS deck, a type 86, end
of last ISS program record causes the System
Loader /Editor to clear itself from the disk and branch
to DUP. For the remainder of the subroutine storing
operations, DUP is in complete control (Figure 8).
This area contains tables AB, AC, and CFTA,
an image of the Load Mode control record, prinCipal
print and input/output device information, and
various other indicators.
Primary Program Entry POints/Labels
Phase
Name/Label
El & E2
SETI0
El & E2
START
El
MODE
El
SETDT
E2
ABSOR
ROUTINE DESCRIPTIONS
This section describes the principal subroutines,
entry points, and tables within the System Loader /
Editor program. In addition, other subroutines and
areas referenced by the program are described.
All references are in terms of labels/symbols
used on both the flowcharts (Charts FB, FC, FD,
and FE) and the program listings. To examine a
specific portion of the program, the user can:
1.
2.
Find the area of interest on the logical level
flowchart.
Use an identifying label/symbol from the flowchart as a cross -reference to both the entry point
descriptions (contained in this section of the
manual) and the program listing.
The program listing, with its descriptive notations or comments, provides a step-by-step analysis
of all areas of the program.
El/E2 Communication Area
During analysis of the System Configuration Records
furnished by the user, Phase El sets up information
in a region located at approximately /03C2 - /0502 in
core. To preserve this information when core is
overlaid by DUP, the area is written to disk storage
before each DUP operation during ILS and ISS loading.
Updating of the El/E2 Communications Area on disk
is done when necessary by the System Loader/Editor.
Function and/or Description
Initializes Interrupt Branch
Addresses for the ILS
routines which are part of
the System Loader/Editor.
Entrance to record read
routine. On the card system, CARDO is used.
Performs checks on the
Load Mode control record
and sets up indicators in the
El/E2 Communications
Area.
Picks up defective track information whi.ch Disk Pack
Initialization Routine (DPIR)
has written in sector zero,
and stores it in both the El
disk routine and in the E 1/
E2 Communications Area.
An attempt is made to confirm that DPIR has been
executed. If it definitely
has-not been executed, an
error message is displayed
and program will halt.
One of several entry points
in routine which loads system programs to disk.
Sector addresses are established in one of three ways,
depending upon the type of
Sector Break control record
processed.
Ordinary data will start
at the beginning of a sector
and will progress until that
sector is filled. The completed sector will then be
written to disk and the next
successive sector read down.
Record information may
overlay all or part of the
sector being IJrocessed.
This will continue until the
program is loaded or until a
Section 7: System Loader/ Editor, 1130 Monitor System
143
Phase
E1
E1 & E2
E2
E2
144
Name/Label
Function and/or Description
Phase
Name/Label
Function and/or Description
E2
IOCSD
SCON
Sector Break record is
read and a new sector address is established.
Clears area in which "AB"
E2
CLEDT
Mter completion of the last
ILS storing operation, the
ISS Subroutines will be encountered. Each of these
is preceded by a control
record (type 13) which contains the ISS number common to the routine. If the
number is not among the
REQ card data, the routine
will be bypassed since no
device is present in the
user's system which can
handle it.
If it is a usable routine,
control will be transferred
to the segment of DUP
which remains in lower
core. DUP will then store
the ISS subroutine and reload the System Loader /
Editor to core.
A control record following
the last ISS routine will signal the System Loader/
Editor to clear itself from
disk and transfer complete
control to DUP. All remaining subroutines will
then be loaded and final updating of COMMA will be
under DUP control.
LDPT2
INIT2
LDMDD
and "AC" auxiliary tables
will be built and feeds control to routine labelled
"CONVT" which will accept
IBM card code and convert
it to binary. The DCBIN
conversion routine is used
in this operation. Converted information from the
REQ System Configuration
records is then stored in
CFT A tables of the E1/E2
Communications Area.
Reads down sectors from
disk as directed by three
initialized control words:
SCNUM is the address of
the first disk sector
to read from.
PGL TH is the number of
sectors to be read.
HXCFG is 2 less than the
core location to
read into.
When E2 is loaded to core
from disk, either by E1 or
DUP, INIT2 will be branched to via the E1/E2 Communications Area. Interrupt branch locations in
core will be set with the
ILS routine addresses in
E2 and control will go to
LDMDD.
Loading of system programs will begin in the
case of an initial load. For
reload, those records
which could change COMMA
are bypassed and the system load is started when a
SUPV control record is
reached. This control
record immediately follows that part of the Supervisor which constitutes
COMMA.
Additional Referenced Entry Points /Labels
Phase
Name/Label
Function and/or Description
E1 & E2
A
E2
ABC
E1 & E2
AC
E1 & E2
B
80-word buffer into which
records are read by card
or paper tape input routine.
Switch testing routine
entered at the time a Sector
Break card is read.
Its purpose is to determine if a phase should
be bypassed or loaded.
Start of a table setup by E1
which contains IBA information.
6o-word buffer area that, if
used, contains information
Phase
El & E2
Name/Label
BASE
El & E2
BUFFI
El & E2
B4HEX
El & E2
CARD
El & E2
CFACT
El & E2
CFTA
El & E2
CFTAL
El & E2
CILA
El & E2
CILO
El & E2
CKSR
E2
CLDUP
E2
CZ
El & E2
DSKAD
Function and/or Description
from Buffer A in compressed format.
Contains sector address
established when last
absolute Sector Break card
was read.
Address of the start of
main buffer used in disk
operations.
Subroutine which will convert limited set of binary
characters to EBCDIC
, code.
Determines type of record
read by testing word 3.
Correction factor used
during system load which
results in the first loadable
data word following a
Sector Break record being
placed at the start of a
sector.
Table where System Configuration records are
stored after converting
their contained data from
IBM card code to binary.
Number of complete records
stored in CFT A table.
Word in the single device
ILS framework where the
area code is placed.
ILS information for the
DSF and Core Image Loader.
Checksum routine. ControIs are reset after each
Sector Break card so that
record sequence breaks
can be tolerated between
loaded phases.
Sequence which will transfer control to DUP Control
(DCTL).
Routine to determine core
size for COMMA using
"wrap around" method.
Word in which number of
current sector to be written to is maintained as loading progresses.
Phase
Name/Label
Function and/or Description
El & E2
EDIT
El & E2
EOP
El & E2
ERROR
E2
FORTT
El & E2
FORTX
E2
HIGH
E2
IBANO
El & E2
ICNTR
E2
INLET
El & E2
ISW
E2 will be loaded from disk
to the location equated to
EDIT when required. DUP
also contains this address.
Branch point when a type F
record is read. A file operation is initiated at this
point so that the probably
unfilled in-core buffer is
written to disk.
When a disk error occurs,
an indicator is set and control is returned to the disk
routine to turn off the interrupt level. Upon exit from
disk routine, the indicator
is interrogated and if on, an
error message is typed and
program stops at a WAIT
instruction.
If PROGRAM START
is pushed on the console, a
retry of the same operation
will be initiated.
Compares new and old (in
COMMA) FORTRAN Compiler address during a reload operation.
Indicator which communicates from the Load Mode
record to E2, indicating
whether the FORTRAN
Compiler is to be loaded.
Routine which saves the
highest disk sector number
loaded during system load.
Later used to establish the
CIB address and others in
COMMA.
Word which indicates what
interrupt branch address is
being processed during ILS
generation.
Contains contents of word 1
from data records.
Routine to set up the sector
which will contain LET following proper initialization.
Used as a "busy" indicator for
the Console Printer routine.
Section 7: System Loader/Editor, 1130 Monitor System
145
Phase
Name/Label
Function and/or Description
Phase
Name/Label
Function and/or Description
E2
JADK
Used in preparation for calling DUP to establish the core
location that sector 9 of the
Skeleton Supervisor will be
loaded to.
Routine to load the Skeleton
Supervisor to lower core.
This includes sectors 8,
9 and A.
Image of the Load Mode
control record.
Routine to restore updated
table and the E1/E2 Communications Area to disk.
Routine to write initialized
COMMA (sector 8) to disk.
Compares new and old (in
COMMA) Assembler program addresses during a
reload operation.
Indicates to E2 whether the
Load Mode control card requests that the Assembler
program be loaded.
Indicator set on at each Sector Break record; it causes
following data record to recei ve special processing.
Indicator that will cause
generation of ILS04 routine
if set on.
E2
SLW13
E2
SPPAS
E2
SPVSW
E1 & E2
DISKO
E1 & E2
WBSKT
E2
WD25A
E2
WS
Word in single device ILS
routines corresponding to
the level number.
Routine to pass all records
except type 13.
Switch to bypass COMMA
region of Supervisor.
Routine to wait for
completion of disk operation.
Double word in loading routine which in leftmost 16
bits will contain indication
of whether record information is to go to current sector. Rightmost 16 bits will
contain relative word location within the sector.
Used to advance records, if
necessary, to the point
where DUP will receive a
STORE record containing a
name which matches the
name of the ILS routine
to be stored.
Routine to pick up current
Working Storage address
from COMMA before an
ILS routine is written to
disk for transfer by DUP
to the User Area.
E2
LDSKL
E1 & E2
MODCD
E2
REST
E2
REST8
E2
SAPP
E2
SAPX
E1 & E2
SCTRI
E2
146
SETMI
The 1130 Disk Monitor System Maintenance Program
(IBMOO) is the program by which the user updates the
1130 Disk Monitor System. The program IBMOO is a
part of the IBM-supplied 1130 Disk Monitor System.
With it~the user can update the Supervisor, Assembler,
DUP, and FORTRAN Programs and the Subroutine
Library as new releases are provided.
The input to the program can be in either card or
paper tape form. However, the input must come from
the principal I/O device.
Figure 26 shows the relative organization of core
storage during execution of the maintenance program.
See Appendix F of the publication IBM 1130 Disk
Monitor System Reference Manual (Form C26-3750)
for an explanation of control record setup, header and
data record formats, and operating procedures. Also
see the same source for the description of the paper
tape input, system messages, and error diagnostics.
The following descriptions summarize the routines
which comprise the basic logic of the program IBM 00.
The labels at the left correspond to the labels to be found
in the program listings (see Charts FF, FG, and FH).
SECTION 8:
THE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
START -
Initializes the pseudo-TV and the IL
subroutines; obtains from the Disk
Communications Area (DCOM) the modification level and the version number
and types them out; determines the
principal I/O device for the system
from COMMA; reads a record from
that device.
If the input is from paper tape, converts
the input record from PT TC / 8 to IBM
card code.
Determines if the input record is a valid
System Program header record.
Extracts from the first header of a modification the total record count for that
modific ation.
Converts to binary the word count, the
relative word number, and the sector
address obtained from the input header.
Converts to binary the version number
and modification level obtained from the
input header.
Turns off the disk non-write switch,
enabling the program to make modifications to the Monitor Programs.
Checks for the names FOR, ASM, SUP,
and/or DUP in columns 1 through 3 of
the System Program header record;
continues accordingly.
Determines if FORTRAN is present as
a Monitor Program; if not, turns on the
disk non -write switch.
Determines if the Assembler is present
as a Monitor Program; if not, turns on
the disk non -write switch.
Checks the version number and modification level from the input header against
those found in DCOM. If the new numbers are valid, the program proceeds;
if not, an error message is printed.
Computes an absolute sector address for
an Assembler modification from the
relative sector address obtained from
the input header.
Checks for a Subroutine header (the
name SUB in columns 1 through 3 of the
input header). If the name is found, the
program continues; if not, the program
initializes for a return to the Supervisor.
PTSW1
-
CDRT1
-
HRCVT -
HDRWD -
MLEV
SlSUB
Hardware Area
HDCHK Communications Area
(COMMA)
Resident Supervisor
SWFOR -
DISKO
SWASM -
VERSN IBMOO
- - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- --I/O and I/O Conversion Routines
-- -- -- --- -- ---- --~----
ASMSW -
Specia I Disk Routine and Disk
Sector Buffer
~----
-- --------- ------Psuedo-TV
~
Figure 26. Storage Layout During Execution of the System Maintenance
Program
SUBHR -
Section 8. The System Maintenance Program
147
MODl
RDISK+2 -
ENDOJ ENJ02
CKSMG -
CSMOK -
148
\Varns the user that an attempt is being
made to update the Monitor to modification levelland then WAITS. If PROGRAM START is pressed, the program
continues.
Updates the modification level in DCOM
alter a modification has been successfully completed.
Types the update complete message.
Types the version number and new modification level; returns to the Supervisor.
Determines that the checksum contained
in the input data record is correct. If
incorrect, an error message is typed
and the modification is terminated.
Moves the modification data from the
input data record to the disk sector
buffer. The word count from the data
record and the relative word number
and total word count from the header
record are used to make the modification.
NWSW
MCRCK -
A2P03
RDATA PCKNG -
Writes the modified sector onto the disk
from the disk sector buffer when the
modification is complete. This routine
then reads the next input record. If the
input is from paper tape, the PTTC/8
is converted to IBM card code.
If the disk non-write switch is on,
this routine does not write the disk
sector buffer onto the disk.
Determines if the input record is a
Monitor control record. If it is, the
program returns to the Supervisor; if
it is not, the program terminates with
an error.
Reads the sector to be modified
from the disk into the disk sector
buffer.
Reads an input data record, either card
or paper tape.
Packs 80 card columns into 60 binary
words.
FLOWCHARTS
User
Programs
Assembler
Program
Supervisor
Subroutine
Library
FORTRAN
Disk
Uti lity
Program
Compiler
Chart AA. The 1130 Monitor System
Flowcharts 149
••••• AZ·········.
•
•
•
SKELETON
SUPERVISOR
••
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
••
X
••• •••• 8Z •• •••••• ••••
• PRESUPERVISOR •
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
:X ..............................................................
.
X
•·.· ..CZ········ ..•
X
•
PHASE A •
• CONTROL RECORO •
•
ANALYSIS
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
01
••••
••
••
x··························.•.
.*. ••
.. ..
XEQ
• ••• NO
••••••••••
••
X..
*..*
X
X
• ••••• FZ········.··
• ••• F4 •••••••••
•
CORE-LOAD
•
CALL LOADER •
AND LOAD
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X.
EXECUTION
•
X
• •
CORE-LOAD
••
.. ..
• YES
...•.Gl..........
•••••••••••••
i
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
.•
*.
•• .LOCAL
•• NO
•
••• ~N~~~t~s6R •••••••••••• X •
*.
.*
•
•
••• ••• EZ.···.··· •••
• •• ·E3 •••••••••
•
MONITOR
•
LOAD NEEOEO •
•••••••• X.
PROGRAM
•
MONITOR
•
•
•
EXECUTI ON
PROGRAM
•••••••••••••••••
.•.x
GZ ..
•
.*.
•
.*
*.
•••••••••••••••
.....G3..........
•
PHASE C - .
••
•• NO
•
INITIALIZE
••••••••• X..
.FILES
•••••••••• X.
TYPE RECORD •
••
••
X.
PROCESSING
•
••••
•
• YES
•••••••••••••••••
•
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••
:X
........................ .•
•
.....HZ..........
••
•
•
•
•
-.
*.
.
H3
•••
••••
NO
••
.*
••
*.
PHASE E
COUNT
•• YES
•
FILES
••••••••• X•• EQUAL ZERO ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
PROCESSING.
••
••
••••••••••••••••••
150
G4 ..
.* .
.*
PHASE 0 - .
••
COUNT
•• YES.
LOCAL/NOCAL ••••••••• X•• EQUAL ZERO ••••••
PROCESSING.
••
••
X
•
••••
• NO
X
Chart AB. The Supervisor
.............
*..*
• YES
••··.·.El··········••
•
•• PHASE B •••
YES
.. ..
.. ..
•..•
• YES
Fl
.
. •.
OZ
••
03
••
• ••••• 04 •••••••••••
•• ·:OR, DUP:· •• NO
.PA~S~~BtYP:· •• NO
•
PRINT
OR ASM
•••••••••• X•• COMMENTS, OR •••••••••• x
ERROR
••
••
•• TEND
••
•
ME SSAGE
*..*
••••
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••••• A2 •••• • •••••
•
••• X.
•
MaN
CALL EXIT
ENTRY POINT
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
.•-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.•
••• •• A3.· •••••• ••
•
•
•
LINKM
CALL LINK
ENTRY POINT
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
...... Bl······.·.··
•
READ IN
COLD START
•••••••••••••
•
X
....··C1···········
READ IN
•
OISKO AND
SKELETON
SUPERVISOR
•
STORE NAME
• OF CALL LINK
•
IN COMMA
••
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
R3
X
••• •• C3 ••••••••••
••
X
...... 01···········
.SAVE CORE ABOVE.
PRESUPERVISOR
•
ON DISK
•
..............
X
...... El······
... ·.
GETA
•
LOAD
•
PRESUPERVISOR
•
•
•••••••••••••
X
ISETS
•••
Fl·•
*. •• NO
•• •*
•• CALL LINK ••••••
*.
*.
....
.*
.*
• YES
X
PREB
.• ·.··Gl.···•• ·.· ••
• SAVE CORE BELOW.
PRESUPERVISOR
•
ON DISK
•
•••••••••••••
:X .......... :
X
•• ••• ·H1 •••••••••••
LOAD
•
1/0 ROUTINES
•
•••••••••••••
•
X
······Jl······.···.
READ IN
•
PHASE A
•
•••••••••••••
•
X
•••••
• 1\;\
•
•
til.
•••
Chart AC. The Skelton Supervisor, Presupervisor, and Cold Start Routine
Flowcharts
151
f·*
f,lit*
*""
~
.. Ill'"
7
..
1<
~
INIT
*•••• Al*.** ••••••
•
•
•••
•••••••••••••••••
••
•
••
INITIALIZE
PHASE A
·...••••'"...
.....Al..........
• 81 •• X.
*
* . X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPI
X
••
•
•
•
NAME2
INITlAlIlF.•
TO READ
•
CONTROL.
RECORD.
B2
•••
JOBI
• ••••• B3 •••••••••••
••
*. •• YES
•• .*
.SKIP CARRIAGE • •
• •• X..
JOB
•••••••••• X
PRINT THE
••••
I'IECORO
•
••••
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
•• '" ••NO
·•......• .
••• $
• (1 •• X.
REAOP
X
••••• ·Cl·· •• •••••••
READ
II RECORD
•••••••••••••
...
X
•••••• C2 •••••••••••
PRINT
•
THE RECORD
•
•
•••••••••••••
x
01
x
••
.lI/
x
4
1
•
02
•• .*
*.
••
••
NO.. /I IN
••
••••• fIRST T~O ••
•• COLUMNS ••
•• ••••
•
(1 •
•••••
•
.*
*••
• *
YES
*.
.. ..
••
ASMl
*. ••
•. .•
••
*..*
.* .*
•• .*
••
••
•••
••
FOR
FORI
*. ••
••
TO LOAD
FORTRAN
•
•
•
•• .*
•••••••••••••
••
..
x
XEQI
*. ••
F3
•••
•••••••••••••
...... ••••. .................
x
.•
••
••
••
G2
•••
••
.. ..
OUP
OUPI
•••
••••• •
G3
••
• •••• G4 ••••••••••
•• INITIALIZE ••
YES
.* .* NON-OUP *. •• NO
•••••••••• X.. ShlTCH ON •••••••••• X.
TO LOAO
•
••
••
••
•
DUP
•
*. ••
...... ••••.
.•................•
...*
*..*
• YES
• • X. KI •
••••• •
x
•••
PAUSI
HZ
••
• •••• H3 ••••••••••
*. •• Y E S .*
$:
•• ••
••
PAUS
•••••••••• X.
WAIT
•••••
*.
•••••
•
Kl •
•• ••••
•
....
•• ••
x
: X •••••••••••
X
••
••
••
•
••
J2
•••
••
.
.
•
*
• ••••••••••••••• *
TYPE
TYPl
*. ••
*...
•• ••
••••••• **•••••••••
••
*
X
x
•• ••••
•
Bl •
•
•••••••••••••
....J4.··*·.···
EXIT TO
•
DUP
••••••••••••••••
••
•
•
••••• •
. ....
.
TEND
LOAD
DUP
x
•••••
•
$:
X
....•.H4*.*
...•.• *.
•• ••••
•
Rl •
•••••
•
*••••
•
•
....
x
K2 .*. ••
Chart AD. The Supervisor - Phase A
•
•*••••• *••••*•••••
•• .•
* NO
•
NO..
••••••••
• •••• J3 •••••
YES
• CHANGE INPUT
•••••••••• X.
DEVICE TO
••
•
KEYBOARD
*..$:
x
152
.*
• NO
•••••• Kl·.·········
PRINT
ERROR MESSAGE
•• ••••
•
III •
•••••
•
•
...··.
••
•• .* NON-XEQ *. ••
• NO
•••••••••••••
FORTRAN
•••••••••••••••••
•• X. Kl •
•• ••••
•
Cl •
•••••
•
•
•
.·.·E5··
•.... ··•
EXIT TO
Io4ULTIl
XECL
• •••• F4 ••••••••••
······F5·.··~
•
•
LOAD
YES
NO
• INITIALIZE
•
PHASE B
••
XEQ
•••••••••• X.. SWITCH ON •••••••••• X.
TO LOAO
••••••••• X
••
••
••
••
•
PHASE' 8
•
* . .~.*
*..*
•
•
'
• NO
• YES
F2
•••
•
....05······.··
EXIT TO
•
ASSEMALER
•
•••••••••••••••• •
•
•••••••• X.
GETA
• ••••• E4 •••••••••••
•
LOAI)
•
•
••••••••• X
FORTRAN
•••••••• X.
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
pRNTl
X
··.·.·Fl·· •• •••• •• •
• PRINT OR TYPE.
COMMFNTS
RECORD
•
* •••• E3 ••••••••••
*• INITIALIZE.•
YES
•••••••••• X.
•
•• • ••NO
•
ASSEMBLER
•••••••••••••
$:
*..*
• YES
INITIALIZE
•*
TO LOAO
••••••••• X
• THE ASSEMBLER •
••
.** .•.••..•••.•••.
x
E2
· ..·.·04.·····
..···
LOAU
• •••• 03 ••••••••••
YES
•••••••••• X.
• NO
El
••
*
*. •• NO •
•• •COMMENTS
••
RECORD
••••••••
*.
•••
ASM
.•.x
OKSUP
•
• •••• K3 ••••••••••
•• YES
• CHANGE INPUT.
•
•
•••••••••• X.
DEVIC~ TO
••••• X. 81 •
.*
• PRINCIPAL 1/0 •
•
•
OEVICE
•
• •••
•••••••••••••
x
•.AF
•••••
• AI·
•••
•••••
• AE •
• AI·
•••
·.···.1
..........•
•
X
•
•
INITIALIZE
PHASE B
•
••
••
•
•••••••••••••••••
•· ••••
•
B3 ••...
•••••
X
.....
• B3··········•
X
RITE
B1·.········•
••.....
CONVERT AND •
•
COMPRESS
•
• MAINLINE NAME.
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
SAVE
LET/FLET
ENTRY
•••••••••••••••••••
GOXEQ
X
••••• Cl·.········
• STORE NAME
•
IN COMMA.
•
•
• STORE LOCAL AND.
• NOCAL COUNT •
.. .•. ..
X
HIT
C3
.•.X
*.
.*
••
••
••
El
••
NAME
BLANK
....
•• ••
.*
.*
X
•• ••••
•
H3 •
•••••
•
•.
•• ••••
• •••• •
GIt..
•
E2 ••••
••••• ••••••
• X
.
.
.•••••••••••••••••.
LOKUP
X
••••• Fl····.· ...•
•
LOOK UP
•
NAME IN
•
•
LET/FLET
•
•
*.
*•• *
•
•
READ IN
THE LOADER
•••••••••••••
...
.*
.*
X
TST2
• •••• E3 ••••••••••
••
•
•
•
INITIALIZE
fOR
CORE IMAGE
LOAD
•
•
••
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
X
•••••• F2 •••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••
• NO
• •••• E2 ••••••••••
•• YES
• INITIALIZE
•
•••••••••• X.
FOR DSF
•
••
•
LOAD
•
• NO
.•.x
.*
-.
INDICATOR
BITS.
YES
•• EQUAL 11
••••••
x
• YES
*. .*
03
•• . * COUNT *. •• NO
•• EQUAL ZERO ••••••
........
J.
....
*.
• YES
••
*.
••
INDICATOR BITS. NO
.EQUAL 10 OR II ••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
01
•
•
•
X
•••••• F3 ••• •• •• •• ••
•
READ IN
THE LOADER
•
•
•
•••••••••••••
••••
•• •G4
••••• ••
X
NAME
Gl
••
•• • * NAME IN *. •• YES
•• LET/FLET
••••••
•.
.. ..
.*
i
·••••..
•
* •. *
• NO
• HI •• X.
ER6 ••••
X
•••••• Hl···········
•
PRINT
•
ERROR MESSAGE
•
•
•••••••••••••
i
•••••
• AD •
• AI.
•••
•
••••••
B3 •.•
•••••
X
•
•
••••G2 •••••••••
EXIT TO
•
THE LOADER
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
PHAZE
X
····G3
........
.•
EXIT TO
THE LOADER
•
•••••••••••••••• •
•• ••••
•
H3 ••••
• ••••• i
.•.
.. .. .. ..
.*
H3
••
*.
ic
••••• GIt ••••••••••
•• INITIALIZE ••
•
TO LOAD
•
PHASE C
•••••••••••••••••••
••
CAROC
•
X
• ••••• HIt •••••• •••••
LOAD
•
• PHASE
C
•
•
X
•••••••••••••
• YES
•••• •• ••••
••
HI
•• X. E2 • •
ic
••••• • •••• •
•.AF
•••••
• A\ •
•••
INDICATOR BITS. NO X
•• EQUAL 00
••••••
*.
.*
.. .
Chart AE. The Supervisor - Phase B
Flowcharts
153
•••••
• Af •
• AI.
•••
X
INPUT
•••••• Al· •••••• •• ••
•
•
READ
A RECORD
•••••••••••••
•
•
X
•••••• 81 •••••••••••
•
•
PRINT
THE RECORD
•
•
•••••••••••••
X
••••• Cl •••••••• ••
••
••
INITIALIZE
fOR *-TYPE
RECORDS
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••••••
••••• •
•
X
NTST...
fTST
•••
ERIO
X
• •••••010 . . . . . . . . . ..
02
••
03,
••
*. •• NO
.*
*. •• tiD
.*
*. •• NO
••
••
•
PRINT
.LOCAL
•••••••••• X..
.NOCAL
•••••••••• X..
.fILES
•••••••••• X ERROR MESSAGE •
*.
*.
.*
*.
.*
X
•
. . . * .*
*..*
*..*
LIST
01
••
••
.*
•••
••
.. ..
.. ..
...
• YES
• YES
.. .. .. ..
.*
.•
i
*.
••••• •
• Dio •
••••••
X
••••• Fl . . . . . . . . ..
••
•••
• AI·
*.
••
NOCAL
•• YES
•• INDICATOR ON ••••••
x
• NO
E2
*.
.*
* ••
*
• NO
.•
x
•• ••••
•
DIt •
•••••
•
i
•••••f2 . . . . . . . . . .
X
•••• *F3 ••••••••••
••
•• SET NOCAL ••
•
INDICATOR
•
•••
••••••••••••••••••
• SET fILES ••
•
••• INDICATOR •••
•••••••••••••••••
X
·····Gl
.......•.•
•
•
X
····.G2
.........•
•• INITIALIZE
••
• DISK 1/0 AREA.
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
•• INITIALIZE ••
• DISK 1/0 AREA.
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••
•
••
SET LOCAL
INDICATOR
••
•
•••••••••••••••••
• INITIALIZE
•
• DISK 1/0 AREA.
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
X
Hl· ••••••• ••
••••••
••
• INITIALIZE
•
TO LOAD
•
PHASE 0
•
••••••••••••••••••••
X
······Jl·.·
.....···
LOAD
•
PHASE 0
•••••••••••••
i
•••••
• AG •
• A2.
•••
Chart AF. The Supervisor - Phase C
•
X
H2 •••••• ••••
••••••
••
• INITIALIZE
.................
•
•
TO LOAD
PHASE 0
•
•
•
•
X
••• • •• J2 •••••• ••• ••
•
•
LOAD
PHASE 0
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• AG •
• AI.
•••
•••••••••••••
•••••
.AO •
i
El
••
.• LOCAL *. •• YES
••
•• INDICATOR ON ••••••
*.
....
• YES
.•.x
154
DLt •
•
•
X
• ••••&3 ••••••••••
X
•••• *H3 ••••••••••
•• INITIALIZE ••
TO LOAD
•
•
PHASE E
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•••••• J3 ••••• ••••••
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••
LOAD
PHASE E
x
•••••
•••
.AH •
• AI •
•
•.AG
•••••
• A2.
•••
•••••
• AG •
• AI·
•••
NOCAL
X
••••• Al· •••
• INITIALIZE
•
•
• TO PROCESS
•
NOCAL
•
RECORDS
•
•••• *•••••••••••••
CAL
LOCAL
X
••••• A2•••• • .....
• INITIALIZE
•
•
• TC PROCESS
•
LOCAL
•
RECORDS
•
*• ••••••••••••••••
*·····•
•
•
•
•.X •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
X
X
••••• 81···.*·····
••
•
INITIALIZE
INPUT AREA
•
•*
•
•
•
.
x
••
••
••
• •••• C2 ••••••••••
.. ..
• YES
X
•• STORE
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
....
•
*••••••••••••••••••
••
WRITE DISK
1/0 AREA
•
ON DISK
*.
•••
••
*.
* •• *
•
•
.*
.*
• YES
••
INITIALIZE
TO LOAD
PHASE C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
.
.
ENDUP
••
• •••• 04 ••••••••••
••••
• YES
••
AREA
ON DISK
•
•
•
1/0
•
•• ••
X
•*
•••
.c~uNfE~g~~TIV::.~~ •••••• X: TAN~~I~~I~~SK :
••
••••• E2 ••••••• •••
*.
AREA. NO
OVERFLO~
••••••
1/0
x
03
•••••••••••••
X
El
• STORE ENTRY •
• COUNT IN DISK.
•
1/0 AREA
•
•••• *.02 ••• • •••••••
MAINLINE.
• NAME IN DISK •
•
1/0 AREA
•
.•
• DISK
····*···
X
••• C3 ••
•••
•
.ADJUST POINTERS.
. ............*.*.
MULTA
••••• 01 ••••• •••••
DOFLO
.
NNDUP
••
CONTROL •• NO
• INITIALIZE
•
EQUAL
•••••••••• X. TO WRITE DISK.
••
•
1/0 AREA
•
••••
•
ON DISK
•
NAMEA
••••
• YES
....
•••
.•.x
B3 . • •
•• NEXT ••
• •••
..SUBROVTINE •• NO
•
•
•• NAME AREA •••••• X. HI •
•• • CLEAR..
••
••••
*. .*
•••••••••••••••••*
C1
••••
B3 *
•
•••• •
•••
•••••••••••••••••
X
••• ••• E3·.·········
READ
A RECORD
•
•
••••••••••*••• •
X
-•••••• E4 •••••••••••
•
*
WRITE DISK
1/0 AREA
ON DISK
•
•
• •••••••• * •••
........... x:
X
:ERI2
X
•••••• F2 •••••
****.·
*••••• Fl ••***·••***
•
•
•
PRINT
•
ERROR MESSAGE
•
•••••••••••••
•
••••• *•••••• *
• AI·
•••
•
•
PRINT
THE RECORD
•••••••••••••
•
•
••••• F4**X••••••• *
CAllB
•• INITIALIZE ••
•
TO LOAD
•
PHASE 8
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
X
•••••• G4 •••••••••••
•
•
LOAD
PHASE B
•••••••••••••
.
X
• AI·
•••
••••• HI ••••• ••• ••
• EDIT AND STORE.
• SUBROUTINE
•
• NAME IN DISK •
•
1/0 AREA
•••••••••
*••••••••
•
•
*
•.AE
•••••
• X•••••••••••
X
•
.....*.. ..
.*••
•*J I •• ••
• DISK 1/0 AREA.
••
•
•
X
••••••f3 •••• •• •••••
x*•
•••
.AF •
X
•••••
• AD •
* AI·
•••
•••••
•
HI *
•• ••••
•
·
.•.x
LOAD
PHASE C
OVERFLOW
• •••
NO
•
•
•••••• X. B3 •
•. •*
• YES
Chart AG. The Supervisor - Phase D
Flowcharts
1SS
•••••
• AH •
• AI.
•••
FILES
X
••••• Al.··· ••• •••
•
INITIALIZE
•
,.
FIlES
•
• PROCESSING AND •••••
• DISK 1/0 AREA.
•• ••••
•
B3 •
•••••
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••••••
....
••
. .......... X:
Bl ••••
.
•
x
: NAIIIE
• •••• B3 •••• •• ••••
• CCNVERT AND •
.STORE STATEMENT.
•
NAME
•
AGAIN
X
•••••• 81· •••••• ••••
READ
A RECORD
•••••••••••••
•
•••••••••••••••••••
.. ... ..
....
C3
••
• DISK 110 AREA. YES.
•
•• OVERFLOW
•••••• X. HZ •
•
••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
01
••
••
.•.X
*.
••
.*
• NO
.*
03
.
•
.*
.•
••
••
•
NUMER
X
••••• FZ •••••• ••••
• CCNVERT AND •
• STORE FILE
•
•
NUMBER
•
•
•
*.
E3
.•.x
••
COMMA
*.
*. .*
F3
*.
.*
.•
•
PRINT
•••••••••• X ERR'lR MESSt.GE
•
•••••••••••••
.*
. ...
.x
....
.*
•
.*
••
..
.X ••
*. •• NO
•• LAST RECORD ••••••
*.
•.
*•• *
.*
.*
•
•
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• AD •
• AI·
•••
X
•••••• H3 •••••••••••
•
PRINT
•
ERROR MESSAGE
•
•••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
AD •
•••
• AI·
•
•••
*
'"
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
••• •
•• •G4
•••••••
••
WRITE DISK
110 AREA
•
ON DISK
••
INITIALIZE
• TO WRITE OISK •
•
1/0 AREA
•
ON DISK
•
•
MUL TA
X
•••••• H4 ••• •• ••••••
• WRITE DISK
•
1/0 AREA
•
ON DISK
•
•••••••••••••
X
•• • ••• • •• •
••• •• ·.G5
••
INITIALIZE
•
TO LOAD
•
•
PHASE 0
••••••••••••••••••••
X
• ••• ·.H5 •••••••••••
•
•
LOAD
PHASF B
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
.AE •
X
••••• J4 ••••••••••
••
•
•
•
••••••••••••••••••••
••
INITIALIZE
TO LOAD
PHASE C
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• AF •
• AI.
•••
•
•••••••••••••
WNDUP
X
••••• G4 •••• • •••••
•
156
• INITIALIZE
• TO WRITf nlSK
•
110 IIRFA
•
ON DISK
••• ••• F5 •• •••••••••
MUL TI
X
•••••• K4 •••• •••••••
•
LOAD C
PHASE
Chart AH. The Supenisor - Phase E
·
X
• •••• F5 ••••••••••
X
• AI·
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
Bl •
••••• •
• YES
• HZ •• X.
ER5 ••••
X
······HZ·· •••• •••••
•
PRINT
•
ERROR MESSAGE
....
•
•
ENnllP
x
• YES
G3
• •••• *
•••••
.AO •
....
••
*.. *
*••
*
• YES
·• ..
•
••••
* •••
*.
•••••• £4 •••• • ••••••
••
NEXT
•• NO
•
•
..COLUMN BLANK •••••• X. B3 •
X
•••
GZ
••
•
*
*.
.DISK 110 AREA. NO
•
•• OVERFLOW,.· ••••••
*.
••
ER4
*. •• NO
.. .. ..
•••••••••••••••••••
*.
.•.
*..
*
• YES
• YES
DFLO
04
*. * . . * .*
• NO
x
'"
*.
*•• *
[RIZ
X
•• ···.El· •••••• ••••
PR INT
•
ERROR MESSAGE
•••••
••
*. * . . * .*
.*
• NO
• AD •
• AI.
J.
••
NEXT
•• Y E S . .
•• N(1
•
•
•• COLUMN BLANK •••••••••• X•• LAST RECORD •••••• X. G4 •
•• YES
••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
••
*•••
:NTBLN
••
.. ..
.FILES
RECORD
*.
•.. • *
•
....
....
x
X
•••••• Cl· ••• • •• ••••
• THE PRINT
PFCORD
•*
•
•
•
• AI.
•••
•
..... A2··.·······•
FRC" DUP OR
•
THE SUPER VI SOR
•
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X.
PHASE 0
•
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
••
ENTRY PCINT - APIOO.
READS PHASE
INTO
CORf.
X
••••• e2.· ••••••••
••
•••
•
•••••••••••••••••••
PHASE
1
GETS THE MAI~LINF
HFADER, 1~ITIALllES,
lOADS LOCALS, ETC.
X
•
••
x*•
PHA S E 2
•
••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••• 03.· •• ••••••
• ••••••••••••••• e _ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••
.
.••
••••• El •••• • •• • ••
·•••• X.•
PHASE 3
•
••
••••••••••••••••••
PROCESSES PEAOER
RECORDS AND Il SUBRQUTINES, lOADS SUBROUTINES BY CLASS
CODE.
• ·STORECI
.
.•
CUNTROLS LeADING AT
CU~PL[TION OF lOAD~~~~E~Vov~~tl~ES IF
RFQUIRED.
.••
PROCESSES SOCAl AND
lOCAL SUBRCUTINES
FeR WADING.
••••• Fl •••• • •••••
•
·•••• X.
••
•
PHASE 4
•
••••••••••••••••••
..
X
·····F4···.······
••
••
•
DUP
••
•••
•••••••••••••••••
STORFS RfLOCATED ANO
CONVERTED PROGRAM
IN PFRM~NfNT DISK
STORAGE.
••••• GI··.·······
•
••
•••• X.
PHASE 5
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
TO
~EXT
JOB
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• x
/I XEQ
.
.
X
.....
•• H4··········••
••••• Hl··········
·•••• X.• PHASE 6 ••
•••••••••••••••••••••
..··..·Jl··..······.•
•
•••• X.
PHASE 1
•
•••••••••••••••••••••
•••
PH~SE
R
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
RFAOS ALI BUT FI RST
SFCTOP CF PROGRA~
FADM CIB INTO CrRf.
X
••••• J4 •••• • •••••
SELECTS DISK 1/0
ROUTINE, LOADS IT
I~TO CORf.
••• SUPFRVISOR •••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
READS FIRST S~CT~R
flF PflOGRA~ FROM
Clfl INTO COkE.
TO EXECUTION
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• x
Chart AJ. The Loader - Disk System Format Load
Flowcharts
157
FROM THE SUPERVISOR
X
•••••• B2 •••• ••• •••••
•
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X.
PHASE 0
•
•
••
••••••••••••••••••
ENTRY POINT - BP200.
PROCESSES CORE IMAGE
HEADER, READS PHASE
8 INTO CORE.
/I
..·....01····••••••.
•
•••• X.
•
PHASE 7
•
•
••
•
•••••••••••••••••
XEO
x
••••• 04 •• • •••••••
SELECTS DISK 1/0
~2¥~I~~RE~OAOS IT
••
••
•
PHASE 8
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
.·.·.E4.•X···•....
••• SUPERVISOR •••
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
READS All BUT FIRST
SECTOR Of PROGRAM
e~~~ :~~~~ ~~E~IB
INTO COPE.
READS FIRST SECTOR
OF PROGRAM FROM
:~~1? ~~E~IBU~~~O
CORE.
TO EXECUTION
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
~ ••••• x
Chart AK. The Loader - Core Image Format Load
158
•• ••••
•
At •
•••••
•
X
..... Al·······*·.•
••
•
•
OUPCO
•
•••••••••••••••••••••
X
.....
•• B2··.·•.· .•.••
nCTl
••
•••
••••••••••••••••••
...
.. ..
...
x
•*
••
*.
te.
C2
••
DEFINE
*.
*. ••
.*
••
• •••• C5 ••••••••••
YES
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
.
••
*
• NO
••
I)Z
•*
*.
x
••
DELFTF
*.
•
•• ••••
•
til •
•••••
•
x
••
•
*
•
...•..•..........
OEFINF
* .
l(.
*. ••
.•
.*
• •••• 04* ••••• *•••
• •
yr S
• •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X*
DELETE
•
*
.
*.
•••••••••••••••••
•• *••NO
x
•** •••
Al •.
x
EZ
••
••
• *.
.*
*.
••
*.
DUMP
*..*
•• •• * •
*****F3* •• ** •••••
•
•
•
•• Y f S .
.*
•••••••••• X.
•
•
•
DU~P
•
• •••••••• *••••• *.•
*. ••
• NO
*
x
••• *
•
At •
•• ••••
•
.. ..
x
GZ
••
*.
*.
.
.*. ••
OUMPlET
*. •• •• .*
.
• •••• G5 ••• *••••••
•• yrS
.*
•
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X.
OUMPL~T
•
•
•
•
•• •••• ** •••••• *•• **
• NO
x
.•. ••
x
H2
••
••
•*
*.
*.
DWAOR
*. •• •• .*
•
...
..**.H4 •••••••• *.
• •
*
.
**••••••••
.
•• YES
.*
• •
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X.
JZ
•*
*.
.** •••••
x
••
*.
STORE
*.
•
Nll
x
••
••
OWAnR
•• ••••
•
At *
• •••• *
.•
• •••• J3 ••••••••••
•
•• Y F S ·
•••••••••• X.
.*
•• • ••NO
•
•
•
STORF
•
•
•••••
•
At •
•• ••••
•
•
*
•••••••••••••••••
x
X
•.···. •
•• .... KZ···
ERFOR
•••••••••••• *••• ••
•• ••••
•
At •
••••• •
Chart BA. DUP Functions
Flowcharts
159
NYETC
······81.·••• · •.•..
•
SFLECT
HANK RfCORD
•
•••••••••••••
•
•
SUPPC
GET
82 ••• •••• •••
••••••
••
• INITIALIZf
•
lTV
• •••• 83 •••••• • •••
••••• B~ ••• • ••• •••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
.X ••• ••• X.
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
PUT
••
••
MOVE EXIT
ADDR. TO
PUT ADDR.
•
•
• ADJUST FILE •
• PROTECT AODR • •
• LOAD DISK 1/0 •
• PUT PARAMETER •
:X ........................ :
X
·····CI··········
•
CALCULATE
•
• PUFFER LfNGTH • •
•
SET UP
•
• 10AR HEADER •
i
GOMUL
X
••••• C3..........
• •••• C4 ••••••••••
•
• • FILL IN CTL •
LOAD DISK.
.PARAMETER. SET •
•
•
1/0 GET
••••••••• X.UP IOAR ORIGIN.
:
PARAMETER:
: COU~~6R~~!GIN :
IHlcn
•.88
•••••
•••••••••••••••••••
X
......01··.·····.··
•
LOAD
Den
•••••••••••••
•
•••••••••••••••••
• OZ·
•••
•
CLEAR
DUPCO
SWITCHES
·· ..
..
.. .•.....
....
...
....
••••
• 04 •• X.
••••
REST
X
••••• 02 ••••••••••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
•• •
••••••
•
•• WORKING •• YES.
•
••
STORAGE
•••••• X. Gl •
•• EXCEEDED ••
••
•.B8
•••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
• ••
*
• NO
• E3.
•••
x
•••••
.BC •
• B2.
•••
:LDRDC
X
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••••• E3 ••••••••••
•
•
•
•
RELEPT
SET UP
CALL FOR
STORECI
•
•
•
•
X
••••• F3.·.·· ••• ••
•
.INITIALIZE lTV ••
•••••
INSERT
•
•
INTERRUPT
•
ADDRESS
•
•
•
•••••
•••
•••
SFXIT
X
•••• •• Gl.· ••• • •••••
LOAD
•• x ERROR MESSAGE
•
R()UTINF
•
•
•• ••••
•
G1 •
•••••
•
•••••••••••••
X
•
•
•••• Hl •••••••••
EXIT TO
•
PERRe/TERRe •
••••••••••••••••• •
•••••••••••••••••
• B8 •
• G2 •
• Gl·
•
.
.
.••••••••••••••••.
i
••
E~
• •••• E5 ••••••••••
....
•• ••
•• MORE THAN •• NO
•
SET UP TO
•
••
1 SECTOR
•••••••••• X. OUTPUT FINAL •
•• LEFT..
.PARTIAL SI:CTOR •
•••••••••••••••••
•••••
·BB •
....
....
X
~
•
• YES
OUT2
X
..... F5 .•........
•
•
••
S£:T UP TO.
•
STORE
••••••••• X. PARAMETERS
•
• GET OR PUT
• INTO LINKAGE •
• FULL SEt TOR •
••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••
.....
MMORE
••
X
F~..........
i
SYSCK
X
•••••• GZ ••••• • •••••
DU'"P FIRST
320 WORDS
• TC PRINCIPAL.
PRINTER
•• •••• G5 •• •••••••••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••
i
•
HALT
...
X
••••• HZ ••••••••••
••
•
•
......... "'
GET OR PUT
SECTOR. WAIT
•
FOR OP
COMPLETE
•••••H5 ••••••••••
••
••
•••
•
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
DECREMENT
WORD COUNT
BY 320
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
.....J4..........
J5.•. ..
i
.* COUNT*. ••
RESTORE.•
NO •• WORD
• FILE PROTECT .X •••••••••• GREATER THAN ••
•
•
•• ZERO
••
••
·....................
•
•
•
X
........
..•
EXIT TO
··.·K~
CALLING
•
PROGRAM
•
•••••••••••••••
...
.... .
• YES
X
••••• K5 ••••••••••
••
••
INCREMENT
.SECTOR ADDRESS •
•
8Y 1
••••••••••••••••••••
x
••••••
••••• •
•
Chart BB. DUP - DUPCO
160
[)It
•
•••••
• BC •
• 82.
•••
DECODE
• GET PRINCIPAL.
PRII'H 10CS
*
**.*.*.* ••• **
•
•••
83
••
****.A5.***.*.** •
•*
*. •• YES
** DECODE I1FFINE ••
•*
••• X*.
.DEFINE
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X*CONTROL RECORD.*
••
••
*
SET DUPCO
*
••
••
•
SWITCHES
•
*. ••
*** •• ***** •• *****
• NO
x
. *.
.*
••
*.
*.
C2
*. *.
BYESW
*. NO
ON
•••••••
*.
.•
*.•
*
* YES
.*
C3
..
·x ••
X
····**C5 •• *·****** •
LOAn
•
DEFINF
• •• *.C4** •• *** •••
*• SEARCH LET. ••
YES
*.
.OELETE
•••••••••• X.
SFT OUPCO
•
••
••
*
SWITCHES
•
*•••
. .**
**.*** ••• **.*••• ***
* NO
•• .*
*" ••
*
****.********
••• *
•
·BIC·
•• X. A} •
X
:X .......... : :
.•.x
••
.*
*..*
*.
•
* •• **********
E3 · *. *.
-OUMP
*.
*•• *
*
****
*
* E5 ••••
*.**. *
X
• •
.**.
x
X
******E2*****.**.**
* GET PRINCIPAL *
INPUT IOCS
••• ** •
X
*••••• 04 •••••••••••
.•
*. •• YES
••
LOAD
• DELETE
*
•• .OUMPDATA ••••••
*.
.*
•
*
*.
.*
x
.*••••••• *.*.
*•• *
• NO
*****.
•
• .***
E5 *
•• x**BE:.
81 •
**••• •
03
******02****·******
PHINT
EXIT
MESSAGE
*
** •••• ******.
*. *.
.*
.*
*****~5* •• **.*·**
••*
*
OATSW
***
EQUAL DISK
BLOCK
*
•
COUNT
*
* •• **************
YES
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ~.
NO
: •.•..••... x:
.•. *.
x
X
F3
******F2*****.·***.
*
RFAD
*
CONTROL RECORD
*
X
*****F5**********
**CPNTROL
DECODE nu~p *
HEC~R~.*
LET.
** SEARCH
SfT DUPCO
*'"
*
SkITCHF.S
*
*****************
.*
*., •• YES
••
*. *nUMPlET
••••••••••••••••••••
*.
.*
*.
.*
*•••
*
*************
• NO
x
.•
G2
.*. *.
G3
*.
•*
DUP
*. YES •
*CONTROL KfCORD.* ••••••
*. *.
*. ,,* .*
*
•*
NO
.*. *.
H3
*.
*. *.
*. *. ,,* ".
*
X
".
YES
.*****K2··**·***·**
*··:~~}·f~*~~~***
*
LOAn
SYSTEM
SYSTE~
*X ••••••••
*
* LOACER/EDITOR *
*LCACE~/f')I TOR*
*****.*********
*.**.**.*.***
..
.x
•
*.
.. ..
.-
.61.
*
*
: •••••••••• X:
LOAD
DWA!,)P
*
*
•• x*
At
*
****
• *
.*
*************
.************
*****J~**********
**CONTROL
nECnOE STOR~ *
•
RFCOP!).*
••• X* SEARCH LFT. *
* SfT nupeD *
* SWITCHES
*
*****************
x
** •••
X
**·***K3** •• *******
PRINT
ERROR MF.SSAG(
x
.
A1
****
• *
*************
****
• *HJ *
NO
*
•• x*
******~5**********'"
******J4*.*******.*
•• J3
*.
•*
*. YES
*
LO"D
STnKEMnO
*. .STOREMOD •••••••••• X
*. *.•• ,,*
*
*************
****
• *RO *
.• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• x
.•.x *.
*.
X
.*****r.5***********
*
LOAD
nu,..p
.* ••
* •
*.*.
*****
*BS *
* 02*
Chart BC. DUP - DCTL
*
• NO
.*
EOIT
•• NO
*CONTROL pECORQ.* ••••••
*.
••• *•• *•• *•••
*. ".
x
J7.
•
•• x* Al
.• .* .STORE *. *.••••••
YES
••
****HI*******·*
.*
••
EXIT TO THf *
YES.* MONITOR *.
SUPERVISOR
*X ••••••••• CONTROL RECORD.*
• *******.******* *
*. * . . * ".
*.• *
* NO
.*
.* •••• G4 ••• *.* •• ***
LOAD
•
DUMPLET
• NO
•
*
• *.
X
.*
*• •• YES
••
*.
*OWAOR
••••••••
*.
".
*. *•• *".
x
HZ
..
·x ••
*
*BH •
• 82*
•••
X
******K5***********
LOAD
S mR E
*
*********.***
****
• x**BGB2 **
••
* '"
****
• •*
Flowcharts
161
••••• •
.***.
• (>0 •
A3 •
•• ••••
•
• AI·
* •
•
c .. s
X
CHK(.l
.• CALCUlATE
*·*.~1·*·.*· .. ·.•
*PLT
•
•
• C~F(K ~ISK
.RUICKS, A']JlIST *
.*.....
S17~
"LrCK
...
.•.x
••
TAPE
PAPF~
*.
·.....
•
* •• "' ••• *"'.
*.
.,
.*
•.. *
.*
••••••
• 1]7 ••• X.
~I
>t.
'II • • •
.1". *.
*.
.. ..
.*
••••••
•••••
·HI-I •
• '12·
•••
x
."'.
•••••••••••••
x
• Y~S
(I
••
••
1:.
P~I~CIPAL •• YES
DtVTCE ••••••
•• tl[I)Ulflro ••
*..*
.*
.•.x ••
C?
••
x
••••• •
• H2 •
'" Nli
....
•
••••• •
X
····*·01·········.·
GET FIRST
*.
.•
•.
D2
••
HLIINK
*.
CAH0
·.....
•••••••••••••
x
*.
.,
* •• *
.*
••
.*
YES
••••••
• NU
F2 ••
•• ••••
•
X
• ····E2······.··
RfTUflN TO
•
)C.
.•
E1
.•.j(
••
*.
• *LI OR DATA •• YfS
•• PRCGPAM TC BE ••••••
••
....
llu"pE:n
*.
•
.*
x
r-.;l
;(
••••• r\"' •••••••••
.PKC(fS~
HFAIl~R
~tTH CC~~A
•
•
•
•
INFn.
r.rPNT
INITI~lllf
•
•
•
•
•
•• ••••
• • ••• •
C4 • •
* .••
•••• *••F2
••• •
· .
.................
...
~
..
••
••
.•
G1
wl);~D
f(JUAt
*.
••
,<'
* •• *
..
*.
IFIl,
.*
••••••
X
•
•
w0 r 12 •
IN
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
9
cr;~5"
: X •••••••••• :
x
·.···JI··········
'" [~C[1rE TYPE •
• fl(lO, PROCESS.
• AlCC~rl~G TO •
TYPf•••••••••
"' ••• *•••••
•
•
••••...
·•....
•
•
Kl
••
Spr,,,x
1(.
'.
l(
••••• KI··········
• CRfAT~ CARD •
• SYSTfM FUP~AT •
•
~[1qCS A~n
•
• ~UN~AT HEAr[R •
•••••••••••••
hS ~~Q'r. * •••••
··......
i(
.*.*
•
~1 •
Chart B D. DUP - DUMP
~ONITOR
....
PRPf)F
· ..
x
••
X
•••••
•••
.BIl •
• 02·
•.......•
•.····84··
• TURN OFF CARO •
.0 ...
..
• NC. INDICATOR
• CLEAR SW306, •
SVIND
•
•
x
••••••••••••••••• ••••
•• E3 ••
••••• •
•••• ••••• •
x
•• ••••
• ••••• •
1'3 •
• C4 ••••
-
· .
COOl'
•• ••• C3 ••••••••••
CLEAR BUFFER • •
• CONVERT DISK •
.SYSTEM TO CARD.
• SYSTEM FORMAT.
•
•••••••••••••••••
·••••..
••••
04 •• X.
• .x ••••••• ~ ••••••••••••••••••
••
X
X
• •••• 01 ••••••••••
• MOVE 40 WORDS •
• FROM OSF TO •
: S~~FU~Ut:~~s :
• FOR OUTPUT
•
• •••• 04 ••••••••••
•
MOVE
•
• MOVE WORDS
•
•
AND PUNCH
•
CARD
•
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
• ••••
87 •
••••• • •• E3 ••
• X.•
•
•
• •• X.
.. ... ..
..
.x
x
BUMP?
X
•• ••• E3 ••••••••••
•
PCHOT
•
• PUNCH DESIRED •••••
•
NUMBER OF
•
•
CARCS
•
E4
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
*.
.*
*.
x
* ..• .*
••••••••••••••••• ••••
• YES
••••
•• Kl ••
• .8B.
•• ••••
•
• .X. 02 •
F3 ••••
•
•
••••••
••••
••••• • x
.•. ••
S"'ALl
F3
• •••• F4 ••••••••••
.*..
•• AnJUST COUNT ••
..REQ'D WORDS •• yrs
.
....
•• ••
OF SAVED
WORDS TO 2
.
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
NO
X
• ••••G3 ••••••••••
• CALCULATE NO • •
• OF IND. ANO •
• DATA WORDS
•
• LEFT FOR NEXT •
• CARC IMAGI::
•
E5
••
.*
*•
•• MORE THAN •• NO •
•• 54 NORDS TO ••••••
•• OUTPUT ••
••
.....-..
...
..-
••
EOJ
•• NO
•
•• SWITCH SET ••••••••
..lESS THAN NO •••••••••• X.
•• SAVI::O ••
•
PCHOT
·····G4
......... .•
•
CHKCO
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
• READ A CARD •
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
•
GET SF-CTOP,
COMPU1E WOIIO
CCUNT TO
liE CUM PI-£)
• YES
x
F'ii
•••••••••••••
• ••••• H4 •••••••••••
• PUNCH CARD OR •
PAPER TAPE
RECORD
•
•
•••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
..
.x
X
...lGAD
····J2··········
.
PRINCIPAL.
PRIIIIT DfVICE:
•
ROUTINC
*••••••••••••
J3
••
.*
*.
..UTHER T~AN •• NO
•• SAVED WORDS ••••••
•• REQ'O ••
•.
*•••
.*
x
• YES
•••••
•
A4 •
•••••
•
X
•••••• J4 •••••••••••
.GF.T NEXT SECTOR.
DECREMENT
OFPNT BY
320
•••••••••••••
••
~...
NO.. SECTOR
••••• FINISHED
*.
x
•• ••••
•
04 •
•••••
•
*.
....
••
••
••
.*
• YES
X
·····.G5•••••••••••
•
GET
NEXT
•
• SECTOR •
•••••••••••••
••••
•• X. 04 •
••••• •
AND CHECK IT •
••• ••••••••••••••••
•
X
X
••••• H3···· ••••••
• SET OFPNT TO •
.ENO ~EXT HEAOER.
.SAVE NEW HEAnER.
:PlAC~NTl~to WC :
•••
DECREMENT
NORD COUNT
•••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
·......
•
• •••• 05 ••••••••••
.. .
..··.·H2 •••••••••••
MOVE
• •••• H5 ••• • ••••••
•• MOVE 'MCNT' ••
:l~~~O~H~~K~~b~ :
•••••••••••••••••••
X
····.J5 ••••••••••
•
PCHOT
•
• PUNCH DESIREO •
•
NO. OF
•
•
CARDS
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••
•
X
•••••• K2 •••••••••••
DUIo4P TO
Pqf\lTt-1<
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• 112·
'" •
.
• I:1R •
162
•••••••••••••••••••
H!PMAT AND
• PUNCH
fll.')-(lF- •
PROGPAM
•
•
CAPD
•••••••••••••
X
., ...
G2·········
EXIT
TO THE •
•••••••••••••••• ••
••••• •
•• H2 •••••.
•
•
••••• Hl ••••• *••••
STO~F
X
..· ... f7····
....... ·•
leAO
• fRROR PRIM
RUUTIIIIE
•
•••••••••••••
•• YeS
'" NL
•
•
•
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
•
• ..................
••
• ••••• 65 •••••••••••
••••• • •• "14 ••• X.
•••• X
x
••
•• ••••
•
1'2 •
•••••
•
x
••
HlUCK FQ[11'4
DI'>K
.:11
X
••• •• A4 ••••••••••
• LNTE~ IND.
•
• BITS ANO DATA.
• WOROS INTO
•
• CA~D IMAGE
•
x
X
ill.
•••
•• *A5
•••••
•
•
(OP ••••
X
114 ••••
••••• • ••••
'" A5 •
• YES
NO
...
.•.
.*
1110
* .• *
•• MC~ITUR •• YES
••
CCNTROl
••••••
•• RECORD ••
•• pgl~T
*.
•
.*
*.
.:;gN~YEr 2al~·:.~~
.THAN 1 CARD.
*.
.*
Nt-III II
CAI'D
filL
* .• *
•*
••
*.. *
63
.• nUT PUT *. ••
Rf~iUJI"~
..
•••••••••••••••••
.....
*.
.
.X •••••••••••
NO ••
••••••
.•
••
*.
* •• *
.*
••
••
*.
.*
· ..
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
llH RFCOR!) IF
• Pfl;'D. REAC A.
RECORD
•••••••••••••
····.[l·...····.·•
X
E~CCIC
~p
• crDE. Sf ARCH
• SPECIAL OP
• ccrE TABLE
x
•• ••••
•
G2 •
•••••
•
X
*.
*•• *
.t
.•
£2
...
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
G2 •
••••• •
03
...
••
*.
PASS 2
NUMERIC
*.
*.. *
.*
.*
• NO
•• NO
••••••
X
.• ...• E3·.····
..•.
ERFLG
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.- •
• SYNTAX ERROR •
•
•
.
SET ISS NO.
EQUAL ZERO
• YES
X
• •••• F2 ••••• • ••••
•
S710e
•
• GET rNT~Y PPINT •••••
•
NA~E AND
•
•
ADDRESS
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
.
S7r;~.,
••••••••••••••••••
•
•
GO.
Tr.
••
••
•••••••••••••••••••
••
•• A2.•
••...............•
•
•
•• ISS •• A3.•
••............••.•
•
•
•• llBR •• K3.•
•
•
*••.••••••••••••••
••
•• A4.•
••...........•...•
•
•
•• rPM •• G5.•
••.........•.....•
•
•
•• SPR •• J5.•
•
• • *•
•••.••••••••••••
•• 04.•
•
••...•••••••••••
•
••
*
• IlS •• F4.•
•
f~T
~es
~DNG
•
.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.-.
••••••••••••••••*.•
• SAVE ISS NO.
• ANC NUMBER
• OF LfVELS fOR
•
HEADER
X
·•... ·HZ.····
•....•
S20tH
•
•
•
INITIAlllE
TO lOAD
PHAS~
•
•
6
••••••••••••••••••
••
••
••
*.
x
•• ••••
•
Cl •
•••••
•
.*
G3
••
PASS 2
*.
*•• *
.*
F4
•.
*.
••••••••••••••••••
•
•
••••• *•••••••
x
•• * ••
• cr •
• AI·
•••
Chart BQ. The Assembler - Phase 2
*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••••
..X. 01 •
••••• •
.. .
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.•
•••••••••••••••••
..••••.•
x
•• ••••
•
01 •
•••••
•
X
S2100
•
•
•
COLlfCT
ISS NA~E
•
•
....
• F5 •••••.
H':lRT Z
.*
.x
••
•
•
.*
x
•••••
•
G2 •
•• ••••
•
••
*•• *
.*
• NO
x
.•-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.•
J4
..
LI 13Rl
•• ••• K3·.· •••••••
•
•
•
•
TURN GN
LIBR SWITCH
ILBRSWI
••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
x
•••••
•
01 •
•• ••••
•
• YES
x
•• ••••
•
A5 •
•••••
•
*.
.. ..
.*.
x
*•••
••• •
•• •G2
••••• •'"
• NO
.. .
...
LEVEL NO. • •••••
•• NUMERIC ••
* .. *
••
..·=RECEOEO·· •• YES
••
RY SP~
••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. 01 •
••••••
••
.. ..
(;5
••••
•
PRECISION
•
.SWITCH IrPRswl •
.*
*.
•• INTFRRUPT •• NO
••
Cl •
.•.
···HS···· ••• •••
•••
• SfT EXTENDED •
•
•••••••••••••••••
.x
••••
..
..X. .
• •
X
• •••• H4.· ••••••••
•
SCAN
•
• GFT INTERRUPT •
•
LEVEL NO.
•
•••••
•
••••••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
••
••G2
••• •
X
••
RESTORE
ADPRESS AT
RTRN
EPRI
•• PRECEDED BY •• YES
.E~!'oAl~IB~S~~ ••••• :
*.
X
• •••• rs ••• • ••••••
••
.. .. ..
G4
•
..
.
*.BQ
•.. •
• NO
••••• H3.· ••• • ••••
X
..·.·D5 .........•.
•
ERFlG
• SYNTAX ERROR
•
*.• *
•• X. Ul •
.. 4**.JZ··.····
....
FlIPR
.. -.-.-.-.-.-*-*.
LeAD
• PHASE 6 •
•• ••••
•
05 ••••
•
•
• .x •••••••••••
•••• X
..MODE ABSOLUTE ••••••
NO
••••••
• YES
•
•
•
•
•
•
.*
*.
..RELOCATION •• YES
•
•
•
•
*. ••
.*
..••••.•
•••••
••••• •
ILSI
••••• F3 ••••••••••
..
•
•
X
.
X
•••••••••••••••••••
..
..X.••••.
•
•
••••••••••••••••• •••• •••••••••••••••••
• 111 ••
••••• •••••
•• ••••
•
•• • G2
•
•• * •
x
• S20'16
X
··.·.G2 ••• •••• •••
•
ERFlG
•
•
OP COOl:
•••••
•
EKiUJR
•
~O
TO INSERT •
IN PROGRAM
•
HEADER
•
X
SET L.A.C.
TO LOWEST
ADDRESS
AVAILABLE
x
• YES
••
.*
..X. 01 •
••••••••••••••••••
••••
• 01 ••
:x .......... :
•• ••••
•
x
5
* •• *
•
•
•
..····04 ...........
LOAD
• PHASE
5
•
•
•••••••••••••
••••
• .BU.
..X. D3 •
• •
••••
••••••
SYNER
*.
• •••• B5 ••••••••••
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
HDNGA
••
*.
•.SAVE
•
•
01 •
• * ISS NG. *. •• YFS
*.
SET RLMOE
EQUAL ZERO
•••••••••••••••••
x
*. .*
.*
••••• •
••••• •
•
•
•
••
••
••
••
• G2 •
••
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
..
.x
• •••• C4 ••••••••••
• ••• ·C3 ••••• • ••••
•
SCAN
•
• GET ISS NO. •
.t
.... ....
••
••
•
•
•
•
•• IN SPFCIAL ••••••••
•• TABLE ••
•
•
.*
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
Cl •
••••• •
x
Fl·.
CP
CODE
••••••
.t
• ENTCT BY 1
•
.INC~tMENT PROG~ •
~CR ry 3
•
•
.*
*.
•• OP CODE •• NO
•
•
••
x
x
•
•
X
.•.x
* •• *
.•
X
.....
• 84····· .....•
••• 02 •• • •••••••
•••
••
•
OECREMFNT
•••••••••••••••••
*.
.*
*•• *
A5 •
NO.
•• YES
•• GREATER THAN •• ~ •••
.
• NO
•••••• Cl.·
•• •••••••
pALeL
•• PACK
••
C2
••
.• ENTCl *. •• YFSX.
••
•• f~lJAL lERO ••••••
•••• • YFS
• 01 •• X.
••••• •
X
S2'::('3
*.
• NO
.*. :
RFCORD
*.
*.
X
CO~MENTS
*.
..RELOCATION •• YES
..MODE ABSOLUT~ ••••••
• NU
x
Cl
.•.x
A5
.•
•• IL
G2 •
•• ••••
•
*.. *
..• Cl •• X.
S2"C"••••
..
MIS 1
••
A~
YfSX
•• BY ISS OR IlS ••••••
•
,6SS[MBLY.
•
• DISALLOW ENT, ,.
• ISS, ILS, CR •
•
.*
.•
*.
•• PRECI:DEO ••
A~SnLUTf
..•.
.. ... ..
IS<;I
*.
• NU
..
· .. 81.·.····· ..,.
.FnRCf
•
.•. ••
•• ~ElCCATION •• YFS
•• MOIlE AflSOLlJTf: ••••••
~e
•• SYMBOL TAAL~ ••••••
•• OPT ION ••
*.
••••• •
••••• •
,61.
x
•••••
•
05 •
•• ••••
•
J5
••
.*
*•
•• PRECEDEO •• YES
••
BY EPR
••••••
*.
*.
*.. *
.*
.*
.
x
••••••
• NO
X
• •••• K5 ••••••••••
•• SET STANDARD ••
•
PRECISION
•
ISPRSWI •
•.SWITCH
••••••••••••••••••
(;2 '"
•• ••••
•
x
•• ••••
•
01 •
•••••
•
Flowcharts
175
.......
•
•••
••••• •
•
x
.t.
AI
S3A3
••
*.
x
*•• *
••••• •
•• Gl ••
• NO
....
.•.x ••
In
*. ••
*.
0
•.. *
. ..
I~
1
..
.x *.
••
•.
10C
*•• *
.*
X
·
..··••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-
•
•
.
.•.
.. ..
....
t.
.*
• NO
X
•
•
Dl
POUTINF.
.PRl~l
•••••• *••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
.•····El····.·...·•
SET UP TO
SAVE SYSTEM
SY~BOL TABLE
..
X
TABLE
..
.*
f?
.•..x
••
X
• •••• F3 •••••• • •••
..
RESET
•
• PARAMETERS TO •
CONTINUE
•
•
• IN-CORE FROM •
•
PHASE 9
•
•.
•• FPI~LIPAL •• YES
•• lIn PUUTI,."f ••••••
•• IN CLR[ ••
*.
•••••••••••••
......
.
•
• .x •.....••.••
....
* •••
.*
..
.......
.. ... ..
•
•
~
I
..
•••••••••••••
••
••
0
••
...
x
112
.*
.p~INT
* ... *
.*
• Ne
•
x
•• ••••
•
A? •
X
GETER
.
LOAD
!:RP(R PR INT.
RUUTIN[
•••••••••••••
i
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
• ••••• Kl··· ••••••••
EHNT3
PRINT
• EHIlOR MESSAGE.
AOit
•••••••••••••
X
•• ••••
•
A2 •
•••••
•
Chart BR.
·••••..•
• [It •• X.
•
DUSTn*.**
x.
• ••• ·E4 ••••••• *••
••
•
SET UP TO
•
.CONTINUE OUTPUT •
• FROM PHASE q •
•• •••••••••••••
ARFA
*•••
•• ••••
• •••• • •
83..
•
• F4 •• X.
•••• •
• • X
L8 ••••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
• ••••• FIt •••••••••••
DISKl
REAl)
OVERFLOW SEC TOR
•••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• G3 •• X.
••••• • X
• X ••••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
Lq
*.
ANe/LRt. hO
The Assembler - Phase 3
• PUN(~ SELFLT~r ••••••
.*
*.
;
* •• *
•
X
•••• **J? ••• *••••••
TV3
Pfll"'T MESSAGF
'Sy"eCL TABLE'.
•• -*-*-*-.-.-.-••
•••••••••••••
••••
·....
.•
x
•
•
A3 •
A5
•••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-
.. .•. ..
"''1
••
Hit
••
ANY
•• YES
.TABLf OVERFLOW ••••••
*.
•.
•.• *
.*
.*
x
••••• •
• Ait •
••••• •
• NU
•
*
.•.x
J3
••
*•
••
DUMP
•• YES
•• COMPLETE
••••••
••
•.
*.
• •• *
.•
• NO
x
•• ••••
•
G3 •
••••• •
.*
x
..
.x
••
.*
*.
•• DUMP OF •• NO •
SECTOR •••••
•• COMPLI:Tf ••
.nV~RFLOw
*.
*. .*
.*
• YES
.*
J4
.•.x
••
*.
• •••
•• ANY MURl •• NO
•
•
•• OVERFLOW
•••••• X. A5 •
•• SECTORS ••
••
....
*..*
••••
• YES
••••• •
• A'i •
X
••••• • ••• •• K4 ••••••••••
•• SfT UP TO ••
• DUMP ANOTHER
OVERFLUW
•
SECTO~
•
•
•• •••••••••••••••••
x
•.. ••••
Fit ••
•
.
••••
176
..
OUMP HCORD OF
•
5 SYM8ClS •
• YES
•
't • • • • • •
X
••••• ·GIt •••••••••••
SlJD"P
DUMP RECORD or
•
5 SYMBOLS
•
x
••
.. .. .*••
·
.
....
• •
······Jl· ...•.•....
....
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
*..
.. .
: X •••••••••• :
••
•• YES
•• STPSV EQUAL ••••••
•
Fn~c~
x
•• ••••
•
G3 •
•••••
•
OUTPUT •
.OF SHORT (LESS •
.THAN 5 SYMBOLSI.
REcnRD
•
•
•••• •• G3·
••• •••••• •
SUDMP
Ie l<[iUT I NF •
x
Hl
L'>
X
······GzDISKI
.........
·.
-.-.-.-.-.-.LC!Ar PRINCIPAL
RSTIO
• SAVE SECTOR •
.ADDRESS OF LAST.
•
• OSF O~TPUT
x
• ••• *CIt ••••••••••
••
· ..
• NC
• GI •• X.
• • .
S3A2
X
Cl··········
•.....
SAVE
RLMDE. •
.*
• NO
x
• YES
T('l DISK.
•.........
*.
••
*. ••• * .-
•..... Fl·····.·····
OISICl
-.-.-.-.-.-.WP ITE SYMBOL
....
•• LFFT ~(FORE ••••••
..OvERFLOw ••
E3
••
•• RfST Of •• NO
•• I"'-CORE MOVED ••••••
.TO PHASE 9 ••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
WRTST
•• ••••
••
••f4
••• •
•••••••••••••
Bit
••
•• C; OR
••
x
...
.. ..
X
•
•
•
x
.M0RE SYMBOLS •• YES
• NO
: x•••••••••• :
SVI
LOAn
PHAS[ It
.*
*.
•• Ih-CORE •• YlS
.TAeLE COMPLETF ••••••••••••••••••••
*.
.*
*.
.*
*. .*
t.-.-.-.-.-t-.-••
LOAD PPINCIPAL
STPSV
•••••
(SlOP SAVEl.
...
HIP:~
••••••
..
· .
x
...... 02····.·.···.
DISKl
.*
*
)(
*••••• A5 •••••••••••
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
••••
A5 •
•• X. G3 •
••••
••••• •
*.• *
: X •••••••••• :
X
*.•*
.*
.x
C3
••
••
*.
••
DUMP
•• YES
•• CCMPlETE
••••••
(CTSYfol EC;:UAL.
t. G I
••
••
• NO
01··········
•.....
• SET DATA IN •
•
*.
x
x
*.
(OMPL~TF
• NU
..
.... .
..•-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
•
SlOUT
••
.* IN-cnRE *. •• YES
•.
•• •••• B3 •••••••••••
SUOMP
DUMP HCCRD OF
•
'i SYMBClS
•
•••••••••••••
• YES
••
.TA~lr
..
•• I'RINCIPIIL
YlS
•• P~I~' ~OUTINf ••••••
t . IN CCRI' ••
••
•
•
•
•
x
••••••••••••••••••
C2
A4
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
• • ••••
• A~··
• B3 •• X.
•••• •
••••• • X
L't
.*
• YES
..
.••
NO..
CTSYM
••
•••••• GREATER T~AN ••
••
•
•
I",ITIALIZE
•
TO DUMP
• SYMBOL TABLE
...
••• •
•• •A'>
••••
x
L5A
• •••• A3· •••••••••
•·····~2····.·
MGVE AREA
.TO BE OVtRLAIC
PY PRINT
•
• RrUTl~[ INTO
PHASE q
•
hLJ
• YES
.. *
*. .•
•• ••••
•
Ait •
•••••
•
X
*'.
LlPH3
•• ERCNT EQUAL ••••••
••
x
••
ANY
•• NU
•• SY~~0lS IN ••••••
••
TA(ILE ••
.*
•• ".
••••
•
",2
••
•• YFS
•• SVSW EQUAL 0 ••••••
•.
.... .•.
.. ..
fl.?
•
.. ..
.. ..
SlA
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
•
i>~
• AI·
x
•••••
•••
.RS •
• AI·
•
•••••
• 85 •
• AI·
•••
54,..
X
.....
•• SfTAl··········••
eLANK~
•
IN SIIRF.A.
•
• SPACE PRINTFR •
••• •
••B2
•• ••••
••
••• *•••••••••••••••
x
IH
•••
X
••
• :t
• •••• fj2 ••••••••••
$.
••
ANY
••
fRRCR5
••
*..*
..
•• NO
•
•••••••••• X.
••
•
•
•• • ••YES
•
•••••••••••••••••
.•.
X
Cl
X
* •. *
•
.*
M~SSAGt:
•••••••••••••
• NO
*· •••••••
X
X
• •••• 02 ••
01 •••• ••••••
••••••• CONVERT
••
•
•
•
..
.•· .•. (2*.·········
TV3
..-.-.-.-.-.-.PRINT ERRrR
••
.•
*.
YES ••
••
••••••
1 F~ROR
••
•• C~LY
••
*.
*
•
TO
•
U;TPUl APr A •
~rVf ~R~OR
~ESSAGF
••
DSF TO •
•
START OF
•
.WORKING 5TQRAGf.
CCUNT, •••••
SET IN OUTPUT.
MESSAGE
•
~PRrR
~UVE
•••••••••••••••••••
x
••••••••••••••••• ••••
*•
*
82 •
••••• •
X
.....
•• SU El··········
1 IN FRROR •
•
• COUNT. REMOV( •
• PLURAL FRCM •
•
fRROPS
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
••••• •
B2 •
••***
•
•
X
....• E2.··
•• · ••••
•.RFSTORE
••
AND
•
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
XEQ5~
OUPS~
X
....
FZ.·······. •
EXIT TO THF.
SLPERVISCR
•
•••••••••••••••• •
•
•
Chart BS.
The Assembler - Phase 4
Flowcharts
177
•••••
.ElT •
• AS·
•••
•••••
·IlT •
•*•
....
-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.
·.•••••••••••••••••
.
NALGN
SCAN
EVALUATE
OPERANC
•
•
•
•
•
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••••
SCAN
EVALUATE
(PERAND
X
X
••••• B1· ••• ••••••
•
ORGBS
•
• RELOCATION AND.
•
OPERAND
•
• ERROR CHECK •
••• ••••••••
•••••• e2ORGAS
.RELOCATION AND.
•
OPERAND
•
• ERRCR CHECK •
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
.•.x
X
C1
•*
••
*.
..
.*
*••
*
t NC
01
.•
.•.x
••
•• POSITION
••
18 EQUAL
*.
~
* •• *
..
.*
02
*.
•• OPERAND •• Nt)
••
•• RELOeATA8LE •••••••••• X..
*.
••
••
-.-.-.-.-.-.LOAD LABfL.
REAC NEXT
RECORD
•
.....
•••••••••••••••••
•
..
•
*
• F3 ••••
• x
NGEIot2•••• .•.
•.
*.
••
HZ
.•.
•*
••
•.
x
••••• •
••••• •
*•••
x
••
..
*. •• YES
.*
.*
•••••
••
••F3
••• •
* •• *
.*
••
x
JZ
.•.x
••
PASS 1
*. t .
._
••
••••••
*. .•••• •
• YES
• NO
•
• AZ •
X
X
••••• KI •••••••• •• •
• .• .... KZ.·········
*ACD 1 TO L.A.C •• ••••
ERADO
•
• STORE RESULT •
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
.ENTER INTERNAL.
•
IN LABEL
•
* VALUE ILABVL) •
•
NO • •
IN ERTBL
•
'•••••••••••••••••
.
•• ••••••••••••••••
x
x
•••• •
•
•• ••••
•
•
• AZ ••
•• •103
••• •
.
.....
The Assembler - Phase 5
STATE~ENT
""0
.•
•
•
SYM80L
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
•
X
••103
K3 •• • •• •• •• •
••• • •••••••
OPERAND VALUE •
tCUAL O.
•
•
•
•
OPERAND
RELOCATION
EQUAL O.
D5
.•.x
••
..
*.
..
*•••
••••..
·•....
• .
.*
• NO
• f5 •• X.
X
.. ···E5 ..·······•••
•
VPF.RAN~
• RfLOCATI0N
• VAL~~ PUT IN
• LA8EL RrLoeA•
TION WORD
•••••
•
•
.
••••••••••••••••
..••••.•
•
INTF.~NAL
STATE~ENT NO • •
IN ERT~L
•
..X. E5 •
•••••
.. ..
........
.•.
• •••• H4 •••••••• • •
•
ERSCH
• SFARCH ERTal
• F~R INTERNAL
•
STMT. NO.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.••
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
•••
• 103 ••
•• ••••
•
·····J3.·········
•
ERFLG
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
•
UNOEFINED
x
•• ••••
•
G4 •
•••••
•
• NO
iC
• YES
•
NO
••••••
X
iC
*. ••
.*
G4
••
•• UNOEFINED •• YES
•
•• SYMBVL IN •••••••••••••••••••• X•••••••••••
•• OPERAND ••
••
•
•*
••
fOU2
•• .* hUMBER * • •• NU
•• IN ERTBL
••••••
••
..
•
•
••••• ••
•• •G4
••• •
x
ERSCH
•
.•• -.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.
SFARCH ERT8L •
• FOR INTERNAL •
•
STMT. NO.
•
•••••••••••••••••
*.
•.. *
.*
•
ERAOD
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-..[NTER
•
••••• •
• 103 •
••••• •
X
.•.x
•.
*. ••
fQUER
X
••• •• FS ••••••••••
••••• G3 ••••• • ••••
x
• YES
ERl
•• L.A.C. EVEN ••••••
* •• *
.. ..
••
PASS I
•••••••••••••••••
*.••••••
Yl:~
• NO
* ..
• AZ •
••
PASS 1
H3
.*
••
* •••
••
•• NO
•• ANY OPERAND ••••••
•• ERROR ••
••
•• NO
•• IN FORMAT ••••••
• YES
F3
.. .
ORGBS
*. * •.• .*
*
.•
••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
..x. fl •
••••• •
X
•*
•••••••••••••••
••••
• wCROS TO 1/0 •
• eUFFER 19-1Z) •
.•.
HI·.
••
X
*.
.•.x
YES •• UHU~FIN[D ••
• •••••• Sy,.SflL IN ••
•• fPERANO ••
.• [(,lUlL
•• ··E4···.·····
• FXIT TO THE •
•
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
•
•
.*
(5
• YES
• • x ••••••••••••
••••• •
.....
FZ.·········
•
B4HEX
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
• NO. RESERVED •
•••
178
EIHWR
••
••
X
.*
•••••
Chart BT.
.*
••••
·04·· ••VALUE
•••••••
• OPERAND
•
EQUAL O.
•
•
OPERAND
•
•
• RELOCATION
•
EOUAL O.
•
• BT •
• HI·
t.
*..*
•
•••••••••••••••••••
.•••••••••••••••••.
.. .
X
• •
••••
..
....
•• ••
•
••••
•• X. E4 •
••••••
:X .......... :
• "X. Al •
•• . *
ORG
LAefL VALUE •
• SET FQUAL TO •
• OPEPANO VALUE •
X
• YES
•••••••••••••••••
.
•••••••••••••
••••
• .CE·
...
X
••
•• NO
••••••
• ••••C4 ••••••••••
••
•
• •••• ~S ••••••••••
*.
••••
• .
ERFLG
•
•• NO
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
ORG
•••••••••• x. RELOCATION
•
••
• LABEL VALUE •
• SET EQUAL Tn •
• LAST LOCATION.
•
PLUS I
•
ORGER
X
•••••• FlLDl8L
•••• •• •• •••
JI
x
.*. ••
X
.x •••••••••••
•• FI ••
• X..
*.
.*. ••
• YES
••
*•• *
ti4
*. .*
• YES
C3
.*
*.
.*
...*
*. .*
.....
• EZ··········•
.....
BSSA
x
.••.
• E4 •• X.
X
..
•• ••••
•
f4 •
•••••
•
.*. ••
SCAN
F.VALUATF
rPERANO
•••••••••••••••••••
x
• YES
••.• ·····••
••.. ··.EI
SET L.A.C.
•
•
EQUAL TO
•
• OPERAND VALUE •
•••••••••••••••••••
....
.•
• NO
83
.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.- ••
Jt:.
:.......... X:
•
..
.x
* •• *
.*
X
••••• 105 ••• • ••••••
•
•
•
••
•• NO
••
OP COOE
••••••
••
BES
••
•• NO
••••••
• YES
•
t.
•••••••••••••••••
*.
.*
*.
••••• e2 •• •• ••• •••
• L.A.r. SET
•
•
fC~Al TO
•
• LABEL VALUE •
• PL~S OPERAND •
VALUE
•
•
••
YES •• POSITICN ••
•••••• IA nF RECORO ••
•• BLANK ••
EQUA
••
YES
•• MCDE ABSOLUTE ••••••
loB
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
x
103
.*
t •
•• RELeCATION ••
•
•
•
.
••••
ERZ
x
••••• AZ··········
••••• 101·· •• ••••••
•
•
•
•
· ..
.•.
••
i
ORGA
•• ••••
103 ••••
•••••
•
AZ ••••
• .
• 111.
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
••• •
•• •A3
••••• ••
J4
..
.x
••
.*
*. •• NO
•• NUMBER
•
•• IN TABLE
•••••••••••••••••• X.
•.
.*
*. •. .* .*
• YFS
..
X
EOlll(l
X
••••• K4..........
• ••••• ~5 •••••••••••
•
ERflG.
LOLBL
•
UNDEFINEO
••••••••• X
LOAD LABEL.
•
SYMBOL.
• Rf-AO Nfl(l •
•
•
PECORD
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
.Cf •
• AI·
•••
*.*.
•* A2 *
*
***** *
X
*** •• A2***** ••• *.
ERTBl FUll**
••• SET INDICATOR
*
*
(ERSnAJ
*
•
NCN-ZERO
•
**********.* ••• *.
·*·*.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
ERXRI
X
*.**A7*.*.*·* ••
* EXIT TO T~E •
CALLING
•
•
*
POUTINF
*
.*.*******.****
•
.SEARCI-I ERTAL TO.
• LOCATE SLOT FeR.
• CURRENT NC. •
•••••••••••••••••
Cl
*.
.*
*••
*
• NO
•
•.*.**•••
**
•
••••• 01.·.*·****·
INTERNAL •
*
NO • •
*
IN FRTBl,
•
* AOJUST TARLE •
*
POINTER
•
•••••••• ** •• *.*.*
.*
*..
*
* YES
.** .•.*
• BU
03*
i
***.*
*·CEAI·*
•*
*
X
**.**CS**********
* ADJUST RETURN *
(RTRN) *
***AOORESS
IN PHASE 9 TO •
GO TO PHASE 2 *
AT HORTZ
•
*
******** •• *******
X
S2505
****.04 •• *· •• ··*·
*
CENTER
•
.HEAOING (MOVE *
* lEFT 18 POS.) *
••• *.******.*.***
****··05*.*******.*
HIPR
**-*-.-*-*-+-.-.*
RESTORE
*
PHASE 2
*
** •• ** •• *** ••
*
HONGS
i
****.03***·***·*·
* SET PHASE 2 •
S~ITCH *
**RESTORE
AT END OF
•
.HONG PROCESSING*
** ••••• *••*.*.*.*.•
.*
*.
•••• fl ••••••
•••••
• BU •
.*
E3
* •
•
X
**·**~2***·**···.
•
RPAGE
•
• RESTORE 1132 •
• TC Nfn PAGE *
*.** ••••••••• ***.
.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.-.
•
•
.*. *.
*.
PASS 1
*. •.
* F2*
H05
*.
.*.
S2S00
X
.*.*.C4.** •• * ••• *
•
PUT LF
*
• CHARACTER IN *
• POSe 1 AND AT •
•
END FOR
•
* TYPE~RITER
*
* •• ***.***.*.*** •
x
X
·**
FXIT TO TI-IE •
CAlliNG
*
ROUTINE
*
***** •••• ******
•
K2 •
* *
:x ••••.•.... :
•
*
*
• B5 •• X.
x
.***
HOI:'XT
B5
••
.•
*.
.*
HONG
*. NO
*. DETECTED IN .* ••••
•• PHASE Z .*
**
•
•
*
*.**
•
•
•*.*. * .X
HfNO
••••• 02 •••••• ***.
** SET I~DICATOR.• •
• FOR fiNDING •••••
.ENTRY IN ERTBl *
** •••• *.*.* ••• *.*
*ENTE~
STATE~ENT
** ••• 84*.**.*.***
** MOVE 'PAGE' •
• TO POSe 73-76 •
*
OF PRINT
•
BUFFER
•
•
** •••• ***** ••• *.*
•• *.
.CJ *
•• x*
02
X
X
.**.*A5.*···*· •• *
RESTORE liST •*
* AND liST DECK *
•
CPT IONS'
*
* •• **** •• ******
.***
**
•
X
X
• * •• **E3** •• *** •• **
FLIPR
*.-.-.-.-*-*-*-*.
RESTORE OVERLAY
• PREVIOUSLY •
IN CORE
••• * •• **** •••
TBlN':J
X
·····C'1**.*··***.
• SAVE fRTBl
*
• PCINTER FOR * ••••
* NEXT ENTRY
*
X
•••••• *.* •• *.** ••
•
A5 *
***.* *
..**
*
*.
C2 *•••
***** • •
••
•• YES
• ERTBl FUll (25 ••••••
•• ENTlHESJ ••
*.
X
*•
••
A4 *•••
***. * •
•
NHOPH
X
****.A4**·**.***.
BLANKS •*
•** TOMOVE
POSe 1-34 •
Of PRINT
*
•
*
BUFFER
*
•••• **.****.*.** •
*•
**.**.A3.*** •• *** ••
TV3
**-.-.-.-.-.-*-••
PRINT
I1EADING
•
• *.***.* ••• **
l<**.
x
•*
••
.**.
: x•••••••••••
ERAr.r;
••
•••••
• ••• BlE~SCH
...
••••
•• *** •
• •
• A3 *
*.**
.*
•
•
•
•
X
*·****E4*.****.*.*.
OISKI
*.-*-*-.-.-.-*-.*
WR ITE HEAD I NG
TO FIRST SECTOR
OF CIB
*****.*******
*.••••••
NU
.*
* ..•
* YeS
••••••••••• X:
x
*.*.*.F3.**** ••••••
X
i
.*.**
*BQ *
• FS·
• *
*
X
*·**.*F4***.*****.
GTHOG
•
*-*-.-*-*-.-.-.-.
PAL6L
*.-.-.-*-*-*-.-**
READ NEXT
RECORD
•
* ••• ****.*.**
*
NfW PAGE
•
ROUTINE
•
•
***** •• * •• **.***.*•
.. .
•• **
X
FRSCI-I
• *.*.GI.· •• *.**·.
*• SET ERS~ TO *•
• IERn (NC. NnT •
IN TAelEI
•
•
•••••• **.* ••• *•••
•
•••••••••••
X:x
•
•••
II
.• 1-11 *. *.
.* INTERNAL *.
yes
*ST~T. NO. EQUAL •••••
.TABlE ENTRY*
*.
*•. *
*
.• YES.. .* Jl
.*
x
•• ••••
•
U2 *
NO
X
***··J2***.******
*
SUPPRESS
*
*ltAOING IEROS, •
• ~CVE TU POSe *
*18-PC OF PRINT.
•
EUFFER
•
•••• *.*** •• *.*.* •
••
•••• *. ENTRIES I~ .*
*. TA~LE ••
~nRE
*.
.:t
•• *•NC
*.*
Kl
x
•*.
.*
25
•• fNTRIES
*.
*.
*. *.
....
TABLE
*
IN
.*
YES
••x*.
•
*
* A? *
* .*** *
Chart BU.
X
··* •• H2**··******
** CC~VEPT PAGE **
.COUNT - AINARY •
*
• TO Df.CI~Al
* •••• ***** •••• **
***
*.
.*.x············
: ... ONG2
*.
*.
.*
* .•
*
* YES
*..* Nil
••••
.*
CUTUP
X
****.K2 •• **··** ••
** I~CRrMENT •*
* PAGE COUNT
•
x
.***
•* C2 *
* *.** *
*
flY 1
*
•••• * •••• **** •• **.*
x
••• *
•
** A3 *•*
****
.* •
:X .......... :
*. *.
.. .... ..
•• liST DECK *. NO
*OPTIDN SELECTED •••••
*.
.*
• YES
x
.***
* A4 **
*• .*.*
•
x
••• *
S2520
X
·***·J4*·*· •• ****
*.FORCE lOLBl TO ••
• INHIBIT lIST *
.AND liST DECK O.
*
OPTIONS
*
•• * •••• *.***.* •••
•
•••A4*• **
•*
X
···*··K3·*.···*··*·
PCHCD
*.-*-*-.-.-*-*- ••
PUNCH
HADING
*
RECORO
**.* ••• **.*.*
•
*.** •• H4******·.***
TV)
**-*-.-*-.-*-.-••
TYPE
*
HEADING
*
*** ••• * •• *.*.
.*
x
.• J3
.*
*••
*
* YES
X
H3
*.
.
.*
*. ••
• NO..
liST
• ••• *OPTION SElECTEO*
*.*** *
...x *. •.
x
.*.
G4. *.
.*
*.
.* PRINCIPAL *. NO
•• PRINTER THE .* ••••
.TYPE~R ITER.*
****.*G2.*.****** ••
DISKI
*.-.-.-*-*-.-.-.*
REAC HEADING
• FRO· CIB INTO*
PRINT flUFFieR
•••••• **** •••
•
.ERlPl
•• X* B5 *
***.* *
~
·*·**·K4***.·*.**·*
PALBl
*.-*-*-.-.-.-.-*.
READ NEXT
RECORD
*
..**** ••••• **
•
x
*** •
•* A5 •*
*
•
.***
The Assembler - Phase 5
Flowcharts
179
•••••
• ev •
•••
X
INSU
X
••••• Al··········
• I~SERT OP CODE.
• I~TO INSBF
•
• (PITS 0-41
•
••••• A2··.·.··· ••
•
~RFLG
•
• FrR~AT tRROR •••••
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
....
.•.
x
* ..•
...
x
Cl
••
.•
*.
•• TAG GREATER •• Nu
• THAN 3 GR LESS ••••••
•• THAN (j • •
.•
*.
.*
C2
••
*.
PASS 1
*.
*•••
.*
*.
ERFLG
TAG ERROR
*.
... ..
••••••
•
•
..
'.
..•••••.•
•••••••• ••• X.
.. ..
G2
..
.
••
.*
*.
•• CONDITIONS ••
YFS
BLANK ••••••
X
-128
.*
••
••
• •• *
.*
.'
ERFLG
ADDRESS
...
Jl
.•.
*.
E'~ROR
~ES
OPERAND
••••••
•• ALLOWED ••
•
•••••
•
....
X
•• •••••••••
••• •••G3
INSERT
• DISPLACEMENT •
•
INTO INSBF
•
• (BITS 8-151 •
*.
J2
180
..
.
X
• •••• J3· •••••••••
••
•*
*. ••
•• FORMAT
FORMAT
F I FL r· L
•• YES
••••••
••
.•
.. ..
.......
••
FIELD
I'lLANK
••
~u
••••••
..
•
DFOUT
• PUT INSBF INTO
• DSF BUFFER
•
(BINARYI
•
•
•
•
•
1'3 •
nIsPLAC~~ENT
FOR~AT
Chart
.....
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
*.
.*
*.
.*
x
x
* •••
* .• *
• YES
•••• • •••••••••••••••••
• NC
•
•• ••••
•
JIt •
••••• •
•
.x ••
X
.•.x •• •••••
K2
Kl
••••• K3· ••• • ••• ••
•
*
*
.
•
••
••
•• YES
•
•• NO
•
INCREMENT
• TO BE MODIFIED ••••••
••
FIFLD I
••••••
• L.A.C. BY 1 •
••
.*
*.
.*
•
••
*.
••
*.
.*
•
....
x
x
*•• *
•••••••••••••••••
• YES
• NC
•••• ••••••
••••
•
•••• ••••• •
B3 •
..X. Ait •
•• X.
•
•• X. A2 • •
•
••••• •
••••• • ••••• •
• • ••••
BV. The Assembler - Phase 6
••
••
X
• •• ·.C5 ••• •••••••
.I~SFRT ABSOLUTE'
'(01 UR RELOCAT-•
•••••••••••••••••
04 ••••
•
.X
•
HI,
•
••• ••••
••
CHECK AND
COLLECT
CUNOITION
CODES
.. .
A~
..
.x
•
•
•
.. .
•
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
x
••
F.5
.*
*.
.:·C~8~D~~l?~ .:.!~~.
*.
.*
*.
.*
*•• *
•
x
D~ •• ••• •••••
SAVE
•
• QPERAND VALUE •
[PERANO
••••••
•• PCSSIBLr: ••
•
*.
NO
.•
x
*..
*
• NO
••••••
• 04 •
••••• •
x
•• ••••
•
H7 .•
·••••..
.
X
.' .' .
..·~ON01TIO:· •• vrs
••
G3 •
•• ••••
•
~OVE
••
....
Fit
x
••••• •
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
• G3 ••••
• .
INSTS
· ..
• NO
.•
•
•
-.
*.
••
•
•
..................
x
x
*•• ••••
••••
• NO
•• Dit •• • • .x •.••••.•..•.
•• C2 •• ••••
••••• • •• H3 •'.X.
••••• • •• H2 ••• X.
x
•••• X
•••• X
HI
••
• •••• HZ··.·.·····
••••••••
.•
*.
•• .. • •• H3 ••INSBF
•
•
SCAN
•
.INTO 1/0 BUFFER •
••
LrNG
•• NO
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•• FORM VALID ••••••
• (9-121. PUT O.
•
EVALUATE
•
•.
.*
• INTO POS 6 OF •
•
OPERAND
•
••
.*
•
110 RUFFER
•
•
•
x
*•• *
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• YES
•• B2 ••
••••• •
x
x
*.
••••• •
SPOND
f3···.······
.•.....
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
x············
DISP
•*
*. ••
•• FOR~AT
OR
••
X
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
FI~Lr
*.
•
•
•
.
.
• ABLf III FLAG •
"NTC 1/0 KUFFER.
•
•
IPOS 71
.•.x············
• NO
••••
.•.x ••
E3
•• X. B4 •
·
••
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
•••••
• At·
•••
.DISPLACEMENT •• YES
..BEYOND 121 TO ••••••
•
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
X
••••• Fl· •• •• ••• ••
.-•
• INSERT TAG
•
INTO INSflF
•
• lelTS 6-11
•
X
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
INCRtMENT
L.A.C. BY 1
•••••••••••••••••
'l;E •
•
•
•
X
•
S~T TAG
•
•
• EQUAL TO 0
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
:X •••••••••• :
•
• •••• R5 ••••••••••
•
SCAN
•
•
EVALUATE
•
•
OPfRANO
•
•••••••••••••
••
•..... E2··········•
••
••
0
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
.
••••..
·•••••
•
X
Gl
x
•• ••••
••
••G5
••• •
NO
* ••••••
I~SERT LCNG
INST~UC1'ON
•
•
•
.FLAG INTn INSBF.
•
IBIT ~I
•
• ••• ·Olt ••••••••••
••••• El.··.······
INST2
.•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••••
.
'••••
•.• X. H3 •
••••••
· E2 .. X.
.
.*
••
INSXT
X
• ••••• BIt •••• • ••••••
lllL BL
LOAD LABEL.
• RfAD NfXT
RECOItC
NOM(,Z
X
• •••• Cl ••••••••••
•
ERFlG
•
• RfLOCATION
•
•
ERROR
•
•
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••••
•.
.*
.*
)(
• •••• A~ •••
••
*....
•
A5 ••••
Ll2NO
x
X
••••• 01··········
•
•
••
· '.
• NO
• YF.S
• YES
...
*.
••••
• Rio •• X..
• •
.DISPLACEMENT •• YES
•• A8snLUTE
••••••
•• NO
.•
*.
· ..
B3
.•.
•
•
•• • *T~o-~nRO * . •• YfS
•• INSTRUCTION ••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
H3 •• X.
•• ••••
• x
.*
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• CZ •• X.
••••• • x
.•.
SINST
••
••
AI,
•
SUBTRACT
•
• L.A.C. FROM •
• OPERANC VALUE •
· ..
• NO
•• • *
••
Nr:loIOD
FCER
X
••••• B2 ••••••••••
•
ERFLG
•
.-.-.-.-.-.~.-.-.
• FOR~AT ERROR •
AI·.
• * TAG *. ••
YES..
•••••• FIELD BLANK ••
*.
.*
.•
*.
•.
• •••• A3 ••••••••••
.-*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
•
x
•••••••••••••••••• ••••
••••
•
•
J4 •
• •
•• ••••
•
•• 82 •••••.
·•....•••.• .
•• ••••
•
A4 ••••
•••••• x
•• ••••
•
• A3 •••••X
"400 ••••
••• •
•• •A2
••••
••••• •
• AI.
••••• F4 ••••••••••
•
ERFLG
•
.CONOITION COOE •
•
F.RROR
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
•••••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
••••• •
• •
• GS ••••
••••
X
Ll3F10
•.····G4·· .. ·····.•
0
X
•
• •••• GS ••• •••••••
• INSERT SF(OND •
• WORD INTO 1/0 •
•
RUFFER
•
•
IPOS 13-161 •
•
•
'~SERT
•
.CONDITION CODE •••••
• INTO IHS8F
•
• (RITS 10-151 •
x
•••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••• ••••
•
•••
•
•
• •
•
•• •Gl
••• •
• • .
IINST
X
•..· .. H4·····.· ...•
•
....
Hit ••••
• INSFRT INDIRECT'
• ADDRESS FLAG •
• INTO INSBF
•
•
181T 81
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• J4 •• X •
••••• • x
· ..
..o. ... .. •.
L rr.. s T
••
J4
X
• •••• J5 •••• • •••••
••
PASS 1
••
NO
••••••
•
INCRE~ENT
~y 1
L.A.C.
••
•
••
••
*.. *
•••••••••••••••••
• YES
•• ••••
•
••••
A5 •
..X' B4 •
X
••••
•
•••• •
.•...• K4··········•
•
INCREMENT
•
• L.A.C. 8Y 1 •
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••••
..X. E2 •
••••• •
*.
•.
.*
.*
x
·.
.
.. .
.. .
•••••
·sw •
• AI.
•••
X
nCA
.•
••
••
•.
AI
•••
••
PASS 1
•.
*•• *
••••..
·•••••
•
*. ••
.*
.*
NU
••••••
• YES
• Bl •• X.
X
••••• Pl •••••••• ••
•• INCREMEPIT ••
• L.A.C. BY 1 •
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
..
X
..
...... C1·.····
LDLEIL .. ···
-.-.-.-.-.-.LeAC LAIHL.
REAC NEXT
J;'ECORD
•
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• CE •
• AI.
•••
.
OC?ND
X
... ·.El·······.··
SCAN
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
EVALUATE
•
OPfRANC
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
X
*tNSfRT ABSOLUTF •
• I~I OR RELOCAT-.
• liSLE III FLAG.
• IN 1/0 BUFFFR •
•
IPOS 61
•
..... Fl··.··.····
•••••••••••••••••
X
.....Gl····.··.··
••
•
INSERT
CPEPANC VALUE
• IN 1/0 BUFFER
• IPOS q-121
•*
•
•
•
••••• *••••• *•••••
••• *·~1**X••• *•• ••
.-*-*-*-.-.-.-.-.**
•
OFOUT
OPFRANO
*• ~CVE
VALUE TO 110
•
BUFFER
•
••••••••••••••••••
••••
.. .
•• X. B 1 •
••••• •
Chart BW,
The Assembler - Phase 6
Flowcharts
181
•• ••••
•
A7. •
****.
*rJl *
*
••Al·
•
D~Ol
AI
•• o·
*.
*.
.•.x *.
•. ••
.. ..
XLFC
.*
A2
YFS
••••••
*•••• •
NO
••
.. ... ..
....
••
H2
.*
•• S~IFT
••
•• YF S
•• L.A.C. FVEN ••••••
•.
*.
.*
•
••
•.
••
INCRf~F~T
.. ... ..
.. ..
*.
*.
1\3 •• X.
•
x
•••••
• fl·
•••
·CA •
*.
.*
.*
••••
.*
•
•.SHIFT
••
•
•
CONSTANT.
RIGHT HY
•••••
SHIFT CCUNT •
..
.. .... ..
.*
••
••
••••••••• *•••••••••
* .• *
03
.x
••
.•
: ~~~V~:~Tl~~~ :
• TO CO'PLIMENT •
FORM
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•*•••
.. •. . * ...
•••••••••••••••••••
•
X
•
• x
•••••••••••••••••
*••.*
Jl
...
••
*.
*.
••
•
•
COOt TO
lie RuFFEP
•
•
••• L.A.C. BY 1 •••
•••••••••••••••••
X
•
BitHEX
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
1 OF
•
.CONSTANT TO 1/0.
•
eUFFER
••••••••••••••••••
~OPO
•
••• ** ••••••••••••••
••••
·•••••
.•
X
•
182
•
•
••H2
••• •
Kl *.X.
X
••••• KI.· •• • ••• ••
C(~PU1E SHIFT.
•
FOR FIXFD
•
•
PCINT
•
0
X
...··..· •.•
••.····H3
INC~EMENT
•
••••• J3 ••• • ••••••
X
••• *
• YFS
Chart BX
X
···.·Hl ••• •••••••
•.MCVE
PELOCATICN.•
DEOUT
.*
·•••••..
•
••
.
.x ..••.••••••
·........•..•.••...••••••• x..
B-VALUE •• NO
SPECIFIED ••••••
•• . *
*
•
(pes 6-7)
•
•• KI •• •• ••••••••••••••••
••••• •
*.
...... ..
••
.....
••••• •
•
INTtGER •
AS FIXFD
•••••
POINT
•
••• ••• ••••• • X
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••••
• Hl •• X.
• •••• Hl ••••••••••
.•
X
·.·.·C3 •• • •••••••
•
fOUT
•
• HOVE EXPO~ENT •
• TO CSF BUFFER •
T~OS
CC~PLIMfNT
.*
• YES
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
Gl ••• •••••••
•••• •••TAKE
••
•
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••
••
•• TREAT
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••• •••••••
•••••• F3BTHEX
•
• MrVE EXPONENT •
• TC 1/0 BUFFER •
•
(POS 6-7)
•
•••••
Fl ••• •••••••
• RE~OVF
SIGN •
• BIT, SHIfT
•
•
RIGHT flY
•
• SHIFT COUNT •
•
•
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••••
.•.x
.. ..
X
X
.*.*.F1 ••••• •••••
Gl
••
NO.. INTEGER
•••••• CONSTANT
The Assembler - Phase 7
A2
•
INCRFMENT
·•••••..
•
X
• •••• k3 ••••••••••
•
OFOUT
•
•
~OPC 1 OF
•
• CO~STANT TO OSF •
BUFFER
•
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••
x
••••
·•• A4 .••
••••
•
• E4 •• X•
..
X
• ••• ·.E4.·•••••••••
LOL8L
LOAD LABEL •
..-.-.-.-.-.-.•••••••••••••
•• X. 113 •
•
FLOTO
••• X. EVALUATE OEC
UPERANO
•
X
....•04···
••••.·••
•
•
•
L.A.C. BY 1 •
•••••••••••••••••••••
x
•••••
• CA •
••••
• 02.
..••••.•
*.
•••••••••••••••••
X
••
•••••• E3 •• ••••••••• •
I~CREMENT
.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
*.
• NO
X
.
••••• C4.· ••••••••
•
OFOUT
•
•
WORO 2 OF
•
.CO~STANT TO OSF.
BUFFEP
•
•
B
•• YES
SPECIFIEO ••••••
*.
• YES
••••••• E1.· •• ••••••••
••• L.A.C. BY 1 •••
•••••••••••••••••
.
X
X
•••••••••••••••••••
• YES
X
• •••• B4 ••• • ••••••
. -.-.-.-.-*-.-.-.
••
••
.·
A4.···.····.•
• ...INCREMENT
•
•
• L.A.C. BY 1 •
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
•
114HEX
•
••
I~C~EHE~T
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.• L.A.C. BY 3 •••••
•
~ORO 1 OF
•
.CONSTANT TO lin.
••
••
•
eUFFER
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••• ••••
• •
•• ••••
•
• E4 •
••••• •
• C3 •••••
•• •••••••••
•••••• C3fLOTO
• E~ALUAT~ XLFC •
•
OPERAND
•
••••• 02 ••• • •• ••••
••
x
••• •
••C3
•• ••••
••
••
X
••
PASS 1
••
*.• *
x
*.
...
NO ••
• •••••• POSITIVE
•••••••••••••••••
:X •••••••••• : :
••••••
••
x
C2
• L.A.C. KY 1 •
.SET LAVAL EQUAL.
•
Tr. L.A.C.
•
Nf' ••
.*
• 0:
CCNSTA~T
••••••
.*
*••
• *
YES
·•••••..
••••
•
•• NO
PASS 1
••
X
THAN ••••••
• .. *
••
••
X
••
• •••• E3 ••••••••••
••
• NU
••••• (1 ••••• •••••
01
•••••
• CA •
• 02*
•••
*.
COu~T •• YES
31
N(,
X
••
..
..G~EATF-R
.*
x
• NG
.x
A3 ••••
A3
•• YES
••••••
••
~INUS
A"3 •
.... ... ....
•
•••••• x
••
SHIFT
C/JUNT
*.*. •
x
III
••
••
••
x
*.. *
•
.. .. ..
........
.x
••••
·•• A4 .••
••••
••••• •
•.* •• •
x
•••••
·CE •
• AI •
•••
••••• •
*
A3 •
•• ••••
*,,*"'* •
• 11.2 *•••
•
Fll ***t
Flll1 r
t
X
••• **A1······· •••
*****AZ*··.·· ••••
RFSfT
• SWITC~ES ANO •
• ~LFFfRS TC
•
•
lrRQ
•
•• *.*.*** ••••• * ••
••
•
•
•
••
••
At
...
*.
••
* .• *
...
.*
••
*.
.*
••
•.
• ••••••
••• ••••SETe3 •••
••
FLNIS
•
•
•
*
•
• *••••••••••••••
•••
.*
* •.
*
• NO
.*
01
••
SIGN
MINUS
.*
C3
••
.•
*.
•• CPERAND •• NO
•• CHARACTER ••••••••••
•• EllANK ••
x
t. ••
*CA *
• YES
• DZ*
•
•
CCLLECT
•
•
I'ANTISSA
•
•
DIGITS
•
••••••••••• **.***
x
***.
•
•• A7. ••
.. ... ..
x
02
*. *. ()
x
*** •
•*
B7.
.*
.•
•
•
.."'.
••
•• X. A2 *•
**•• *•
•
x
* ••
*
• NO
••
•• ••••
•
•••04**••
FLlP2
X
*****EZ**.***** ••
•
•
NGP
*
OR
MOX 3
*
•
x*
••••
.*
•
F3
.*
..
.x ••
*.
*.
+.
.*
+• • *
•• *. *.
.*
*...
** •••
G3
*.
lARGF fOR ••••••
eUFFER .*
••
.. .
x
*••• *
• *** *CA *
* 1)2.
•• x* C7 * • •
•
•••• * *
• NO
X
•••
*. .*
.*
.*
x
•••••
.*
F4
x
.*.
••
• FlI •
*
..
.. ..
x
••••••
• A3 •
• •
*•
* •. *
*.
• YES
••
WORD OF •• YES
*. MANTISSA
••••••
*eUfFER A'O'.
*. .... *.*
A 'B'
*.• *
*••
••
••
• LEFT
•.
..
·CA •
• EZ.
G3 •• x.
fLFNL
•*
*.
.MANTISSA Toe*. YES
••
••07.·
•
01.
•••
•• OPF.RAND •• NO
•• CHARACTER ••••••
x
• NO
••
*
•
• NO
••
•• YES
*.ZERO I'ANTISSA ••••••
*.
E4
.•.x
.81 •
•• OPERAND •• YES
•• CHARACTER ••••••
INITIAL
•
•
BINARY
•
* EQUAL
EXPONENT
*
•
192
•
••••• *** •••• ** •••
•
X
*.
*. • •• * .*
••••• E3*.* ••••• *.
••
••
x
••
CHARACTER ••••••
•• AN 'E' ••
X
*·.*·r?· •• *******
*
MPY
*
*-.-*-*-*-.-*-*-*
•
COMPUTE
*
*
BINARY
•
*
I'ANTISSA
*
••••• *****.****.*
••
••
•
••••• •
• *. ••
.•.x
04
.*
*.
•• OPERAND •• YES
• NO
**•• * ••• **.*.***.**
G2
FLSSC
•
•
•*•• *•
• 04 •
*•• *. •
X
•• ***F1···*·**·.*
* SFT FLrATI~G *
• SIGN IFLSGN) •
•
"(NUS
•
•** •• ****."'* •• * ••••
FLF IN
X
*.**.03 •• *.· •••••
* COMPUTE POWER •
OF 10
•
•
* I'ODIFICATION *
••••••• ** ••••• * ••
••
.OPERAND CHAR •• YES
•• lESS THAN ••••••
.*
* ••
*
• YES
..**.
•••
•••• *•
•• Nil
••••••
•••••
•
.•.
•..•
X
•
•
~CN-INTEGFR
..*.
..* •• C2** ••••••••
•• YES
••••••
TO INDICATE
• *.......... .• x
.....
•• ••••
•
*
•
•
• C3 ••••
••CZ
••• •
• ••••• x
·......
HLP
*.
A~PERSANC
*.
SET DECIMAL
POINT COUNT
TO ZERO
• A2 •• ••••
•• ••••
• •• Cl ••• X.
.
.. ... ..
•*
•
•
•
••x*.
x
*.
•
X
X
.*
SIGN
*.
•
••·.··1-'2.· •••••••••
*.
x
C1
•• ** •••••••••••••
•
SET FLLPZ
•
E~UAL TO
•
MCX 3 -1
•
.* •••• ** •••• ** •••
•
•
•
'" NO
...
•
*
(PERA~O
P(INTER ONE
C~A~ACTEP
RIGHT
• AZ •• X.
• '"
•• YES
•• SIGN PLUS ••••••
*.
*
*
*••
~(V[
·••••••••..•
~
.•
X
* •••• A3 ••• ** •••• *
..*.
x
.*
x
•• ••••
•
C3 •
•.*.*
•
•• ••••
•
K3 •
• NO
*
X
••••• H3 ••••••••••
•
SRT
•
• SHIFT BUFFER •
RIGHT 1
*
•
•***.* •••••••••••••
•••••
. -.-.-*-.-.-*-.-.
X
.....
•• J3.····.····
•
BINARY.
UPD~TE
•
EXPONENT
•••••
1
•
•••• *••• BY*•••••••
*••• x
••••
*~**
*FlY •
·.*•. ...
*
K"
HHj)\
t •••
'"
x
••
•*
••G3
••• •
K3
••
• :t
*•
•• MANTISSA •• YfS
NCRMAL 11 ED ••••••••••
*. • • • • .*
x
• ••••
• '><..
:
*
***
*
: K'I ::
***",*
Chart BY.
The Assembler - Phase 7
•• ••
• NO
x
•••
*•
• Ill •
.Bl •
•• C!.
•
• AI.
• *
•
Flowcharts
183
•••••
·ElZ •
• At·
•••
••••• •
••••• •
,(
••••• Al ••••••••••
A2
•
•
SHIFT
•
• BUFrER L[fT 1 •
•-.-.-.-.-.-.-*-.
•••••••••••••••••••
•.
••
.*
• VF~
....
SUBTRACT
CALlIN~
•••••••••••••••
•
••••••••••••••••••••• i
•••• •
•• ••••
•
."l
A3 •
• D~ ••••
•••••
•
• • .
BUILD
•
• SPECIFICATION •••••
•
•
1
•
•
POWE~
....
x
FL~C
•
•
OF Ie
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
SFT INPICo610R
••
HP
•
~rN-INT~GFP
X
··.·.03·
....·.··.•
•
••••• 07· ••• • •••••
••
•••
• •••• C3 ••••••••••
•• r2 •••••.
•·.···01.·· ...···.•
x
·BY •
• 04 •
·x
ROUTINE
****
Fuse
.....
••
••
•••• •
·'H
X
••
•• ••
• NO
·· .. •
• ····(2···
fXIT TO •.
THF
•
•
.x
•• CHARACTfR.. YFS
•• LESS THAN r ••••••••••
X
••
•
•
.. .. ..
1\3
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••• ~nDIFIER LFSS ••
•• THAN I; ••
r~n~
•••••
·CA •
• oz.
•••
• POINTfR TO
•
• RFTURN OUTPUT •
•*
*.
NQ •• P8WE~ OF 1~ ••
••
••••••••••••••••••
•••
x
•
•
•
•
x
,(
CHARACTER
AND MOYE
POINTER
RIGHT 1
• BY •
'" K3·
• Cl ••••
•
.*
•·····P,7··.···.··.
••
•
SFT XR7
•
• x
•••••••••••••••••
•••••
*.
•.LOAO
••••••
• NO
•
C1
*•••
FlXXX
• •
....
...
....
~PRE
•• T ... .AN Z'ir; ••
X
••••
.K7 •
X
• •••• A3 ••••••••••
••
..EXPONfNT
• •••• Bl··· •••• •••
•
UPOATF
..
•
RINAPY
•••••
• ~XPCNENT flV -1 •
•
.•.x
A3 ••••
•• ••••
•
.*
*. •• VFS
•• MIN~RY
SL T
•
••••••
• "2 •
• TURN ON FLBSW •
• AND INDICATE •
• NCN-INTEGER •
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
: X •••••••••••••••••••••••• :
x
OIV
.....
E2..........
. •••. F3 •.•••.•.•••
• SfT M [ , n ( F Y . .
X
•·····~1··.···.···
MPV
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
·•••••••••••••••••
... ··..
•
•
•
INSTRUCT1(~
•
• SUBTRACT 5
•
FeR
•
• FROM PREVIOUS
•
PCSTTIVF.
•
RF~AINDER
• SPI:CIFICATION • •
•••••
•
~UlTIPlV
RV lr
'"
•
r:~
••
.*
*.
VF~
•• PO~FR OF ••
•••••• In FQUAL n ••
•
Fl
*.
*.
* •••
•
.*
.*
.*
*.
•
or 1'"
.
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.•
X
FLF(\(
X
••••• Jl ••••••••••
•
•
•
Chart BZ.
184
The Assembler - Phase 7
...
*.
.*
..
.i
••
*.
* .. *
.*
MO~IFY
I~STRUCTION
SP~CIFICATIO~
x
· ..
•• ••••
•
06'1 •
••••
•
•
•
·· ..
.
•.... KZ··········
·CII •
.. ['Z·
•
K2
fL2 ••••
••
-.
*•• *
•
MCVE OPI:RANC •
•
PPIN'[R 1
•
•
C~A~A(T~R
•
•• • • 6 • • RIGHT
•
•••••••••••
....
i
•'" A3 ••
••••• •
.
.*
.*
·.....H3.·.·........
• ADe 5 BASK
• AND TURN OFF
•
CARRY
•
..
•
·••••••••••••••••
..
:X .......... :
•
X
••••• J3 ••••••••••
• DIVIDE
••
•
•
BY )0
•
•••••••••••••••••••••
x.
i
••
••
X
*.
• YES
FOP
NEGATIVE
.. -
.x
• YES
* •••
•••xc..
*.
• NO
H2
G3
..SUBTRACTION •• NO
..RESUlT MINUS ••••••
* ••• .*
•••••••••••••••••
Kl
••
.*
*. •• Y~S
•• BINARV
•• fXPUN~NT LE<;S ••••••
•• THaN r ••
A7 •
••
•• OPEPo6ND •• NO
•• CHARACTlR A ••••••
•• ~INUS ••
•
•
•
x
•
.•.x
·····J2·······.··
• SET
•
•
•
••
...
.... .. ..
.... •·•
• •
••••• •
x
.*
X
•••••••••••••••••
~w
(;Z
*.
•• ••••
•
K7 •
•••••
•
•••••••••••••••••• i
•••••
•
•·BV
•G".
•
•
IN<;FRT
• fXPCNENT ~Nn
•
SIGN I~
•
r.()~4STANT
.•
x
••••• Hl·.····.···
•
DIY
•
•
O'YIDE
•••••
•
RV 10
•
•
* •. *
•
•
• YES.. CPEPAND ••
X••••• CHAPACTfR AN ••
..""P[RSAND ••
•••••••••••••••••••
••
X
• •••• F3· •••••••••
• TURN ON •'"
•• CARRY •••
•••••••••••••••••
*.
• NO
X
•
..
.x ••
YES.. ePE~A~r ••
• ••••• CICREMENT ••
•
L.A.C.
•
•
BY 1
••••••••••••••••••
••
INSERT 'I'
•
IN •
1/0 BUFFER
•
•
(POS 7)
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
• YES
X
X
••••• F4 ••••••••••
• •••• F5 ••••••••••
• INSERT NAME
• WORD Z
IN
• 1/0 BUFFER
• CPOS 13-161
•
J~ERl
••
•
1/0 BUFFER IN ••
(POS 7)
•
•
•
•
•
X
.
:OS2ND
X
.····G4OFOUT
.........
.•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
NAME WORD 2 •
··· ..G3·.··.·····
CLLCT
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
GET
•
•
NAME
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
..
...
••
••
H3
.•.x
••
hAME OK
..
•
3
•
1(3 •• X •
•
X
••••••K3 ••••••• •• ••
•••••••••••••
X
•••••
• AI.
•••
• CE •
•••••••••••••••••
X
• •••• ~5 ••••••••••
•• INCREMENT ••
••
•
L.A.C.
• ••••
•
L.A.C.
•
•
BY Z
•
1
•
••••••••••••••••••• x ••••••••••••••••••
•
x
••••
••••
•
•••
• A4 •• .CB •
• K3 ••
•• ••••
•
•• ••••
• •• J4 •••••
x
•••• .•.
LINKA
X
••
INCREMENT
•
J4
••
••
•*
••
•
·••••..
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
•
•
X
...
LDLBL
LOAO LABEL.
READ NEXT
RECORD
X
• •••• H4 ••••••••••
L.A.C.
BY
TO
DSF BUFFER
•
• •••• G5· ••• •• ••••
•
DFOUT
•
.WORO 2 OF LONG •
•
eSI TO
•
•
• OSf BUFFER
•••••••••••••••••
•• YES
••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•
•
•
•
•
ZERO
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
••
••••• K2 ••••••••••
Chart CB.
X
·····C5
.........
.
•
INSERT ZERO •
•
•
INCREMENT
L.A.C.
·..
BY
•• X. C3 •
••••
•
••
.. ..
PASS 1
*.
·•••••..
•
NO
••••••
.•
.:41
•
INSERT NAME
IN
."ORD 1
• 1/0 BUFFER
• (PCS 9-IZ)
•
• 11.4 •• X·
X
A5 •
X
K4 ••• •• •••••
•••• •••INCREMENT
•
•
•
L.A.C.
•
•
BY 4
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
.......•
•• X. KJ •
•.
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
x
••••• •
••••• •
• YES
••••
BY
• •••• J5 ••••••••••
*. ••
.
••••• IC5 ••••••••••
•
•
••
OFOUT
NAME WORD 1
OSf TO
BUFFER
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-••
••
•••••••••••••••••
x
•••••
.CC •
• AI·
•••
•
••••••
lINKZ
••••• 04 ••••••••••
•
t
•
.. ... * •.•••x
*••
• *
YES
1
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
OSAA
•• YES
•••••••
••·····HZ····.·.··.
••
II\CPfMENT
•
INC~fMENT
TO
DSF BUFFER
•
•
1
*.
••••••••••••••••••
••
x
* .. .*
.
••••
• NO
• NC
• C~ ••
:X .......... : : .......... X:
•• ••••
•
X
X
X
J3 ••••• •••••
•·····J2··.·.····.
INSERT ZERO •
••·····JI··········••
••••• ••IhCPEMENT
••
•
•
•
••••
X
*.
*.
X
••• ·.Fl ••••••••••
•
DFOUT
•
.NAMf WCRO 1 AND.
• INDICATORS TO •
• DSF BUFfER
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
02 •
••••• •
x
• NO
••
••••
• ••• NO
••
NAME OK
••••••
• •••• C4 ••••••••••
X
Fl· •
•• . *
DFOUT
•
.•• -.-.-.-.-.-.-$-.
NAME WORO 1 •
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
.•.x
.CB •
•••••••••••••••••
"A~E
•
85
•
•
•
•
•
•
X
••••• EZ·· ••••••••
•
INSEPT NAME •
• WORO 1
IN •
•
110 BUFFER
•
•
(POS 9-121
•
X
*••
••••••••••••••• *•••
•
x
•.CE
••••
•
• AI·
•••
•••••••••••••••••••
•
IN •
•
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
•• ••••
•
02 ••••
• • X
COP ••••
.x •••••.••••••
•
1
····.·C3 •••••••••••
LDLBL
••••••••••••••••• X
LOAD LABEL.
• READ NEXT •
RECORD
••••• OZ· •••••••••
• INSERT 3 'CALL).
• OR 2 (L IBf) IN •
•
Ill. BUFFER
•
•
(PUS 6)
•
•• ••••
•
"1 ••••
•
X
· ..
.
•
•
INCRE~[NT
BY
'3'
•
INSERT NAME
.WORD 1
IN
•
1/0 BUFFER
• (POS 9-121
INCREMENT
L.A.C.
•
INSERT
1/0 BUFFER
(POS 6)
••••• B4 •••••••
••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
C3 •• X.
•• ••••
• •
CllXT
••
A5 ••••
••••••••••••••••••••
X
·····(1·····
.. ··.•
•
•
•
•
•
X
II\CREMENT
L.A.C.
RY 1
•
.X
• •••• A4 ••••••••••
•
•
•
•
•
• • ••• 83 ••••••••••
••
•
•
•
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
••
Of OUT
NAME WORD 2
10
[SF BUFFER
x
••••••••••••••••••
••••
• •
• E1 •
••••• •
YES
X
• •••• P2 ••••••••••
..
.*
•
•
•
•
•• I\C
••••••
....* ...
•
DSAZ
••••• A3 ••••••••••
t.
Nl.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
PASS 1
....
••••••
••••••
A4 ••••
X
••• *
* •• *
•
A2
•••
•* •••••
• •
K4 •
•••••
• CC •
• AU
•••
X
••••• Al·········.
•• INCRFMFNT ••
•
L.A.C.
•
•
BY 1
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
X
••••• el ••••••••••
• INSERT NAME •
•
WORD 2 IN
•
•
• lID P.UFFER
• CPOS
13-1f) ••
••••••••••••••••••
.
X
..•.. C1··········
r.fOUT
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
NAME WORD 2 •
•
•
•
•
TO
e~FFER
•
CSF
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
01·· ••• • •• ••
•••••••INCREMENT
••
•
L.A.C.
•
•
BY 1
••••••••••••••••••
••
x
•••••
• CB •
• 1<3.
•••
CllCT
••••• Gl··········
• SET UP SCAN •
• FOR SYMBOLIC •
•
OPERANDS
•
•
CNLY
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
...... .......·.
X
~l.·
•
SCAN
• COLLECT 2-~ORO
• NAME, STORE IN
CLBUF
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.- ••
•
••••••••••••••••••
···.·Jl·....····.•
X
••
•
•
~ESTORE
SCAN
TO NORMAL
STATUS
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•••• 1<1 •••••••••
•
•
•
EXIT TO THE
CALLING
ROUTINE
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•
Chart CC. The Assembler - Phase 8
Flowcharts
187
•••••
•••
X
•••
••• •
•• •A3
••••• ••
•••••
.co •
• CD •
• AI·
• A7·
•••
X
•••
A2
••
.•
*.
.*
*.
••
•• ytS
YFS •• CELIMETER ••
••
PASS 1
•••••• ••••• IN PCSITICN 35 ••
EXITA
AI
•.
•.
EBCA
••
*•• *
.*
FBPO:
X
••••• A3 ••••• •••••
• P~CK 2 EBCCIC •
• CHARACTE~S
•
•
FEP WO~O
•
.. ..........
.*
•
• NU
• B2 •• X.
X
fX2ND
·.···B1·· ••·•·.·.
..
•• EBCR
.•.x
.X
••••• ~2· •••••••••
•
ERFLG
•
• SYNTAX ER~PR •
•
INSE~T
•
.RElCCATION INO-.
• ICATOIl ((1) IN •
•
110 BUFFER
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
X
••
••
.
EBLP
X
• •• C2··
••••••
•••SCAN
FOil •••
RIGHT
•
DEllMETER
•
• AND DETERMINE •
•
C~APACTER
•
•
crUNT
•
X
•.... 01········
..•
OFOOT
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
lOX TO •
~CVE
MONCL TO
[SF BUFFER
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
·
.
B3.
R[('o~O
•••••••••••••
x
•.CE••••
•
••
.,.,.
• AI •
*.
........
PASS 1
•• YES
.*
••••••
X
..···C3 ••••••••••
•
OFOUT
•
• ~CVF 1 WORO •
TO
•
•
• [SF BUFFER
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••••• •
••••• •
•
•
•
•
•
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-
• NO
•• INCREMENT ••
• L.A.C.
BY 18 •••••
••••••••••••••••••••• x
•••••••••••••••••
.•
•.
X
••••• C2· •••••••••
••••• C1 ••••••••••
•
BlttlfX
•
• INSERT SHOIlT •
• L[X TO MONel IN.
•
1/0 flUFF FR
•
X
lDlRL
LOAD LABEL.
IlEAD N~)(T
AI,
•
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
X
• •••• 03 ••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
INCREMENT
L.A.C.
8Y 1
•
•
•
• X ............ .
X
••••• E1 ••••••••••
••
•
•
INC~EME~T
L.A.C.
BY 1
••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
E2
.•.x ••
*.. *
• NO
x
•••••
·CB •
• K3.
•••
i
••.•• F2.··
•••••.••
•
BlottEX
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
COUNT.
.
CHARACT~R
• TC PGS q-12 IN •
IIG BUFFER
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
Chart CD.
188
The Assembler - Phase 8
.. ... ..
....
....
....
x
.*
*.
•• C~APACTER •• YES
•• COUNT ZERO ••••••
•.
.*
*.
.*
x
E3
••
••
ALL
•• NO
•
•
•• CHARACTERS •••••• X. A3 •
..PROCESSEO..
••
*. • .*YES
•• ••••
•
B2 •
••••• •
i
••••• F3 ••••••••••
••
•
•
RFTURN RIGHT
DELIMETEIl
TC 1/0 AREA
••
•
••••••••••••••••••••
.. •••.
•
•• X. AI, •
••••• •
..
•• •••• A4 •••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
••••..
·•....
•
• NC
•
•• ••••
•
AI, ••••
•••••
•
•
•••••
•
A.3 •
•••••
•
•••••
•c[ •
• Al.
•
*•
•
.•.x
AI..
• •••• A2 ••••••••
••••
*.
•
PALI1L
•
••
•• YES
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•• X.r[~~E~TS SlMT ••••••••••• X.RFAO - PASS 1 • •
••
••
.O.,TIGNAL LIST -.
••
••
•
PASS 2
•
• NO
•• **
• Al ••
•• ••••
•
X
~N[MGNIC
•
•
X
••• ·.Cl··.·······
•
•
•
SET LABfL
VALU~
••
ILABVLI •
FCUAL Te
•
L.A.C.
•
••
•
B3
..
.x
••
ER.ROR
84
X
•••••• C3 •••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••
:X .......... :
X
•
•
•
EXIT TO
REQUIRED
PHASE
•••••••••••••••
••
*.
A8S, •• YES
•• np SPR
••
.155, ENT, ERR, ••••••
*.
.*
*. • .*NO
X
• •••• C4 ••••••••••
••
•
••
INCP.fMFNT
L.A.C.
•
BY 2
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
•
: X •••••••••• :
X
X
• ••• 03 •••••••• •
..
.x
.*
•• LIBR,
t.
• NO
LOAD
REQUIRED
PHASE
•
•• •••••••••••••••••
••
PHASE
•• YfS
•• SEPVIC(NG OP ••••••
COOE I~ CORE.
.·· .. 01······· .. ·
•••••••••••••••••
• •••• A4 ••••••••••
........
••
•••••••••••••••••
•
StT LABEL
•
.PELeCATION PIT.
•
EUUAL TO
•
•
~OCF OF
•
•
ASSE~PLY
•
••
•• • ••YES
•• ••••
•
Al •
••••• •
..
.x
*..*
x
UP COOt
••••••••••••••••••
•
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••
B1· •••• • ••••
••• • •••
PACK .NC SAVE •
•
•
•
A3
••••
•
ERrlG
•
•• UP coo~ •• NO
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.- •
•• IN TA8L~
•••••••••• X.
UP CODE
•
..
•••••• 04 •••••••• • ••
•
•
•
LOLBl
LOAD LABEL
• READ NEXT
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-
•
..• .•
Rf'CORD
•••••••••••••
••••
•• X. Al •
X
••... ··..••
••.*··.FJ
S[ARt~
•
•
OP COOt
••••
•
TAPLF
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
Chart CE.
The Assembler - Phase 9
Flowcharts
189
•••••
·CF •
• A3·
•••
•• ••••
•
A2 ••••
•••••• X
SCAN
••••• Al •• ••••••••
•
•
: 1~6A~WV¥~~~~S :
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
••
•
•
•
SET TYPE TO
NOPl,
ALLO. FULL
SCAN
*.
SKPCB.
*... *
.•
B2
••
.•.x
x
•••••
·CH •
• 01·
•••
.....
x
CZ
••
•• CPERAND •• YES
•• CHARACTER A ••••••••••
•• MI NUS ••
x
•• ••
·CH •
• Fl.
• NO
....
• SET TERM ••
AND RTERM
•
EQUAL TO 1
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
.*
••
*.
....
.....
•• ••
.CG •
• NO
.. ..
.•.x
• NO
.•.x
..C~ARACTER
EI
••
•• OPFRAND •• YES
•• C~ARACTER A ••••••
•• ElLANK ••
*. .*
02
•• OPERAND •• YES
AN ••••••••••
..ASTERISK ••
X
•
•
•
.*
.....
•••
X
• K3.
•••
X
TYPE
.•.... EZ··· ...····•
•
•
•
NOP
OR
BRANCIi
•
•
•
•
•
x
••••• •••••••••••••••••
•••
• CIi •
• ~l*
.•.x
Fl
••
.. *
•.
•• UPERAND •• YES
•• CHARACTER A ••••••
•• (CMMA ••
••
F2
.•.x
••
*•
.. .. ••••• ....
..•••••. •••
~
.....
•• CPERAND •• YES
•• CHARACTER A ••••••••••
•• SLASH ••
x
x
• •*
•• ••
·CG •
• NO
• NO
• CH •
•• X. A2 • • HI.
• F3 •
•••
•••• •
•••••
• CF •
• HI.
•••
LABBL
HI
...x
HZ
••
•*
*.
•• ~~Y ElLANKS •• YES
•• EMBEDDED IN ••••••
•• LAefL ••
*.
* •• *
.*
• NO
x
•••••
.CK •
• EI·
•••
x
••••••
·CK
.•.x ••
.•
*.
•• (PERAND ••
••
....
C~ARACTER
•• PERIOD
• NO
• Gl.
JZ
.•.x
••
0
•• ••
x
•••••
• CG •
• C2·
•••
190
•••
.CHARACTER EQUAL •••••••••
OR lESS THAN.
X
••
• NO
Phase 9
.CG •
• G3.
•*
*.
•• (PERAND •• YES
••
Chart CF. The Assembler -
.....
YES
A ••••••••••
••
X
•• ••
•••
•••
••••••
·CG
• AI·
... .•. ..
••••• 01 •• ••••••••
x
• NO
•••
X
.....
•• ••
••
....
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
....
YES
•• CHARACTER A ••••••••••
•• BLANK ••
X
YES
..CHARACTER AN ••••••••••
..AMPfRSANO..
X
•• ••
.CH •
• NO
• 01.
•
•
X
A3 •••••
..•
*.
•• OPERAND ••
*.
.•
*.
•• CPERAND ••
···.·Cl ••••• •••••
•
SET COL3
•
•
TO
•
•
NCPl
•
*.
••
• NO
••••••••••••••••••
SCNLP
.•.
•• OPERAND •• YES
•• CHARACTER A ••••••
~.
PLUS
••
X
••••• Bl •••••• • •••
••
AZ
• ••••
.CG •
• J4.
•••
•••
.CG •
• Fl •
•••••
• Ill.
•••
•• ••••
•
A3 •
••••• •
• CG •
A2 •
•• ••••
•
••••• •
•
.-.-.-.-.-,.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
X
••••• Al· •• •••• •• •
•
~OVE SCAN
•
• POINTER ONE •
CHARACTER
•
•
•
RIGHT
•
•
Rl
.•.x
••
.*
*.
YES.. OPERIINO ••
••••••
C~ARACTER
••
*.
COMMA
*•• *
.*
• NO
A ••
••
X
••••• A2••••••••••
•
•
•
•
SKPCB
SKIP PAST
COMMA OR
BLANK
.*
•
•
•
•
A3
.•.x
••
••••
• CG •
• A4 ••••
• • •
FERR••••
X
.•.... A4.··.·.····•
• SYNTAX ERROR •
•• X.
TO
•
•
•
• ERFLG
•
• •••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
A4 •
•••••
•
••
YES.. OPERAND ••
••••• CHARACTER EQUAL.
OR '"'ORE THAN.
••
0
* •• *
••
• NO
X
B3
.•.x
••
.*
*•
•• OPERAND •• YES
•• ·.e2··.······
• EXIT TO THE •
CALLING
•
•
ROUTINE
•
•
••
•••••••••••••••
CHARACTER ••••••
.LESS THAN A.
*.
••••
.CG •
• Cl ••••
•••••
• •
SMeOL
X
••••• C2 ••••••••••
•• SET TYPE ••
• FOR BRANCH TO •
•
SXMTP
••••••••••••••••••
••
*•• *
.•
x
••••• • .ce.
••••
· ... A4 .. X.•
•••• ••••• •
• NO
: .......... X:
C3
.•.x
• A4.
X
• •••• C4 ••••••••••
••
.*
t.
•• OPERAND ••
NO
.CHARACTER VALID •••••
..fOR RAOIX ••
•
ERFLG
• SYNTAX EHROR
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.••
••
•
x
••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• A4 ••
••••• •
x
.•.
X
X
X
••••• 03 ••••••••••
01
••
.....
.•.. ··04.·····.···•
•*
*.
• 01······.···
••
•• ,",ULTIPLY ••
•• OPERAND •• NO
•
SET SCAN
•
•
STORE
•• CHARACTER A ••••••
• OUTPUTS EQUAL •
• ACCUMULATED •
•
BLANKS IN
•
•• PERIOD ••
• SYMBOL BUFFER •
•
• INTEGER BY
•
TO ZERO
•
*.
.*
RADIX
•
•
•
x •••••••••••••••••••
•• • *
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••••••••••••••
•••••
• YES
• CF'.
•
•••
• A3.
·•·CG.
E4 •.. X.•
•••
.X
X
SCNEX
X
X
••••• E2 ••••••••••
••••• E3 ••••••••••
••••• El··········
...
··E4.·.··.·.·
••
••
• SET XR2 .••
••
••
•• SET XR2 ••
•
SCAN
ADD
• NEWEST DIGIT •••••
•
• POINTER ONE •••••
FOR •••••
•
• POINTER TO
• RfTURN OUTPUT •
• TO PRODUCT
•
•
CHARACTER
•
•
SYMIlOL
•
•
• CeLLECTION
•
•
R IGI- •
•••
• • .
SPLlJS
X
..... 01······
....
•
COl l
'to
'..
.• .•
YE S
•• ""
x
.•.
·•-
.. ..
el
••
*. *.
*•••
•
....• . •••
.•-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.•
*.
S"'Nl'i
'I(
••••• FI· •••••••••
•
ceLL
'"
• r.~lLECT TFRM •
.•
••
••
x
• •••• u~ ••••••••••
COL'I
•.
Fl
.•.x
••
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
*. *•• *.*
.*
••••••
STSCH
SEARtH
SYf'!flOL
TAHlF
•
•
•
•
••
x
•••••••••••••••••
•••••
.CG •
x
• GI·
•••
.*
.i. ••
*. *.
•. *.
fJ~LflCJ\T'1··d
.12
..
•• .*
.:.
••• *
ST AI>
••••• KI ••••••••••
• ~cT r~TFRNAl '"
• ~~LL(ATION
•
•• ·"."\OIICI-I TI' MOol'.
••
f'1F
...
.. * ....
A5sr,.PLY
...
I; ...........:•••.••.•
••••.
·•....
•
x
• A2 •
•
P'OFRT
~O
.....
.•.x
••
X
••
.CI •
•
••Al••
.. ...*.
• ••• AOSUA •••• YfS
•• SET TO ADO ••••••
•.
x
•••••
•
K~ •
X
•••••••••• ••••
· -.
•
••
.~
*. *•• * .*
.
.
• NO
• .CG" • P7 •
•• X. KI ....
•
•
• NO
••••• J~
.... . . ·••••.. •••••
·•.
• • •••• •.... • .
••••
••.•.
.•··.·
*••
: *
~
•.
*. .*
• " ~~LTIPIE ". YfS
•• ~EFfNIT'O~ ••••••
Nfl
.:c ••••
••••VALII) •••
H3
*•.
*
• Yf-S
J2
••
-...
•
... x.
:......•*
•
.•.
.~:lncI~:~,L,T:: •• ~~~ ••••
..
......
• CH"
G3
•• EOUAL I)
•• ••
H7
...
•••• SY"'HOL . ' ... NU
*.
Pt~I~[O
••••••
•
'"
•
•
ADO OR
•
• SUBTRACT TERM.
•
TO/FROM
•
•
VALUE
•
.
'I(
•
crLt
• COLLECT TFRM
X
• •••• F3 ••••••••••
Nil
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
....
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
·...............•'•'""
192
••
Nrp OR
IlRANCH Tn
CLRES
ROUTINF
AU"ilitl
*. ••
OK
SY"~OL
•
•
•
•
•• • •• yl ••••••• •••
The Assembler - Phase 9
X
•
•
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••• •••••
·CG •
••••
·CH •
• H7.
• H I · •••
•••
• • .
x
Chart CH.
•
•
•
•
•
• •••• [3 ••••••••••
••
••••• Gz·· ••••••••
SUBTR~CT
~ I.~
•••••
•
B? •
•• ••••
•
•••••••••••••••••
• YFS
Gl···· ..····•
•.....
•
SFT ADsue
•
• TO
•••••
••
••
*,.*
x
••••..
·•....
• .
YI'!;
X
X
• :
.*
• NO
• E3 •• X•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
JI
....
• HZ.
••
SALNK
*.
INOICATE
• RfLOCATABLE
.FlFMfNT CTRLSW
• NOT FQUAL"I
.• .*
X
.
S~T
..
••
NU..
TYPE
••
• •••• FCUAL SYMTP ••
x
·CH •
Fl· •••
x
•••••
•
C3 •
•• ••••
•
.2 PFLOCATABLE. YES
•• ELF,.FNTS IN ••••••
•• PR,)OUCT ••
·Gl*
••••• E2 ••••••••••
..... El···· ..... .
•
LABCK
•
••
••
AOSUP
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
TO ADO
•••••
•
CCMPR[SS
•
•
ANC CHECK
•
•
SYMBOL
•
•••••••••••••••••••'" i
•••••••••••••••••
•
••••
•
ce
•
••••
·
Nn
••••••
••••
•••••
·CG •
x
•• ••••
•
K2 •
•••••
•
X
.. ..
~)
f,3
.•
*. ••
• NO
• r.c •
•
••
..NOT'I'P CSLT
• r I ••••
• ((1ll1:'CT TFP",
(7
• *l'l'PF H;UAI
•
x
•••••••••••••••••'. •••••
• (H
TO
~ULTIPlY
••••• Cl· •••••••••
....
. -.-.-.-.-.-.-.-*
·•••••••••••••••••''""
*. .*
••
• YES
•
•
0
RH[R
••••••••••••••••••
SET C~L3
TC NUP
SW ITCH SET
....
.•-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.••
•
•
••
~FlOCATION
• • .
•
X
X
• •••• P3 ••••••••••
•••.. P2···
••••••.
•• REL[CATlnN ••
••
••
.TFPM PFlOCATION •••••
•
FRROP TO
•••••
•
FACTOR
BY
•
•
ERFLG
•
Fl,..NT
•
•
• x •• ••••••••••••••••
x
•••••••••••••••••
•••••
••••
• CG •
••••
• I'll.
•
•
E1 .• ••••
••• • •
x
••••
COLI
COL?
.. *.
." .••
Cl
X
••• •• HI ••••••••••
•
COLL
•
• COLLECT TERM •
·
·••••
.•.x
•• .*INTERNAL * •••
K2 •• X•
X
•• ~7.·.·
••
•
py TF.P" •
••
•
..................•
~llTIPly
FL~~T
x
•• ••••
•
• Al ••
.....
x
·CI •
• nl·
.hrn
•
C(,UIIIT TO
•
•
.~INU5 I • TER~ •••••••••
.. ~FIOCATIO~.
X
FACT~R
•
• ••••
•
..................
.CI •
• AI.
PFLr.CATIC~
.
•••
. ••••
•
K
~
••••
• •••••
X
••••• ~3 ••• • ••••••
.1000 RELOCATIUN
•
crUNT TO
• PLUS 1 • TFH~
• RFLOCATION
•
FACTOR
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
•••••
•••
.CI .•
• Al.
•••••
• CI •
•
Ill.
•••
~
CLPFS
.
••••• 11\ ••••••••••
•• RESET StAN ••
•
FOR NEXT
•
•
TERM
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
.....el···..·····•
~
••
~ESTOPE
SCIIN
•
FOP NFXT
•
ELE~FNT
• ,. OPf~IITOPI
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
~
•••• Cl.· ••• ••••
EXIT Tn THE •
(IILLING
•
ROuTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
••••
• CI •
•
[1 ••••
••••• • •
!o!DFFP
X
.....
• 01··········•
•
~UlTIPLV•
• LFflNED ER~OR •••••••••
•
TO ERFLG.
X
•••••••••••••••••
.CH •
• •••••
• J2·
••••
•••
• CI •
• Fl ••••
• • .
lJDl'f'l
)(
··.··El
••••• •••·••
•• UNOEFINFC
•
•
EPRCR •••••••••
•
Til ERHG.
X
••••••••••••••••••• .CG
•••••
•
•
....
SV~BrL
• t4.
•..•
Chart CI.
The Assembler - Phase 9
Flowcharts
1.93
••••• •
••••• •
•••• •
·•• A4 ....
•
• A2 •
••••
X
•• ••• B3· •••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
64 ••••
•••••
• i
LBXXX
.•.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
NO ••
•••••
••••
• B2 •• X.
•
elt ... EX
ERF X
••••• e1 ••••••••••
•• OUTPUT
•
•
••
It ... EX
•
•
•
•
TO
•
•
1/0 I'LFfEII
••••••••
! •••••••••
C~ARACTfRS
····1'2.·•...•••
EXIT TO THE
CALLING
ROUTINE
• ••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
C2 ••••
•••••
•
X
LDLBl
X
•
•
•
.. .
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. B7. •
••••• •
X
•••• C1····.···.
• EXIT TO TI'E •
•
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
•
•
•••••••••••••••
GTHDG
..
*.
•••••••••••••••
+.
*.• *
.*
.•
..
••
F2
.•.x
••
*..
*•
*•••
••
••
•
SAVE
•
• PARA~lTfRS TO •
• REST(R£ OVERLAY.
• NO .. IN CORF •
•••••••••••••••••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
i
X
•••••• H2··
FlI ••
PR •••••••
READ IN
P,",ASE 5
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•*
*.
x
••••• •
.*
.*. ••
••
•• POS 18
*. ••
*. ••
BLA~K
•• • *
.+
.. YES
if
•••••
•
A2 •
•• ••••
•
Chart
194
CJ.
.*
NO
••••••
i
•• ••••
•
C2 •
•••••
•
The Assembler - Phase 9
•
•
•
.•.i
.. *
•.
*•• -
i
•• ••••
•
B4 •
•••••
•
i
•
PRINT/TYPE
ERROR MESSAGE
A03
••
J3
..
.i
*•
PASS 1
*.
EXIT TO THE
CALLING
ROUTINE
.•••••••••••••••
...•
..
*••• .*
•
RCUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
•
•
...
•• YES
••••••
x
•• ••••
•
Ait •
EXIT TC THE
•
F5
*.
.•.x··········· .
••
*•
* .. *
.*
x
••F4••••'"
•'"••••
•
• YES
.. ..
.... ....
G5
*.
.•.x
••
••
LIST
•• YES
..DECK E IEDIT) ••••••
*.
*. $. .* .*
.*
·•••••••••..•
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
• YES
• NO
• H5 •• X•
J4
.*
.*
•• LIST PECK •• NC
.OR LIST OECK E•• ••••
..SPECIFIED.·
•
..
X
•••••• 115 •••••••••••
PCHCD
PUNCH FROM
.POS 1 TO END •
CF OUTPUT
•••••••••••••
SUPERVISOR
•
••••••••••••••••
•
*.... .*
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
..
.x
..•••••.•
•••••••••••••
•• X. E4 •
••••
••
.*
*.
•• PRINTER •• NC
..ON CHANNEL 12 ••••••
*.
.*
*.
.*
x
*•• *
• YES
**••••
•
A5 •
.
'.••••
••••• •
• ···.1<2·.·.·····
EXIT TO THE •
•• NO
ASSEMBLy.· ••••
*.
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
FIRST
•• NC
••
SOURCE
••••••
..STATEMENT ••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-
X
•••• K3 •••••••••
*.
X
• •••• ES ••••••••••
•
INT2
•
••••••• UNPACK NEXT •
• SO~RCE RECORD •
.FRO~ INTER 110 •
G4 ••••
.*
••
1 PASS
• YES
• ••••• H4 •••••••••••
•
• NO
i
••
~X •••••••••• :
•••
.. ..
05
••
: X •••••••••• :
••
LINE DF
1I STI NG
PUNCH
X
GTHOG
RESTORE PAGE.
•
PRINT
•
HAO I NG
•••••• H3 •••••••••••
•
•
PCHDR
.x ••
.*
•••••••••••••
..
G4
.*
..-.-.-*-.-.-.-.•
PRINT
X
* ..
• NO
*•• *
TV3
•••• F4 •••••••••
AlTloO
.*
*.
:X .......... :
••
*.
······CS •••••••••••
.*
•••••••••••••
•
•
•
••
X
.
RDSIIC
X
• ••••• E4 •••••••••••
ROCRO
..-.-.-.-.~.-.HAD SOURCE
RECOI(Q I CARD OR
PAPER TAPE I
••••• •
••
*.
•• NC X
••••••
....
••
•• X·
CALLING
*. .*
...
..
.x
• YES
••
ASSEMBl Y
*.
••
*..
*
-: YES
.x
B5
••
LIST
•• NO
.OPTION SELECTED •••••
INTERM~OIATE.
••
ANY
•• YES
• wORKING STCRAGE •••••
..AVAILABLE ••
.·.... .
•
•
.t'
.*
...
•
INT1
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
.SAVE
STATEMENT.
.IN
110
•
•• ••••••••••••••••
......
• ·.x .......... ...
• E4 •• X.
• • .
INCREMENT
•
I~TEPNAL STMT •
NC. BY 1
•
G3
*. ••
1 PASS
*.
•••••••••••••••••
X
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
•
.>0 .•
GTHXT
*.
.~OVf
.TO PRINTIPUNCH •
E'UFEFR
•
•
• •• ·.04 ••••••••••
•
•
RETURN
ADDRESS
TO LDLBl
ROUTINE
•
•
•
·CJ •
• K7
• •••• AS ••••••••••
• YES
•••••
••••• E3 ••••••••••
*.
•• ••••
•
B2 •
i
Kl
••••••
.CL
• A3.
•••
PALBl
••
••
••
*••
*
• NC:
••
•
•• STCRE
PASS 1
Cit
••
i
LABEL VALUE
TC POS 1-4
CF
110 BUFFER
•
•
•
•
••
· .. .. ..
•••••••••••••
•••
••
.$
••••••
·• .... 03········.·
INSERT
•
• F2.
18
.*
X
x
•••••
• eu •
•• THIS ERROR •• YES
• ALREADY IN PDS ••••••
••
PASS 1
•• YES
• NO
••••••••••••••
x
• *. ••
J1
*.
.. ..
SHBL
•••••••••••••••••
••••••• H1··.· ••• •••••
INCIIE~ENT
•.
*•• *
X
••••• G2··.··· ••••
•
EIIRCR COUNT
BY 1
*.
o
84
x
XYES •• PIII~(IPAl ••
•••••• PRINTER THE ••
• "'PE .. RITER ••
•
•
•
ERFLG
• •• ·.G1·.·.··.··.
• SET NCN-OUP •
• ANC NON-XEC •
•
FOR THS
•
ASSE~BLY
•
•
•
•
.•
••••• F3 •••••• ••••
• NO
•
...
i
•• ••••
•
G4 '"
•••• "
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
• YES
X
CALLING
II0UlINE
..
•••
E2
••
NO..
LIST
••
••••• OPTIC~ SELECTEO.
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
••
••
.*
*.
•••••••••••••••••
BTHFX
···.·E1· ••• • ••• ••
• CCNVfRT ACC. TC.
• ~C. OF CHAIIS • •
• SPECIfIfO BY •
• XR2. STORE IN •
•
1/0 !'UfffR
•
HIT TO THE
•
•
•
•
i
X
.-.-.-4-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••••
•••• Fl ••••• ••••
LABCK
COLLECT
AND CHECI(
LABEl
•••••••••••••••••
··.·.C2 ••••••••••
•
INSERT
•
•
• E~ROII FLAG
•
TO POS 19
•
•
OF
•
•
110 E'UFFER
•
····.Cl·.· •• • ••••
•
8T~EX
•
•
BINARY
•
•
TO ~E~
•
•
•
•
•
•
...•
•
pqMVE
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
1/0 PUFFER.
•
.ANr
CONTINUE IN.* .....
•
2 PASS ~co~ •
•••••••••••••••••
...
A5 ••••
•••••
•
X
X
....... .•
••····.A4··
.. AfT
•
••••• A2 •• • •••••••
•
. INSFIIT
•
•
• ERIIOII FLAG
•
TO pas 18
•
OF
•
•
•
IIC BUFFER
•
·••••..•
••
X
GTHOG
RESTORE PAGE •
•
PRINT
•
I1EAOIt.G
.... ·.K4········...
..-.-*-.-.-.-.-..
.. .
•••••••••••••
••••
•• X. A5 •
••••• •
fRS
X
••••• K5· •••••••••
•
INSERT
•
•
8LANKS
•
• TO POS 1-17 •
•
Of
•
.. .
•
1/0 BLFFER
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
..X. H5 •
••••• •
LABCK
•••
AI
••
+.
YES..
FIRST
••
•••••• CHARACTER ••
•• NUfo'ERIC ••
••
•.
.*
·.•••••........
....
*•• *
•
.• LA BCl·• El
••
••
.. X.
•
i
61
••
•*
••
N(
*. ••
.....
YES
ChARACTER ••••••••••
HANK ••
X
•• ••
.CF •
• HI.
• NC
•••
x
:LABKl
.
.*
X NC ••
••••••
C1
•••
••
*.
••
CHARACTER ••
•• IIALID ••
*. ••• * .*
• YES
...
01
...x
••
t.
••
FIIiE
•• NO
•• C~ARACTERS ••••••
•• ChECKED ••
*.
*•• *
.*
x
•• ••••
•
Bl •
•••••
•
• YES
X
:LABCK
..... El·.········•
• CCLLECT FIIiE
•
CHARACTER
• LABEL INTO
•
TWO kCReS
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
·•••••••••..
•
•
•
•
Fl •• X.
•
X
•••• Fl ••••• ••••
EXIT TO THE •
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
lAB ER
X
••••• Gl •• ••••••••
•
INCREMENT
•
• LINK-wORD fOR.
• PSEUCC-SKIP •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
Hl •••••• ••••
•••• •••
••
RETURN ALL
•
ZEROS IN
•
•
A, AND C.
••••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. Fl •
••••• •
.. .
Chart CK.
The Assembler - Phase 9
Flowcharts
195
•••••
•.CL
,.3.•
••
•• ••••
•
A2 •
•••••
•
OFOUT
AI
.•
•••
••
P97
*.
••
ANY
•• YES
•• DATA OUTPUT ••••••
••
YET
••
:t.
•• • *
.*
X
••••• Bl ••••••••••
• INSERT LOAO •
• ACtRESS INTO •
• FIRST DATA HOR •
• AFTER PROGRAM •
•
HEAtER
•
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
.... ....
.•
Cl
X
•••
••
••
•• NU
•• DATA BREAK ••••••
•.
*•• *
•..... 01··········
CThOR
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
GENERATE
•
• DATA HEACER •
••••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
..
E1
X
•••
••
•
..
.. ..
* •••
• YES
X
••. .... E2····.·····
••
DATA
S~IFT
.INOICATOR BITS.
.[~TC INDICATOR.
ellS ~ORC
•
•
•
~ORO
CCLNT OF •
DISK CLTPUT •
BY I
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
Hl··········
•••••••
••
RESET
•
•
COUNT FOR
BLOCk Qf
NF~
•
•
•
•
8 ~ORDS
•••••••••••••••••
X
•• UPDATE
••
.····Jl......····
•
OUTPUT
•
POINTERS
•••••••••••••••••••
••
:X .......... :
X
KI •• ••••••••
••••••
••
•
PUT
•
•
DATA
~ORO
•
INTO BUFFER •
••••••••••••••••••
•
X
Chart CL.
196
The Assembler - Phase 9
•• ••••
•
,.2 •
•••••
•
*.
••
.....
....
x
•• ••
.CJ •
• YES
OK
• 03.
•••
X,
••••• B3 ••••••••••
••
SET S~ITCH
•
FOR STADD
• ENTRY TO SRCH
•
ROUTINE
•
•
•
•
•
X
···.·C3
....•••...
•
SRCH
•
DATA OUTPUT
POINTER
•
•
.-.-.-.-.-.~.-.-.
• SEARCH SYMBOL •
•
TAiLE
•
•
IN CORE
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
.. .•. ..
X
...·····••
••·····02.·
CECREMENT
•
•
SHIFT
COUNT
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••• •• E2··········•
OUf~~TO~~~TCH :
:
•
•
(OATSWI
•
NeN-ZERO
•
•••••••••••••••••
F2
.•.i ••
.* CAT A *. •• YES
••
..FIRST WORD OF ••••••
••
*.
lIf1F
• •• *
.•
••
03
• NO
.•
••
•
:•
l~v~~=i~T
ACCRESS
•
CGUNTER
•
•••••••••••••••••
..
X
..
•••••• H2···········
I/ROFO
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.WR~TE OSF
SE TOR IF •
BUF ER FULL
•••••••••••••
X
•
•
•
E3
..
.x
••
• 03.
•••
*.
ANY
•• NO
•• SYMBOl TABLE ••••••••••
..OVERFLOW ••
X
•• ••
.CN •
• YES
• Fl.
•••••
•••
••••
..
X
..
• ••••• F3
••• ••••••••
WRSVT
-.-.-.-.-.-.-
s~N~~ ~tR~~~~ •
•••••••••••••
·····G2··········
:•
•.CJ•••••
••••
•• ••
• NO
•
••
••
LABEL
•• YES
•• ALREADY IN ••••••••••
•• TABLE ••
X
O'FlO SECTOR
:)1. •••••••••• :
5~IFT
••
X
···
•• ···••
• .. (2·····
UPDATE
•
•
•
X
X
••
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
•••••• ••••
•••• •• ·Gl
••
INCREMENT
•••
•••••••••••••••••
X
••••• Fl··········
•
SET NEXT
•
• INDltATOR BITS.
•
WORD TO
•
•
ALL ZEROS
•
•
•
•
.*
A3
•• ANY LA~El •• NO
..O~ THIS STMT •••••••••••
X
•• START rF •• NO
•• NE~ BLOCK CF ••••••
•• 8 WOROS ••
•
X
STAOr.
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
.*
• YES
X
IlFXR2
X
••••• A2···.· •• •••
•
INC~EMfNT
•
• WORe COUNT OF •
• DISK PUT PUT •
BY 1
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
• NC
CMPCT
•
····J2·········
EXIT TO THE •
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
X
·····G3
.. ········•
OFSCH
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
SET UP TO
•
•
•
•
•
SE"RC~
O'FlO
•
SECTOR
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••• •
.el·
• H3 •• X.
• •
••••
X
•••••• H3 •••••••••• •
RCSYT
..-*-.-*-.-.-.-..
REAC
cnHb~W
•••••••••••••
X
··
...
• J3··.·······•
:
S~~RS~~I~~
:
• EN1RY TO SRCH •
•
RCUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
•••••
·CN •
• A1·
•••
•••••
·C,. •
•
Ill.
• ••
X
P911
•••
AI·.
•. •• NO
ANY
CVEPFLO~
••••••
.*
••
.... ....
••••
·......
• .
..
..
••
•.
..
.*
-.-.-.-.-.-.READ
PIIRTIAL
SECTOR
•••••••••••••
• YES
•• 81
..
RSTRE
• ••••• 112.·
•• •••••••
ROSYT
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
ROSYT
•••••• 113· ••• •••••••
•
OISKI
REIIO
CVERFLew
SECTOP
•
•••••••••••••
SRCH
••••• A4 ••••••••••
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•• CO,.PUTE
hIGH •
.AND LOW ADDRESS.
• DIFFERENCE
•
•• X.
STS2
X
• •••• B2.· •• • •• • ••
RESET ~IGH
•
• A~O LOW END •
•
IICORFSSES
•
X
RS1RE
RESTORE
PARTIAL
SECTOR
•••••• 81 ••••• • •• •••
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.-
••
•••••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
...
x
X
•••• B3.··· •• •••
• EXIT TO THE •
•
CIILLING
•
•
RCUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
••
••
YES' ••
••
• ••••• DIFFERENCE ••
•• EQUAL 0 ••
.*
B4
*.
*. .*
•
.*
NO
: X•••••••••• :
X
··.·.CI ••••••••••
X
•••• C2.·· •••• ••
• EXIT TO THE •
CALLING
•
•
•
ROUTINE
•
••
••
LCIIO
•
Sy,.BOL
•
VALUE
•
••••••••••••••••••••
:X .......... .
STXRI
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••
CALLING
RO~TINE
•••••••••••••••
••
••
•*
•.
• SA~E LOW END
• IIODRESS. SET
• UP TO READ
.fIRST O~ERFLOW
SECTOR
•
•
•
* •. *
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
t.
.•
• •••• E2.···· •• •••
• SET UP HIGH •
•
ANC LOW
•
• ADDRESSES TO •
• SfARC~ ONE
•
• SECTOR TABLE •
•• NO •
••••••
.*
04
.
X
X
••••• FI ••••• • ••••
•
Of'SCH
•
•
SET UP TO
•
• SEARC~ eVER FLO ...
•
SECTOR
•
••••• F2 ••••••••••
•
•
-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
•
•
••
SET XR3
TC COUNT OF
OVERFLew
SECTORS
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
·......
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
••••
• GI •• X.
• • .
X
•
•
•
•••••••••••••
.....
....
•••
...
E4
••
.*
•.
• SRCH ROUTINE •• YES
..ENTFREO FRO,. ••••••
•• STAOO ••
*.
•••• C2.··.··.·.
EXIT TO THE •
CALLING
•
RCUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
* •• *
.•
x
•• ••••
•
Kit •
•••••
•
• NO
X
• •••• F4 •• • •••••• •
SAVE ANC ••
•.RELOCIITICN
MULTIPLY•
•
• DEFINED BITS •
•••••••••••••••••••
••••..
·
•
. *... • .
•
GTOF2
X
• • •••• Gl· ••••••••••
ROSH
REAC
OVERFlOI.
SECTOR
••
••
•• NO
••
COMPARE
••••••••••
•• EQUAL ••
X
•• ••
·CO •
• AI.
• YES
•••••••••••••••••
• YES
.•.x
x
II
••
II~Y
CVERFLO~
*.
.. ..
••••• 02 •••••••• ••
····01
.........
EXIT TO ThF •
EI
•••••••••••••••••
OFSCH
X
••••
·C,.
•
• EI ••••
••••• • x
.•.
P912
X
••••• C4 ••••••••••
•
SUBTRACT
•
.DIFFERENCE FRO".
• HIGH ADDRESS • •
.CO~PARE SYMBOL •
•.
THERE
•
Gif •• X.
.P914
X
•• • •• G4 ••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
INCREMENT
•
• LINK-WORD FOR.
• PSEUDO-SKIP •
: •••••••••• X:
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
~RSH
eIll:RFLC ..
SECTOR
•••••••••••••
...
x
••
••
•.
JI
••
•.• *
.*
•• YES
••••••
.*
x
•••••
• Nt
• c~ •
•
KI
•*
.•.x ••
•••
E'.i·
••
•• II~Y ~rRE •• YES
•• OVERFlOI.
••••••
•• SECTORS ••
*.
.•
.. .
$ ••
*
x
•••• ••••••
•
Gl •
• .X. B 1 • •
••••• • •••• •
• NO
Chart CM.
P913
X
•• • •• H4 ••••••••••
••
•
•
•
.·..
J2·········
ExIT
TO THE •
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
••••••••••••••• •
•
CLI'AR
•
• STADO ENTRY •
.SkITCH (AOOSk) •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
X
t.
F(U~O
•.
~2.·
DISKl
..-.-.-.-.-.-...RITE
•••••••••••••••••
••
..
·.. ·.. ..··.•..·
X
••••• HI·.· •• • ••••
•
SRCH
•
•
SEARCH
•
•
OVERFLOk
•
•
SECTCR
•
•
•
•
• ••• J4 ••••• • •• •
~XIT
TO THE
CALLING
•
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
••••• •
•• K4 •••••.
....
MUL T
)(
·.··.K4·.··.··.··
.INSERT MULTIPLY •
• -CEFJ~EO SIT •
• IN BIT 0 OF •
•
WORD 1 OF
•
•
SYMBOL
•
.. .
•••••••••••••••••
••••
..X. G4 •
••••• •
The Assembler - Phase 9
Flowcharts 197
•••••
••••• •
••••• •
• C~ •
• AI.
• A3 •
•••
PCJ8
X
••••• Al···.··.··.
•
SRCH
•
•
SFARCH
•
CVERFlO~
•
•
~
SECTOK
•
X
pqlO
A3
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
...
..
••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
•••••• CZ.· ••••• • •• •
hRSYT
.. RITE (JVERFlO~
wIll- "UlTlPlY-.
DEFINED TAG'D
•••••••••••••••••
•*
*. •.
••• *
••
•••••••••••••
•• YES
••••••
.* .*
x
X
•••••• El •••••••••••
RSTRE
RESTORE
• Hll T_BlE
ST ATI;S
•••••
·Cl •
• H3.
•••
..-.-.-+-.-.-.-..
•••••••••••••
...
X
•••
..
••
•• PUSH-DO~~ •• NO
•• RECUIREC
••••••
*.
Fl
*.
...
-.*
• YES
.*
PSt-CN
X
••• •• G1 ••••••••••
• PUSH SYMeOl •
• TABLE DCWN 1 •
• E~TRY FRCM SPOT.
~~ERE NE~
•
•
•
• ENTRY GOES
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
SY~IN
X
•••• ·Hl· •••••••••
••
•
ADC
•
•••
•••
•••••••••••••••••
SY~BOl
X
••••• Jl ••••••••••
••
••
•
•
•
CCUNT
••••••••••••••••••••
INCPEMf~T
Sy~eOl
X
•
CECRF~ENT
• SYMBOL TABLE
•
lOW END
• ADDRESS BY 3
..... Kl··········•
•
•
••••••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
Chart CN. The Assembler - Phase 9
198
• NO
..
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
RSTRE
RESTORE
• FUll TABLE
HATUS
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• CJ •
• 03.
•••
C3
.•.x
.
STSlA
X
••• •• C5 •••••• • •••
•
SRCH
•
•
SEARCH
•
IN-CORE
•
•
•
TARLE
•
••
.*
•.
.:. GVE~~lOW .:.~~~ •• ~ ••••••••••••
•• SECTORS ••
*.
.*
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
•••••••••••••••••
* .• -
• NO
X
• • •••• ez •••••••••••
• NO
S T At2
X
t •• _
•••••••••••••
X
X
•• _NY ~ORf
•• OVERFlO~
X
•.CJ
•••••
• D3.
•••
:x .......... :
••••• C1· •••••••••
•
INCREMENT
•
• SECTOR _CDRESS •
FOR NEXT
•
•
OVERFlO~
•
•
SECTOR
•
•
••
••
-.-.-.-.-.-.-
• Ne
.•.x
•••
AS
••
.• ANY *. •• YES
••
..SY~BOl TABLE ••••••
·.OVERflOIil
t.
._ ••
• •••• ·B3··.··.····•
WRSYT
IIIRITE
CVERFlOW
SECTOR
-. •• YES
*.
FCUND
••••••••••••••••••••
*.
.*
•.
.*
*•• *
[l1
••••
•• ••
• YES
x
Bl
STSCH
••
•• IN-CORE TABLE ••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
•• • *
•••
.*
•. •• NO
.•• END OF
•
STOOZ
X
• •••• D3 ••• • •• • •• •
• RESET TABLE •
•
•
liMITS TO
•
• AllCIil MORE
•
SY~BOlS
•
•
•
.·..
.....
ERNTl
..-.-.-t-.-t-.-..
PRINT
.ERROR MESSAGE.
A02
•••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
X
•••••
• D3.
•••
X
·.D~.··.··
05
.•.x
••
•• .*
••
FOUND
..
•.
* •• *
*•.••
.*
..
NO
••••••
• YES
x
•••••
.CM •
• £1.
.CJ •
X
••••• ES ••••••••••
X
•
•
•••• EIt •• • ••••••
EXIT TO THE
SUPERVISOR
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•• INCREMENT ••
FOR.
•
PSEUDO-SKIP •
••• ••••••••••••••••
•
ll~K-WORD
x
•••••
•••
.eM •
• AI·
•••
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
•••••
·LU •
• Ai·
•••
;.
NLlllo
Ai
•*
• iNPUT
•••
*•••• A3••••••••••
.INCkEHENT
INPUT •
:POI~~i~fER~TPUT:
.UECRtMENT lOOP •
•
COUNT
•
*.
~YMuOl ••
YtS
•• ~KtATtk ThAN ••••••••••••••••••••
• IAdlt tNTKY.
,'*.
*•• *
.*
•••••••••••••••••
• MJ
X
•·····~1.·········•
• AULkt~~ Ju~T
~
~LMPAKt~
•
"'hi
•
•
i~
luw-tNO
•
•
ALLKt~S
'"
•••••••••••••••••
••·LM.
*.
...• •
•
• .X. A.. ~
!NT 1
(,1
•••
X
1'915
••
'"
.... .•. .... ..
....
.... ....
...
x
x
••••• u~ ••• ••• ••• •
• AUJkt:~~ JU~1 •
• (.UMPAK~O IS •
•
•
• Ncw hIGH-cNO
•
AOUKtSS
•
•
63
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• ·LM.
•• X. A't •
• •
••••
* •• *
• YES
i
C3
••
•*
*.
."'ANY LULUM", •• NU
• ~i-2~ NU~-HLAN~ •••••••••••••••••••
*.
.•
*.
.*
*..*
.*
..ANY
*. • •
X
••••• ul •••• ••••••
'II'
•
•......... "'
... ..
AI
••
•
"' '•"
x
·.U~ ...·····•·
•...
•
•
SJAKT
•
• (.OMP~tSSION AT •
CUL ~7
••• ••••••••••••••••
••
X
.··*.tl··"'·······
• IN~t~T LAULL •
• tltL~ biT iN •
~JATtMtNT
•
•
• ~KtfiX wukD •
•
- olr 0
•
~.
•.............•
.$
i
•••••••••••••••••
X
·····~3··········
• ~AGK ANO MOVE •
• .. WORDS OF 10 •
•
fiELD TO
•
• INTt~HEDIATE •
• OIP aUffER
•
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
•
•
fLKNuN-~lANK
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
.•.
i
X
SLAN fkUM
l.Ll 71 LtfT
.*
••••• 03 ••
••••••••
.INSERT
10
FIELO.
• ~IT IN PREFIX •
.~ORD. ADD ~ TO •
• ~ORD COUNT IN •
• PRtFIX WORD •
••••• Fl ••••••••• •
•
•
••
*.•
• YES
:X ........................ :
••
••
COLUMN •• NO
NON-~LANK •••••
.73-60
• Yl:~
•
STAkr
• ('uMPKtS~IUN
•
l.~L
2i
••
•• PACK AND •• NO
•
•
•• MOVE DONE •••••• X. Hl •
F~
.* .*~UOH
••
..1
*.
FOR •• NO
MORE OUTPUT ••••••••••••••••••••
•• RECORD ••
•.
* •• *
.*
• YtS
:X .......... .
X
·.·.·ul········.·
• (.All.uLAlt wOkD •
LL.tmT FuM
•
•
.Pkl:tl~ wUko-i/2.
• I~U. fkLM /'4UN- •
• bLANK PLUS 1 •
••••••••••••••••••
••••
• f ! •• X.
• • .
·......
~~1.6
P'J17
••••• G3 •• ••••••••
.INITIALIZE
FOR.
~fi~~ ~5fi~?OOF :
• NEXT PREFIX •
• WURD SET TU 1 •
:
•••••••••••••••••
X
••
2
• LhAKALTtRS
....
••
••
1NTO.
1 IooUkO
•
............•
~
X
·.···Jl.··.······
• STGMt iN ••
~
...• .............
• l",TtkMtOIArt •
• ourp~T BuFFtR •
•
~
•
•
•
• ••• H3 •• • ••••••
EXIT TU THE
CALLING
MOUTINE
•••••••••••••••
• •••• G4.· ••••••••
• TOTAL OATA
•
:W?e~~HI~K~~~~OR:
• WORDS) PUT IN •
•
WOKD 1
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
X
••••.• hl •••• ••• •••
~ALK
X
X
•
•
•
. .....-H4.····.····.
lllSKl
..-.-.-.-.-*-.-..
WRITE SECTOR OF
·INTERMEDIATE
OUTPUT
*
•••••••••••••
K
••••• J~.*.*
•••••*
•• INITIALIZE ••
FOR NEXT
•
•
SECTOR
•
••• ••••••••••••••••
•
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
Chart CO. The Assembler - Phase 9
Flowcharts
199
•• ••••
•
A3 •
••••• •
DTtiDR
••••• AI· •• • •• ••••
•
INCREME~T
•
•
• ~RDCT BY 2
•
••
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
X
• ···.BI.········.
•
DETERMINE
•
• NC OF ~ORCS •
•
IN BLOCK
•
• CINCLUCING DATA.
•
HEACERI
•
•••
WRTSII
X
.2
••
• ••••• A3 •••••••••••
••••
01 SKI
••
•• YES
•• -.-.-.-.-.-.- ••
..fNTEIIEO FIIOM •••••••••• X
WIIITE
'ENO" PROCESS
•
SECTOR
•
kllOFO
..•• •• ..
•••••••••••••
• NO
.•.x
•••••••••••••••••
.. .. ....
X
x
.*.
•
•
HEADER INTO
•
DISK OUTPUT •
••••••••••••••••••
•
X
.·
• ...01··.······.•
•
•
•
SET UP TO
START NE~
DATA BLeCK
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
:
•
···.E1.········
EXlILl~NlHE :
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
···
• .. 83··········
BY 1 •
•
.INCIIEM~NT
.SECT8R AOORESS •
x
••••••
••••••
• YES
•
••·.··.Cl·········.
••
ENTER DATA
x
e2
••
••
t.
••
PAST
•• NO
.~ECTCII POINT OF •••••
BUFFER
••
.. ..
...... .-....
H3 •
C2
••
••
BLOCK
•• NO
•• COMPLETED ••••••
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
:•
~~~~(=
•.we K
E TCR
F
•
NG iT8RAGE.
•• ••••
•
H3 •
x
·.·
• .. 02··········
DTtiOR
•
:•
X
•• ••• C3 ••••••••••
•.DEiR~MENT
•
NO OF.
x
• YES
•
F DSF
••••••••••••••••••
••
BY 1
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
••••• •
MVLFT
••
•• E2········ ••
••••
•
•
SET RDTHD
•
:
•
Dl~i~U~~~tIR :
.•.x
••
*.
.. .... ..
FROM •• YES
.."END" PROCESS ••••••
.E~TERED
••
•••••••••••••••••
X
C3
.*
x
•• ••••
•
t13 •
• NO
..
.;NVi
MVCNT
E3
.•.x
••
••••••
..
g~ ~8e~~·:.!~~.
•• EQUAL 0 ••
•. . .*
SklTCH
•
•••••••••••••••••
.. .
• NO
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
••••••
:x .......... :
NOMVE
X
*:~~~:Y~~~i:·:=i·:
AND XR2
•
• CONTROL. RESET •
•
CATA HEADER
•
CONSTANT
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
·•••••
..
•••• •
•
H3 •• X.
kDFXl
•
*
•
Chart CP. The Assembler - Phase 10
200
X
• ••• H3 ••• • •• • ••
EXIT TO THE
CALLING
ROUTINE
•••••••••••••••
•
*
•
•••••
• CQ •
• *AI.
•
•
••••••
INT2
X
••••• Al*· ••••••••
•• CLEAR 1/0 ••
•
BUFFER
•
•
(SARfA)
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
INT2A
X
••••• Bl.· •••• ••••
•
SET XR I
•
•
TO
•
• SUFI PLUS 3 •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
••••••• • ••
••• •••• CI
••
SET XR2
• TO SAREA PLUS •
•
•
20 (LABEL
FIELD)
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•*
01
.•.x
••
••
.*
.*
*. • .*NO
;
••••••• EI· •••••••••••
INCRE~ENT
•
XR2 BY 6
• (PCINT TO OP
• CODE FIELD)
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
X
••••• Fl···· •• ••••
•
SET XR3 TO
•
• WORO caUNT OF •
•
RECORD
•
lOR3
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
;
..
•*
••
A2
.•.x
••
X
..
•• ••
NO
•• 10 IN RECORD ••••••
•.
*•••
.*
• YES
X
•
••••• 82· •••• •••••
•
DECREMENT
•
•
XR3 BY It
•
•
••
•••••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
X
••••• •
• A2 •
••••• •
•••• ••
••• ••••SETA3·•••
UP TO
••
•
•
•
UNPACK 10.
INDICATE IF
NO 10
• ••••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••••••
• 83 ••••
••••• • X
.•.
NO 102
•.
*.
••
*. • .*YES
.*
X
•• •••• C3 •••• • ••••••
OISKl
READ IN
• NEXT SECTOR •
..-.-.-+-.-.-.-..
•••••••••••••
X
02 ••••• •• •••
•••••••DECRE~ENT
••
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
8Y 1
••••••••••••••••••
••
•
XRI 8Y I.
•
.OECRE~ENT 8UFI •
• PLUS 2 BY 1 •
•• ••••
••
• E2 ••• X.•
UNPK ••••
X
••• •• 03 ••••••••••
•
:SEC~~~R~~8~lsS :
:X .......... :
••••• E2 ••••• •••• •
• UNPACK FROM •
•
eUFI AND
•
• STORE IN SAREA •
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
TSlIO
X
••••• •
••••• •
• E2 •
B3
••
.*
*. •• NO
•• SECTOR
•• UNPACKED
••••••
ROIO
•• ·C2 ••••• ••• ••
•••
••
•
DECREMENT
•
XR3 BY 1
•
•••••••••••••••••••••
X
*.
••
•• YES
•• ANY LABEL ••••••
•.
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
••••••
• A2 •
X
•
•
•
····E3 ••••• •• ••
EXIT TO THE •
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
X
..
••
F2
•••
••
••••
.. ..
••••
••
•• ••
••••
*•• *
YES.
•
..10 IN RECORD •••••• X. A3 •
• NO
x
•••••
•
83 •
•• ••••
•
Chart CQ. The Assembler - Phase 11
Flowcharts
201
•••••
• CIl •
• ~l·
•••
...
•• ••••
•
A2 •
•••••
•
x
ENO~
•• • *
••
*.
AI
• •••• A2 ••••••••••
••
-. •• NO
••••••
.*
.. ..
PASS 1
• YES
X
X
• •••• P2 ••••••••••
• MAKE ~EAD[R •
.LENGTH (WOIlO 61.
• EQUAL NO. OF •
.LEVELS SPECI~·D.
•
FLUS 6
•
• ••• Pl ••• • •• ••••
••• RESET
CCUNTEIlS •
•
•
• AND
• FOR PASS 2
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
S~ITChES
CI
•
•
•
•
•
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•••••
·CS •
• Fl·
•••
... • *
...x
X
• INSERT LEVELS
• SPECIFIEO TO
.~OROS 16-11 OF
HEADER
•
•• ••••
•
A3 ••••
•••••
•
X
A3 ••• • •• ••••
••• ••••INDICATE
••
• PROGRAM TYPE •••••
•
I
••••••••••••••••••
••
•• ••••
•
B3 ••••
•••••
• •
S2ltOA
X
B3 ••• •••••••
••• ••••INDICATE
••
• PROGRAM TYPE
•• X. 03 •
•••••
.*
*. ••
Ne.. I PASS
•••••• ~SSe~BLY
••
*.
.*
*.
.•
;
02
••••• 01· •• • ••• •••
03
•
..
• • ••• Fl ••••••••••
CLEAR TO ZERO.
• FIIlST 'il ~OIlOS •
• OF P~OGRA~
•
•
~E~CER
•
F2
••
••
ILS
•• ASSEf"BLY
•
*. • •
•••••••••••••••••
..
Gl
.•.x
••
.. ..
.. .0
.* .*
.•
.•.x
HI·.
•.
* •• *
x
• PROGRAM TYPE
*.
.0
.*
.•
• YES
x
·•
•
INCICATE
TYPE
PROG~A~
.
ii
:~~ t~e~L~4~E~g·:
• IN WORe 15 OF •
HEAOER
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
202
•• ••••
•
F3 •
•••••
•
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
.
.. .
The Assembler - Phase 12
• INSERT RESULt.
• IN WORD 3 OF •
HEADER
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
ENOAC
F3
..
••
DISKl
..-.-.-.-.-.-.READ IN PHASE
*.
•••••••••••••
* •. *
X
• •••• F4 ••••••••••
•
INSERT
•
• HEADER LENGTH.
• IN ~ORO 6 OF •
•
PROGRAM
•
•
HEADER
•
.
.*
.*
• •••• F5 •••••• ••••
• FORCE FIRST
SECTOR OF
•
• INTERMEDIATE
•
1/0 TO BE
•
READ
•••••••••••••••••
ENDAI
X
••••• G5 ••••••••••
•
INT2
•
• UNPACK FIRST •
.STMT INTO SAREA.
• ClIO BUFFERI •
••••• G4 •••••• • •••
• INSERT SIZE •
•
OF COMMON
•
• IN WORD 5 OF •
PROGRAM
•
•
HEADER
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••
•.CR.
••• •
• H5 •• X.
•••••
•
X
•••••• H5 •••••••••••
OISKI
..-.-.-.-.-.-.WRITE SYMBOL
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
..
H::!
.•.x
••
..
........
.. .•. ..
*.
.*
• NO
J3
••
*. • •• * .*
.*
• YES
•• X. 03 •
••••• •
.. .. ..
1<3
••
••
.x
*. *.
* •• *
x
HEADER
••
••
FILE
DEFINED
x
•• ••••
•
Bit··
..
• TABLE O' FLO •
SECTOR BUFFER
•••••••••••••
*.
*.
•• NO
••••••
.*
.*
*. • .*YES
x
S21t3B
X
••••• K4 ••••••••••
• INSERT DATA •
• PERTAINING TO •
• SIZE OF FILE •
•
• IN FIRST 7
•
~ORDS
•
•••••
•
04 •
•• ••••
•
X
..•••••.•
•••••••••••••••••
..X. A5 •
••••
..
• ••••• J5 •••••••••••
•• NO
••••••
••••• •
.• .*
•• ••••
•
Ait •
•••••
•
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
04 •
.x ••
••••• •
JIt
.*
*.
••
FILE
DEFINED
2:•
:TOoal~IT~ ~:H
••
•• NO
..TYPE EQUAL 2 ••••••
*.
..
X
• •••• HIt •• • •• •••••
• SET UP DSF
•
.BUFFER POINTERS.
••
•• YES
•• TYPE EQUAL 1 ••••••
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
X
•
I~ ~ORD 3 •
•• ceOI INSERT
•
• CF PIIOGRAM
~EAOER
•
•
..
.11 OVER INTl •
OF PHASE 9
X
*.
X
•••••• E5 •••••••••••
•••••••••••••
• YES
Chart CR.
x
•••• ·G3 ••••••••• •
X
.LENGTH (~ORO 61.
•
EQUAL 4
•
• ••••OS ••••••••••
• FORCE LAST
•
SECTOR OF
•
•
• I~TERMEDIATE •
•
110 TO BE
•
~RITTEN
•
•
S2ltitO
X
•••••• E4 ••••••• ••••
DISKI
READ IN PHASE
• IC OVER STADD.
OF PHASE 9
X
••
J2 ••••
••••••
• •••
MAKE
HEADER
•
X
X
• •••• 04 ••••••••••
• YES
S2430
•••••
H2
•• ••••••••
•
INSERT
•
INTEIIRUPT
•
•
• LEVEl NO. rN •
•
• ~CIIO 13 OF
HEADER
•
•
•.• ••••
•
112 •
••••
*.
•
• • ••• Kl •••
.INSFRT
ISS• ••NU••••
••
ii
•
•••••
•
02 •
•
•• •••• • •••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••••
(,
••
x
X
•
:·VS·T~~~C{~J2N :
•• STANDAIID •• NO X
•• PRECISION ••••••
•• ••••
•
B3 •
•••••
•
••••
if
•• ~ •• Jl.· •••••••• •
••
.*
••• G2 •••••••• ••
•••
••
•
INOICATE
••
ISS
NO
•• ASSEMBLy.· ••••
*.
• $:
....
1/0
•
•• ••••••••••••••••
.
.x •••••••••••
..-.-.-.-.-t-.-..
•• NO
••••••
7
•• ••••
• ••
••
• A3 •• •••••••••••••••••
.. NC
S2402
*•••
..
• YES
•• ABSOLUTE
YE~
•• ASSEMBLy.· ••••
*. •.
.* .*
X
•••••
.....
52431
••
•• ·E2.····.····
•••
••
•
INCICATE
4
.-.-.-.-t-.-.-.-.
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
• YES
•
•
INTI
•
• SA~E END STMT •
.IN INTERMEDIATE.
•• Dit ••• X..
* •• *
••••••••••••••••••• x
•••••••••••••••••••
••••• • ••••• •
:X .......... : :
• 03 •
• •••• • •• F3 *•••.
············x
x
524(4
•••
eLlI'il
X
S2421•••• .
••
••
•• .*EXTENDEO -. •• NO
•• PRECISION ••••••
*. •.
X
• •••• C5 •• • ••••• • •
••••• C4 •••••• ••••
03 •• X.
S2420
• PROGRAM TYPE
•••••••••••••••••
X
•••••••••••••••••
Si'4CC
;
•• El··········
••••M~KE
BUFI THE.
• OSF ALFFEP
•
• (NC INTEIlf"ED- •
•
lATE 110)
•
.*
•
DECREMENT
•
.TEMP TYPE BY 1 •
•
(6 TO 5 OR
•
•
4 TO 31
•
•
••
.*
X
·•••••••••..
• x
...
• MAKE CFBUF
•
.* ENT *. ••
• (PASS 1 AREA OF.
NO..
••
• PRINCIPAL 1/0 ••••• •••••• ASSEMBLY
• ROUTINEI ThE •
*. *.
.• .*
•
• rSF P~fFfll
*••
*
• YES
• •• *
•••••
.CS •
• AI·
•••
X
• YES
•••••••••••••••••
•. . *
*.
••
• •••• e5 ••••••••••
•
MAKE DSF
•
• BUFFER OF8UF • •
•
SET FIRST
•
.SECTOR ADDRESS •
• TO 32 (RELAT) •
Bit
••
*.
.
••
LIBR
•• NO X
•• ASSEMBLy
••••••
•.
.
.. ..
.*
• MAKE HEADER •
.LENGTH I~ORD 61.
•
EQUAL 3
•
••
A5
.*
*. •• NO
•• 1 PASS
•• ASSEMBLy
••••••
*.
.*
x
*" • .*YES
•••••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
Bit ••••
•••••
• x
.•.
S21t3A
•
..
•••••• x
X
• INSERT NO. OF •
• FILES DEFINED.
• IN ~ORD 9 OF •••••
.PROGRAM HEADER •
• •••• C3 ••••••••••
••
•• ••••
•
A5 ••••
A4 •
••••• A4 ••••• •••••
2
•
•••••••••••••••••••
:x .......... :
..••••.•
•• ••••
•
02 ••••
•••••
• x
.•.
524'1'3
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
• YES
••••• •
••••• •
x
•• ••••
•
••A5••• ••
FLIPR
..-.-.-.-.-.-.REAO IN
PHASE
1
•
•
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
.BO •
• Al •
•••
•••••
•••
• (S •
• AI.
ENOA2
X
••••• A1 ••••••••••
• RE~ERSE PhASE •
• 10 ADDRESSES •
• FRCM eLF! TO •
•
OFeUF
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
.. .•. ..
.. .. *•• *....
;
81
••
•• PRINCIPAL •• NO
.1/0 PAPER TAPE ••••••
• YES
X
• RESET PAPER
• TAPE FIRST
• fRAME AOO~ESS
• FOR POS 1 OF
• 1/0 eUFFER
.....Cl·.·· ..... .•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
·• x•••••••••••.
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
X
•• • ••• 01· •• • •••••••
RDCRO
ROC NEXT
REtCRO (tARt OR
PAPER TAPE)
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• CR •
• H5.
•••
•••••
• CS •
• Fl*
•••
..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..
X
END;?
• ••••• Fl· ••••••••••
fLlPR
•
READ IN
PHASE 12A
•
•••••••••••••
x
•••••
• CT •
• AI·
•••
Chart CS.
The Assembler - Phase 12
Flowcharts
203
•••••
·CT •
• AU
•••
P1ZAX
..
•• ••••
•
",2 ••••
••••• •
i
..
.. .. .. ..
AI
•••
••
•• L.A.C.
••
E~EN
•.
•• YES
••••••
• ACCRESS IN
•
.CCH56 IN COHMA,.
• pes Q-1Z OF
•
• lie SUFFER
•
.*
• NC
••••••••••••••••
••••..
·•....
.
. .••. ez··· •• •••··
••
i
SB~
•• ·.·B1 ••••••••••
TN
82 •• X.
•
x
•
•
•• AOJLST
••
• L.A.C. TO
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
:x .......... :
••
fC~CE LDlPl
• RCVTINE TO 00
.OUTPUT (PTIONS
CNL Y
•
E~EN
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
j(
X
·.·.·Cl
• INSE~T•• ••••••••
L.A.C • •
• I~ LAP.£L VALUE.
• ANO I~ CeLtC •
•
IN COlollolA
•
.....CZ· ......· .•
•• FeRCE ~AST ••
• SECTOR F OSF •
• cuT PuT 0 BE •
•
hRITTEN
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
j(
i
. .•..CZ··.·······•
•• • •• 01 •• ••••• •••
*
i
.····",2··.···.···
• INSERT XEQ
•
OTHOR
•
• CO~PLETE LAST •
.. DATA HEADER •
IN nSF
•
•
• INSERT DISK
.BLeCK CG~NT Of
• PRCG~AH IN
• CC~54. COH5~
•
PLUS 13
. -*-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
..
i
X
·E1 ••••
• •• ••••
..• •••FORCE
kORr
• COuNT Of LAST •
• DATA H~ACER •
•
TO ZERC
•
•••••• EZ •••••••• · · · '
FL IPR
..-.-.-.-.-.-.RUD IN
PHASE 3
•••••••••••••••••••
...x
i
•.SR
••••
•
• At·
•••
Fl
••
.•
*.
•• ANY E~T~Y •• YES
•• PCINT IN THiS ••••••
•• ASSEMBL Y ••
*. ••• * .*
x
•• ••••
•
82 •
•••••
•
• NC
.•.i
CZ ......•...
GI
••
• ••••
.*
*.
•
•• XEQ ACDRESS •• NO
• SET UP CODE
•• SPECIFI~O •••••••••• x. fOR SYNTAX
ERROR
•
0
....
•• ••
•
•••••••••••••
•
.••••••••••••••••.
·•••••
..
•••• •
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•••••••••••••••••
..• •••.
••
•
•
•
•
•
• YES
• HZ •• X.
•
ENDI:R
X
••••• HZ·· ••• •••••
•
E~FLG
•
• INSERT ERROR •
• CCOE IN 110 •
•
eLffER
•
.. ·Hl.····.····
..·-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
X
•
•
•
SCAN
EVALUATE
OPERAND
•
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
.. ... ..
•
x
•• X. BZ •
•••• •
Jl
••
• ASSF"'BlY ~CDf. YES
•• EQUAL OPERAND ••••••
•• "CCE
••
:t:.
••• *
.*
i
• NO
·
•• ••••
•
AZ •
•••••
•
. .....
X
••••• Kl·· •• ••••••
• seT LP CCCE.
•
•
• fUR RELOCATION ••••• X. H2 •
•
ERROR
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
Chart CT.
204
••••
The Assembler - Phase 12A
PHD
Al··········•
••.....INITIALIZE
•
•
PHASE
•
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
POL
.. ..
.. ..
X
•••
Bl
••
••
DUMP
•• YES
•• REQUESTED ••••••••••••••••••••
*.
.•
•. • .*NO
X
. · ...Cl··········
SET UP
•
•
•
•
•
NEXT
PHASE
PARAMETERS
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
·····ez
.........
.
INITIALIZE
•
DUMP
•
•
•
•
CU~P AND
NEXT PHASE
PARAMETERS
•••••••••••••••••••
:X .......... .
OISKF
X
•••••• 01·· ••• • •••••
LOAD
NEXT
PHASE
.•.x
DZ
••
.• DUMP *. ••
NO..
THIS
••
•• PHASE ••
•
•
• .x......
•
•
•••••••••••••
X
.... El·····
..·.•
•
EXIT
TO NEXT
•
•
PHASE
•
••••••••••••••• •
Chart DA.
•
•
•
•.
.*
•••
*
• YES
X
E2······.···•
•.....
•
CALL AND
•
: DU~~E~~I~E
:
•••••••••••••••••••
FORTRAN - Phase 1
Flowcharts
205
PHOA
A1······· ..•·
••.....
INITIALllE
•
OISKF
•
•••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••.•.• Bl···X •• ·•••••
CALll
•
•
CAll 2
LeAO
SUPERVISOR
INTO ell!
•••••••••••••
•
•
X
C1··········•
•.....
•
SET UP
•
•
•
•
MONITOR
CAll
ROUTINE
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
01.··•• ·· •• ·•
•••••.
•
INITIALIZE
•
:+
NEXT
•
X
•
•
PHASE
•
PARA~ETFRS
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
•
•
•
Chart DB.
206
....
El·········
EXIT
TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
FORTRAN - Phase 2
.·
... A2·.···.·.·.•
••
SIZE OF •
.....
DECID~
MACHINE &
•
•
• INITIAlIZE PHSE.
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
• 82 •• X.
• • •
AXXO ••••
X
•• 84 ••
••••••
· ..
AXX4
••• ••• 82· •• • •••••••
•
•
READ
SOURCE.
STATEMENT
·.....C1...........
•.
•
C2 ..
....
....
•
X
........
.*
x
•• ••••
•
82 •
C4
•••
••••• •
••
AXX5C
*.
C5
•••
••
.$
*.
••
•• YES
•• EXCESS
•• YES
•• CONTINUATION •••••••••• X•• CONTINUATION ••••••
..STATEMENT..
.STATEMENTS ••
*..*
•••
• NO
*..*
* ..•
• NI)
*••
*
• NO
X
•••
SEC
02
••
••••
•• SPECIAL •• YES
•
•• ENO STATEMENT •••••••••• X.
••
••
•
••••
*•• *
• NO
CSl
• ••• 03 •••••••••
EXIT TO THE
ROl
ROUTINE
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•
X
• •••• 04····.·· •• •
• COllECT ••
•
STATEMENT
•
•
•
NUM8ER
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
: X •••••••••••••••••••••••• :
: ........................ X:
X
CONVT
.*
x
AXXItA
•
ANALYZE & .
YES ••
••
• STORE CONTROL .X..........
CONTROL
.~
•
RECORD DATA •
•• RECORO ••
SWlT
••
• NO
•••
·•••••••••••••••••.
.•.x ..
•• COMMfNT •• YES
•• STATEMENT ••••••
•••••••••••••
DEf
..
84
E2 •• • ••••• ••
••••••
••
•
CONVERT
• STATEMENT TO •
•
EBCDIC COOE •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
AXX8
X
• •••• E4 ••••••••••
ERST
X
··.··E5.··.··•• ••
STATEMENT
.800Y ANO PLACE •
•
ON STRING
•
•
REPLACE
•
.STATEMENT WITH •
• ERROR MESSAGE •
•.PACK
••
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•• ••••
•
82 •
•••••
•
AXX3
X
•••••• FZ···········
PRINT
SOURCE
•
•
STATEMENTS IF
•
INDICATEO •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
...••••....
•• X. 82 •
•
•
•••••••••••••
••
••
••
G2
.•.x
••
*.
.. ..
•• YES
CONTROL
••••••
•• RECORD ••
*•• *
• NO
x
•• ••••
•
84 •
x
•• ••••
•
82 •
•••••
•
••••••
Chart DC •
FORTRAN - Phase 3
Flowcharts
207
GETIO
STA=!'~:~I •••••••• ~l
••
INITIALIZE
• PHASE & MOVE •
• STRING NEXT TO •
• SYM80l TABLE •
••• X.FOR NAME SEARCH.
••
X
.*
C1
•••
••
••
..
lA2
02
C2
•••
••
..
11
.•
*.
.*
*. • .-YES
*•••
: :ZA4
...
it
:X •••..•••••• : :
*•
20
X
12
• •••• 02 ••••••••••
••••• 03 ••••••••••
••
••
PUT
• 10 IN STRING •
•
AREA
••••••••••••••••••••
•
.INITIAlIZE GET.•
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
••
* •.
• -YES
••
•
CAllS AND
•
•
• PARAMETERS
•
INTO
•
• OUTPUT STRING.
.•.x
••
VALID
•• NO
•• STATEMENT ••••••
•• NAME
••
• YES
X
03
.....
01.··.··.·
..
• INSERT .FIO •
C3
.. ..
••
•• NO
•
••
10CS
•• NO
•• INDICATORS •••••• ••• X•• ARITHMETIC ••••••••
•• PRESENT ••
·.STATEMENT ••
•.
•
••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
COCT
19
B3··········•
••.....
INITIALIZE
•
••
·• x•••••••••••••••••••••••••.
x
:MAkE
13
••••• E2.·· •• •••••
•
COMPRESS
•
AND MOVE
•
•
STATEMENT
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
14
••••• F2 ••••••••••
•
ADD
•
• PRECISION TO •
• ANY FORTRAN •
• SUPPLIED SUB •
PROGRAMS
•
•
ER
it
22
••••• F3 ••••••• • ••
••
•
•
SET UP
ERROR -4
STATEMENT
•
• x
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•••••••••••••••••
•• Jl ••
••••• •
.•.x
:ENOO
•
•
•
•••••
G2
•• 15
••••
• •• ·G3 •••• • ••••
••
•• YES
• EXIT TO THE •
•• ENO STATEMENT •••••••••• X.
ROl
•
••
••
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
••••
*•• *
• NO
.•.x
HZ
•• 16
••
*.
••
CAll
•• NO
•• STATEMENT ••••••
*. *.
*. .-
... .*
• YES
.... .•. ....
.. ..
••••
lAIB
x
Jl
••
09
JZ
••
Jl
•••••
•
*.
* ••
*
• YES
X
10
MOVE
>I'
>I'
••'" TO NEW STRING.••
•••••••••••••••••
.. .
••••
••••• •
•• X. Jl •
Chart DD.
208
FORTRAN - Phase 4
17
*•• *
.*
'" YES
• •••• Kl ••••••• • ••
••
••
•• SSWTCH ••
•• SllTE OR •• NO
•• OVERFLOW IN ••••••
•• STMT
••
•• FORMAT
•• NO
•
•• X•• OR ERROR STMT ••••••••
••
..
.x
x
•• ••••
•
Jl •
•••••
•
XY2
X
18
K2 •• ••••••••
••••••
CONVERT
TO
•
• 5 CHARACTER •
.NAMF. CLOSE UP •
• STRING I WORD.
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
....X.• .•
Jl •
••••
x
•• ••••
•
••Jl•••••
•• ••••
•
83 •
•••••
•
START
ISTMT
••• INITIALIZE •••
•
PASS ONE
••••••••••••••••••
••
.... ....
.~.
••••
•
•
• 02 •
•• •• •• ••
• NO
· ....
...t
•
••••••
.
.
..
.
RMOVI
X
20
••••• C3 ••••••••••
•
•
REMOVE
STATEMENT
•
•
: •••••••••• X:X •••••••••• :
.
X
12
••••• 02 ••••••••••
STl ••••
MOVES
01
•• 03
•• SUBROUTINE •• NO
•• OR FUNCTION ••••••
•• STMT..
•
•
•
...*
MOVE
TO NEXT
STATEMENT
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•• • ••YES
X
.*
* •••
• NO
•••••••••••••••••••
• 01 •• X.
04
····.El.··.·····.
•
SET SORF
•
•
POSITIVE
•
• FOR FUNCTION, •
•
NEGATIVE
•
• FOR SUBROUTINE.
X
•.
Cl
•• 02
••
.FIO
•• YES
•• STATEMENT ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••••••
.. ..
•••
83
•• 19
••
STMT
•• YES
•• HAVE STMT ••••••
•• NUM8ER ••
01
••• ·.81 •••• ••••••
.*
E2
.•.x
••
•.
13
........
YES..
STMT
••
• •••••• HAVE STMT ••
•• NUMBER ••
•••••••••••••••••
• NO
x
••••• •
••••• •
• H3 •
X
14
PUT ERROR
ON THE
STRING
•
•
•
.·
• ...F2··*···· ..·•
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
·· ............
. .... •
X.·
•• X. 1<2 •
x············
TENT
.*
Gl
•••
••
*.
A8El
05
.*
G2
•••
••••••
••
*.
16
••
REAL
•• YES
••
STMT
•• NO
•
••
INTEGER
•••••••••• X.. HAVE STMT •••••••••••••••••• X•
•• EXTERNAl ••
X
•• NUMBER ••
•• STMT ••
••••
*..
*
• NO
*••
*
• YES
.•.X
H I . . 06
•• • * DIM. *. •• YES •
•• COMMON EQUIV •••••••••
•• STMT
••
*.
X
:RMOVE
* •• *
.*
• NO
11
••••• H2.· •• ••••••
•
:
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•
:
•
S~i~~~~NT
NUMBER
.. .•
••••..
·•••••
•
• H3 •• X.
•
MOVE
X
18
• •••• H3 ••••••••••
•
•
•
•
TAG5
••
Jl
•••
••
....
01
•
•
..•••••.•
..X. 01 •
•••••
••
••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•• X. 01 •
X
MOVE
TO NEXT
STATEMENT
••••
••••
....
•• CONTINUE •• YES.
•
•• STATEMENT •••••• X. B3 •
*'.
••
•• . *
••
x
Kl
•••
••
••••••
••••• •
• 1<2 •
• NO
OB
lENa
X
K2
•••
••
09
*. •• YES
•• .*TRANSFER *. •• NO
•• .*
•• STATEMENT •••••••••• X•• ENO STATEMENT ••••••••••
*. * . . * .*
*. * . . * .*
x
•••••
•• ••
• YES
X
•• ••••
•
02 •
•••••
•
Chart DE.
•• ••
• NO
X
•• ••••
•
01 •
•••••
•
.OF •
• Bl.
•••
FORTRAN - Phase 5
Flowcharts
209
•••••
•••
• OF •
• 81·
INIT
X
01
••••• B1· •• •• •••••
••
:
••
:
•••••••••••••••••••
l~l!~A~~~E
ENOS T
X
•••
..•.
C1
••
02
EOP
..··C2····...••
09
••
•• YES
•
••• X•• ~~O STATEME~! •••••••••• X:
••••
•. •*
EXIT TO THE
RO~V\NE
•••••••••••••••
•
:
• NO
....
*...
•• ••
••••
·......
•
x
01
•••
••
03
....
X..
LOOK...
••
STMT
•• YES
•• HAVE STMT ••••••••••
•• NUMBER ••
02
• NO
•
. •
.MOVE
.X
Olt
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
08
••••• 03 ••••••••••
...*
•• • ••NO
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
x
•• ••••
•
E1 •
•••••
•
••••• E2 ••••••••••
••
:
PUT
••
SY~~arE~A'~E :
•••••••••••••••••••
X
.....
f2····
.....01.•
• PUT SYMBOL
• TA!LE AOORESS •
•
ON
•
•
STRING
•
•.................•
x
•• ••••
•
El •
•••••
•
Chart DF.
210
FOR TRAN - Phase 5
.
.
CLOSE
05
E1 •• X.
••••• El····· •••• •
••
MOVE
•
•••••
TO NEXT
•
•
STATEMENT
•
•
••
•• NUMBER
•• YES
•
PUT
•
IN SYMBOL ••••••••.•• X.ERROR ON STRING •
•• TABLE ••
•
•
•• ••••
•
82 •
•••••
•
01
••••• 81········*·
PH
•
••
••
INITIALIZE
•
002
•
•.
...
••• X..
*.
END
*.
*.• *
.*
••
••
*.
01
•• YES
••••••
.. ..
t.
COM~ON
.*
x
•••••
•
02 •
•• ••••
•
x
•.
ii
•••••
.OH •
• Bl·
•••
.•.x ••
09
C2
•• 10
••
NAME
•• NO
•• IN SYM80L ••••••
•• TABLE ••
.*
• NO
.*
.*
*.
ZORRO
••
t.
••
• YES
ii
C1
x
82
••
•• NO
•• LEGAL NAME ••••••
PHASE
••••••••••••••••••
••
.*
••
.. ... ..
.. ..
.. ... ..
·••••••••..
•
03
•• YES
••••••
•.. *
.*
• YES
•
• 02 •• X•
•X
11
• •••• 02.· ••••• •••
MOVE
•
••
•
•
PUT STRING.
•
.ERROR
ON
•
x
••••••••••••••••••
••••
••••
• HI ••
..X: 1'1 :
•• ••••
•
••••
NXTPH
.*
*. .*
• NO
.•.
ii
E1
•• 04
•• COMMON
•• YES
•
•• PROCESSED •••••••••• X.
•• ALREAOY ••
•
.. .
....
. ...
E2·········
EXIT
TO THE •
••••
•. •*
•••• • NO
F1 •• X.
•• ••••
•
•••••••••••••••
· ..
.....fl···..··.··•
X
•
••
MOVE
TO NEXT
STATEMENT
•••••
•
ROL
ROUTINE
•
•
X
12
PLACE
05
••••• F2 ••••••••••
••
•
.NAME INPUTSYMBOL ••
•
TABLE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
G2
.•.x
••
13
•• .* NAME *. •• NO
•• OIMENSIONEO ••••••
•.
••••••
•
•
FIX ••••
.. ..
.*
*•• *
• YES
• HI ••••
X
06
•
•
•
INITIALIZE
TO SCAN
.•
•
•
• CONSTANTS TO
81NARY
•
• Jl •• X.
....
X
•••
Jl
•• 07
•• STATEMENT •• NO
•• TERMINATOR ••••••
••
••
•.•. .•.•
NEX
.
•
PLACE
• CONSTANTS IN
• SYMBOL TABLE
•
•
•
08
:X •••••••••• :
••••• •
.....
• Kl··········•
•
REMCVE
•
• STATEMENT FROM •
STRING
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•• ••••
•
Fl •
•••••
•
Chart DG •
.
15
••••
: 82 :
X
X
••••• J2 ••••••••••
X:•••••••••••••••:
• YES
REMOVE
•
•
................•
· ..
• •••••
14
.....
•• H2··.··.····
••
COLLECT
STATEMENT
••••••••••••••••••
••
••••
PTB
X
PRTE
.....
• Hl··········•
NEXP
X
16
••••• K2.· ••••••••
•
GOTO NEXT
•
•
ITEM IN
•
STATEMENT
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•••••
•
Jl •
•• ••••
•
FORTRAN - Phase 6
Flowcharts
211
•••••
·OH •
· •Bl.
••
START
X
01
••.... ·Bl.··.·.···.••
•
INITIALIZE
•
PHASE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
••
••
••
*.
C1
..
.X
••
*.
.FIO
*.
*•• *
.•
••• •
•· •C3
.
••••• •
x··············
OTB
OZ
.*
•• NO
••••••
CZ
*.
.*
03
X
TO NEXT
STATEMENT
•
•
.*
· ..
.. ..
....
• Fl •• X.
•••
Fl
*.
••••• •
••••• •
• 04 •
x
11
PIECE
X
70
.....03..........
. .... 04 ••••••••••
•
•
••
••
MOVE
•
PUT
: :SlOP
•••
• •••••
•
TO NEXT
.X ••••••••• NAME IN SYMBOL.
VARIABLE.
•
TABLE
•
••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••
x
•· ••••
11:2 •.
•••••
•
x
•• ••••
•
G3 •
••••• •
• YES
•••••• X
003
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
El
•• 04
•*
*•
•• FUNCTION •• NO
•• OR sueR.
• •••••
•• 'SORf t ••
* •. *
10
• INDICATE REAL •
.OR INTEGER MODE •
.IN SYMBOL TABLE.
.•
.
'"
.•.x
•.
X
.··
• .• C3···.····.·•
12
REMOVG
X
13
• • ••• OZ···· •• ••• •
'"
RE~OVE
•
"'STATEMENT FROM •
'"
STRING
•
•••••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
••••
*.
• YES
·01·········.•
•....
•
P'CVE
•
STARI
••
*. •• • * .*
• YES
•
•
•••
•• STATEMENT •• NO
•• TERMINATOR •••••••
....
....
0'5
••
FUNC.
•• NO
•
•
••
DR SUB
•••••• X. K2 •
•• STATEMENT..
••
* •••
•• ••••
•
G3 ••••
• YES
OOZ
•••
TRY
06
•*
••
••
•• NO
•• LEGAL NAME ••••••••
*.
*.
••
*•••
.*
.. .•.x···········
.. .
.... •••• •••....
· ..
•••• •....• .
.*
*.
SUBPROGRAM
NAP'E IN
SY~BOl TABLE
.-
•
••
: .......... X:
08
X
Ell
•••••••••••••••••••
17
·····JZ·········.
•• ERROR
•
•
•
PUT
•*
ON STRING*
••*••••••••••••••••••
••••
· ..
· 11:2 .. X.
x
09
.. · ..Kl.··.·.····•
•
PUT SY~
• TBL AOOR OF
• SUBPROG IN
• COMMUNICATIONS
AREA
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
•· ••••
C3 ••.
•••••
Chart DH.
212
FORTRAN - Phase 6
SOS
••••• •
X
H3
18
• ····11:2·········
EXIT TO THE •
•
ROl
•
ROUTINE
•
•
•••••••••••••••
••
•• INTEGER
•• FUNCTION
*.
x
• YES
.··.·Jl.··
.•.··.••
PLACE
•
•
•
•
.*
• NO
x
X
ZI
••• *
• NO
PLACE
••
....
.. ...x ..
:ZARRO
H I . . 07
HZ
•• 16
••
NAME
•• YES •
••
NAME
•• NO
•• IN SYMBOL TBl •••••• X.
•• IN SYMBOL ••••••
•• OR COM ••
•• TABLE ••
*•• *
•••
*.
.*
.. .•. ..
*.
G3
....
....
....
....
••
•• YES·
•
•• REAL FUNCTION •••••• x. J3 •
• YES
lOililO
.. ..
•••••• i
X
Gl
ZZ
•• NO
•
•
•••••• X. KZ •
.*
$ •••
• •
• • J3
04 •
• YES
•• X.
tINO
X
Z3
•••• ·J3· •••• ••• ••
•
INOICATE
•
• fUNCTION IN •
• COMMUNICATION •
• AREA (SORF) •
•••••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
Fl •
•••••
•
••
••
•• ••••
•
1.2 •
•••••
•
.... ....
X
SIO
A2
•••
••
09
•• STATEMENT •• NO
•• TERMINATOR ••••••
*. *•• *.*
• YES
i
10
.....
..·.·.
•• 82.·.·
••
REMOVE
.STATEMENT FROM •
•
STRING
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
PHASE
01
••• •• Bl ••••••••••
••
•
•
RMOVE
••
INITIALIZE
•
• PHASE ••
•••••••••••••••••
x
••••• •
• Fl •
••••• •
X
TEST
Cl
•••
•*
••
••
02
••
•• YES
••• X•• ENO STATEMENT ••••••••••
••
••••
•• ••
••
x
•••••
.OK •
• NO
01
.•.i
•*
••
••
-.
••
• Bl.
•••
.. ..
DIMENSION
.*
YES
••••••
.•.
i
••
*.
.:.•• ~~S~~~!~~
.:.!~~.
ALREADY ••
*.
••• * .*
· ..
x
11
••••
••••
*•• *
• YES
ZORRO
Olt
••
••
•• NO
•
•
•• LEGAL NAME •••••• X. K2 •
•••••
•
Gl •
•• ••••
•
• NO
El
x············
02
x
*. .*
•*
.... .•. .... ..
....
DAP
03
*. ••
E2
..
.x
••
12
NAME *• •• YES
•• IN SYMBOL ••••••
•• TABLE ••
•• .*
*.
* •• *
.*
•••••
• NO
• OK •
•••• • NO
• Bl·
• fl •• X.
•
•
••••• •
•
X
05
PLACE
X
13
•••••fl . . . . . .•• ••
.....
......
•• MOYE TO ••
•• F2··.·
•
•
PUT
••••• NEXT STATEMENT.
• NAME IN SYMBOL ••
TABLE
•
•
10
••••••••••••••••••
••
••••••••••••••••••
••
••••
•• ••••
•
Gl ••••
• G2 •• X.
•
• •
• • X 08
MIX ••••
JCOLL••••
X
lit
····.Gl ••••••••••
.•· .•G2.·.·
.••.••
•• INITIALIZE ••
: CON~~k~~~TTO :
.BINARY AND PUT.
TO SCAN
•
•
.IN SYMBOL TABLE.
STATEMENT
•
••••••••••••••••••
••
•••••••••••••••••••
· ..
x
••••• •
••••• •
• 1.2 •
TARZ
X
15
• •••• H2·· ••••••••
•••••
•
•
•
•
GOTO
•
• 1.2 .X ••••• NEXT ITEM ON •
STRING
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••••••
....
x············
PREY...
J2
••
16
.
SUBN
.
.. .
18
••••• J3 ••••••••••
•• SU8PROG •• NO
• SPREAO SYMBOL
•• NAME OR PREV •••••••••• X.
TABLE FOR
••
OIM..
•
DIMENSION
••••
•
INfORMATION
Chart DJ •
FORTRAN - Phase 7
•• • ••YES
••••
• K2 ••
•• X.
•• ••••
• X 17
ER
••••• K2··.· •••• ••
••
••
PUT STRING.
• ERROR ON
•••••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. Fl •
••••••
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. G2 •
••••••
.. .
Flowcharts 213
•• ••••
•
A2 •
•••••
•
ZAR
...
••
A2
.•.x
••
..
10
••
•
.SET INCICATORS •
•
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
• NO
•
ER
••
•
INITIALIZE
•
•
PHASE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••
·••••..
OAP
•
•
•• YES
PLACE
•
•••••• ••• X.NAME IN SYMBOL •
TABLE
•
•
.•
*•• -
BEGIN
X
01
••••• Bl.· ••••••••
B2 •• X.
X
••••• B2 •• • •••••••
·......
• •••• B3 ••••••••••
Cl •• X.
•• ••••
• X.x ••••••••.•••.
.•.
X
11
•.••. C2·.·.·
.•...
.* END *. •• YES • ••
••
••
MOVE
•• STATEMENT •••••• •••••
TO NEXT
•
•
STATEMENT
•
*.
.*
*. *. .• .*
•••••••••••••••••••
X
• NO
•• ••••
•
F3 •
•••••
•
x
Cl
01
••
••
.•.
•*
*.
••
...
02
••
••
.. ..
REAL
*.
.•.x
••
*.
.
ZORRO
.
EXTERNAL
*.
. ....
.•••••••••••••••••. ....
:NEXP
F2
••
X
••••••
••••• •
••
12
....
•• ••
••
••
•*
••••••
Gl •• X.
• X
06
*.
x
••••• •
• f3 •
••••• •
·.···Gl···
.......•
•• INIT IALIZE
•
•
TO SCAN
•
STATEMENT
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
.*
G2
.*
*.
BOB
X
08
•
RfMeVE
•
• STATEMENT FROM •
STRING
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•• ••••
•
Cl •
•••••
•
Chart DK.
214
FORTRAN - Phase 7
••
*.
.. ..
...
....
14
*. •• NO •
.•
.•
•••• X.
X
.•
H2
••
*.
15
.
••
NAME
•• YES •
•• E~UAL IFIX •••• X.
*.
x
.....
• Jl·.·.··.•..•
. ..
• YES
••••• •
• YES
.•.x
••
•• EXTERNAL
•••
H I . . 07
.*
•• STATEMENT-. •• NO
•• TERMINATOR ••••••
*.. *
SOS
13
• NO
•••••• X
*.
••
.. ..
• HI •• X•
.*
••
*•••
· ..
*.
.•.x
•• COMMON
•• YES
..OR PREVo DIM •••••••
•• NO
* ..• .*
F2
*.
.*
.*
• NO
A2 •
•• ••••
•
TlCKK
••
J2
.•.X .0
*.
16
.
.. .. •••
..•••••.••••••••
••
NA~E
•• YES X
•• ECUAL FLOAT ••••••
*.
.-
*•••
•
• NO
x
•• X. 83 • • B2 •
•••• •
x
21
••••• E3 ••••••••••
• YES
MLTN
05
• YES
LAP ••••
•
.!: ...........
....
.
••
IN
•• NO
•
•• SYMBOL TABLE ••••••••
•• YESX
••••••
.... ....
·••••..
••
20
COLLECT CONST •
• TO BINARY AND •
• PUT IN SYMBOL.
•
TABLE
•
• Gl •
••
.*
••••• 03 ••••••••••
04
• NO
.•.x
.*
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
.*
Fl..
19
••
.•
*.
INTEGER
*.
x
: :PHIL
03
•• YES
••••••
.. .. - ..
••
••
El
.x ••
• YES
• NO
.•
.. ..
....
C3
••
NAME
•• NO
•• OIME~SIONEO ••••••
*•• *
JAP
11
••••• A3 ••••••••• •
••
••
PUT STRING.
.ERROR ON
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
.. ..
••••..
·•••••
•
*.
•••••
• 81·
•••
PLACE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
• B3 •• X.
•
• .
..
•• LAP5
X
18
•• LEGAL NAME
• OK •
09
•
• MOVE POINTER
•
III
•
••••• X. HI •
•
•
••••
•• •F3
••••
••••• •
X
22
• ••• F3 •••••••••
•
•
•
EXIT TO THE
ROL
ROUTINE
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•
>I)
•
••
***.
A3 •*
**•• **
X
.*. *•
A3
.*
*. *.
NO .*
•••••••• OPERATOR
.*
*. •.
.* .*
START
•• ***Al •• * •• ***.*
l3
*•
•• INITIALIZE
*•
PHASE
•*
.*****.**.*** ••••
•
•
*•••
· ..
*
CAP
*.•
*
* YES
*.
• Bl •• X.
****
X
.*.
OUT
BI
*. *.
•*
*.*.B2** •• **.*.
••
•• YES
* EXIT TO THE •
*. END STMT
.* •••••••• X*
ROl
*
••
.*
*
ROUT INE
*
*. * .•• . *
*.***.*****.**.
• NO
........... X:X
CI
•*
.*. *.
Z
*.
••
*. YES
•• ARITH STMT ••••••
*. •.
.*
.*
.*x••
•• • .*NO
: A3 :
•
X
*
*
...
•
...*
:X
........... .
X
••
*.
: :ll
: :133
* •••
*. YES
• •
CAll STMT .* •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
*.
.*
.*
*. *.*NO
•
.*.
x
•*. *.
JBR
03
• •• **04* ••• *****.
.*
*.
*
*
.*
lEGAL
*. NO
•
REPLACE
•
•
*. CONSTANT
•••••••••• X*STMT WITH ERROR* ••••
*.
.*
*
MESSAGE
•
*••. ..**
•.*.** ••••• * ••• ****
* YES
x
*** •• E3*.***.*.**
*
:
c~~~~~Clo
•
:
*
BINARY
*
* *.*.*.*.*.******
••
:MOVf
X
*** •• FI·· •••·*· ••
*•
• •*
,",OVE
••••• TO NEXT STMT. *
:RC21
x
••*.*F3* •••••• ·*·
••• **.*.* ••••• ***.*
••••••••
*••••••••*
•
*
*
•
X
Zl
*****C2**********
C3
*.
* • *.
*
MOVE
*
X NO.*
*TO NEXT ITEM IN*X •••••••• *.
DECIMAL
.*
*
STMT
*
X
*.
.*
•
•
*..*
********* •••••• *.
*. .*
* YES
NO
X
•*EI
••
X
•••
ClSUP
B3
*.
.*.*.B4.* ••• ***.*
.*..
*
*
****
••
STMT
•• YES
*
REPACK
•
*
•
•• TERMINATOR .* •••••••• X.
STRING IF
••••• X. HI *
*.
.*
•
NECESSARY
•
X *
•
*
•••
•• ••
.** •• ******** ••••
* NO
...*
*•••• *
••• ••
* A3 •*
01
*
.*..
*.*.
••
•• YES
••
*.
IF STMT
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X••
............
**.*
RC
••
•
PUT
•
• CONT. IN SYM • •
*
TBl
•
x
:RC22
• •••• G3 •••••• ****
PUT
••
CONSTANT
*•
* OPERATOR AND *
** S.T.
ADO ON *
STRING
*
.**.* •• * ••• *.****
:NUMM
x
••• *.H3 •••••• ***.
*
•*
••
PACK
•••••
STMT IF
*
•
NECESSARY
•
• ** ••••••••••
••••••
Chart DL.
FORTRAN - Phase 8
Flowcharts
215
CKI
Al······.··.•
•.....
• INITIALIZE
•
•
•• PHASE •••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• Bl •• X.
• • x
10SYl•••• •••
· ..
Ill..
Ofl
B2
. • • . •• YES
•• DEFINE
•.•.
•••
.* SORF
••
••
OF5
*. •• NO
Cl
.•.x
••
ER12
X
• •••• C2···· ••••• •
•
•
: lZP~~ ~~:Y~G :
••
EXIT
••••••
•• STMT
••
••
*.
.*
••
x
* •• *
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• NO
•• 03 ••
••••
• .X. Fit •
••••••
••••••
x
•••
Cll
01
••
• •••• 02 ••••••••••
•• • *
CALL *. •• YES
XR2R
•*
••
••
*.
CALL
•• YES
• CHECK SYNTAX
LINK
•••••••••• X. AND MODIFY
STMT..
•
.. ..
*..*
...
•
•
•
•
••••
•• X. Fit •
X
El
•
................
.. ..
•
• NO
.*
•
••••••
••
*.
••
END
•• YES
•• STATEMENT ••••••••••••••••••••
*.
*.
...... .
.*
• NO
.*
••••• •
X
•
•
•
216
FORTRAN - Phase 9
•• COMPUTE ••
:SPECI~I~iTIONS :
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••
•
03 •
•• ••••
•
eel • ···.03 ••••••••••
X
••
••
MODIFY TO
MATCH
•
•
•
CALL EXIT
••••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. Fit •
••••••
.. .
OF3
X
• •••• Olt· •••••••••
•• ADD INFO ••
• SYMBOLTO TABLE ••
••• ••••••••••••••••
•
X
• •••• EIt ••••••••••
•• UPDATE
••
OFCNT
•••
••
••••••••••••••••••
••••
• Fit •• X.
••••• •
X
•••••FIt·. . . . . . . ..
••
••
MOVE TO
•
NEXT
•
•
STATEMENT
••••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. 81 •
••••• •
· ..
••••
•• X. F4 •
Chart DM.
X
•• • •• CIt ••••••••••
.. .
••
• •••• B4 ••••••••••
*
CHECK FOR
•
••
.•••••••••.. X•••• POSITIYE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• X: A~~Ll8N~~~~is :
*...
...*
•
•
•• • ••NO
•• • ••YES
•••••••••••••••••
~l~f
••• ·FZ···· ••• ••
EXIT TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
.. .
•••••
•
A3 •
•• ••••
•
A2 •
•••••
•
ORGIN
01
••••• A1 •• •• •• • •••
CV7
••
••
• INITIALIZE
•
•
PHASE
••••••••••••••••••••
••••
· ..
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
••
* •. *
.*
••
*.
.. ..
••
.*
CV5A
04
•
•
•
*.. *
02
••
13
•• YES·
•
•••••• X. K2 •
*.. *
X
CVll
•• ··E1·········
EXIT TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
•
E2
••
14
••
•• NO
•• VARIABLE NAME ••••••
*.
•••••••••••••••
*.
*•• *
.*
.*
x
•• ••••
•
K3 •
• YES
.. ... ..
.•.
x
.. .. .. ..
F l . . "O!!
•*
*.
•
•• CONTINUE •• YES
••• X.. STATEMENT ••••••
.*
•
X
15
••
•• NO
•• LEGAL NAME ••••••
*. *.
06
*•••
.•
·....••••...
•• ••••
•
A4 •
•••••
•
•
.. .
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
FORTRAN - Phase 10
x
•• ••••
•
A2 •
••••••
•
X
••• •
•• •A2
••••• ••
•• ••••
•
K2 •
•••••
•
x
)PUT
X
09
••••• K1 •••••• ••••
• PUT SYMBOL
•
• TABLE ADDRESS •
•
ON STRING
•
X
23
••••• F3.· •• • •• •••
•
REMOVE
•
CONSTANT
•
•
•
OPERATOR
•
•• CONVERT ••
••• OPERATOR •••
•••••••••••••••••
•
• Jl •• X.
••••
X
CV25A
•••
Jl
•• 08
.
*
*. •• NO
••
LEGAL
•• STMT NUMBER ••••••
•• IN SYM ••
•• TBL ••
• Kl •• X.
•
•• NO
•••••••
.*
CVI0
X
24
• •••• H3 ••••••• • ••
CVl7
X
17
••• ··H2·.· •• •••••
• FI~o OR PUT •
• NAME IN SYMBOL •
TABLE
•
•
•
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•
•••
••••
•• B2 ••
..X. Kl •
••••• •
••••••
• YES
*•• *
.*
• YES
.. .. .. ..
··••••..
..
*.. *
••••• •
22
•
NAME IF
•
• REQUI~EO IN •
• STMT FUNCTION.
07
.*
*. •• NO
••
•• 00 STATEMENT ••••••
.*
•• X. Kl •
•••••••••••••••••
.•.x
• YES
••
•
•
..••••.
E3 •
•
.*
• CONSTANT IN
• SYMBOL TABLE
A3 •
HI..
*.
Chart DN.
••
28
•••••••••••••••••••
X
••••••
•
"4 ••
X
•••••
••••
•• •A2
CVl3
X
16
••• ··G2 ••••••••••
••••• ••
•.AoJUST SHAPE OF.•
•• •••••••
••··.··Gl·
•
SET SkITCHES •
: ~~~olbA ~~I~~ :
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
CV3
F2
X
••••• •
••••• •
• NO
CV2
••••• •
X
•
•• CONSTANT
•• OPERATOR
*.
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
E3
*.
•
04· •• • •• •• ••
••••••
•
• FIND OR PUT •
X
CV6
•
•• •Bl ••
•
• NO
X
*.
•
•
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
Jl •
x
•••••
•
••••• •
••
.
.
•
••
•• OPERATOR
.*
• YES
:WAIT
....
••••• •
••••• • • •
••••
· ..
.... ... .... ..
.... •••
.... .... •••••
••••• •
.. .•. ..
.. ... ..
X
NO ••
••
•••••• ENo STATEMENT ••
*.
•••••••••••••••••
26
X
•••••••
••• •••• A4 •••
•
PUT STRING ••
.ERROR ON
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
• •••• • NO
C3 •
••••• • •• 02 ••• X.
•••• x
X
*.
•
•
•
•
•
A4 ••••
•
..
• NO
...
•
REMOVE
• POSSIBLE STHT
• NUMBER. CHANGE
• 10 IF STMT IS
• STHT FUNCTION
....
•••
CV50
X
20
B2
•• 11
•• ••• B3.· •• • •• •• •
• * R/W *. •• NO
••
•
CLOSE UP
•
•• GO TO OR IF ••••••
STRING IF
•
•
•• STMT
••
•
NECESSARY
•
X
*•• *
• YES
•
.X •••••••••••••••••••••••••
• 02 • •
• C3 •• X.
X
•
:COOT
x
27
MOVE
X
21
•••• ·C4 •••••• •• ••
C2
•• 12
••• •• C3.· •• ••••••
.*
*.
••
•• YES
•
COLLECT
•
•
MOVE
•
..INTERNAL STMT ••••••
•
INTfGER
•
•
TO NEXT
•
•• NU"'BER ••
CONSTANT
•
•
STATEMENT
•
•
.
03
*. ••
YES
•• FORMAT OR ERR ••••••
•• STMT
••
01
•
X
19
••••• A3 ••••••••••
•••••• X
.. ..
X
•*
••••• •
• • .
CV12
• B2 •• X.
CV5
• INITIALIZE
•
• TO SCAN BOOY OF.
•
STATEMENT
•
*.
••
•••
• MOVE POINTER
• Bl •• X.
...
CVO
10
• •••• A2 ••••••••••
••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
·• ..
•
Cl
X
••
CVI ••••
X
02
••••• B1··.··.··.·
• * .FIO
••
••••• •
•
CV5B
K2
.•.x
••
•• ••••
•
K3 ••••
•••••
• x
.•.
CV22
18
.*
*.
•• STATEMENT •• NO
•• TERMINATOR ••••••
*.
.*
*.
* .• *
.*
• YES
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
••••••
x
•• ••••
•
E3 •
•••••
•
K3
•• 25
.* LEGAL *. •• YES •
••
••
INTEGER
••••••••
·.CONSTANT ••
*.
*•• *
.*
•
x
•• ••••
•
A4 •
•••••
•
Flowcharts
217.
START
01
••••• Bl ••••••••••
••
•
•
•••
INITIALIZE
PHASE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
·•••••••••..
•
• Cl •• X.
ABEL
..
C1
.•.x
••
•.
07.
OUT
12
••
•• YES
•
••• X•• END STATEMENT •••••••••• X.
••
••
•
••••
*•• *
••••C2.··.· •• ••
EXIT TO THE
RCL
ROUT INE
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•
• NO
iC
:CBEL
01
•••
•• 03
.:t
111.
•• FO~~AT
•• YES
•• STATEMENT ••••••
*. •.
*•••
.* .*
'" NO
X
:NOVEM
04
..... El····.··.··•
NCN
•
.• X...••• STATEMENT
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
~OVE
FOR~AT
:OECE~
.~:...........
BAKER
11
••••• F2 ••••••••••
.*
*. •• NO
•
••
••
•
PUT
•• STATEMENT •••••••••• X.ERRO~ ON STRING •
•• NUfo'BER ••
X.
•
Fl
••
O~
*..*
•• •••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. Cl •
••••••
.. .
•• • ••YES
X
('6
..... Gl.····.·.·.•
••
•
• INITIALIZE TO •
SCAN BODY
•••••••••••••••••••
••
••••
• HI •• X.
• • X
·......
.. ... ..
·.IEND
·• YES..
H I . . 07
END
••
•••••• OF STATEMENT ••
·.0 *.
* •. *
.*
.•
• NO
Jl
•••
••
08
.. *
*. ••
•• SYNTAX
NO • •
•• AND TYPE OK •••••••
...
*.
*•• *
.lII
.*
• YES
218
FORTRAN - Phase 11
Oq
•.SPECIFICATIONS
OUT
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
••
X
TST
Chart DP.
x
.....
H2······
..··•
•
PUT
X
10
·····J2··········
•• MOVE TO NEXT ••
•
•
ELEMENT OF
STATE~ENT
•
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. HI •
••••• •
.. .
START
01
••••• Al ••••••••••
••• INITIALIZE •••
•
PHASE
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
..
·· ..
• III •• X.
••••
X
•••
TEST
81
.*
••
*.
02
NO ••
••
•••••• ENO STATEMENT ••
*.
.. ..
.*
•. .*
•• ••••
•
C2 ••••
•••••
• ii
.•.
ABel
• YES
:OUT
11
ii
•
•
•
···.Cl···.····.
EXIT TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
01
•••
••
.*
C2
••
*.
11
••
•• NO
•• STATEMENT ••••••
..FUNCTION ••
*.
N
03
.• ERROR *. •• YES
•
••
••• X.. STATEMENT ••••••••
*. *.
•• .*
*•• *
• NO
.*
*••
*
• YES
X
12
••••••••••
•••• •••02
•
REPLACE
•
.STATEMENT WITH •
.ERROR STATEMENT.
•••••••••••••••••••
X
.•.x
E1
•• 04
.*
*. •• YES
•• FORMAT
•
•• STATEMENT •••••••• X•••••••••••
•.
*. •. .* .*
.*
• NO
.•.x
Pl..
.. ..
.. ..
:A8Ell
05
*.
.
~~~ll=~~T ·:.:~~.X:
*.
.*
*. .*
.:.
•*
• NO
Gl
.:.
••
:CK
06
••
.FIO
•• YES •
•• STATEMENT •••••• X.
*.
*.
*. .*
.*
.*
• NO
X
07
••••• H1· •••••••••
••
••
• INITIAL1ZE TO •
• SCAN PHASE
••••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• Jl ••
• ••• X.
TEST
t···
J1
j.••
08
•*
*.
•• STATEMENT ••
X
:ZZZZ
X
•
•
:ST:~N~p~~\krWED:
•
OPERATOR
•
•
STORE
0 VALUES IN
•••••••••••••••••
X
16
••••• J2 ••••••••••
:MOVE
MOVE
TO NEXT
STATEMENT
....
•. .....
3.·
•• ••
ii
09
.•
.. .
•• X. 81 •
• YES
X
••••• •
• C2 •
••••••
.•
••••••
10
••••• K2 ••••••••••
.••••••••••••••••.
••
DIM
•• N O .
•• LEVEL 1.2 OR •••••••••• X. MOVE POINTER
Chart DQ.
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
• NO
••
14
IS
• •••• H2 ••••••••••
•
.•
YES X .
••••
•• ••
K1
13
•••G2 ••••••••••
•••
•• CALCULATE 0 •••
•
VALUES
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
•• TERMINATOR •••••••••• X.
••
••
•
•••
X
• •••• FZ......... .
••
••
GET
•
DIMENSION
•
• PARAMETERS
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
••••
••
•• X. Jl •
•••••••
FORTRAN - Phase 12
Flowcharts
219
•• ••••
•
A3 •
••••••
ARITH
X
18
• •••• A3 ••••••••••
•
~OOIFY
•
:EXPRE~~I~~ FOR :
• SCAN PROCESS •
START
01
••••• A1 •• • •••••••
••
•••
• INITIALIZE
•
PHASE
••••••••••••••••••••
••••
·· ..
..
• Bl •• X.
••••
X
•••
B1
••
NO ••
••••••
END
..
XYl
+.
*.
.. ..
..
.*
XYl5
Ol
Bl
••
••
••
•
•
•
..
.x
••
*•
.*
*.
*.
.*
*. .-
.*
II
....
Cl·.····.··
EXIT
TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
••••••••••••••• •
.*
••
Cl
.•.x
••
*.
*.
*•• *
.*
••••••
.•.
X
* •. -
.*
XYl3
.• .•
El
.•.x
x
*.
04
.0
NO
•• IF STATEMENT ••••••
-. *.
*•• -
.* .*
• YES
X
05
•••••F1······.. ••
•
PUT IF
•
• OPERATOR ON •
•
STRING
•
.•.x
••
06
x
•• ••••
•
Bl •
•••••
•
...
• NO
.* .*
x
••••• •
• J3 •
••••• •
12
X
13
••••• El.· ••••• •••
•
PUT CALL
•
• OPERATOR ON •
•
STRING
•
E3
•• II
.
.•
*.
• •••
.YES •• STATEMENT •• NO
•
•
X••••• TERMINATOR •••••• X. A3 •
••
14
....
.*
••
••••
•• ••
....
....
NO
•
•
STATEMENT •••••• X. K3 •
••
..FUNCTION ••
••
••
••
....
•
*•• -
••••••
• K3 •
••••• •
x .
.•.x
*.
x
•• ••••
••
••H3
••• •
••••••
• Gl •
••••• •
GZ
.•.x············
:XYl3
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
XYl8
•• • * LEFT *. •• YES
•• PARENT~ESIS ••••••
-. *.
• NO
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
Gl
.• ·····:
INDICATE
•
.SUBPROGRAM NAME •
••••• •
••
.*
••
•• ••••
•
A3 •
• NO
*.• -
• •••• Ol·· ••••••••
01
•• 03
•*
*. •• YES
•••
••• X•• ARIT~METIC ••••••
•• STATEMENT ••
*.
19
•••••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
J3 •
•••••
•
• YES
:XY5
••
LIST
X
lO
•• •• ·C3 ••••••••••
•
CHECK
•
STATEMENT
•
•
.NUM8ER LIST FOR.
•
VALIDITY
•
11
.*
••
•• ••••
•
Gl •
•••••
•
*. •• NO
•• LEGAL NAME
..
.x
.*
*. •• YES
••
··.!~JI~~~I~~
x
• YES
X
B3
10
• :. ST~~~~ENT .:.~~ ••
• YES
:OVERF
•••••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
8l •
•••••
•
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
A
*••
• YES
..
.. ..
.x
HZ
•• 15
VALID *. •• NO
•• STMT FUNCT ••••••••
•• NAME
••
•• • *
•.
•••••
•
H3 ••••
•• ••••
• x
.
XYl9
..
H3
•• 07
•• .*STATEMENT* ••• YES
•• TERMINATOR ••••••
..
.*
*.
·•••••..
• YES
*•• *
.*
..
• NO
• J3 •• X.
X
:XY7 ••••
16
·.· .. Jl··········
•
••
••• X.ERROR
••
•• STHT PUT
FUNCTION.•
• OPERATOR ON •
• STRING. COUNT.
•
• ARGUMENTS.
•
.•.x
17
*. •• NO
•• • *
•• lESS THAN 15 ••••••
*.
*.
••
.. ..
.-
• YES
Chart DR.
220
FORTRAN - Phase 13
x
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
.*
08
•
••
PUT
•
ON STRING.
.....
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
I(l
• x
••••• J3 ••••••••••
•
x
•• ••••
•
J3 •
••••••
••••• •
•
•
•
•
.
.X •••••••••••
• K3 •• X.
•
XYll
X
09
• •••• K3 ••••• • ••••
MOVE
TO NEXT
STATEMENT
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
81 •
••••••
•• ••••
•
A2 •
•••••
•
XYl4A
X
10
••••• A2.· ••••••••
START
01
••••• Al····.··· ••
• INITIALIZE
•
TO SCAN
•
•
STATEMENT
•
•
•
•• CHECK liST ••
FOR VALID
•
•
.VARIABlE NAMES.
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
·· ....
·••••..
NO ••
••••••
.•
*.
Bl
•••
••
END
*.
* •• *
02
.*
..
*.
.*
*.•
*
• NO
..
XY15
*. ••
.*
•••
A3
•• 18
••
*.
•• STATEMENT •• YES
• •• X•• TERMINATOR ••••••
• 82 •• X.
••••
X
•••
82
•• 11
.* RANGE *. •• NO
••
•
•• OPERATOR
••••••••
• Bl •• X.
•••••• ii
XY2
XY13
-.
••
*.
.*
..
.••••. .
X··
....
.
.. .
......
..
.
.
•• ••
•••••••••••••••••
• YES
* •• *
• YES
• C3 •• X.
XY7 ••••
X
19
XYl6
C2
•• 12
••••• C3 ••••••••••
••
NON
•• NO
•
PUT
•
X
..DIMEO INT VAR •••••••••• X.ERROR ON STRING •••••
•••
:OVERF
20
ii
•••• Cl·.···· •• •
• EXIT TO THE •
ROl
•
•
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
• YES
:XY3
..
.•.
01
•• 03
READ *. •• YES
STATEMENT ••••••
•• . *
•
••• X..
*.
•• •* .*
..
.•.
••
.. ..
·••••..
*.
STATEMENT
04
.*
• Fl •• X.
ii
•••
Fl..
XY21
X
14
••••• E2.· •••••• ••
•
REARRANGE
•
•••••
• IMPll~O CO
.STATEMENTS FOR.
•
SCAN
•
•
ii
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
G2 •
••••• •
• YES
••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
••••••
*.• *
XY6
•
•
•
•
••••• •
• * WRITE *. •• NO
••
••
13
PUT
OUT OOA
OPERATOR
•
•
X
ii
El
X
• •••• 02 ••••••• • ••
••
••••••
• Fl •
• NO
XY4
PUT
05
.* 10CS •. •• NO
••
••
RECORD
••••••
•.
.*
*.
.*
X
*.. *
•••••
•
C3 •
•• ••••
•
• YES
XY6A
.. .•. ..
....
ii
Gl
•• 06
••
lEFT
•• NO
•• PARENTHESIS ••••••
-.
.* .*
*.
• YES
PUT
ii
07
••••• Hl·········.
••
•
•
.•
••
Jl
•
•
*.
.*
.*
• YES
•••••••••••••••••••
•• X•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
X
•
••
.. ..
XY22
OB
.*
• YES
.•.X
X
•
•
••
••
.*
••••
*.. *
17
TO NEXT
•
•• ••••
•
C3 •
•••••
•
• STATEMENT ••
•••••••••••••••••
Kl
•• 09
••
VAR
•• NO
•
•
•• lIST FOllOWS •••••• X. 82 •
*.
X
·····J2··········
• MOVE
••
•
*. •• NO
•• R/W STMT NUM •••••••
••
OK
••
*.
-.
XY27
X
16
•••••
H2CHECK
•• ••••••• ••
•
•
STATEMENT
•
.NUM8ER liST FOR.
VALIDITY
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
.•.x
..
.. ..
G2
•• 15
.* GOTO *. •• NO X
.
••
•• STATEMENT ••••••
x
•• ••••
•
C3 •
•••••
•
••
PUT
OUT 110
OPERATOR
••••• •
• • X
XY24 •••• .
,.; G2 ••••
••••
*
••••.
X
•• ••••
•
81 •
•••••
•
• YES
Chart DS.
FORTRAN - Phase 14
X
•• ••••
•
A2 •
•••••
•
Flowcharts
221
••••• •
••••••
•• ••••
•
A2 •
• A3 •
••••••
STAI!T
lINUE
01
••••• Al····· •• •••
••• INITIALIZE •••
PHASE
•••••••••••••••••••
••
•• • *
A2
*.
*.
* •. *
Bl
*.
.•. ••
END
*.
••
.*
.*
•
•
*. .*
LIZ
02
.*
••
••
*.
• YES
*.
*•• *
.*
•••
GENERATE A
LABEL
•
· ..
E2 •
•••••
• •• B3 ••• X.
•X
ISTNO••••
11
20
• •••• B3········.·
•
PUT STMT
•
NUMBER OR
•
•
.GENERATED LABEL.
• IN WD 2 OF DO •
•
TBL
•
*
*. •• YES
•• • CONTINUE
•• STATEMENT ••••••
*. ••
.*
82
.•.x
19
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••• • ••••
x
•
x
•*
X
• •••• A3· •••••••••
10
*. •• NO
• YES
• Bl •• X.
NU ••
••••••
••
•• IN DO TA8LE ••••••
·•••••
..
•••••
A~EL
.•.x
.*
..• .
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• NO
•• X. E2 •
:OUT
•
•
•
X
21
X
··.·C1·········
EXIT TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
············x
.•.
01
••
• OPEN STRING •
.TO INSERT A DO •
•
TEST
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
....•
.....13.•
•• 02····
PUT
••
•:• OUT A ~00 TEST :•.X •••
••••
• E2 •• X.
.• fIIOVF• • .X
lit
IPUT
03
*. •• YES
•• • *
•• CO STATEMENT ••••••••
*.
••
•. .*
.*
•••••
12
•..... C2········..•
.*
• NO
•• ••••
•
03 ••••
•••••
• x
.•.
INUMB
03
••
21
.* NUMBER *. •• YES
FOLLOWS
••••••
*.
.*
*.
.•
*••
• *NO
••
••
....... .......
·......
••••• E2.· ••••••••
••
••
MOVE
TO NEXT
•
•
•
•
SlATEfII~NT
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
·••••••••..•
x
•• ••••
•
Bl •
•••••
•
············x
FULL
•••
• F3 •• X.
•
•
IFIO
X
23
• •••• F3 ••• • ••••••
•
••
PUT TO FlO.
•• OUT CALL
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
..••••.
•• X. E2 •
••••• •
.... ....
G2
••
••
10;
.* LEGAL *. •• NO
•• 00
STATEMENT ••••••
x
*•• *
••••• •
• Hit •
••••• •
• YES
.•.x
HI..
••
••
•*
*.
STOP
*.
* .• *
*. •• YES
••••••
.*
.*
x
•• ••••
•
03 •
•••••
•
• NO
J1
•• • *
••
*.
.•.x
••
PAUSE
OB
*. •• YES
*. •• • * .*
.*
••••••
• NO
BAKUI
.•.x
X
07
Kl
••
*.
*•• *
x
x
• E2 •
• YES
FORTRAN - Phase 15
•• ••••
•
A2 •
••••• •
222
X .....
17
.....
J2·.···
•
PUT
•
• OUT 00 INIT.
• MOVE TO NEXT
STATEMENT
•
.•.x
09
....
....
•• ••
H3
•••
••
••••••.
.
.
.•••••••••••••••••.
..•••••.•
CLOSE
X
26
• ••••HIt ••••••••••
.:·INT~~G~bNST·:.~? ••••• X:ERROR b~TSTRING:
·.VARIABLE ••
• YES
•
•
•
X
25
• •••• J3 ••••••••••
• PUT IN SYM
•
TBLE. PUT
•
•
• SYMBOL TABLE •
.AOOR ON STRING.
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
....
1<2
••
IB
••
•• YES·
•
•• STATEMENT •••••• X. 83 •
•• NUMBER ••
•
•
*•• *
• NO
•••••
SHOE
•• ••••
Hit •
••••
•
•
..X. E2 •
•
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
03 •
•••••
•
••
•• NO
•• STATEMENT ••••••
•• j;AVE NUM •••
Chart DT.
•• 8UILD DO ••
.TABLE. (EXCEPT.
•
WORD 21
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
.. ..
.. .. ..••••. ....
•
.•
16
••••• H2 ••••••••••
x············
x
••••• •
• A3 •
••••••
....
....X.•••••.•
F3 •
••••
••••
•• ••••
•
AZ •
•••••
•
START
.•.X
01
•..... Al····.·····•
AZ
•• 10
*. •• YES
S8SC
..EXPRESSION IN ••••••••••••••••••••
•• TABLE ••
.•
••
•• INITIALIZE ••
PHASE
•••••••••••••••••••
••
·•••••••••..•
•
*.
Bl •• X.
TEST
NO ••
••••••
..
*.
81
.•.x ••
..
END
*.
*.• *
.*
G
OZ
••
••
.*
:OUT
X
IZ
••••• CZ ••••••• •••
X
01
••• X..
•.
.•.••
.. ..
FORMAT
*.
03
*. ••
.*
.*
YES
••••••
x
OPFN
X
13
• •••• CZ··.· •• ••••
•
PUT SU8SC
•
•
GENERATED
•
• TE~PORARY ON •
•
STRING
•
...x
EI
•• 04
.• STMT *. •• YES
••
•• HAVE NUMBER ••••••
••
*.
.. ..
· ..
••••
.•
.*
x
••••• •
• F3 •
••••••
• NO
• Fl •• X.
•••••• X
I IF
•••
*.
FI
05
•*
*.
•• STMT IF, •• NO
~!LkRI~~~ O~ •••••• :
.. ..
•.
x
*•• *
••••• •
• YES
•
•
•• ••••
•
JZ •
•••••
•
• NO
X
20
••••• C3 ••••••••••
TST5
••
TAG NAME
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••
•
••
....
Cl·········
fXIT
TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
••••••••••••••• •
•*
•••
~
11
•• ••• 8Z·· ••••• •••
•
PUT IN
•
•
SUBSCRIPT
•
• EXPRESSION
•
•
TA8LE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
• YES
•
•
•
.*
*••
*
• NO
••• TAG NAME •••
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
i
21
• •••• 03 ••••••••••
TST5A
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
E3 ••••
•••••
• •
PURG
X
19
••
RE~OVE
•
••••••• EXPRESSION FROM.
•
STATEMENT
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
14
• •••• E3 •• • ••• • •••
E2·· •••• ••••
•
PURGE
•
••••••
•• •
INDEX FROM
•
•
MOVE
.PAST SUBSCRIPT.
.X.....•• EXPRESSION
SU8SCRIPT
•
•
••
••
•
TABLE
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
.
. ••••••
*
• .X •••••••••••
• F2 •• X.
••••• •
• • X
X
15
TESTl•••• .
F3
••
22
••••• FZ··.·······
••
•• NO
•
•
••• MOVE POINTER •••
•• REFERENCED •••••• X. F1 •
..STATEMENT..
••
••
••
*..•
•••••••••••••••••
....
•
.. .. ..
....
F3 ••••
....
....
• YES
• J2 •
••••• •
X
C
06
•.....Gl····....·.•
•
•
•
INITIALIZE
TO SCAN
STATEMENT
G2
.•.x
••
TLR
16
•• • *STATEMENT*. ••
..
•
•
•
•• TERMINATOR
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
· ..
*.
.•
*..
• *
YES
..
NO
••••••
x
•• ••••
•
HI •
••••• •
• 1-<1 •• X.
•••••• X
100
o
HI
•••
.••
JAY
07
*. •• YES
•• . *
•• DO OPERATOR ••••••
•.
.*
X
17
HZ·· •• • •• •••
••••••
••
•
CLOSE UP
• STATEMENT IF
•
NEC~SSARY
X
Z3
••••• G3 ••••••••••
•
•
•
•
CLEAR
SUBSCRIPT
EXPRESSION
TA8LE
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•• ••••
•
Fl •
•••••
•
•
•
•
•
x
*. .*
•••••••••••••••••
••••
• NO
• • ••••
••••• • •• J2 ••• X..
x
o
MOVE
X
18
J1
••
08
••• •• J2.· •• ••••••
•
••
••
•• NO
•
MOVE
•• SUBSCRIPTS (0 ••••••
•
TO NEXT
•
•• (1 (2 (3 ••
STATEMENT
•
•
*.
.*
•
•
x
*. .*
•••••••••••••••••
• YES
•• ••••
•
F2 •
x
•••••
•
•• ••••
•
TSl't
X
09
81 •
••••• Kl ••••••• • ••
•••••
•
••
•
GET
•
•
SU8SCRIPT
•
• EXPRESSION
••••••••••••••••••••
.*
*.
.. ... ..
Chart DU.
FORTRAN - Phase 16
•
E3 •
·......
X
•• ••••
•
A2 •
••••• •
Flowcharts 223
X
Oq
.•..• A2···
...•.••
START
01
••••• Al· •••••••••
: SCANI
••
•
•
• INITIALIZE
••
•
PHASE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
•
INITIALIZE
FOR SCAN
STATEMENT
•
•
•
•• ••••
•
83 •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••• •
X
10
.•..• B2···
.•.....
••
•
•
· ..
02
•
•
.*
*.
.. ..
.. ..
:PTPOL
03
•• ARITH ASF •• YES •
••• X•• CALL GOTD IF ••••••••
•• R/W snITS ••
•.
.*
• NO
...
x
••
Olt
*. •• NO
•• • *
•• ENO STATEMENT ••••••
*.
*.
••
•• .*
.*
.*
• YES
••
11
*. •• NO
.. ..
~
.*
••••••••••••••••••••
x
:X ........................ .
12
•·.·.·02······.··.
••
•
CALCULATE
.STATEMENT NORM •
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
X
.•••• E2···
......13.
•• IF NECESSARY, ••
• OPEN OR CLeSE •
•
STRING
••••••••••••••••••
••
CRTNM
X
lit
••••• FZ· ........ .
05
i
•
•
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
• • •• Fl····· ••••
EXIT TO THE •
ROL
•
ROUTINE
•
•
CORRECT
•
.STATEMENT NORM.
•••••••••••••••
.......G2···....·...
MOVE
x
X
15
•
PLACE
•
••••••••••••••••••• POLISH TABLE ON.
•
STRING
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
:NEXTS
07
••••• Hl ••••••••••
• MOYE
••
•
TO NEXT
•
•
STATEMENT
•
••••••••••••••••••••
.•.x
Jl
•• DB
• NO •• LAST STMT •• YES.
•
•••••• A STATEMENT •••••• X. Cl •
•• FUNCTION ••
••
••
••
....
•
*•• *
Chart DV.
224
FORTRAN - Phase 17
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
NAME
....
x
03
•••
••••
....
••
....
•• ••
.
AOY.
16
x••
• YES
X
FORCE
•••
E3
••
17
•• DO
••
••
THE
•• NO
•
•• OPERATORS ••••••••
•• FORCE ••
•.
.*
* ••
*
• YES
•• ••••
•
83 •
•••••
•
.
19
••••• Olt ••••••••••
.•••••••••••••••••.
••
BOTH
•• N O .
• ••• o~I=~~bRs •••••••••
X: MOVE POINTER
x
•
•
•
••
PERFORM ALL
• •••••• FUNCTIONS OF
• INTERPRETER
PACKAGE
•
*••
• *YES
X
••
•••
C2.
••
NORM
•• LESS THAN
•••••••••••••••••••
El
18
••••• B3 ••••••••••
x
:CKNM
•• POINT ENTRY
IN START.•
•
ROUTINE
•
.•.
X
PLACE
: X •••••••••• :
••••• Cl ••••••••••
01
•
•
TE~PORARIES
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
• Cl •• X.
• • X
RST ••••
SETUP
••
RESET
GENERATED
•
:
ENTER
01
81 ••• •••••••
•••••••INITIALIZE
•
•
•
PHASE
••
••
•
•••••••••••••••••
STAPT
X
02
••••• Cl ••••• ••• ••
•• STRINGMOVE
NEXT TO ••
• SYM80L TABLE • •
• INITIALIZE. •
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
·.......
• 01 •• X.
•
* .X •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
01021
X
03
••••• 01··· •• •••••
••
•
••••••••••••••••••••
••
INITIALIZE
• TO SCAN NEXT
STATEMENT
•
01051
13
••••• 02 ••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
• MOVE oUMHY
•
•••• ~X. VARIABLE TO •
• OUTPUT STRING.
.•.
X
01061
X
03
.*
Fl
.•.X *.
*.
05
••
10
* ••
*
• YES
lit
•••••••••••••••••
• NO
.•.x
• olt •
•
NO.. .* LAST *. ••
.x •••••• STMT ENO STMT ••
*.
.*
*.
.*
El
••
Olt
••• ··E2 •••••• • •••
• MOVE TO OUTPUT •
•*
*. •• YES ••
••
STRING
••
•
•• STHT FUNCTION •••••• ••• X. PReCESSING
•••••
•• STHT
••
•
SU8SCRIPT
•
X
••
.*
•
OPERATORS
•
....
••••••
••••• •
•• ••••
••
••03
••• •
EXIT
•
•
•
X
11
····E3·········
EXIT TO THE •
AOL
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
P20~1
X
11
••••• Olt ••••••••••
•• PROCESS ••
RETURN
•
•
STATEMENT
•••••••••••••••••••
••
x
•• ••••
•
01 •
•••••
•
.
•• ARITH.~ •• YES •
•• •• ~~~~~M~Nt •• ••••••••
*. *. .• .*
• NO
....
....
•• ••
•••
••
.
.
.
.•
x
GI
P2011
15
••••• G2 ••••••••••
06
••
GOTO
•• YES
•
PROCESS
•
•
•• STATEMENT •••••••••• X.GOTO STATEMENT •••••
••
••
•
• NO
.•.X
HI..
•
x
••••••••••••••••
01
*•
•:.••.*STATEMENT
e~~¥~ .:.~~~ .............. .
••
*.
*. .*
.*
• NO
••
Jl
.•.x
••
t.
PI053
08
•• RETURN
•• YES
•• STATEMENT ••••••
•.
*.
*.. *
.*
.*
X
16
•
•
READ WRITE
STATEMENT
•
•••••
•
x •••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• Olt ••
••••• •
• NO
010101
X
•••• ••••••
••• •• ··J2PROCESS
••
09
.....Kl····.·····
MOVE
•
•
•
:
STATEMENT
•
~~~~~~R~~RI2G :
•••••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
03 •
••••••
Chart DW •
FORTRAN - Phase 18
Flowcharts
225
:PI051
X
10
•• ••• A2 ••••••• • ••
• MOVE DUMMY
•
• VARIABLE TO •
• OUTPUT STRING.
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
ENTER
01
...
• ·.Bl··.·······•
•
INITIALIZE
•
•
PHASE
•
•••••••••••••••••••••
X
START
.
02
.STRING NEXT TO •
• SYMBOL TABLE • •
• INITIALIZE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
·•••••
..
•••• •
• 01 •• X.
•
PI011
X
03
••••• 01···.······
• INITIALIZE
•
••• X. TO SCAN NEXT •
STATEMENT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••
El
.•.x
.. ..
Olt
*. •• yeS
••
...x
Cl
.•.x
••
11
•• END ••
• •••
••
OF
•• YES.
•
•• STATEMENT •••••• X. Dl •
..OPERATOR ••
••
....
*•••
.. ..
••
x
•••
P5011
17
D2
•• 13
••••• 03 ••••••••••
••••
•
MOVE
•
••
•• YES
.1WO CALLS W/ARG.
..CALL OPERATOR •••••••••• X.
TO OUTPUT
•••••
••
••
•
STRING
•
X
....
•• ••
• NO
......
..
•• ••
•
MOVE
•
• OPERATOR AND •
• NAMES TO OUTPUT.
•
STRING
•
x •••••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
B2 •
x
•••••
•
•· ••••
:PI01t1
X
06
Bl ••.
...·.Gl·.·
.......•
•••••
•
MOVE
•
STATEMENT
•
* •. *
.*
• NO
• UNALTERED TO
•
OUTPUT STRING.
•••••••••••••••••••
•
.•.x
H I . . 07
•• WAS * •••
• NO..
•••••• LAST STMT END ••
•• STMT
••
*.
* •• *
.*
• YES
x
08
ROL
•
.··::tl·~~·;~:··.
•
•
Chart DX •
226
FORTRAN - Phase 19
.•••••••••••••••••.
•••
P3011
16
El
••
lit
••••• £3 ••••••••••
••••
•
MOVE
••
.:·IF OPERATOR·:.!~~ ••••• X:OP~~T~U~A~fiGTO: ••• :
P:!013
X
15
••••• Fl ••• • . . .•••
05
•• ARITH.~ •• yes
•• •• ~~~~~M~Nt •• ••••••
*.
....
• NO
• NO
• NO
1"1
•••••••••••••••••
x
••
•
STATEMENT ••••••••
•• FUNCTION ••
*.
·• Bl ..
X.
• .X •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
.P2011
X
11
••••• B2 ••••••••••
•
MOVE TO
•
• OUTPUT STRING.
• TILL NEXT NON.
•
PROCESSEO
•
OPERTR
•
•
.....
Cl··········
•
MOVE
•
••
••
·.......
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
.•••••••••••••••••..
ENTER
• •••• AI ••••••••••
••
••
• INITIALIZE
•
PHASE
•
••••••••••••••••••••
X
01
10
••••• BI· •••• •••••
•
ALLOCATE
•
• COMMON VAR. IN •
• SYMBOL TABLE •
• ••• 82 •••••••••
•
ENTER
•
PRINT
•
•
•
• SUBROUTINE
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
..
.X
X
PB21C
•••
CI
•• 02
.*
*.
•• EQUIVALENCE •• NO
•• STMT PRESENT ••••••
•.
*.
.*
* ..
• *YES
.*
C2
•• 11
•• .*LIST SYH * • •• NO
• ••• 1=kbG~~~ ••••••• :
*. *. •• .*
• YES
X
12
•••• ·02·•••••••••
P8212
X
03
•• ••••••••
•·····01·
IDENTIFY
• AND ALLOCATE •
• VAR IN COMMON •
•
THRU
•
• EQUIVALENCE •
•• MAKE
•
.ENTRY IN PRINT ••
BUFFER
•
••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
X
P8311
.*
••
... X..
•••••••••••••••
El
•••
••
04
*. ••
.
YESX
ALL
EQUIV VAR ••••••
•• ALLOCATEO ••
•.
.*
E2
*.
•••••••••••••••••
13
.*
*•.
• *
YES
X
lit
PRINT
•
•••••• f2 •••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
:P8511
X
06
• •••• Gl.· ••• •• •••
•
ALLOCATE
•
•
• VAR NITHIN
•
••••• COMBINED NEST.
•
AS PER
•
PRECISION
•
•
••
•• BUF FULL OR ••••••
•• END OPe ••
*. • .*NO
:PB321
X
05
••••• Fl· . . . . . . . ..
• IDENTIFY A •
• COMBINED NEST •
• OF VARIABLES IN.
• EQUIVALENCE •
..
.X
.* PRINT *. •• NO X
.
••
•
•••••••••••••
:X .......... :
JRET
X
15
•• •••••
• ··.·G2··
RETURN
TO
•
•
CALLING
•
ROUTINE
•
•
•••••••••••••••
PB711
X
07
••••• Jl.· ••• •• •••
•
ALLOCATE
•
• UNALLOCATED •
• VARIABLES IN •
• SYMBOL TABLE •
•••••••••••••••••••
EXIT
X
08
KI •••••
•••• •
• • •••
EXIT
TO THE
•
ROL
•
• .........................
ROUTINE
•
Chart DY.
FORTRAN - Phase 20
Flowcharts
227
01
.···.Bl .....•...•
•• IN I TlAlIlE ••
ENTER
PHASE AND
•
:;;~;~·····:t
B2
•
PRINTER
•••••••••••••••••••
••
X
MOUST
02
••
:E2020
10.
•
03
......01··.···· •• ··
• UNREFERENCEO
LIST
• STATEMENTS •
•••••••••••••
X
Al021
Olt
•••••• El •••••• • ••••
•
•
LIST
UNDEFINED
VARIABLES
•
•
•••••••••••••
EIOn
.... ....
.. .. .. .
X
•••
05
Fl..
••
•• YES •
••• X•• END OF STRING ••••••••
.
• NO
:EI021t
.•
Gl
j. *.
••
•• ERROR 10
*. *.
*.
06
•• YES
•• .*
••••••
*••
*
• NO
x
01'
····.Hl ••.....•••
•
:El031
MOVE
STATEMENT
••
• x••• UNALTERED TO
• OUTPUT STRING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
:El051
08
······JI···········
LIST ERROR
•
AND STHT
•
• ~~r~~~N~~OM •
STRING
•••••••••••••
Chart DZ.
228
FORTRAN - Phase 21
••
x •• :
RIOll
11
••••• B3 ••••••••••
• ................$
• YES
10
•• • ••• C2 ••••••• ••••
•••••••••••••••••••
X
09
x
...·.Cl···..··..·
•
DELETE
.EQUIV
STMTS. IF.•
• ERROR NOTED •
• INSERT ERROR
AlOll
••
••••
•
REARRANGE
•
••
COMM
•• NO
• STRING. PUT $
•• AREA ERROR WD •••••••••• X.FORMATt DEfiNE •
:~J~l6~ ~IRF~~~T:
• •• !ND ON....
EXIT
X
. ...C3·········
• PRINT MESSAGE.
• EXIT TO THE •
'O~TPUT HAS
•••••••• X.
ROL
•
BEEN.
•
ROUT INE
I~
SUPPRESSED'
•••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
ENT
01
••••• B1··········
•
MOVE
•
• STRING NEXT TO •
•
SYM TBl.
•
• INITIATE fOR •
STMT SCAN
•
•
••••
•• •C2
•••••••
•••••••••••••••••
.•.x
141021
C1
•• 02
NEXT *. •• YES
••• X•• STMT FORMAT ••••••
•.
*.
*. .*
.*
R~L
X
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
Gl •
••••••
X
.•.x
.... ... ....
02
••
10
•• IS THIS •• NO
..A SUBPKOGRAM ••••••
*. •.• •* .•
.*
• YES
• YES
X
•
ADDR •
• OF 1ST EXEC •
• STMT IN COMMUN ••
•
AREA
•
01
•• 03
.* NEXT *. •• NO
••
•• STMT INITIAL ••••••
•• 110 CALL ••
* •• *
09
••••• C2 ••••••••••
•.INSERT
.*
• NO
*.
X
1011011
•• • *
M1081
Cit
E1··.·.·· •• •
••••••
•
.MOVE STATEMENT •
•
TO OUTPUT
•
• X...
STRING
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
11
••••• E2 •••• • •••••
••
••
OUTPUT CALL
• SUBIN W. ARG
• TRACKSW -I IN
•
SUBR.
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
IH092
X
12
••••• F2 ••••••••••
•
•
• OUTPUT STRING ••
• INSERT ALLOC • •
• TRACKSW -2 IN •
•
SUBR.
•
•• ••••
•
G1 •
•••••••••••••••••
••••• •
EXIT
X
13
•• •• ··G2STORE
•• ••• ••• ••
.PROGRAM
LENGTH ••
•• COMMUNICATION
IN
••
AREA
•
•
:141031
X
05
····.G1·········.
•
MOVE STMT
•
•
•
TO OUTPUT
•
•••••
STRING
•
•
INSERTING
•
•
• ALLOCATION
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
X
•••• H2 •••••••••
•
•
•
M1051
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•
x··························•
•••
•• 06
••••
•• NEXT STMT •• NO
•• STATEMENT ••••••
•• FUNCTION ••
J1
EXIT TO THE
ROL
ROUTINE
•••• ••••
X
• YES
•• ••••
•
C2 •
.....•
08
•
OUTPUT
•
• CALL SUBIN W• •
• ARG AND STMT •
• BOOY TRKSW-O •
••••• J2 ••••••••••
: ••••• 1~~~~ ••••• :
X
•
X
01
••••• Kl·· •••• • •••
•
INSERT
•
• ALLOCATION INTO.
• OUTPUT STRING •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
Chart EA.
FORTRAN - Phase 22
Flowcharts
229
ENT
01
·.···B3 ••••••••••
••
•
INITIALIZE
•
• POINTERS FOR •
• SCAN OF STRING.
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
C3 •• X.
•• ••••
• j(
.•.
M1000
· ..
....
.. ..
.*
C3
••
*.
02
.***
....
•• NEXT STMT •• YES.
•
•• HAVE STMT •••••• X. E3 •
NUMBER..
••
*.
• NO
.. .•. ..
....
·••••
..
••••
....
....
j(
03
••
03
••
IS NEXT •• NO
•
•
•• STATEMENT •••••• X. H3 •
•• FUNCTION ••
••
*•• *
• YES
• E3 •• X.
•
• x
.•.
ALOC
.*
E3
••
*.
.... ....
04
•• LISTING •• NO
•• REQUESTED ••••••
*.
.*
• YES
.PRINT STATEMENT.
NAME AND
• ALLOCATION •
•••••••••••••
·
.
• X•••••••••••
TKOFF
j(
06
••• •• G3 ••••••••••
•
INSERT
•
• AlLOC IN SYM •
•
TBL. DELETE •
:LABEL~T:~LOC OF:
•••••••••••••••••
·•••••
..
•••••
• H3 •• X.
•
MOVE
X
01
••••• H3 ••••••••••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••
MOVE STMT
•
• UNALTERED TO •
• OUTPUT STRING •
.. .•. ..
....
.. ..
x
J3
••
....
....
08
••
•• NU
•
•
•• LAST STMT WAS •••••• X. C3 •
••
END..
••
• YES
X
09
•••• 1<3 •••••••••
•
•
•
Chart EB.
230
EXIT TO THE
ROL
ROUTINE
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•
FORTRAN - Phase 23
•• ••••
•
112 •
•••••
•
...........
x:X
•
·•.....Bl··········.•
ENTER
.l2012
01
•••••••••••••••••••
X
..
••
X
12
••••• C2 ••••••••••
03
..
•.•
•
•
•• EXTENDED •• NO
•• PRECISION •••••••
*.
.*
*..
• *
YES
X
11
••• ·.C2 ••••••••••
X
•*
10
•• SCAN STATEMENT.•
• FOR ONE WORD •
•
CALLS
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
•••••••••••••
•••
*.
• NO
LIST
fEAHRES
SUPPCPTED
01
••
.*
*.
02
· •••• ·Cl.·X•••• •• •••
1<10~1
B2
••
•• YES
•• END OF STRING ••••••
• INITIALIZE THE.
•
PHASE
•
•
•••
.. .... ..
•*
'
TAG
•
CALLED SUBR .•
·:SUB~~C~~N~NOUT :
•
TABLE
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
04
..... El····.·····
•
AL TER
•
• SUBR ~AME TABLE.
• TO REFLECT
•
•
EXTENDED
•
•
PRECISION
•
13
••••• E2 ••••••••••
••
•
••
• MOVE POINTER
• •••••
TO NEXT
•
STATEMENT
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
x············
L2041
.*
..
F2
•••
••
*.
14
..
•• LISTING •• NO
•• REQUESTED ••••••
*.
.•
*••
• *
YES
X
15
•••••• G2 •••••••••••
•
•
LIST
SUBROUTINE
•
NAMES WHICH
HAVE IlEEN •
TAGGED
•••••••••••••
:X .......... :
X
LI035
•••
H I . . 07
.
*
*.
•• LISTING •• NO
•• REQUESTED ••••••
•.
•.
.. ..
.*
EXIT
.*
• YES
X
X
16
•••• H2 •••••••••
•
•
•
EXIT TO THE
ROL
•
•
ROUTINE
•
•••••••••••••••
OB
•••••• Jl •••• • ••••••
• LIST SUBPROGR •
NAMES THAT
.ARE IN SYMBOL.
TABLE
•••••••••••••
:X .......... :
l2011
X
09
Kl ••• • •••• ••
•••••••INITIALIZE
••
• STRING POINTER.
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
B2 •
•••••
•
Chart EC •
FORTRAN - Phase 24
Flowcharts
231
ENTER
01
••••• P3 ••••••••••
••
••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
INITIALIZE
PHASE ANO
PRINTER
•
•
LItOll
.. ..
....
.. ..
....
....
X
C3
•••
••
02
•• SYM TRL •• NO
•
•
••
LISTING
•••••• X. K3 •
•• REQUESTED.·
••
• YES
.... ... ....
x
D~
••
03
•• EXTENDED •• NO
•• PRECISION ••••••
••
.$
*. • .*YES
X
04
••••• E3 ••••••••••
• MeDIFY FOR
•
EXT PREC.
•
INSERT
• PARAMETERS FOR
CONY.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
L402l
X
05
··.···P3·.··...•.••
•
•
LIST
REAL
CONSTANTS
•
•
•••••••••••••
X
06
• •• ·.G3 ••• • ••• • ••
•
COMPUTE
•
• LOCATIONS AS •
• ENCOUNTER EO. •
• SYM TBL PASS •
•
SWzO
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
07
•• •••• H3· ••••• •••••
LIST
•
INTEGER
• CONSTANTS •
•••••••••••••
X
08
· .. ·.J3.·.·..··.·•
•
COMPUTE
• LOCATIONS AS
• ENCOUNTERED.
• SYM TBL PASS
SW=l
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
·•••••..•
• K3 •• X.
•
COREQ
X
Oq
EXIT
10
•••••• K3 •••••••••••
LIST
•••• KIt •••••••••
•
CORE
•
• EXIT TO THE •
RO~~\NE
:
• REQUIREMENTS ••••••••• X:
•••••••••••••
Chart ED.
232
FORTRAN - Phase 25
•••••••••••••••
START
••••• Al.·.· •• • •••
•• INITIALIZE ••
. PHASE
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••••
••••
·· ....
• Bl •• X.
••••
X
Bl
•••
01011
••
• •••• B2..........
•
••••
••••
•• ••
• NO
01022
....
x
Cl
•••
••
.
01031
.•.x
FlOl5
• •••• B4 ••••••••••
••
OUTPUT.
•
DEFINE FILE ••••••••• X.
TABLE.
•
.
• •••• C3..........
•• YES •
••••••••
.*
..•••••.•
* .• *
MOVE TO
NEXT
STATEMENT
•
•
•
.. .
....
C4
••
PLACE.
•• END OF
•• NO
ALLOCATION
••••••••• X.. CONSTANTS ••••••
INTO SYMBOL •
••
••
TABLE·
••••
x
•• ••••
•
Bl •
•••• '"
•• • ••YES
•••••••••••••••••
·
X
• ••• 04 •••••••••
••
••
REAL
•• CONSTANT
•.
..
OUTPUT I N .
•
ABSOLUTE
••••••••• X.
MODE
•
•
• •
•••••••••••••••••
.... ....
01
• •••• B3..........
••
SET U P .
•
DEFINE FILE ••••••••• X.
PARAMETERS.
•
• •••• C2..........
•• INTEGER •• YES
•
•• CONSTANT
•••••••••• X.
••
••
X
'"
••••
•
•• • ••NO
FlOll
•
•
• ••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. 81 •
••••• •
01032
01033
•••
•• DEF INE
•• YES
•
••
FILE
•••••••••• X.
•• STMT..
•
•
•
•
EXIT TO THE
ROL
ROUTINE
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•
• NO
•• X. Bl •
••••
Chart EE.
FORTRAN - Phase 26
Flowcharts
233
...·.•
•·····.2.··.·
• INITIALIZE
•
•
PHASE
•
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
..
82
.•.x
••
..
.. ..
•• EXTENDED •• NO
•• PRECISION ••••••
•.
.*
•. • .*YES
X
• •••• CZ·····.···.
•• SUeR ALTER
NAME TA8LE.•
• TO REFLECT
•
•
EXTENDED
•
PRECISION
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
..X •••••••••••.
X
•••• •• OZ •• • ••••••••
OUTPUT STRING
•
DATA FOR
•
RElOCATA8LE
•
08JECT
•
PROGRAM
•••••••••••••
X
•
•
•
Chart EF.
234
•• •• fZ •••••••••
EXIT TO THE
ROL
ROUTINE
•••••••••••••••
FORTRAN - Phase 27
•
•
•
..
ENTl
.RCMON
..
ENT2
.....81.·········
EG H4.
-.-.-.-.-.-.•
RESTORE
•
•
•
Tt'E
SUPERVISOR
.*
••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••
ENT"'!
COMPILATION
MESSAGE
.•.... 85··· ...... .•
••
*.
658
••
*••
• *
YES
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
PRINT
WORKING
STORAGf
EXCEEDED
MESSAGE
•
•
•••••••••••••
:X .......... .
.....
03·····EG.•···
.RCMON
H4.
..-.-.-.-.-.-.•
RESTORE
•
•
THE
•
• SUPERVISOR
••••••••••••••••••
X
X
• PACK INPUT
•
:RE~2R~ONI~6RUP :
• INPUT AREA
•
.....01.·········
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••• C3 •••• • •• • •••
•
•
SET UP
• MONITOR CALL
•
~ESSAGE
••
X
X
• ••• Cl •••• •• •• ••
••• 0ISABLE
ENC OF •
•
•
•
B3
• SECTOR AOOR*.••• NU
..GREATER Tt'AN ••••••••
..
X
••• ·.C4 ••••••••••
•
•
CONVERT
•
• •• X. SECTOR ADOR. •
TO HEX
•
•
•
• •••• C5· ••••••• • •
•
••
•••••••••••••••••••
•
•
SET
INDICATOR.•
NON-lfRO
•
.~PROR
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•••••• 04 •••••••••••
•
PKINT
OISK ERRORS
•
• MESSAGE •
•••••••••••••
SNRS"
X
••••• El········ ••
••
•
SET
•
•
NO-READ
SWITCH
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
SNXS
:X ..................................................
:
X
.•.
X
Fl·.
•• SNXS EQUAL •• NO
.•
*.
*.
*.
ZERO
••••••
.•
*. *•• .*
• YES
••-$-.-*-$-.-.-••
RfSTORf
'"
•
•
•
•• ••••
•
G2 •
•••••
•
$
X
•
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
•
Y~S
..
G5
••
..
.*
.~
•• COMPILATION ••
• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• e.*.
•••••••••••••
fRROPS
*. .~ .* .*
.*
'" NO
........... X:
X
• •••• H2 •••• • •••••
•••••• Hl •••• ••• ••••
•
NON-OUP
•
•
SWITCH
•
••••••••••••••••••
•
••••
• Jl •• X.
• • .
••
•
•
•
••••••••••••••••••••
•
••
PCSITJON
DISK ARM
•
•
• AT MONITOR
••••••••••••••••••••
•
·......
GMON
X
•• ••• JI··.·.· •• ••
•
RESTORE
•
•
DISK
•
INTERRUPT
•
•
•
WORD
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
.•.x
...
x
OR
.MON nOR CALL •
X
SET
•
SUPERVlsn~
X
•
1<1
THE
••••••••••••••••••
····
..G2······.··
..
PRINT
• END CF COMPo •
•• ••• Gl.······ •• •
•
SET
•
NON-XEQ
•
•
•
SWITCH
•
TO '2
•
•
•
ENT4
X
••••• F5.· •••• ~ •••
"'RC~ON
EG H4 •
••
X
• •••• J2 ••••••••••
•
•
*. •• .* .*
• NO
RCMON
••••• H4 •• • •••••••
•• COMPUTE ••
• CI8 ADDRESS •
• OF SUPERVISOR ..
•••••••••••••••••••
X
•••••• J4 •••••••••••
REAO IN
.THE SUPERVISOR •
USING
• ROl ROUT INE •
•
•
•
..··1(2·.····
.•• •
EXIT
TO THE
•
MONITOR
•
•••••••••••••••
X
••••• H5·· ••••••••
.SET PARAMfTfRS-.
... nISI< BlnCK
•
:CP~~~~T~~ni=8~
:
XEO ADDRFSS •
•• ••••••••••••••••
••••
•• x* Jl •
••••• •
.. .
•••••••••••••
X
X
••
•• ENe ••
•• Of COMPo •• YES •
••
MESSAGE
••••••••
•• crSABLEO 0*
RESTORE
STATUS
TO lEROS
• ••• 1<4 •••••••••
•
•
•
EXIT TO THE
CALLING
ROUTINE
•
•
••••••••••••••• '"
X
••••
••••••
•* G2 ••
Chart EG.
FORTRAN - Phase 28
Flowcharts
235
XQXl
Al··.····.··•
••..•..
INITIALIZE
•
•
•
•
AND COMPUTE
OUMP
•
•
ADDRESSES
•
•••••••••••••••••
.....
al··.·· ..·..•
•
X
•
•
•
SfT UP
OUMP COUNTS
A~D FORMATS
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
... ··.Cl··.··.··.·.
OUMP
• STRING, CC~M • •
ARFA, AND
.SYMBOl TABLE •
•••••••••••••
•
•
•
Chart EH.
236
X
....01··.···
...
EXIT TO THF
NEXT
PHASf
•••••••••••••••
FORTRAN - Dump Phase
•
•
•
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
• FIO
·••••• A2..........
X
•••• Al.........
.SVE ADDR OF TBL.
• ••• A3 •••••••••
•
• • OF 110 CALLS •
•
RETURN
•
TO CALLER
•
• INITIALIZATION ••••••••• X.AND GET SIZE OF ••••••••• X.
•
• • INT VARS. S E T . .
•
•••••••••••••••
• UP RESTART.
• ••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
• RED
•
•
•
•••
••••• B2..........
• •••• B3..........
• •••• B4..........
85
••
•••• Bl.........
•
• • GET UNIT NO I: •
•
TURN.
•• IS
••
• •
SET
•
.FRMT ADDR WITH.
.READ INDICATOR.
••
RfAD
•• NO
EDITED READ ••••••••• X.READ INDICATOR ••••••••• X.UNIT NO. SET UP ••••••••• X.
OFF. SET
••••••••• X.. SPFCIFIED ••••••
• •
•
X . 1/0 CMND USNG •
.VARIABLE COUNT.
••
••
•••••••••••••••
•
•
.TBL - 110 CALLS.
•
TO ZERO.
••••
•••
• YFS
•••••••••••••••••
.WRT
•• ·.Cl ••• ••••••
•••••• C2 •• ••••••••
•
•
• •
SET
•
•
• EDITED WRITE ••••••••• X.WRITE INDiCATOR •••••••
••••••••••••••••• ••
•
••••••••••••••••••
*lOAF
....01.........
.••••• 02 •• • ••••• ,•.•
STORE
•
REAL
•
• COUNT OF THE
• NON-SUBSC ARRAY ••••••••• X.
NUMBER Of
•
• • VARIABLES IN
•••••••••••••••
•
THE ARRAY
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
··.··C4· ••• • •••••
• ••• C3.··.····.
•
•
•
INTEGER.
.STORE COUNT OF •
.NON-SUBSC ARRAY ••••••••• X.
NUMBER OF
•
•
• • VARIABLES IN •
•••••••••••••••
•
THf ARRAY
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
X
······C5 •••••••••••
• READ A RECORD •
FROM THE
• SPECIFIEO •
DEVICE
•••••••••••••
:X .......... :
X
.101
!
•
••••• 04.· •• • ••• • •
• ••• 03 ••••• ••••
N~~~8~~c
•
•
S~~RI72f~~~~R :
! ........ X!
ELEMENT.
•
VARIABLE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••
·•••••..
•
• E5 •• X.
X
*lOF
X
••••
X
••••• E2..........
• •••• E3..........
• •••• E4..........
• •••• E5 ••••••••••
•••• El.........
•
• •
• •
• •
•
•
RFAL
•
• SET INDICATOR •
•
SET
•
•
STORE..
•
NON-SUBSC
••••••••• X.
FOR REAL
••••••••• X.VARIABLE COUNT ••••••••• X. ADDRESS OF
••••••••• X. TRANSMIT THE •
•
ELEMENT.
•
VARIABLE.
•
TO 1
•
•
VARIABLE.
•
RECORD
•
•
•••••••••••••••
•
• ••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
X
• IOFX
••••• F2..........
• •••• F3 ••••••••••
•••• F 1 •••••••••
•
• •
COMPUT E
•
•
REAL
•
• SET INDICATOR •
.THE ADDRESS OF •
••••••••• X. THE VARIABLE •
• suesc ELEMENT ••••••••• X. FOR A REAL
• •
VARIABLE
•
X . USING I.R.I • •
•
•••••••••••••••
•
• •••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
F4
.*. ••
.•
*.
•• IS COUNT..
x
.•
YES..
F5
. * • ••
*•
IS
••
• •••• OF VARIABLES •• X•••••••••• FORMAT I, E, ••
•
•• TO MOVE"O..
•• f, OR A ••
.
*••. .••*
X
*• .
.*
•••
•••••
• •
••••• •
• NO
• A3 •
.10 IX
•••••••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
.•.
••••• •
• Jl ••••
•••••• X
J1
.•. ••
.. .
J2
••
•••••••••••••
• ••••• J3 ••••• • •••••
•• IS
••
••••
••
REDO
•• YES
•• IS COUNT •• NO
.TRANSMIT RECORD.
•• SPECIFIED •••••••••• X•• OF VARIABLES •••••••••• X
TOIFROM
••
••
..TO MOVE
SPECIFIED •
••••
••
0
••
DEVICE
• NO
• YES
.. ..
X
••••• •
• E5 •
••••• •
Chart FA.
.. ..
a..
X
•• ••••
•
A3 •
••••• •
.............
•
X
•• ••••
•
E5 •
•••••
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
•
••••
*•. *
• ••••
•• X. A3 •
• •
.*. ••••
X
:F 00
.COMP
• ••••• H3 •••••••••••
H2
••
••••Hl.........
•• WAS ••
WRITE THE
•
•
•• LAST FUll •• NO
•
• COMPLETE OF ••••••••• X.eUFFER ALREADY •••••••••• X RECCRD ON THE
• SPECIFIED •
•
WRITE.
•• WRITTEN ••
DEVICE
•••••••••••••••
X
••••• G4..........
• ••••G5 ••••••••••
:
OECREMENT:
~~ !~~~I~~ED :
•
COUNT OF
••••••••• X. THE NEC •
.CONV • BTWN DEC.
• VARIABLES TO •
•
MOV E
•
•
I: BIN
•
• •• •• G2 ••••••••••
•• ••••••
INTEGER.
•• SET INDICATOR.•
•
• •••• Gl·
• suesc ELEMENT ••••••••• X.FOR AN INTEGER •••••••
•
• •
VARIAHLE
•
X
•• ••••
•
A3 •
•••••
•
• •••• H5 ••••••••••
• HANDLE EACH •
.FRMT TYPE USING.
• AN UNPACKED •
.BUFFER OF e BIT.
• EBCDIC CHARS •
•••••••••••••••••
X
•• ••• J5· •••••• • ••
••
•
TURN REDO
•
.INDICATOR ON IF.
• SLASH OR PEDO •
•••••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
Jl •
•••••
•
FORTRAN I/O
Flowcharts
237
•••••
•
AI, •
•••••
•
•
x
.•.
.* . .
AI,
••••••••••
..• •••• A5WAIT
•
•
••
•• SUFFICIENT •• NO
•
••
WORKING
•••••••••• X.
•• STORAGE ••
•
• FOR E2..
•
•• • ••YES
ERReR
q
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
........... X:
X
:ABSOfl
.·····B4·.•..•.··..
•••••
••••••
.. ·61·
ANUH•• LO
.... O ••
•
CF
P-OCITSlIUP
•
LCADER
•
•
:SCON
X
• ••• ·C4 ••••••••••
X
· ..··.C1·
.....
·.· ..
eOCTSTR.aP
••
LCAUII
LCACS
PHASE El
:X .................................... .
X
......01·.··.··
....
SHIIT
•••••••••••••
.. ODE
o.
El
X
•••
••
• ••• ·04 ••••••••••
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •••• E2 ••••••••••
•
0
• ••••
.
ERRnR 3
.
•
•••••••••••••••••
E4·.· •••.. · ••
••.·..•
FORM AUXT2
•
•
•
•
x
.
,.,. ••••
AI, •
••••• •
.*
*.
• • . • .*
•••
*
• NO
X
·.··.G2· •••••••••
••
••
••
kAIT
•
EIIROR 1
••••••••••••••••••••
TABLE
FROM CFTA
..
•.....o.
•• ••
.X
o..*..
ERRORS
.0
Fit
.0
••
DETECTED
X
.··.··G4·.........
.
•
READ E2
PHASE
PART I
INTC CORE
•••••••••••••
X
•••
• AZ.
238
System Loader/Editor - Phase El
••
• •••• F5 ••••••••••
.•
WAIT
ERROR 8
.
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
LDPT2
•
•
YES
•
..... 0 • • • • • • X.
• NO
•••••
• Fe •
Chart FB.
•
•
DATA
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
*...*
•. • . *NO
•
•
•
•
•
X
:T8L2
•
•
•••
SETOl
•••
FJ
••
F2
••
••••
•• HAS ••
•• INITIAL *. YES
••
DPIR
•• YES
•
•• LOAD ~EQUEST •••••••••• X•• BEfN E~ECUTED ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
*.
CONVERT
REQ DATA
TO BINARY.
STORE AT
CFTA
•••••••••••••••••
NO.
••
COt-TROl
•••••••••• X.
•• RECCRD ••
•
• YES
X
: CONVT
•
. *LClle-MODE*. .0
.....
•• ••
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
•
••
CLEAR
REQ RECORD
INPUT AREA
•
•
R!:AD
FIIIST RECORO
•
•
•••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
•
LOAD
PHASE E2
PAIIT I
TO DISK
•
.•.
•••••
• FC •
• AZ·
•••
t •• ", •
• Fe •
• A~.
.•.
..
SElia
X
LOPT2
LDMOD
Ait
••
••••• AZ··········
•••••• A3 ••••• •••• ••
.INITIALIZE
IN.
• TERR~PT BRANCH •
•
LOAD
•
•• INITIAL
PHASE E2
•••••••• X..
LOAD
• ADDRESSES AND ••••••••• X
.OEFECTIVE TRACK.
PART II
••
• WORCS IN OISKO •
....
• •• *
•••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
..
START
X
• ••••• AS·.·····.···
•• YES
•
REAC A
•••••••••• X RECORD INTO
••
x
Bt-HER A
• NO
SEH~R a
(COMMA'
FROM DISK
•••••••••••••
•
•
·.....Bl........... ......83...........
•
•••••••• x.
•
•
Bit ..
....
•••
•••••••••••••••••
•• • ••NO
•••••••••••••••••
X
•• X. Dl
•
REElO
• ••••
OZ..........
.•
03
...
•
es ••••••••••
SET SPvsw
SWITCH ON.
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
........... x:x
••••••
• WAIT
•
•
••• ERROR
•
5
••••••••••••••••••••
•••••
•
01 •
•• ••••
•
.•.x ••
.. .•
...... ..**.
•••••••••••••
••••
SAVE
•
•
CCMPARE.
•• SAME KIND •• YES
•
FLET OR CI8 ••••••••• X. SAP A~O FORT ••••••••• x.. OF RELOAD •••••••••• x.
ADDRESSES.
• RECORDS TO
•
..REQUESTED..
•
IN CIBA.
• ~COE RECORD •
••••
•
••••• CIt ••••••••••
01
••••
.•....••
.. AI) •
••••••.•.•••.•••..••••...•.•......•.••.•...••.••....••..•....•..•.....•..•••...
;
......81...........
•
.
A5 •
•• ••••
•
..
.
••
•••• PAK •••• YES
:-.-.-I!~~~-.-.-:
·~SS CECK·· •• NO
•• INDICATOR •••••••••• X. PACK 80 WORDS ••••••••• X•• BVPS SWITCH ••••••••••
••
eN..
• INTC BUFFER B.
X
••
ON..
••••
•
(60 WORDS t
•
••••
•• ••
•••••••••••••••••
• •• t
• NO
• YES
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• -FE.
H2 •
Dit
••
•••• SPVSW •••• VES :
SWITCH ON ••••••••
••
••
X..
••••
••••
• NO
••
•• X.••••
• •
•
..X.•••••
El •
•
••••
• ••
•
•
.••.
.••.
.• E5 •• *•
•• X:BI+~AgFLS~:083 : •••••••• x.::RE1~C~~~oRO·:.~~ •••••• X.:· ~~~~R8
·:.~~ •••••• X.:· ~~~~R~ ·:.~~ •••••• x.:· ~1~~R~ .:.~~ ••
• IN BUFFER 8 •
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
•
•
*...
t . . . ••
...*
..._
• •••••••••••••••••
•• • ••YES
•• • ••YES
•• • ••YES
••••
••••
• YES
• El ••
;
x
x
x
•• ••••
•
••••
••••
••••
••••••
••FD
•
••FE
•
.FD
•
•
t A5 •
• F2.
• A2.
• Dl·
• •
•"•
•••
CARC
••••• El..........
EZ
•••
••••
.*..
••
E3
•••
••
Eit
•••
••
-
...
t
..
•
x····················································· ............•..................................................
.... ••
.-.
.'.
.-.
.-.
., . .
.GZ- .••.
.G3* .••.
.Git* .••.
.*(;5 •• •.
•:.•. ~l~~R~ .*·:.~~ ••..•. X.:·*. ~l~5RA2 .'·:.~~ .••••• X.:·•. 1~~~RA3 .*·:.~~ •••••• x.:·*. ~l~~R~O .•·:.~~ •••••• x.:·*. ~l~~M~2 ..:.~~
..
•.
GI
'.
e'
*. • ••YES
x
•••••
tFD •
• K2.
•••
•..•
• •.
*
• YES
•..•
•..•
* ••
*
• YES
e•• '
• YES
x
•••••
• FD •
x
•.FO••••
•
x
•••••
• FE •
•••
• JZ.
•••
• HZ.
•••
• Jl·
•••••
•
Jl •
•• ••••
•
x
• t.
Jl
..••.
...*
•• • ••YES
Chart FC.
• yeS
x
•••••
•
Jl •
•• ••••
•
X
••••• H5 ••••••••••
••
••
CLEAR
• SPVSW SwITCH •
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
x
.'.
.J2* .••.
•• ••••J3 ••••••••••••
•• TVPE 86 •• NO
•• TYPE 81 •• N O .
••
RECORD
•••••••••• X..
RECORD
•••••••••• X.
••
••
••
••
•
x
•••••
• FE •
• KZ·
•••
t' .
..
•• '
...t
•• • ••YES
ii
•••••
• FE •
•••
• AZ·
•
ERROR 2
•
•••••
•
A5 •
•• ••••
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
A5 t
•••••
•
System Loader/Editor - Phase E2
Flowcharts
239
•••••
• FD •
•••
• A2. ABSSC
• •
• •••• A2..........
• •••• A3..........
A4
••
•
•
FILEX..
•
••••
•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
• SET S~B OFF. •
•• wORD I
•• YES
••••••• X. FILE PREVICUS ••••••••• X. FETCH wORD 1 ••••••••• x•• EQUAL ZERO ••••••
•
SEC T O R .
•
OF SECTOR.
••
••
•
TO OISK.
• BREAK RECORD •
••••
x
•..•••••.•••••••••••••.••••••••••••••.••.•••.•••.••
.•. ••
Bl
• • ",ORD I
",ATCI-
••
•
•• ••
• VI'S
B3
:···x···· X••••
x:
•.••
.
* . .
*. ••
••
B4
. .X
.. *
. .•• NO
.
• •••• e2..........
•
•• NO
• SET SwB ON.
··=~l=C'C~~TI~~ ••••••••••
••
•• • ••NO
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
•
•••••••••••••••••
SwA ON
:t..*
••
. . . .••
.* ••••••••• ~x •••.
•• ••
• YES
YES
•••••••••••
SWB ON
••.•
.FC •
• A5.
•••
x
•••••
• FC •
• A5.
•••
X
• •••• C4 ••••••••••
•
••
SET seTRI
•
•
ON FOR
•••••••••
• SECTOR BREAK.
X
RECORD
•
• ••••
•
•••••••••••••••••
.FC •
• A5.
•••••
•••
·Fe •
•• ••••
•
04 ••••
• Cl·
X
•••
•••••• X
•••
SET"'
•••
• ••••• 05 •••••••••••
••
04
••
••
••
•
eKSR.
••••
••••
WR ITE SECTOR
Hi DISK.
•• S"'A OR SloB •• NC
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
••
seTRI
•• NO
••
BUFFI
•• NO
•
"EAn NEXT
••
ON
•••••••••• X.
(~ECK-SU~
••••••••• X•• I~DICATOR ON •••••••••• X.. OVERFLOW
•••••••••• X
.SECTOR. BEGIN.
••
••
• T~f pt:eORO.
••
••
••
••
LCADI~G DATA
*.
.•
•
•
*..*
• YES
• YES
• YES
• .Fe.
••
•
•• X. A5 •
..X. El •
X
.FC •
• A5 •
X
F2
••
• ••••
····.E4· •••••••
•
CLfAR.
••••
•
ASMCK
•
•
S(lRl..
••
SAPX
•• YES
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•
PLACE
•
•• X. SET UP 5ECTOR ••••••••• X•• INDIeATcR ~N •••••••••• X.SHIFT AS~ LOAD.
• RECORU DATA •
••
••
• ACOR. IF NO •
• AOCRESS~S IN •
•
IN BUFFI
•
eUFF 1 .
••••
•
FCRTRAN
•
•
•
••••
• NO
01
•••
x
• ••••
•• ••
• NO
••
• •••• 02..........
.. ..••••
••••
.....El..........
.................
...
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••
• •
.
..•• fl ••
••••
03
.. .. •••
E3....•..•.•
••
FORTX
•• YFS
• CLEAR FORTX.
•• INDICATOR ON •••••••••• X.
SAVE rORT
••
••
• LC~O ADOR.
••
••
•
I f\ eOH'A
·
•
••• ••••••
F4
•
•••••••
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
(LEA" SAPX. •
SAVE ASM
•••••••••
LeAl: ADOR.
•
X
IN eC~"A.
....
X..••••
•••••••••••••••••
.....C3..........
•
•
•
•
•
....
••••
• NO
G4 .....
X
•
.*
*.
.
WAIT
•
NO.. SECTOR
•• YES.
.X ••••••••• ADCRESSES ~ATCH •••••
ERROR 1 0 .
•• COMMA ••
.................
•
*
INITIAL •• VES.
•
LOAD
•••••• X. D4 •
••
X.
•
••••
• •••
j(
[,4
•••
•• X. A5 •
••••• •
••••• •
•
•••••
•••••••••••••••••••
••••
• ·Fe *
x
. .... F3..........
•••••••••••••••••
•• • ••Ne
•••••••••••••
0.•
•
•••••••••••••••••
• •••• Fl ••••••••••
Fl..
....
•
••••• •
x········· ................ .
...
....
.
.
•
*...
•
....•
*..*
•••••
·FO •
• H2.
•
•
FORT
*
•••
.*
H2..
• •••• H~ ••••••••••
*.
....
•
.
•
•• FCltTRAN •• YES
•
••••••• X•• TO ~E LOADED •••••••••• X.
••
••
•
..• .•
•• ••
• NO
.
.
••••
·
•
. .....
•.•
.
. .....
.
•
•••••••••
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. H5 •
•••••
• FO •
SET FORTX
I~CILATOR ON
....
....
..•••••.•
x
.FC •
• AS.
• J2. SAP
•••
• •
J2..
• •••• J3 ••••••••••
•
•• ASSF~BLER •• YES
•
SfT S~PX
•
••••••• X•• TO EE LOADED •••••••••• X. I~CICATCR ON •••••••••
••
••
•
•
x
•• ••
•••••••••••••••••
.FC •
• Ne
• AS.
•••••
*FO •
• Kl·
•••
•
••••
EOP
•••••• Kl.· •••• •••••
••••••• x
•
~RIT[
C~TO
BUFfl
DISK
•••••••••••••
Chart FD.
240
••
•• X. H5 •
System Loader/Editor - Phase E2
••••••• x
•••••
.FC •
• A5·
•••
••••
• •••• ~5 ••••• • ••••
*
•
•
•
• H5 ••••• X.
••••••
••
SET SWA
ON
•
•
•
•
••••••••••••••••••
X
•.Fe
•••••
• A'5·
•••
•••••
•••
• FE •
• A2.
x
ENDSY
•••
CL EDT
A2
••
• •••• A3 •••••••• ~.
• •• • •• A~ •• • ••• • •• ••
• ••• A5· ••••••••
.•
*.
•
•
•• It-HIAL •• NO
•
CLEAR.
•
PRINT
••
LOAD
•••••••••• X. LeADER/EDITOR ••••••••• X END OF RelOAD •••••••• X.
HALT
•
••
••
•
FROM DISK
•
...*
•
•••••••••••••••••
•• • ••YES
LDSKL
X
•••••• e7. •••••••••••
LOAD
SKelETON
• SUPERVISOR
I,..TC CORE
••
•
•••••••••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••
•
•
•••••••••••••
MILS
INLET
. .... 83..........
. ....
•
••
• •••••••• X:
•
•
• •••• 85 ••••••••••
8~..........
••
i~~WORDS
:~~N~~~~%
: •••••••• X: l~{T~:~I~~
: •••••••• X: lN8·~I~SAKI~~ARlfEAA
IN.
•
AND F I L E . .
COMMA.
•
•••••••••••••••••
ON DISK.
•
ADDRESSES
•
:
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
X
"'FILS
•••
8LDS
PRH
•••••• Cl...........
• •••• C2..........
C3
••
• •••• C~..........
• •••• C5 ••••••••••
~RITE COliMA
•
• SEARCH AUXT2. •
.SINGLE DEVICE. NO
•
ESTA8LISH.
• SET UP LEVEL •
TO SECTOR 8
•••••••• X. 8UILD AN ILS ••••••••• X•• ILS'S DONE •••••••••• X.
AREA CODE
••••••••• X. AND E8CDIC
•
•
•
•
••
••
X . ANa LOADER.
•
NAME
•
•
•
••••
•
DATA
• •
•
• YES
•
•••••••••••••
.. ..
.. ..
;
PAU3
01
••
*.
•.
••••• 8
•••
•
•
••••
•• ••
•••••••••••••••••
~EQUIRF.C
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
X
••
ILSC4
•• YES
.*
• ••••• 05 •••• •••• •••
• LOAD ILS TO •
WORKING STORAGE
UPDATE SKELETON
SUPERVISOR
•
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
••• *
• NO
x
x
•.FC
•••••
• AS.
•••
•••••
• FC •
• A5·
•••
•
••
•••••
• FE •
• F2. TYPE8
•••
EDITC
•••
• ••
• •
F2
••
F3
••
Fit
••
• •••• Pi ••••••••••
••
.•
• . •• YES
.*
*.
.•
*.
•• SET RE-ENTRY ••
••
.EOIT
•• SKELETON •• NO
•• SAME ILS IN •• YES
••••••• X•••• ~ECORO •••••••••••• X••• ~U~1~~~~OR •••••••••••• X.W~~Kl~g il~R!~E······i··X: AOV~ ~re~LOUP : ••• :
••
••
••••
.RECORO.·.
•
•
•
• NO
• YES
• NO
• .FC.
• .FC •
AS •
A5 •
•• ••
.....•••...•..••..•.•.•....
x
.....Gl..........
G2 •.
•••••••••••••••••
•• ••
•....
•••
•• ••
••••
.. X.
•• ••
••••
..X.
.••••.
•••••••••••••••••
..
••• ••••
SEFIL
•
G3..........
Git
••
• ••••GS ••••••••••
•
••••
•
REST.
••
*.
•
CLEAR FILS
•
C(MPARE ILS •
••
SAME
•• YES
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.
•• SKELETON •• NO
•
INDICATOR
•
:Nt~EO~I}~ ~~~D : •••••••• X•••• NAME
•••••••••••• X: UP~~~~ ~~~12 : •••••••• X••• ~Ut~~~l~OR •••••••••••• X:I.E·ci~r~~VISOR:
•
RECORe·
••••
•
•
••••
•
•
• YES
• NO
• .FC.
•
••
•• X. A5 •
• Hit •• X.
• FE •
MCAll
CLDUP
• H2. SPPAS
•••
X
• •
••
• •• ·HS •••••••••
•••• HIt •••••••••
*
•• H2
••
•
•• TYPE 13 •• NO
•
EXIT TO
•
•
•
EXIT TO
•
•
SKELETON
.X •••
••••••• X..
RECORD
••••••••••
DUP
•
•
••
••
x
• SUPERVISOR
•
•• ••
.FC •
• A5.
• YES
•
•
•••••
••••
• •
••••
....
•••••
·.
:F~2:
•
•
.....
X
.....J2..........
10CSD
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
.....J3..........
J~
•
SEARCH CFTA •
TA8LE FOR
•••••••••
MATCHING.
ISS N O . .
•••••••••••••••••
•••
..
••••
•• MATCHING •• NO
ISS NO.
• •••••••••
••
••
••••
• YES
X..
•• ••
........... X:x
•••••
• FE •
• K2. IOCSL
•
•
CLEDT
••••••• X.
CLEAR
• L(ACfR/EOITOR
•
FROM DISK
·
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••
•••
• CLEAR A Y P S . .
•
S~ITCH..
•
••••••• x. FETC~ ISS NO •••••••••• X.
• FROII TYPE 13 •
•
RECORD.
•
•
·.
•• ••
••••
••••••
•••••••••••••••••
.
.... ·K2.· ..·...·.•
.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.- •
•• ••••
•
H~ •
••••••
.....JS .........•
•
X.••
SET BYPS
SWITCH ON
•
•
•
•
•
•• ••••••••••••••••
x
•••••
.FC •
• AS.
•••
•
••••••••••••••••••
Chart FE.
System Loader/Editor - Phase E2
Flowcharts
241
•••••
• FF •
• A4 •
•••
•• ••••
•
AZ ••••
••••• •
X
....
....
••••• A2 •••• ••••••
•
TURN
•
•
• PAPER TAPE
• SWITCHES ON •
•
•
.•.
....
....
•• ••
• NO
........... X:
•••• ·81 •••••• • •••
••
••
INSE~T ILS
ADD~ESSES
•
•
•
•
IN lTV
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
••• ••• CI··· •• ••••••
•
P~ INT
•
fADING
•
10 ..
..............
X
• ••••• 82 ••••• • •••••
fl4
••••
....
••
•••••••••••••
*.
-.• *
.•
ii
•
X
••
••
*.
•••••••••••••
••
•*
*.
•• CARD THE e. YES
••
"'.
PRINCIPAL
*.
110
.•
••
•
••••••••
••
••
HEAOtR
*..*
•• • . *NO
•*
*.
* ••
• *
NO
•
•
••
••
.
ii
...••••• HI.·· •• • ••••
...
MODIFY
•
INPUT AREA
•
•
... FOR HEADER
•
...
NO
••••••••••
X
•
•
•
...
ii
•••••KI ••••••••••
CtlANGE
INPUT COUNT
FIELD FOR
DATA
••
•
•
.. .
••••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. AZ •
••••• •
*.
X
*. •• YES •
•••••• X.
.*
••. ....F3··.··.···.
••
SET
•
•
•
FORTRAN
VOIDED
SWITCH
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
.*
.•.ii
.It
x
.
·0
.*..
••
••••
.....
•
•••••• X
.•.
:
.CONTROl RECORD •
••
•
••••••
:
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
•• ••••
•
G5 •
•••••
•
Maintenance Program
EXIT
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
••••• •
• A4 •
• RELATIVE WORD.
.NO. TO BINhPYo •
STORE AT
•
•
•
RWONO
•
X
• •••• F" ••••••••••
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
.x •••••••••••
CONVERT
SECTOR NO.
TO BINARY.
STORI: AT
SfCTR
•
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•
•
0
• G4 •• X.
• G5 •• X.
G4
••
•• . * FIRST * ••• NO
•• HEADER SwITCH ••••••
••
ON
••
• •••• G5.· ••••••• •
•
CONVERT
•
~OO LEVEL
•
•
• TO BINARY.
•
•
STORE AT
•
•
C~OOl
•
*. .*
••••• •
.*
••
•
•
X
• •••• J4 ••••••••••
•
CONVERT
• RFCORD COUNT
• TO RINARY.
•
STORE AT
•
RECNT
X
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••••
•
···.·E5·.·
......·•
•
CONVfRT
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
TURN
• FIRST HEADER
• SWITCH OFF
•
ii
~PDATE
S~ITCHfS
NO
••••••
• •••• H4 ••• • •• • •••
·:.~~ •••••• X: FO~ElR~~~R
•••••• KZ·· •• •••• •••
SU'~~~TY~E
ASSEMBLER
VOlDED
SWITCH
••
• •••• J3 ••••••••••
•• • ••YES
:
•
X
X
••
HEI~~R
••••• •
• [5 ••••
••••••
• YES
• NO
• :.
••
.*
• ••• 05·· •• • ••••
~XIT TO THE
•
SUPERVISOR
•
• ••••••••••••••• •
X
*.
.. •.• *..
J2
VOIDED
*..*
*•• *
*
•
•
•
X
•
•
•••• ••••
••• •••• F4 ••
••
SET
•
•
•
SUPERVISOR
Nr.N-RFAQ
SWITCH
•••••••••••••••••
• YES
.•.
*•. *
X.. *.
• YES
• * SUP *. +. YES •
HEADER
••••••••
*.
.*
••
••
•••••••••••••••••
242
VOIDED
••
...*
*•• *
••
*. t . YfS •
OUP
HEADER
•••••• X.
H2
X
• SET NO-CHECK
•
PARAMETER
...
FOR DATA
G2
•
•
•
'If* • ••
Eit
.*
*.
•• ASSFM~LER ••
• NO
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•.•.··JI···.•··..••
•*
*.
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
System
••
AS'"'
HEADER
X..
*. *••• .*
X
Chart FF.
..
.ii
YES
•••••••••• X..
• NO
•· ....G1····.·····••
•
•
•
FZ
.*
.E3• •••.
•• FORTRAN ••
ii
• INSERT PAPTI
• AODRESS IN
•
PSEUDO-TV
••
.*.
.*. ••
.*FOR
. . ••
••
1'2
X
•••••••••••••••• •
X
ii
•••••• El ••••• • •••••
PRINT
•
VERS ION AND
• MOO LEVEL •
.•.x
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
••····.(5······.·.·
••
SET
04 •• ••••• ••
• ••••
~XIT TO THE
•
•
• SUPERVISOR
•••••••••••••••••
:X .......... :
•••••••••••••
Fl
••
CONVfRT
PTlC/8 TO
•
• CARC CUDE IN
•
INPUT AREA
READ AND
VERSION
•
'"'DO I.EVEL •
FROM DCCM
. .... P5········.·•
•
CONVf~T
• INPUT RECORD
•
INTO EBcorc
• IN SUPFPVISOR
• INPUT ARFA
X
••••• OZ ••••••••••
•
•
•
x
•••••••••••••••••
•••••
• FH •
• 01 •
•••
•• ••••••• •
••• •••• C4WAIT
•
•• ERROR 1 •••
•••••••••••••••••••
• YES
......01····.···•.·
.*
*.. *
.•.x
.*
....
WAIT
ERROR 3
X
••
• 1
••••
• FF.
•
• C4 •• X.
••••••
X
C2
••
.. *
*.
..PAPER TAPf •• NO
•• SWITCH 1
••••••
*.
.•.x
•• EXIT ••
•
•
0 •• AODR. TABLE.. 2
• G4 .X •••••• XR2 EQUALS ••••••
• READ RECORD.
WAIT FOR
• OP COMPLETE •
*.
• •••• A" ••••••••••
••
••
•• MONITOR •• YES
•
• A4 ••••• X..
CO~TROL
•••••••••• X.
••
•• RECORD ••
•
•••••••••••••••••••
1810100
.
.
.•••••••••••••••••.
X
lilt
•
•
'"
•
•
X
•.•.•CONVERT
H"····
•••.. •·
•
•
•
•
•
..
.0
.. .
•••••••••••••••••
••••
•• X. E5 •
••••• •
x
J"
0*'
••
..
..SUBROUTINE •• YFS
SWITCH 1
••••••
••
ON
*.. *••• .*
••
x
•••••
.FC •
• A4*
•••
• NO
:X .......... :
X
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
••• ••K4 ••••••••••
•
CUNVERT
•
•
• WDRO COUNT
•
• TO 8INARY.
•
STORE AT
•
•
WCNT
•
VF.RSION
TO 8IN~RY.
SToRE AT
CVERe;
X
..••••
••••..• KS.··.·
TURN ON
•
•
•
WRITE DISK
SWITCH
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•.FG.
•••
•
..X. Al •
••••• •
......
•••••
•••
• FG •
.FG •
• A4.
• A1·
•••
x
••••••••••••• X:X
.*.
. *.
AI..
AZ
••
• •••• A3 ••••••••••
• * FOR *. •• YES
.*
*.
•
••
••
•• FORTRAN •• YES
•
TURN OFF
•
••
HEAOER
•••••••••• X•• VOID~O SWITCH •••••••••• X. WRITE DISK
•••••
ON
••
X.
SW ITCH
•
•. * . . * .*
•• * . . *
..•••••.•
••••
.•••••••••••••••••.
•• • ••NO
81
.•.x
•• X. A4 •
••
ASM
HEADER
*.
*•
•• YES
•••••••••• X.
TURN AS~
SWITCH ON
•
• NO
••
••
*.
DUP
HEADER
*.
CZ
••
*•• *
.*
•• YES
••••••
.•
• NO
..
•• . *
••
01
.•.x
••
SUP
HEADER
*.
* .. *
..
*.
•• ••••
•
A4 •
••••• •
••••
• FG.
•
FXIT TO THE
SUPEPVISOR
•
••••••••••••••••••
••
.x
••
NEW MOO
• •••• C5 ••••••••••
*.
•
WAIT
ERROR 5
••
.................
1..
•
*..*
•••••••••••••
•
•
•
•
•
*.·...·
X
ES ••TO THE
• • •••
EXIT
• ~UPERVIsnR
•
•
•••••••••••••••• •
X
.•· .• · ••
••.···.F4···
WA IT
•
.• ..•.•.••.....•• X.................
.... ....
•
•••••••••••••••••••••
*••
*
• YES
X
X
••••• HZ ••••••• • ••
Hl •••• • •• • ••
••••••
• INSFRT NEW MOO •
•
••
•••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••••••
LEVEL AND
VERSION
IN DC OM
•
•
•
•
•
X
TURN
ASSEMBLER
SwiTCH OFF
••
•
X
·.·.·.Jl·.···.···..
•
•
•
•
GZ
••
.*
*•
•• ASSEMBLER •• NO
•• SWITCH ON ••••••
•••••••••••••
•
•
•
..
.. ..
04
•
•
•
..
READ It;
OCOM. WA IT FOR
• OP COI'IPLETE •
.*
• ••••• E4·· •••••••••
PRINT
MOO LEVEL
EQUAL 1
•
•
.x
•••••• Gl •••••••••••
•
DECREMENT
RECNT
BY 1
•••••••••••••••••*
• Gl •• X.
•••••
•
X
NEW
*.. *
X
*
•• • ••YES
.*
• YES
•
*..*
X
• ••• 1\5 •••••••••
-. ••
•• NO
•
•• LEVEL EQUAL •••••••••• X.
••
• •••• FZ ••••••••••
*.
.*
••
•• SUBROUTINE •• NO
•
•• SWITCH 3
•••••••••• X.
••
ON..
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
• NO
.•.x······································
*.
*.
x
•••
Fl
••
.-
• C4.
.*
....
•
•
*
x
x
x
••
•
C4
••
.*
*•
•
YES .OLO MOO LEVEL •
.X •••••••••••••••••• PLUS 1 EQUAL ••
•• ••••
•
A4 •
•••••
•
•••••
• FF •
•
WA IT
ERROR 4
...
••••••
• NO
•
• NO
.•.x ••
....
*..
• NO
*. •• YES
.*
••
•
•• VOIOEO SWiTCH ••••••••
••
ON
••
x
• •••• A5 ••••••••••
*.
LEVEL EQUAL.
NEW
••
• •••••••••••••••••• 1'100
•*
*.
•• ASSEMBLER •• YFS
•• ••••
•
A4 •
•••••
•
..
.x
YES.. • * OLD
•
••
•• • ••YES
84
•
•
.•.
*..*
•••••
•
A4 •
•• ••••
•
•
x
C1
A4
••
OLI)
•• NO
•
•• X•• VERSION EQUAL •••••••••• X.
••
NFW..
•
• •••• BZ ••••••••••
*..*
.. .•. ..
•
•••••••••••••••••
•• • ••NO
.. •• •• ....
••
••
.•
•
.*
••••• JZ ••••••••••
••
WRITE OCCM
•
TO DISK. WAIT
•
FOR OP
•
COMPLETE
•
•
•
ADO SECTOR
AODRESS OF
ASSEMBLER
TO SECTR
••
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••
:x .......... :
Kl
.t ••
X
•*
- •••
•• SUBROUTINE
••
••
SWITCH 2
ON..
•••• •• '.
YES
••••••
X
•••••••••••••
.8:.
•
u.u
• NO
•••••
• FH •
X
•
uu.
.FH •
• ••••• KZ •••••••••••
• READ DISK.
•
WAIT FOR
• OP COMPLETE •
• A4.
Chart FG.
•••
System Maintenance Program
X
.FH •
• AI.
•••
Flowcharts
243
•••••
•••
•••••
•••
• FH •
• A~.
.FH •
• AI.
X
•••••• A4 •••••••••••
•
PRINT
UPDATE
COMPl EYED
•
•
•
•••••••••••••
X
•
•• X
••••• •
B~
•••••• B~ •••• • ••• •• •
•
PRINT
•
VERSION AND
• NEW MOO lEVEL.
EXIT TO THE
SUPERVISOR
•
.. ... -.
.. ..
x
X
•••••••••••••••••
82
••••• Cl.·····.···
•:SE~O~R~R~~~~l
•
2: ••••
• CONTROL RECORD •
•
RETURN
•
x
••••••••••••••••• •••••
• FF •
••••
•• ••••
•
E~ •
•••••
•
:..
....
•
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
X
, ••••• C2· ••••• •••••
WnlTE DISK. •
WAIT FOR
• OP COMPLETE •
•••••••••••••
•••• FIt· •••••• ••
EXIT TO THE
SUPERVISOR
.•
02
·• x•••••••••••.
.•.x
••
*.
•• RECORD
•• YES
•• COUNT lERO ••••••••••
••
••••
•• ••
••
• NO
.. ..
••••
x
El
••
•• CHECK-SUM •• NO
••
CORRECT
••••••
••
.. *•• ..
.*
x
*
•• ••••
•
E~ •
• YES
••••••
X
X
•
•
··••••..
..
.•.
.*
• YES
• El •• X.
.....
..······•
•
WAIT
ERROR 2
•
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
X
E~··
•
•
INPUT - eo
COLUMNS TO
60 WORDS
•
•
•
••
•• DISK SWITCH ••••••
••
ON
••
• FIi •
• A4.
• 01 ••••
•••
•••••
•
X
01.·····.···•
••.....PACK
CARD
•
.•.x
•• WRITE *. •• NO
••
•••••
•
El •
•• ••••
•
• NO
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
x
*. .•
x
••••CI•• • •• • •• ••
.ZERO CHECK SUM.
•
COUNT.
•
.INCREMENT 8Y 1 •
FOR NEXT
•
•
•
HEADER
•
•
READ INPUT
DATA. WAIT
FOR OP
COMPLETE
Bl
••
..PAPER TAPE •• YES
•• SWITCH]
••••••
••
ON
••
•••••••••••••
•
•
. .... A2··.··.····
... · .."1.··.·······
•••••••••••••
•• ••••
•
Al •
••••
• FH.
•
•
•••••••• X.
X
•· ••••
A2 ••....
•••••
X
•
•
•••••••••••••••••
••••• Fl··········
•
DECREMENT
•
•
• RECNT BY 1
•
•
X
..·..·E2··.··.·····
RUO HEADER •
RECORD. WAIT
•
FOR OP
•
COMPLETE
•••••••••••••
.-
f2
.•.x
••
-.
•.. *•. *..
..PAPER TAPE •• NO
•• SWITCH 2
••••••
••
ON
••
••
•
••••••••••••••••••
• YES
X
••••• Cl.··.··.·.·
INPUT DATA.
• TO OISK 110 •
•
AREA
•
••MOVE
•
•••••••••••••••••••
·• x•••••••••••.
X
X
.....
• H2··········•
Hl •••• • •• • ••
•••••••
ADO CATA WORD •
•
•
COUNT TO
•
• RELATIVE WORD.
•
NO.
•
:SElc~R.~R~~~:l 0:
.CONTROL RECORD •
RETURN
•
•
X
x
•••••
• FF •
• A4.
•••
•••••••••••••••••
•••••••••••••••••
JI.· •• • •• •••
••••••
• SUETRACT tATA •
•
•
•
WORD COUNT
FROM WCNT
•
•
•••••••••••••••••••
.. ..
.•.x
Kl
••
••
WCNT
•• YES
•• EQUAL ZERO ••••••
*.
Chart FH.
System Maintenance Program
-.
*. .*
.*
• NO
x
•• ••••
•
Al •
••••• •
244
.•
x
••••
·•• A2 •.•
••••
X
•.Fe
•••••
• Gl.
•••
APPENDIX A. EXAMPLES OF FORTRAN OBJECT CODING
This appendix shows by example the Assembler
Language equivalent for the object coding generated
Source Coding
by the FORTRAN Compiler. A typical crosssection of FORTRAN statements is shown.
Object Coding
With Trace*
Arithmetic Statements - real, integer, and mixed modes
I=J
A=B
A=I
I=A
I=K-M
A=I-B
A=B-I
LD
STO
L
L
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
J
I
FLD
B
FSTO
A
L
I
FLOAT
FSTO
A
LIBF
DC
LIBF
STO
L
FLD
A
IFIX
I
LD
S
STO
L
L
L
K
M
I
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
L
I
FLOAT
FSUB
B
FSTO
A
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
L
I
FLOAT
FSBR
B
FSTO
A
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FARI
*Period indicates that the generated coding is the same as in the Object Coding column.
Appendix A. Examples of FORTRAN Object Cocling 245
Source Coding
Object Coding
A=B+I-J (or A=I+B-J)
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
L
LD
M
SLT
STO
L
L
I=J*K
A=B*C
A=B*I
I=J
I
K
A=B / C
I=J
246
I
(K+M)
L
L
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
I
FLOAT
FADD
B
FSTO
GT1
J
FLOAT
FSBR
GT1
FSTO
A
J
K
16
I
FLD
B
FMPY
C
FSTO
A
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
L
LD
SRT
D
S1'O
L
L
L
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LD
A
STO
LD
SRT
D
8TO
With Trace
I
FLOAT
FMPY
B
FSTO
A
J
16
K
I
FLD
B
FDIV
C
FSTO
A
L
L
3
L
3
L
K
M
+126
J
16
+126
I
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
Source Coding
Object Coding
I=A / J
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LIBF
STO
L
LD
LIBF
DC
STO
L
I=J**K
A=B**I
A=B**C
A=I**B
A=B**(I+J)
A=B**(C+D)
L
L
With Trace
J
FLOAT
FDVR
A
IFIX
I
J
FIXI
K
I
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
FLD
B
FAXI
I
FSTO
A
LIBF
DC
CALL
DC
LIBF
DC
FLD
B
FAXB
C
FSTO
A
LD
LIBF
CALL
DC
LIBF
DC
L
LD
A
STO
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
L
L
L
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
I
FLOAT
FAXB
B
FSTO
A
I
J
GTl
FLD
B
FAX!
GTl
FSTO
A
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
LIBF
DC
FIAR
I
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FAR!
FLD
C
FADD
D
FSTO
GTl
FLD
B
Appendix A. Examples of FORTRAN Object Coding
247
Source Coding
Object Coding
With Trace
CALL
DC
LIBF
DC
FAXB
GT1
FSTO
A
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LDX
LIBF
DC
SUBSC
SGT1
value D4
I
value D1
SUBSC
SGT2
value D4
J
value D2
I
value D1
FLDX
B
FADDX
C
SGT1
FSTOX
A
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FARIX
LIBF
FARI
Subscripted Expressions
A(I)=B(I, J)+C(I, J)
(see Note 1)
(see Note 1)
M=L(I~J,
K)
(see Note 1)
M(I)=M(I+1)+M(J)
(see Note 1)
(see Note 1)
248
11
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
SUBSC
SGT1
value D4
K
value D3
J
value D2
I
value D1
FLDX
L
'FSTO
M
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
SUBSC
SGT1
value D4
I
value D1
SUBSC
SGT2
value D4
I
value Dl
SUBSC
SGT3
Source Coding
(see Note 1)
M(1)=M(2)+M(3)
M(l)=N(l)+M(l)
Object Coding
With Trace
DC
DC
DC
LDX
LD
LDX
A
LDX
STO
11
Ll
11
Ll
11
Ll
LDX
LD
LDX
A
LDX
STO
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
value D4
M
value D4
M
value D4
M
LDX
LD
A
STO
L1
L1
L1
L1
value D4
N
M
M
value D4
J
value D1
SGT3
M
SGT2
M
SGTI
M
LIBF
DC
FIARX
M
LIBF
DC
FIARX
M
LIBF
DC
FIARX
M
LIBF
FARI
LIBF
FARI
Statement Function Statements
A=JOE(B+C, D) + E
A=C(B,.5)+E
CALLXY
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
CALL
DC
DC
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
FLD
B
FADD
C
FSTO
GT1
JOE
GT1
D
FLOAT
FADD
E
FSTO
A
CALL
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
C
B
address of
constant.5
FADD
E
FSTO
A
CALL
XY
Appendix A. Examples of FORTRAN Object Coding
249
Object Coding
Source Coding
With Trace
---
------
-----CALL YZ (A(2) , A(I) , B, C*D)
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LDX
(see Note 1)
(see Note 2)
(see Note 2)
ADR1
ADR2
CALL YZ (A(I),B,C*D)
MDX
NOP
STX
LDX
MDX
NOP
STX
CALL
DC
DC
DC
DC
L1
SUBSC
SGT1
value D4
I
value D1
FLD
C
FMPY
D
FSTO
GT1
value D4
(for A(2»
A
L1
11
L1
ADR1
SGT1
A
L1
ADR2
YZ
0
0
B
GT1
L1
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
(see Note 1)
(see Note 2)
ADR1
SUBSC
SGTl
value D4
I
value D1
FLD
C
FMPY
D
FSTO
GT1
SGT!
A
LDX
n
MDX
NOP
STX
CALL
DC
DC
DC
Ll
L1
ADR1
YZ
0
B
GT1
LD
STO
L
J
I
DO and CONTINUE Statements
DO 10 I=J,K
01_
10 CONTINUE
250
L
With Trace
Object Coding
Source Coding
DO 10 I =J,K,M
MDX
LD
S
BSC
L
L
L
L
1,1
I
K
Adr.a,
LD
STO
L
L
J
I
LD
A
STO
S
BSC
L
L
L
L
L
I
BSC
L
111
LDX
BSC
DC
DC
DC
11
11
I
ADR1+1
111
112
113
LD
BSC
BSC
BSC
L
L
L
L
I
111, +Z
112, +113, -Z
3
L
L
FLD
A
+126
111,+Z
113, -Z
~
f310 CONTINUE
M
I
K
Adr. f3 , ' "
GO TO Statement
GO TO 111
Computed GO TO Statement
GO TO (111,112,113), I
ADR1
LIBF
FGOTO
(see Note 3)
LIBF
BSC
BSC
BSC
FIIF
L 111,+Z
L 112,+L 113, -Z
(see Note 3)
LIBF
FIF
(see Note 3)
LIBF
FIF
(see Note 3)
IF Statements
IF (I) 111,112,113
IF(A) 111,100,113
100 CONTINUE
IF(A+I) 100,111,100
100 CONTINUE
LIBF
DC
LD
BSC
BSC
LD
LIBF
LIBF
DC
LD
BSC
L
3
L
I
FLOAT
FADD
A
+126
111,+-
Appendix A. Examples of FORTRAN Object Coding 251
Source Coding
Object Coding
IF(I) 111,111,112
100 CONTINUE
LD
BSC
BSC
L
L
L
With Trace
I
111,+
112,-Z
LIBF
BSC L
BSC L
FIIF
111,+
112,-Z
(see Note 3)
P AUSE Statement
PAUSE 11
LIBF
DC
PAUSE
Adr. of constant 11
LIBF
DC
STOP
Adr. of constant 21
LIBF
DC
BSC
I
FLD
NAME
subprogram
linkword
LD
BSC
L
I
NAME
subprogram
linkword
BSC
I
subprogram
linkword
STOP Statement
STOP 21
RETURN Statements
for FUNCTION-type return
or
for SUBROUTINE -type return
END Statement
The END statement produces no object code.
I/O Statements
------The first I/O call is always 'LIBF *FIO' followed by the parameters and other I/O calls as indicated by the
*IOCS control record.
LIBF
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
*FIO
/OOXY
12
WRTYZ
0
CARDZ
0
PRNTZ
0
PAPTZ
0
0
0
TYPEZ
0
See the Subroutine Library section for a detailed discussion of FORTRAN I/O routines.
252
Source Coding
Object Coding
READ Statement
READ (N, 101) A,I
LIBF
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
READ (N, 101) X
(X dimensioned)
*RED
N
101
*IOF
A
*101
I
LIBF
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
DC
*RED
N
101
*IOAF
X
(number of items in array)
Read Statement with Implied DO
READ (N,101)(X(I), 1=1,5)
a)-
(see Note 1)
LIBF
DC
DC
LD
STO
LIBF
DC
DC
DC
DC
LDX
LIBF
DC
MDX
LD
S
BSC
*RED
N
L
101
Adr. of constant !
L
I
SUBSG
SGT1
value D4
I
L
value D1
SGT!
*IOFX
X
1,1
L
I
L
L
Adr. of constant 5
Adr. a , +Z
11
Write Statements
Write statements closely parallel read statements, except for the 'LIBF *COMP' which terminates all
WRITE calls.
WRITE (N, 101) A, I
NOTES 1:
2:
3:
LIBF
DC
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
DC
LIBF
*WRITE
N
101
*IOF
A
*101
I
*COMP
Tagged to indicate the end of the subscript argument list.
Included to balance skip at execution of previous instruction.
Transfer Trace.
Appendix A. Examples of FORTRAN Object Coding 253
The following procedures, in conjunction with
Appendix C, are intended to assist the user in
defining and analyzing System problems. These
procedures are a guide to determining which
System element is in control at any given time.
To determine which Monitor Pogram is in
control, examine the control records printed. The
last Monitor control record printed indicates the
controlling Monitor Program.
To determine which phase of the Monitor Program is in control, perform the following:
4.
If the words are not identical, the DUP
function whose IOAR header precedes the
unmatched words is the function presently in
core. In other words, each fWlCtion is loaded
starting at the first word following its IOAR
header, except DCTL which starts at the first
word following the IOAR header table.
IOAR Header Table
Core
Locations
Word
Count
Sector
Address
03B6-7
03BS-9
03BA-B
03BC-D
03BE-F
03CO-l
03C2-3
03C4-5
03C6-7
03CS-9
047A
0476
0460
02SO
0500
03CO
OBCC
0140
02SO
0140
003C
0040
004S
004C
0050
0054
0632
0057
0044
0046
DUP
Function
~
,i
1.
Display the location DSA+2 (OODO). This ~J.- (J}/'i
location contains the ~'address of the
""ftr.st...sect.Ql! of the Supervisor phase in control.
if( lJ~ lJ
Loader
1.
2.
-: SF!A) 1\ t
Compare the first few words following the
phase origin with the phase listing to determine
if the phase has been loaded. (See Figure 4,
Section 2.)
Once it is determined the phase is loaded,
locate the phase entry point. If the entry point
is zero, the phase has not been entered. If
the entry point is non-zero, the phase has
been entered. However, because of the overlay s used in the Loader, the phase, even
though it has been entered, is not necessarily
in control.
<
Assembler
1.
2.
3.
4.
DUP
1.
2.
3.
254
Display the contents of locations 03.6 and
03B7.
Compare these two words to the table below.
Each pair of words form s the IOAR header
for a DUP function. The header consists of
the word count (word 1) and the sector address
(word 2) of the DU P function.
If the words are identical, display the next
pair (03BS and 03B9) and compare them to
the table.
DCTL
STORE
DUMP
DUMPLET
DELETE
DEFINE
EDIT
DWADR
FILEQ
STOREMOD
5.
6.
Display the contents of the location OVRLY +1
(05Bl).
Subtract the sector address of Phase 0 (OOES
with FORTRAN, OOSO without FORTRAN).
The remainder is the displacement, in sectors,
from Phase O. The phase within which this
displacement falls is presently in core.
Phase 10 resides in core in place of the
Symbol Table add routine, STADD, during
Phase 2. If the assembly is in one pass mode,
Phase 11 replaces the subroutine INTI in
Phase 9.
The input phase (CARDO or PAPTl) resides
in core in Pass 1, but is overlaid by output
in Disk System format in Pass 2 of a one pass
mode assembly.
The listing routine (1132 Print or WRTYO)
resides in core if an *LIST control record is
part of the source input; otherwise, it is
overlaid by the Symbol Table.
FORTRAN
SYSTEM LOADER
1.
2.
1.
3.
Display the contents of location ROC 3 (7FID).
Add the value /0140 (32010) to the value found
in ROL3.
Display the contents of the address computed
above and the next higher addressed word.
These two words comprise a disk IOCC. The
second word of the disk IOCC (the computed
address + 1) is the address, in hexadecimal,
of the first sector of the last phase read;
hence the phase presently in core.
2.
3.
The card deck or paper tape strip read or
to be read indicates which phase is in control.
During Phase E1, location A (0658) is the
start of the input buffer; location 021B
contains the sector address of the last
sector written; location 0215 contains the
sector address of the last sector read.
During Phase E2, location 053F contains
the sector address of the last sector read.
Appendix B.
Diagnostic Aids
255
APPENDIX C.
DISK MAP
The following table is a breakdown of the 1130
Monitor System. For purposes of completeness,it
is assumed that both the FORTRAN Compiler and
SYSTEM ELEMENT
Disk Pack 10
Cold Start routine
Supervisor
Phase E
Pliase B
Phase 0
Skeleton Sup. and DCOM
Console Printer and DISKO
routines
PAPTl or CARDO
Phase C
Presupervisor and MultiSector routines
Conversion routines, Phase
A, and 1132 Printer routine
Reserved
Loader
Phase 0
Phase 7
Phase 8
DISK1
DISKN
DISKZ
Save Monitor routine
Phase 1
Phase 4
Phase 5
Phase 2
Phase 3
Phase 6
Map1
Map2
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
1132 Printer/Console
Printer
Reserved
DUP
DUPCO
DCn
STORE
FILEQ
STOREMOD
SRLET
DUMP
DUMPLET
Reserved
ERM
DELETE
DEFINE
DWADR
Principal I/O Device
routine
Principal Print Device
routine
Principal Error Message
Device routine
PTX
Reserved
DUPCO Temp. Storage
Reserved
SECTOR.
ADDRESS
DEC HEX
CORE
ORIGIN
(HEX)
----
0
1
0
1
0802
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
055C
055C
055C
0090
9
11
12
9
B
C
00[4
00F4
055C
13
D
04CO
14
20
E
14
055C
24
25
26
18
19
1A
27
29
32
10
33
34
38
39
40
44
47
48
49
50
51
52
1B
20
21
22
26
27
28
2C
2F
30
31
32
33
34
---0578
OBBC
01C2 with DISKZ,
0260 with DISKO,
0370 with DISK1, and
0438 with DISKN.
00F4
00F4
00F4
0090
0630
OBBC
OBBC
0944
OBBC
OBBC
026A
026A
026A
026A
026A
026A
53
54
35
36
----
56
60
64
69
71
72
73
0272
03CA
03BA
03C8
03CA
06AO
03BC
03BE
88
38
3C
40
45
47
48
49
40
4F
50
51
55
58
89
59
082E
92
5C
OC4E
94
97
100
109
110
5E
61
64
6D
6E
OCFE
0828
77
79
80
81
85
----
045C
03CO
03C2
03C6
----
----
----
the Assembler program are present, a Fixed Area
of five cylinders is assigned with the resultant
FLET, and a User Area of 30 cylinders is assigned.
SYSTEM ELEMENT
FORTRAN
Phase 1
Dump
Reserved
Phase 28
Phase 27
Phase 26
Phase 25
Phase 24
Phase 23
Phase 22
Phase 21
Phase 20
Phase 19
Phase 18
Phase 17
Phase 16
Phase 15
Phase 14
Phase 13
Phase 12
Phase 11
Phase 10
Phase 9
Phase 8
Phase 7
Phase 6
Phase 5
Phase 4
Phase 3
Phase 2
Assembler
Phase 0
Phase 9
1132 PrintjWRTYO
CARDO/PAPTl
Phase 1
Phase 12
Phase 10
Phase 11
Phase 5
Phase 6
Phase 7
Phase 8
Phase 2
Phase 3
Phase 4
VIP/TYPE ER
Phase lA
Phase 12A
System Symbol Table
Reserved
FLET
Fixed Area
CIB
LET
User Area
Working Storage
System LoaderjEditor
Bootstrap Loader
Phase El
Phase E2 (Part I) *
Phase E2 (Part 11)*
* Phase
SECTOR
ADDRESS
DEC HEX
128
129
131
142
144
147
150
154
158
161
164
168
172
176
179
183
187
191
194
197
200
203
206
207
211
215
218
220
224
231
80
81
83
8E
90
93
96
9A
9E
Al
A4
A8
AC
BO
B3
B7
BB
BF
C2
C5
C8
CB
CE
DO
D3
D7
DA
DC
EO
E7
232
233
239
240
242
244
246
247
248
250
252
254
256
258
260
262
263
264
265
E8
E9
EF
FO
F2
F4
F6
F7
F8
FA
FC
FE
100
102
104
106
107
108
109
266
272
280
320
336
334
584
lOA
110
118
140
150
158
248
-_.-
---
--- --632
1586
1584
630
CORE
ORIGIN
(HEX)
7EBC
7984
---7590
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7984
7590
7984
0542
0774
ODDB
025E
05B2
05B2
OC81
ODOB
05B2
05B2
05B2
05B2
05B2
05B2
05B2
03F6
05B2
05B2
OED3 in a 4096-word
machine; 1ED3 in an
8192-word machine
----
----
----
----
-------
---0000
0028
03C2
0100
E2 is loaded onto the dIsk by Phase E1 for the duratIon of the
System Load only.
256
GLOSSARY
Absolute program: A program which, although in
Disk System format, has been written in such a
way that it can be executed from only one core
location.
Assembler core load: A core load which was built
from a mainline written in Assembly Language.
CALL routine: A routine which must be referenced
with a CALL statement. The type codes for
routines in this category are 4 and 6.
CALL TV: The transfer vector through which CALL
routines are entered at execution time. See the
section on the Loader for a description of this
TV.
CIB: (the Core Image Buffer) The buffer on which
most of the first 4000 words of core are saved.
Although the CIB occupies two cylinders, the
last two sectors are not used. See the section
on the Loader for a description of the CIB and
its use.
Cold Start Routine: The routine which initializes the
1130 Disk System Monitor by reading down
from the disk the Skeleton Supervisor.
COMMA (the Core Communication Area): The part
of core which is reserved for the work areas
and parameters which are required by the Monitor programs. In general, a parameter is
found in COMMA if it is required by two or more
Monitor Programs or if it is passed from one
Monitor Program to another. COMMA is initialized from DCOM by the Cold Start Routine and
at the beginning of each JOB.
Control Record: One of the records (card or paper
tape) which directs the activities of the 1130
Monitor System. For example, / / DUP is a
Monitor control record that directs the Monitor
to initialize DUP; *DUMPLET is a DUP control
record directing DUP to initialize the DUMPLET
program; *EXTENDED PRECISION is a
FORTRAN control record directing the compiler
to allot three words instead of two for the storage
of data variables.
Core Image format: Sometimes abbreviated CI
format. It is the format in which whole core
loads are stored on the disk prior to execution.
Core Image Header Record: A part of a core load
stored in Core Image format. It is actually the
last 15 words of the format. Among these 15
words are the lTV and the setting for index
register 3.
Core Image program: A mainline program which
has been converted, along with all of its required subroutines, to CI format. In other words,
it is a core load.
Core load: Synonymous with the term object program, which is comprised of the lTV, the objecttime TV, the information contained in the Core
Image Header Record, the in-core code, and
all LOCALs and SOCALs.
Cylinderize: The process of rounding a disk block/
sector address up to the disk block/sector address of the next cylinder boundary.
Data block: A group of words consisting of a data
header, data words, and Indicator Words for a
routine in Disk System format. A new data
block is created for every data break. (A data
break occurs whenever there is an ORG, BSS,
or BES statement, at the end of each record,
and whenever a new sector is required to store
the words comprising a routine.)
Data break: Sometimes referred to as a break in
sequence. See "Data block" for a definition of
this term.
Data file: An area in either the User Area or the
Fixed Area in which data is stored.
Data format: The format in which a Data file is
stored in either the User Area or the Fixed Area.
Data group: A group of not more than nine data
words of a routine in Disk System format. In this
format every such group has as its first word an
associated Indicator Word. Normally a data
Glossary
257
g-roup consists of eight data words plus its Indicator Word; but, if the data block of which
the data group is a part contains a number of
data words which is not a multiple of eight, then
the last data group will contain less than nine
data words.
Data header: The first pair of words in a data block
for a routine in Disk System format. The first
word contains the loading address of the data
block, the second the total number of words
contained in the data block.
DC OM (the Disk Communications Area): The disk
sector which contains the work areas and parameters for the Monitor Progranls. It is used
to initialize COMMA by the Cold Start Routine
and at the beginning of each JOB (see
"COMMA").
Exit control cell: The second word follOwing an
LIBF entry point, counting the entry point as
one word. It is through the contents of the
Exit Control Cell that the exit from the LIBF
routine is made. See the section on the Loader
for explanation of this cell and its contents.
Fixed area: The area on disk in which core loads
and data files are stored if it is desired that
they always occupy the same sectors. No routines in Disk System format may be stored in
this area.
FORTRAN core load: A core load which was built
from a mainline written in FORTRAN.
Hardware area: Occupies core locations 010-3910'
Words 1, 2, and 3 are index registers 1, 2,
and 3, respectively. Words 8-13 are the
Interrupt Transfer Vector (lTV). Words 32-39
are the buffer required by the 1132 Printer
(words 38 and 39 are also used by the Skeleton
Supervisor). Those core locations in this area
which were not specifically mentioned are
reserved.
IBM area: That part of disk storage which is occupied by the Monitor Programs; i. e., cylinders
0-33 (sectors 0-271).
ILS (an Interrupt Level Subroutine): A routine which
services all interrupts on a given level; i. e. ,
it determines which device on a given level
caused the interrupt and branches to a servicing
routine (ISS) for processing of that interrupt.
258
After this processing is complete, control is
returned to the ILS, which turns off the interrupt.
DEFINE FILE table: The table which appears on the
very first sector of any mainline which refers to
defined files. There is one 7-word entry for
each file which has been defined.
Disk block: A 20-word segment of a disk sector.
Thus, sixteen disk blocks comprise each sector.
The disk block is the smallest distinguishable
increment for DSF programs. Thus the Monitor System permits packing of DSF programs at
smaller intervals than the hardware would otherwise allow. The disk block is also referred to
elsewhere as the "disk byte".
Disk System format: Sometimes abbreviated DSF.
It is the format in which mainlines and suoroutines are stored on the disk as separate entities.
It is not possible to execute a program in DSF;
it must first be converted to Core Image format.
Disk System format program: A program which is
in Disk System format. It is sometimes called
a DSF program.
Effective program length: The terminal address appearing in a program. For example, in
Assembler Language programs it is the last
value taken on by the Location Address Counter
and appears as the address assigned to the END
statement.
Entry point: A term which may give rise to confusion unless the reader is careful to note the
context in which this term appears. Under
various conditions it is used to denote 1) the
symbolic address (name) of a place at which a
subroutine or a Monitor Prograln is entered,
2) the absolute core address at which a subroutine or mainline is to be entered, and 3) the
address, relative to the address of the first
word of the subroutine, at which it is to be
entered.
Indicator Word: Tells which of the following data
words should be incremented (relocated) when
relocating a routine in Disk System format. It
also tells which are the names in LIBF, CALL,
and DSA statements. Routines which are in
Disk System format all contain Indicator Words,
preceding every eight data words. Each pair of
bits in the Indicator Word is associated with one
of the follOwing data words, the first pair with
the first data word, etc.
Instruction address register: Also called the 1counter. It is the register in the 1130 which
contains the address of the next sequential
instruction.
LIBF TV: The transfer vector through which LIBF
routines are entered at execution time. See the
section on the Loader for a description of this
TV.
In-core routine: A part of a given core load which
remains in core storage during the entire execution of the core load. IIBs are always in-core
routines, whereas LOCALs and SOCALs never
are.
Loading address: The address at which a routine or
data block is to begin. In the latter case the address is that of an absolute core location, while
in the former it is either absolute or relative,
depending upon whether the routine is absolute
or relocatable, respectively.
ISS (an Interrupt Service Subroutine): A routine which
is associated with one or more of the six levels
of interrupt; i. e., CARDO, which causes interrupts on two levels, is such a routine.
ISS counter: A counter in COMMA (word 50) which
is incremented by 1 upon the initiation of every
I/O operation and decremented by 1 upon receipt of an I/O operation complete interrupt.
lTV (Interrupt Transfer Vector): The part of the
Hardware Area which supplies the second words
of the automatic BSI instructions which occur
with each interrupt. In other words, if an interrupt occurs on level zero and if core location
eight contains 500, an automatic BSI to core location 500 occurs. Similarly, interrupts on
levels 1-5 cause BSls to the contents of core locations 9-13, respectively. The lTV is defined
as core locations 8-13.
Job: A group of tasks (subjobs) which are to be performed by the 1130 Disk Monitor System and
which are interdependent; i. e., the successful
execution of any given subjob (following the first
one) depends upon the successful execution of
at least one of those which precedes it. See the
section on the Supervisor for examples.
LET /FLET (the Location Equivalence Table for the
User Area/the Location Equivalence Table for
the Fixed Area): The table through which the
disk addresses of Programs and Data files
stored in the User Area/Fixed Area may be
found. LET occupies the cylinder following the
Supervisor Control Record Area. If a Fixed
Area has been defined, FLET occupies cylinder
34 (sectors 272-279); otherwise, there is no
FLET.
LIBF routine: A routine which must be referenced
with an LIBF statement.
The type codes for
routines in this category are 3 and 5.
Load-time TV: The transfer vector which the Loader
uses during the building of a core load. See the
section on the Loader for a discussion of this TV.
LOCAL (load-on-call routine): That part of an object program which is not always in core. It is
read from Working Storage into a special overlay area in core only when it is referenced in the
object program. LOCALs, which are specified
for any given execution by the User, are a means
of gaining core storage at the expense of execution time. The Loader constructs the LOCALs
and all linkages to and from them.
Location assignment counter: A counter maintained
in the Assembler program for assigning addresses
to the instructions it assembles.
Modified EBCDIC code: A six-bit code used internally
by the Monitor programs. In converting from
EBCDIC to Modified EBCDIC, the leftmost two
bits are dropped.
Modified Polish Notation: The rearrangement of operators and operands (i. e. , an operator and two
operands) into the triple form required by the
FORTRAN Compiler to generate the code necessary to perform arithmetic operations.
Monitor Program: One of the following parts of the
1130 Disk System Monitor: Supervisor (SUP),
Disk Utility Program (DUP), Assembly Program
(ASM), and FORTRAN Compiler (FOR).
Name code: The format in which the names of subroutines, entry pOints, labels, etc. are stored
for use in the Monitor Programs. The name
consists of five characters, terminal zeros
being added if necessary to make five characters.
Each character is in modified EBCDIC code, and
the entire 30-bit representation is right-justified
in two I6-bit words. The leftmost two bits are
Glossary
259
used for various purposes by the Monitor Programs. In FORTRAN, symbols of one or two
characters only are packed in modified EBCDIC
code into a single word.
NOCAL (a load-although-not-called routine): A
routine which is to be included in an object
program although it is never referenced in that
program by an LIBF or CALL statement. Debugging aids such as a trace routine or a dump
routine fall into this category.
NOP: Used to denote the instruction, No Operation.
Object program: Synonymous with the term core
load.
Object-time TV: A collection of both the LIBF TV
and the CALL TV.
Principal I/O device: The 1442 Card Read/Punch if
one is present; the 1134 Paper Tape Reader/
1055 Paper Tape Punch otherwise.
Principal print device: Sometimes referred to as
the Principal Printer. It is the 1132 Printer if
one is present; the Console Printer otherwise.
Program header record: A part of a routine stored
in Disk System format. Its contents vary with
the type of the routine with which it is associated. It contains the information necessary,
along with information from LET, to identify
the routine, to describe its properties, and to
convert it from Disk System format to a part of
a core load.
Relocatable program: A program which can be executed from any core location. Such a program
is stored on the disk in Disk System format.
Relocation: The process of adding a relocation
factor to address constants and to those twoword instructions whose second words are not
(1) invariant quantities, (2) absolute core addresses, or (3) symbols defined as absolute
core addresses. The relocation factor for any
program is the absolute core address at which
the first word of that program is found.
Relocation indicator: The second bit in a pair of bits
in an Indicator Word. If the data word with
which this bit is associated is not an LIBF,
CALL, or DSA name, then it indicates whether
or not to increment (relocate) the data word.
260
If the relocation indicator is set to 1, the word
is to be relocated.
Resident Monitor: Occupies core locations 0 10 -607 10 ,
This area is required by the 1130 Disk Monitor
System for its operation and is generally unavailable to the user for his own use. The
Resident Monitor consists of the Hardware Area,
COMMA, the Skeleton Supervisor, and DISKO.
Sectorize: The process of rounding a disk block
address up to the disk block address of the next
sector boundary.
Skeleton supervisor: That part of the Supervisor
which is always in eore (except during the execution of FORTRAN core loads) and which is,
essentially, the logic necessary to process CALL
EXIT and CALL LINK statements. Together with
COMMA it occupies core locations 38 -144 ,
10
10
SOCAL (a System Overlay to be loaded-on-call): One
of three overlays automatically prepared by the
Loader under certain conditions when a core
load is too large to fit into core storage. See
the section on the Loader for an explanation.
Subroutine: Used in the 1130 Disk Monitor System
interchangeably with the term subprograms,
routine, and program. Any distinctions between
these terms will have to be inferred from the
context.
Supervisor control record area: The area in which
the Supervisor Control Records are written.
This area is the cylinder following the CIB.
The first two sectors are reserved for *LOCAL
records, the next two for *NOCAL records and
the next two for *FILES records. The last two
sectors in this cylinder are not utilized. See
the Supervisor section for the formats of these
records.
The Monitor: Refers to the 1130 Disk System
Monitor.
User area: The area on the disk in which all routines
in Disk System format are found. Core loads
(i. e., programs in Core Image format) and Data
files may also be stored in this area. All IBMsupplied routines are found here, since they are
stored in Disk System format. This area begins
at the cylinder following LET and occupies as
many sectors as are required to store the routines and files residing there.
User programs: Are mainlines and subroutines
which have been written by the user.
User storage: That part of disk storage which is
neither Working Storage nor the IBM Area.
It begins at cylinder 34 (sector 272), which
would be the beginning of the eIB unless a
Fixed Area is defined. In this case FLET
would occupy cylinder 34 (sectors 272-279),
the Fixed Area would begin at cylinder 35
(sector 280), and the eIB would occupy the first
two cylinders following the Fixed Area, the
length of which is defined by the user.
Working storage: The area on disk immediately following the last sector occupied by the User
Area. This is the only one of the three major
divisions of disk storage (IBM Area, User
Storage, Working Storage) which does not begin
at a cylinder boundary.
XRI, XR2, XR3: The acronyms for index registers
1, 2, and 3, respectively.
Glossary
261
INDEX
Absolute Mode (Assembler) 46
Assembler Error Codes 49
Assembler I/O Routines 74
I/O Device Routine 74
Print Device Routine 75
Assembler Notes 47
Assembler Output Format 49
Assembler Overlays 75
Assembler Phase Descriptions 53
Phase 0 53
Phase 1 54
Phase 1A 56
Phase 2 56
Phase 3 57
Phase 4 58
Phase 5 58
Phase 6 60
Phase 7 61
Phase 8 64
Phase 9 66
Phase 10 71
Phase 11 72
Phase 12 73
Phase 12A 74
Assembler Program 45
Assembler Program Operation 45
Pass 1 45
Pass 2 45
I/O Data Flow 45
One Pass Mode 46
Two Pass Mode 46
Assembler Storage Layout 4 47
Assembler Symbol Table 51
Assembler Tables and Buffers 51
BEGOP (Operation Code Table) 51
INSBF (Instruction Buffer) 51
Location Assignment Counter 51
Secondary Location Assignment Counter
Card Code Input Conversion Table 52
Paper Tape Input Conversion Table 52
BEGOP Table (Assembler)
51
51
Card Code Input Conversion Table (Assembler) 52
Card Subroutine (CARD1) 119
Call Processing 119
Column Interrupt Processing 119
Operation Complete Interrupt 119
CIB (Core Image Buffer) 8
Console Printer or Operator Request Subroutine (WRTYD)
Call Processing 121
Interrupt Processing 121
Core Image Format
Loading 12
Phase 0 12
Phase 7 12
Phase 8 12
262
121
DCTL (DUP Control) 19
Entry Point 20
I/O Operations 20
Decode Control Record Function Field 21
Decode STORE function 21
Decode DUMP function 22
Decode DELETE and DEFINE functions 22
Call required function 22
Decode control record COUNT field 24
Convert NAME field to name code 24
DEFINE Function (DUP) 40
Entry point 40
. Routines 40
DELETE Function (DUP) 27
Delete from User Area 27
Entry points 28
Phase I - User Area 28
Phase II - User Area 29
Delete from Fixed Area 29
Phase I - Fixed Area 30
Phase II - Fixed Area 30
Exit 30
Diagnostic Aids (Appendix B) 254
Disk Map (Appendix C) 256
Disk Subroutine (DISK1) 126
Call processing 126
Subroutine A (SBR T A) 126
MULT (Read or Write Multiple Sectors) 127
RBCRT (Read Back Check) 127
Disk System Format Loading 8
Phase 0 9
Phase 1 9
Phase 2 9
Phase 3 10
Phase 4 11
Phase 5 11
Phase 6 11
Phase 7 11
Phase 8 12
Disk Utility Program (DUP) 17
DUP Functions and Routines 18
DUP I/O 41
DUP I/O Routines 41
DISKO 41
CARDX 41
TYPX 42
VIPX 43
PTX 43
PERRC/TERRC 43
DUMP Function (DUP) 24
Entry points 24
Dump User or Fixed Area to Working Storage 24
Dump Working Storage to Principal I/O device 25
Blank card/control record test 26
Building one complete card 01' less 26
Format data input for punching 27
DUMPLET Function (DUP) 37
Entry point 38
Routines 38
DUPCO (DUP Common) 18
Entry points 18
Multi -sector Routine 19
Initializing Routine 19
IntelTUpt Level Subroutines (ILS)
DW ADR Function (DUP) 39
Entry point 40
Routines 40
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
FORTRAN
19
Flipper Routines (FLIPO, FLIP1) 127
Flipper Table (Loader) 14
FORTRAN 76
Program purpose 76
General Compiler Description 76
FORTRAN Communications Area 78
FORTRAN Compilation Errors 82
FORTRAN Control Records 77
FORTRAN I/O 127
Device routines 128
Input Specifications 128
flO Call 128
FORTRAN Non-Disk I/O 128
Summary of Non-Disk I/O 129
FORTRAN Disk I/O 131
Summary of Disk I/O 132
FORTRAN Object Code (Appendix A) 245
FOR TRAN Phase Area 78
FORTRAN Phase Descriptions 82
Phase 1: First Sector 83
Phase 2: Second Sector 83
Phase 3: Input 83
Phase 4: Classifier 85
Phase 5: Check Order/Statement Number 87
Phase 6: COMMON/SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION
Phase 7: DIMENSION/REAL, INTEGER, and
EXTERNAL 90
Phase 8: Real Constant 91
Phase 9: DEFINE FILE 92
Phase 10: Variable and Statement Function 93
Phase 11: FORMAT 95
Phase 12: Subscript Decomposition 97
Phase 13: Ascan I 98
Phase 14: Ascan II 100
Phase 15: DO, CONTINUE, STOP, PAUSE, and
END 101
Phase 16: Subscript Optimize 103
Phase 17: Scan 104
Phase 18: Expander I 107
Phase 19: Expander II 108
Phase 20: Data Allocation 109
Phase 21: Compilation Errors 111
Phase 22: Statement Allocation 112
Phase 23: List Statement Allocation 113
Phase 24: List Symbol Table 113
Phase 25: List Constants 114
Phase 26: Output I 115
Phase 27: Output II 116
Phase 28: Recovery 116
Dump phase 117
Phase Objectives 76
Statement String 81
Storage Layout 77
String Area 82
Symbol Table 78
IBMOO (System Maintenance Program) 147
Initial System Load (System Loader/Editor) 134
INSBF Buffer (Assembler) 51
Keyboard, Console Printer, or Operator Request
Subroutine (TYPEO) 120
Call processing 120
Interrupt processing 120
Loader 7
Load-time TV (Loader) 13
Location Assignment Counter (Assembler)
51
Object-time TV (Loader) 14
One Pass Mode (Assembler) 46
88
Paper Tape Input Conversion Table (Assembler)
Paper Tape Subroutine (PAPT1) 122
Call processing 122
IntelTUpt processing (read) 122
IntelTUpt processing (punch) 122
Paper Tape Subroutine (PAPTN) 122
Call processing 123
IntelTUpt processing 123
Plot Subroutine (PLOT1) 123
Call processing 123
Buffers and indicators 123
Interrupt processing 123
Presupervisor 3
Printer (1132) Subroutine (PRNT1) 124
Call processing 124
Interrupt processing 124
Relocatability (Assembler)
Absolute Mode 46
Relocatable Mode 46
52
46
Secondary Location Assignment Counter (Assembler)
Skeleton Supervisor 2
STORE Function (DUP) 30
Entry points 30
Card System format 31
Card Data format 31
Termination 31
Card to Working Storage routines 31
Working Storage to user/fixed area 31
STOREMOD Function (DUP) 37
Entry point 37
Routines 37
Subroutine Library 119
Card Subroutine (CARD1) 119
1132 Printer Subroutine (PRNT1) 124
Paper Tape Subroutine (PAPT1) 122
Paper Tape Subroutine (PAPTN) 122
Plot Subroutine (PLOT1) 123
51
263
Flipper Routines (FLIpO, FLIP1) 127
FORTRAN I/O 127
Disk Subroutine (DISK1) 126
Keyboard, Console Printer, or Operator Request
Subroutine (TYPEO) 120
Console Printer or Operator Request Subroutine
(WRTYO)
121
Subroutines used by the Loader 13
Supervisor 2
Supervisor Area Descriptions 2
Supervisor Control Functions 2
Supervisor I/O Conversion Routines 3
Supervisor I/O Subroutines 3
Supervisor Phases 3
Phase A 3
Phase B 4
Phase C 5
Phase D 5
Phase E 6
Supervisor Resident Routines 2
264
System Loader/Editor 134
Initial System Load 134
System Reload 134
General Description 138
Phase E1 138
Phase E2 138
Core Allocation Summary 141
System Loader/Editor Communication
Area 143
System Loader/Editor Input 134
User-supplied input 134
IBM -supplied input 135
Paper T ape input 137
System Loader/Editor, Paper Tape Systems 140
System Loader/Editor Routine Descriptions 143
Program Entry Points/Labels 143
System Maintenance Program (IBMOO) 147
System Overlay Scheme (Loader) 15
Two Pass Mode (Assembler)
46
Z26-3752-0
N
N
0'\
I
OJ
~
N
I
o
International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road, White Plains, New York
READER'S COMMENT FORM
IBM 1130 Monitor Programming System
Program Logic Manual
Form Z26-3752-0
• Your comments, accompanied by answers to the following questions, help us produce better
publications for your use. If your answer to a question is "'No" or requires qualification,
please explain in the space provided below. Comments and suggestions become the property of
IBM.
Yes
No
• Does this publication meet your needs?
• Did you find the material:
Easy to read and understand?
Organized for convenient use?
Complete?
Well illustrated?
Written for your technical level?
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
• \Vhat is your occupation?
• How do you use this publication?
As an introduction to the subject?
For advanced knowledge of the subject?
For informati0n about operating procedures?
D
D
D
As an instructor in a class? D
As a student in a class?
D
As a reference manual?
0
Other _________ ._______________________________ .______
• Please give specific page and line references with your comments when appropriate.
If you wish a reply, be sure to include your name and address.
COMMENTS
• Thank you for your cooperation. No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
226-3752-0
fold
fold
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 2078
SAN JOSE, CALIF.
BUSINESS
REPLY
MAIL
NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN U. S. A.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY . . .
I BM Corporation
Monterey & Cottle Rds.
San Jose, California
95114
Attention: Programming Publications, Dept. 452
fold
fold
N
I:-.J
I::TI
I
W
''I
V1
tv
I
o
J]rnru:b
~
International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
112 East Post Road, White Plains, N. Y. 10601
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2012:08:22 19:12:44-08:00 Modify Date : 2012:08:22 19:21:48-07:00 Metadata Date : 2012:08:22 19:21:48-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.51 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:3be15207-f0b5-4269-9119-d83b220956de Instance ID : uuid:295246b8-77cd-4d0c-bcfa-df8cfb27ac40 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 272EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools